Home
FANUC
Fanuc 16/18 Operators manuel

Fanuc 16/18 Operators manuel

Name: Mach 4 Metal
Rating: 4.9

FANUC Seríes 16i/160i/160is-MB
FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is-MB5
FANUC Seı-íes 18i/180i/180is-MB

Series 16i/160i/160i-MB FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is-MB

Operator’s Manual Volume 2 of 2

B-63534EN/02

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit. All descriptions in this section assume this configuration. Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.

Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control its operation, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

Contents

Definition of Warning, Caution, and Note ....................... S-2
General Warnings and Cautions ................................ S-3
Warnings and Cautions Related to Programming ............. S-5
Warnings and Cautions Related to Handling ................... S-7
Warnings Related to Daily Maintenance ........................ S-9

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This sectíon descríbes the safety precautíons related to the use of CNC uníts. It ís essential that these precautions
Ьe observed Ьy users to ensure the safe operation of machínes equípped wíth a CNC unít a11 descńptíons in thís
sectíon assume this confıguratíon . Note that some precautíons are related on1y to specífíc functions, and thus
may not be applicable to certaín CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautíons related to the machíne, as descríbed іп the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation
of the machíne, the operator must bеcome fu11y famílíar with the contents of thís manual and relevant manual
supplíed by the machíne tool builder.
Contents

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6-63534EN/02

Definition of Warning, Caution, and Note
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

Warning: Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or both the user and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
Caution: Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
Note: Used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WARNING

Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.

Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory set. Usually, there is no need to change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change. Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit. Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.

The operator's manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the machine if in doubt.

WARNING
Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine tool builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.

CAUTION
Do not remove the internal parts, including the ATA card and compact flash card, from within the CNC.

NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery. To guard against the occurrence of the above and assure quick restoration of deleted data, back up all vital data and keep the backup copy in a safe place.

s-4 B-63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS PROGRAMMING
3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
Thís section covers the major safety precautíons related to programmíng. Before attempting to perform programming, read the supplíed operator s manual and programming manual carefully such that you are fully famílíar with theír contents.
WARNING

Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal-direction perpendicular control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

s-5SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6-63534EN/02 WARNING
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 8-63534EN/02
WARNING

Stroke Check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.

Tool Post Interference Check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automatic operation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interference check cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing injury to the user. After switching on the power or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automatic operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.

Absolute/Incremental Mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.

Plane Selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for details.

Torque Limit Skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without performing a skip.

Programmable Mirror Image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is enabled.

Compensation Function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine. Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function mode.

Warnings and Cautions Related to Handling

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operator's manual and programming manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their contents.

Manual Operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

Manual Reference Position Return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

Manual Numeric Command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specified correctly, and that the entered values are valid. Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

Manual Handle Feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.

Disabled Override
If override is disabled according to the specification in a macro variable during threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

Origin/Preset Operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.

Workpiece Coordinate System Shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

Software Operator’s Panel and Menu Switches
Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operator’s panel, such as mode changes, override value changes, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.

Manual Intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual intervention, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command mode.

Feed Hold, Override, and Single Block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro system variable 3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.

Dry Run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.

Cutter and Tool Nose Radius Compensation in MDI Mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool nose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions for details.

Program Editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.

Rotary Axis Control: Likely refers to managing the rotation of axes in a CNC machine.

Tool Withdrawal and Return: Describes the procedures for safely retracting and reintroducing tools.

Tandem Control: Used for controlling two machines simultaneously or in tandem operations.

Chopping Function (G80): Likely related to specific machining cycles, such as drilling or cutting.

Tool Axis Compensation: Describes adjustments to compensate for tool wear or misalignment.

Data Input/Output Functions: These sections deal with file management, including program input/output, memory card usage, and external I/O devices.

8-6353FN/o2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DA1LY MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement those personnel who have received approved safety and maíntenance traíníng may perform thís work.
When replacíng the batteríes, be careful not to touch the high voltage círcuits marked and fıtted wíth an insulating cover .
Touching the uncovered hígh voltage círcuíts presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of íts memory, because ít must retaín data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm ís displayed on the machine operator or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm ís dísplayed, replace the batteries withín a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC s memory wíll be lost.
Refer to the maíntenance section of the operator s manual or programming mаnual for detaíls of the battery replacement procedure.
s-9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63534EN/02 WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement those personnel who have received approved safety and maíntenance traíníng may perform thís work.
When replacíng the batteries, be careful not to touch the hígh voltage circuits marked and
fïtted wíth an ínsulatíng cover .
Touchíng the uncovered hígh voltage circuíts presents an extremely dangerous electríc shock hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteríes to preserve its absolute positíon.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm ís dísplayed on the machíne operator s pаnelor screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm ís dísplayed, replace the batteries withín a week. Otherwíse, the absolute posítion data held by the pulse coder wíll be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER ai seríes Maíntenance Manual or FANUC SERVO
AMPLIFIER a seríes Maíntenance Manual for detaíls of the battery replacement procedure.
B-63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING
З. Fuse replacement
Before replacíng a blown fuse, however, ít is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have receíved approved safety and maíntenance traíníng may perform thís work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabínet open, be careful not to touch the hígh voltage círcuíts marked and fítted with an insulatíng cover .
Touchíng an uncovered high voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electríc shock hazard.

1. GENERAL OPERATION
MANUAL
OPERATION
Explanatíons
Manual reference Тhe CNC machine tool has a posítion used to determíne the machíne
posítíon return posítíon.
See Section Thís posítíon is called the reference posítion, where the tool is replaced
or the coordinate are set. Ordínaríly, after the power is turned on, the tool
is moved to the reference positíon.
Manual reference posítion return is to move the tool to the reference
positíon using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator s paпel.
Fíg. a Manual reference posítíon return
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program
commands.
Thís operation ís called automatíc reference posítíon return See Sectíon
OPERATION 1. GENERAL
The tool movement by Usíng machíne operator s panel swítches, pushbuttons, or the manual operatíon handle, the tool can be moved a]ong each axís.
Fíg. b The tool movement by manual operatíon
The tool can be mo ed in the followiп і way. :
i Jog feed See Sectíon
The tool moves contínuously whíle a pushbutton remaíns pressed.
ií Incremental feed See Sectíon
The tool moves by the predetermíned distance each time a button is pressed.
Manual handle feed See Section
By rotatíng the manual handle,the tool moves by the distance correspondíng to the degree of handle rotatíon.
GENERAL OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Automatic operation is to operate the machine accordíng to the created program. It includes memory, MDI and DNC operatíons. See Section TOOL MOVEMENT

Fíg. a Tool Movement by Programmíng
Explanatíons
Memory operatíon After the program ís once registered ín memory of CNC, the machine can be run accordíng to the program instructions. This operation ís called memory operation.
CNC Machine
Memoгу
Fig. b Memory Operatíon
MD1 operation After the program ís entered, as an command group, from the MDI
keyboard, the machine can Ьe run accordin to the program. This operatíon ís called MDI operatíon.
Fíg. c MD1 operation
DNC operation In this mode of operation, the program ís not registered in the CNC
memory. It ís read from the external ínput/output devices instead. This ís called DNC operation. Thís mode ís useful when the program is too
large to fıt the CNC memory.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Explanations
Program selectíon Select the program used for the workpíece. Ordínaríly, oпe program ís
prepared for one workpíece. If two or more programs are ín memory, select the proaram to be used, by searchíng the program number Section

Fig. a Program Selectíon for Automatíc Operation
Start and stop Pressíng the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operatíon to start.
By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatíc operatíon pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termínatíon command in the program, the runníng will stop during automatic operation. When one process machíníng ís completed, automatic operatíon stops. See Section III-4

Start and Stop for Automatíc Operation

1. GENERAL OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Handle ínterruptíon Whí1e automatíc operatíon is beíng executed, tool movement caп overlap
automatíc operation by rotatíng the manual handle. See Sectíon
Tool position during
Z automatic operation
TOPERATION 1. GENERAL
Before machíníng ís started, the automatíc running check can Ьe
executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machíne TESTING A
as desired. This check can be accomplíshed by runníng the machine
PROGRAM
actually oг viewíng the posítíon display change without running the machíne See Sectíon 1II-5 .

Check by Running the
Machíne
Explanatíons
Dry run Remove the workpiece, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool
movement rate usíng the dial on the operator s panel. See Sectíon
Dry run
Feedrate overríde Check the program by changíng the feedrate specifıed in the program.
See Section
Feed rate specified by program :
100 mm/min.
Feed rate after feed rate override 20
20 mm/min.
Fig. b Feedrate Override
1. GENERAL OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Síngle block When the cycle start pushbutton ís pressed, the tool executes one
operation then stops. By pressíng the cycle start agaín, the tool executes the next operatíon then stops. The program ís checked in thís manner.
See Section
Fig. c Single Block
How to Víew the
Position Dísplay
Change wíthout
Running the Machine
Explanatíons
Machíne lock
MD1
XO0000
Too1 Y
The tool remains stopped, and only thepositional displays of the axes change.
Fig. Machine Lock
Auxilíary functíon lock When automatíc runníng is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machíne lock mode See Sectíons , all auxílíary functíons spíndle rotatíon, tool replacement, coolant on/off, etc. Sce Sectíon are disabled.
After a created program is once registered in memory, ít can be corrected or modifíed from the MDI panel See Sectíon llI-9 . EDITING A PART Thís operation can be executed using the part program storage dít PROGRAM
functíon.
Program regístration Program correctíon or modificatíon MD1
CNC tape program

Part Program Edítíng
GENERAL OPERATION B-β3534EN/02
The operaior can dísplay or change a va1ue stored ín CNC ínternal memory by key operation on the MD1 screen See Ill-11 . DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA
CNC memory
Fíg. a Dísplayíng and settíng DataExplanatíons
Offset value
Geometry Wear c
T
CNC memorу
Fí b Dísplayíng and settíng Offset Values
The tool has the tool dimension length, diameter . When a workpiece is machined, the tool movement value depends on the tool dimensions. By settíng t001 dímension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes that permit any tool to cut the workpíece specifıed by the program. Tool dimension data is called the offset value See Sectíon
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL
1 st tool path
Machined shape
2nd tool path
Offset vaiue of the 1 st tool
Offset vaiue of the 2nd tool
Fig. c Offset Value
Dísplayíng and settíng Apart from parameters, there ís data that ís set by the operator in
operator s setting data operatíon. Thís data causes machíne characterístics to change.
For example, the followíng data can be set:
Inch/Metric swítchíng
Selectíon of 1/0 devices
Mírror image cuttíng on/off
The above data ís called settíng data See Sectíon
Settíng data
Setting lnch/Metríc switching
Selection of 1/O device
Mirror image ON/OFF setting
Screen Keys Displaying
CNC Memory
Operational
characteristícs
Program Automatic λ
operation
Movement of
the machine
Fíg. d Dísplayíng and Settíng Operator s settíng data

1. GENERAL OPERATION в-6353aεN/o2
Díspiaying and setting The CNC functíons have versatilíty in order to take actíon in
parameters characteristícs of vańous machínes.
For example, CNC can specífy the followíng:
Rapíd traverse rate of each axís
Whether íncrement system ís based on metric system or ínch systeτn.
How to set command multíply/detect multíply CMR/DMR
Data to make the above specífícatíon ís called parameters See Section

Parameters differ dependíng on machine too1.
Parameter
Rapid traverse rate
Setting Positíon control
Reference posítion return
Backlash compensation data
Pítch error compensatíon
Screen Keys Display data
MD1
CNC memory
Operational
Movement Гcharacteristics
Program Automatic of the
operation machíne
Fig. e Díspiayíng and settíng parameters
Data protection key A key called the data protectíon key can be defined. It ís used to prevent
part programs, offset values, parameters, and setting data from beíng
registered, modified, or deleted erroneously See Section III-11 .
Data Setting
Protectíon Key
Regístration / modificatíon inhíbítíon
Machine operator s
panel
Program
Offset value Data protectíon
Sígnal Parameters key
Setting data
CNC memorу
DISPLAY
The contents of the currently actíve program are displayed. In addítíon, the programs scheduled next and the program líst are displayed. Program Dísplay
See Sectíon
Active sequence number
Active program number
PROGRAM 01100 N00005

MEMSTOP 13:18:14
PRGRM CHECK CURRNT NEXT OPRT
Currently executed program
The cursor indicates the currently executed locatíon
PROGRAM 01100 N00003
SYSTEM ED1T10N BOA1 - 03
PROGRAM NO. USED 10 FREE 53
MEMORY AREA USED 960 FREE 5280
PROGRAM LIBRARY L1ST
1. GENERAL OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The current posítion of the tool is dísplayed wíth the coordínate values.
The distance from the current posítion to the target posítion can also be Current Posítíon
displayed. See Section to
Dísplay
ACTUAL ABSOLUTE 00003 N00003
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 30

When a trouble occurs duńng operatíon, error code and alarm messa e are
displayed oп the screen. See Section A1arm Dísplay
See APPENDIX G for the líst of error codes and theír meanings.
ALARM MESSAGE 01000 N00003
010 1MPROPER G-CODE
When thís optíon ís selected, two types of run time and number of parts are dísplayed on the screen. See Sectíon Parts Count Dísplay,
Run Time Display
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 00003 N00003
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 18

Programmed tool movement can be dísplayed on the followíng planes:
See Sectíon I11-1? Graphíc Display
1 XY plane
2 YZ p1ane
3 XZ p1ane
4 Three dímensíonal dísplay

Dísplay on the XZ plane Three dimensional display isometric
Fíg. a Graphíc dísplay
715
1. GENERAL OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. ínput in CNC memory can Ьe
output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy dísk for savíng. After once DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
output to a medium, the data can be ínput ínto CNC memory.
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
Memoгу Papertape
Program
Reader/puncher FANUC Floppy FANUC Floppy Cassette
Offset interface cassette adaptor
Parameters
Floppy disk
SYSTEM P O
CNC
Automatic programming system
Memorу card
Memory card
adapter
incorporated CNC
Fíg. a Data Output
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The available operational devices include the settíng and dísplay unítattached to the CNC, the machíne operator s panel, and external ínput/output devíces such as a, Handy File and etc.
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
The settíng and display units are shown in Subsections to of
LCD-Mounted
Type CNC Control Unít
LCD-Mounted
Type CNC Control Unít
- 719 -
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Stand-A1one Type
Small MD1 Unit
Address/numeric keys
Function keys
-63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Stand-Alone Type
Standard MD1 Unit
Shift key Function keys
Page change keys
Cursor keys
OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-63534EN/02 OPERATION
EXPLANATION OF THE KEYBOARD
Table Explanatíon of the MD1 keyboard
Number Name Explanation
1 RESET key Press thís key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
2 HELP key Press this button to use the help function when uncertain about the operation of aп MD1 key help function .
UELP in case of 160ř/180ř/160ŕs/180ř5, thís key is assigned to Esc key of the personal
computer.
3 Soft keys The soft keys have various functions, according to the Applications. The soft key functions are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
4 Address and nurneric keys Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
5 SHIFT key Some keys have two characters on their keytop. Pressing the key
swítches the characters. Specíal character Ê ís displayed on the screen when a
sH FT character indicated at the bottom ríght corner on the keytop can be entered.
PUT key When an address or a numeńcal key is pressed, the data is input to the buffer,
Puт and it is dísplayed on the screen. To copy the data in the key input buffer to the
offset regíster, etc., press the key. This key is equivalent to the [1NPUT]
key of the soft keys, and either can be pressed to produce the same result.
7 Cancel key Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer.
When the key ínput buffer dísplays

8 Program edit keys Press these keys when edítíng the program.
to Tab key of the personal computer.
NSERT : lnsertion
Deletion
9 Function keys Press theses keys to switch display screens for each function.
See 111 for detaílas of the function keys.
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Number Name Explanation
10 Cursor move keys There are four different cursor move keys.
f : This key is used to move the cursor to the right or in the forward
O O dírection. The cursor ís moved in short units in the forward direction.
O ј : This key is used to move the cursor to the left or in the reverse direction. The cursor ís moved ín short units in the reverse direction.
O: This key ís used to move the cursor in a downward or forward dírectíon. The cursor is moved in large uníts in the forward dírection.
Thís key ís used to move the cursor ín an upward or reverse direction.
O:
The cursor is moved in large units ín the reverse direction.
11 Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described below.
This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the
PAGE O forward direction

This key is used to changeover the page on the screen ín the
reverse direction.
Explanatíons
Key operatíon wíth In the 2-path control, be sure to select the tool post for which data ís
2 path control specified, using the path selection switch oп the machíne operator s panel.
Then, perform keyboard operation, such as dísplaying or specifying
various data items, and editing a program.
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The functíon keys are used to select the type of screen functíon to be
dísplayed. When a soft key sectíon select soft key is pressed FUNCTION KEYS
iminediately after a functíon key, the screen section corresponding to the
AND SOFT KEYS
selected function can be selected.
General Screen
Operatíons
1 Press a functíon key on the MDI pane1. The chapter selectíon soft
POs OFFSET [PRoGj cusτoм keys that belong to the selected functíon appear.
2 Press one of the chapter selectíon soft keys. The screen for the
selected chapter appears. If the soft key for a target chapter is not
dísplayed, press the continuous menu key next menu key .
Function keys In some cases, addítíonal chapters can be selected withín a chapter.
3 When the target chapter screen is displayed, press the operatíon
aσσσσσ selection key to display data to be manipulated.
4 To redísplay the chapter selectíon soft keys, press the return menu
Chapter selection key.
soft keys Operation
selection
key
The general screen ciisplay procedure ís explained above. However,
the actual dísplay pruccdure varíes from one screen to another. For
detaíls, see the descńptíon of índivídual operations.
Return menu key Continuous menu key
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Functíon keys are províded to select the type of screen to be displayed.
Functíon Keys The followíng functíon keys are províded on the MDI pane1:
POs Press thís key to dísplay the positíon screen.
PROG Press thís key to display the program screen.
OFFSET
Press this key to dísplay the offset/setting screen.
SETTING
Press this key to dísplay the system screen. SYSTEM
h1 L s sAG S Press this key to dísplay the message screen.
GRAPH Press this key to display the graphics screen.
cusTOM Pressthískeytodísplaythecustom screen conversatíonal macro
screen .
In case of 160i/180i/160is/180is, thís key ís assigned to Ctr1 key of the
personal computer.
In case of 160í/180i/160is/180is, thís key ís assígned to A1t key of the
personal computer.
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
To dísplay a moгe detaíled screen, press a function key followed by a soft
Soft Keys key. Soft keys are also used for actual operatíons.
The followíng illustrates how soft key dísplays are changed by pressíng
each functíon key.
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :
: lndicates screens
: lndicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a
functíon key 1
[ ј : lndicates a soft key 2
: lndicates input from the MD1 panel.
[ ] : lndicates a soft key displayed in green.
: lndicates the continuous menu key rightmost soft key 3 .
1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
2 Some soft keys are not dísplayed dependíng oп the option
confıguratíon.
3 In some cases, the contínuous menu key is omitted when the 12 soft
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-63534EN 02
SCREEN Soft key transition triqgered by th,e function key uоѕ
POS
Relative coordinate display
[REL] [ OPRTj] Axis oc numecal [PRESET]
[OR
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
When an address and a numerícal key are pressed, the character
Key lnput and lnput correspondíng to that key ís input once ínto the key ínput buffer. The
contents of the key input buffer ïs displayed at the bottom of the CRTBuffer
screen.
In order to indícate that ít ís key ínput data, a > symbol ís displayed
immedíately in front of ít. A _ ís displayed at the end of the key input
data índícating the input position of the next character.
Key ínput buffer display
Fig. Key ínput buffer dísplay
To input the lower character of the keys that have two characters inscribed
on them, fírst press the s + Fт key and then the key in questíon.
When the key ís pressed, _ índicatíng the next character ínput
positíon changes to - . Now lowercase characters can be entered shíft
state .
When a character ís input in shíft status the shíft status ís canceled.
Furthermore, if the sн F τ key ís pressed in shíft status, the shift status ís
canceled.
It ís possíble to input up to 32 characters at a tíme in the key ínput buffer.
Press the AN key to cаncel a character or symbol input in the key ínput
buffer.
Example
When the key input buffer dísplays
>NOO1X100Z_
and the cancel CAN key ís pressed, Z ís canceled and
>NOO1X100_
ís dísplayed.

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-δ3534EN/02
2,3,5 After a character or number has been input from the MDI panel, a data
Warning Messages check is executed when NPUTI key or a soft key is pressed. In the case of
íncorrect ínput data or the wrong operatíon a flashing warníng message
wí11 be displayed on the status dísplay 1ine.
Display of key input
buffer
Warning message
dísplay ED1T WRONG MODE
Status display
Soft key display
Fig. Warning message dispiay
Tab1e Warning Messages
Warning message Content
FORMAT ERROR The format is incorrect.
WR1TE PROTECT Key input ìs invalid because of data protect key
or the parameter is not write enabled.
DATA 1S OUT OF RANGE The input value exceeds the permitted range.
TOO MANY D1G1TS The input value exceeds the permítted number
of dìgits.
WRONG MODE Parameter input is not possible in any mode
other than MD1 mode.
ED1T REJECTED 1t is not possible to edit in the current CNC
status.
1/O CHANNEL=1
This CNC has a total of three channels of reader/puncher and remote
buffer interfaces. It also has a memory cаrd ínterface. The ínput/output
devíce to be used ís specífıed by settíng the channel ínterface connected
to that devíce in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specífıed data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bíts, of an
input/output devíce connected to a specífıc channel must be set in
parameters for that channel ín advance. These settings are not requíred
for the memory card interface.
For channell, two combínatíons of parameters to specify the ínput/output
device data are províded.
The following shows the interrelation between the reader/punch ínterface
parameters for the channels.
747
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
lnput/output channel 0101 Stop bit and other data number parameter
0020 Number specified for 1/O CHANNEL=0 0102
the inputloutput device channell
0020 1/0 CHANNEL 0103 Baud rate
Specify a channel for an Stop bit and other data
inputoutputdevice.
Number specified for 1/0 CHANNEL=1
the input/output devíce channell
other data
Memory Card =4
ιinterface
ParameterNumber
The Handy Fíle ís an easy-to-use, multí function floppy disk
input/output device desígned for FA equípment. By operatíng the Handy FANUC Handy
Fíle dírectly or remotely from a unít connected to the Handy Fíle, programs can be transferred and edíted.
The Handy File uses ínch floppy dísks, which do not have the problems of paper tape , noisy during input/output, easíly broken, and bulky .
One or more programs up to bytes, whích is equívalent to the memory capacíty of 36Øm paper tape caп be stored on one floppy dísk.
POWER ON/OFF

Turníng on the Power
Procedure of turníng on the power
Procedure 1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machíne tool ís normal.
For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.
2 Turn on the power according to the manual íssued by the machine
tool buílder.
3 After the power ís turned on, check that the posítíon screen ís dísplayed. An alarm screen is dísplayed íf an alarm occurs upon power on. If the screen shown in Sectíon is displayed, a system failure may have occurred.
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTEI 01000 N00010
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 5

Fig. Posítíon screen Seven soft key type
4 Check that the 1an motor ís rotatíng.
WARNING
Unti1 the positional or alarm screen is displayed at the power
on, do not touch them. Some keys are used for the
maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are
pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.
î49
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-63534EN/02
If a hardware failure or ínstallation error occurs, the system displays one
of the followíng three types of screens then stops. Screen Dísplayed at
Information such as the type of pńnted círcuít board installed in each slot
Power on
ís indícated. Thís information and the LED states are useful for failure
recovery.
Slot status display
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
Physical slot number Physical slot number
Types of prınted circuıt boards Modulefunctíon
For more information about the types of pńnted círcuít boards and module
functíons, refer to the maíntenance manual B-63525EN .
750
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Screen índícatíng
module settíng status
SLOT 01 3046 : END END: Settingcompleted
SLOT 02 3050 : B1ank: Setting not completed t
Module 1D
BOH1 -01
CNC control software
SERVO: 90B0-01 Digital senıo ROM
SUB : xxxx-xx Sub CPU remote buffer
OMM : yyyy-yy Order made macro/macro
PMC : zzzz-zz compiler
PMC
The software configuration can be displayed on the system confıguratíon
screen a1so.
Refer to the MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63525EN for the system
confíguratíon screen.

Power Dísconnectíon
Procedure 1 Check that the LED indícatíng the cycle start ís off on the operator s
paпe1.
2 Check that a11 movable parts of the CNC machine tool is stoppíng.
3 If an external ínput/output device such as the Handy Fi1e is connected
to the CNC, turn off the external input/output device.
4 Contínue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds.
5 Refer to the machíne tool buílder s manual for turning off the power
to the machíne.
751
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
3 MANUAL OPERATION
MANUAL OPEØTION are síx kínds as follows :
Manua1 reference posítíon return
Jog feed
Incremental feed
Manual handle feed
Manua1 absolute on and off
Too1 axís dírection handle feed/Too1 axís dírectíon handle feed B
Manuallínear/circular interpolatíon
Manua1 rigíd tapping
Manual numeric command
752
в-6353лEN/o2 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
The tool ís returned to the reference posítíon as follows :
The tool ís moved in the direction specífïed in parameter ZMI bít 5 of No. MANUAL
1006 for each axís with the reference posítíon return switch on the
REFERENCE
machine operator s pane1. The tool moves to the deceleratíon poínt at the
POS1T10N RETURN rapíd traverse rate, then moves to the reference positíon at the FL speed.
The rapíd traverse rate and FL speed are specifíed ín parameters No.
1420,1421, and 1425 .
Fourstep rapid traverse overńde ís effectíve duńng rapíd traverse.
When the tool has returned to the reference posítíon, the reference
positíon return completíon LED goes on. The tool generally moves along
on1y a single axís, but can move along three axes simultane ously when
specífıed so in parameter JAX bit 0 of
Reference
ıv position
Deceleration η
point /вv
Rapid traverse motion _ Decelerated
motıon Rapíd traverse rate
FL speed
rapid traverse overríde is
effectíve
Procedure for Manual Reference Positíon Return
Procedure 1 Press the reference posítíon retum swítch, one of the mode selectíon
swíthces.
2 To decerease the feedrate, press a rapid traverse override swítch.
When the tool has returned to the reference posítion, the reference
position return completíon LED goes on.
RAPID TRAVERSE
г Г_ OVERRIDE -ó 3 Press the feed axís and direction selectíon swítch correspondíng to the
50 100 axís and dírectíon for reference posítíon return. Contínue pressing the
swítch untíl the tool returns to the reference positíon. The tool can Ьe
AX1S DIRECTION moved along three axes símultaneously when specífied so in аn
appropriate parameter settíng. The tool moves to the deceleratíon
l+Y poínt at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference posítíon at
the FL speed set in a parameter.
ó x
4 Perform the same operatíons for other axes, íf necessary.
The above ís an example. Refer to the appropriate mаnual províded by
the machíne tool builder for the actual operations.
- ZERO POS1T10N i MIRRROR 1MAGE
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Automatically setting the Bít 0 ZPR of parameter No. 1201 ís used for automatícally setting the
coordínate system coordínate system. When ZPR ís set, the coordínate system ís
automatícally determíned when manual reference posítíon return ís
performed.
When a, β and y are set in parameter 1250, the workpíece coordínate
system is deternıíned so that reference poínt on the tool holder or the
posítíon of the típ of the reference tool ís X= a, Y= β, Z= y when
reference positíon return ís perfonned. Thís has the same effect as
specífyíng the following command for reference posítíon return:
G92XªY iZγ;
However, when options of the workpiece coordínate system ís selected,
it is not able to use.
Restrictions
Moving the tool again Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED
lights at the completíon of reference posítíon return, the tool does not
move unless the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN swítch is turned
off.
Reference position return The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED ís
completion LED extínguíshed Ьy eíther of the followíng operatíons:
Movíng from the reference posítíon.
Entering an emergency stop state.
The distance to return to For the dístance Not in the deceleratíon conditíon to return the tool to
reference position the reference posítíon, refer to the mаnual íssued by the machíne tool
builder.
754
E-6з5з4EN 02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION

In the jog mode, pressíng a feed axís and directíon selectíon switch on the JOG FEED
machíne operator s panel contínuously moves the tool along the selected
axís in the selected dírection.
The jog feedrate ís specífied in a parameter
The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dia1.
Pressíng the rapíd traverse switch moves the tool at the rapid traverse
feedrate No. 1424 regardless of the postiotíon of the jog feedrate
override dia1. Thís functíon ís called the manual rapid traverse.
Manua1 operatíon ís allowed for one axís at a tíme. 3 axes can be
selected at a tíme by parameter JAX No.1002Ø .
Whi1e a switch is pressed, the tool moves in the direction specified by the switch.
Procedure for JOG feed
AX1S DIRECTIJN Procedure 1 Press the jog switch, one of the mode selectíon swítches.
2 Press the feed axís and dírection selection switch corresponding to the
axis and dírectíon the tool is to be moved. Whi1e the switch ís pressed,
the tool moves at the feedrate specifıed in a parameter No. 1423 .
The tool stops when the switch is released.
3 The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override díaд.
4 Pressíng the rapíd traverse swítch while pressing a feed axis and
dírection selectíon switch moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate
while the rapíd traverse swítch ís pressed. Rapíd traverse ovenіde by
the rapid traverse overıíde swítches is effectíve duríng rapid traverse.
0 2000 The above ís an example. Refer to the appropríate mаnual províded
by the machíne tool builder for the actual operations.
JOG FEED RATE OVERRIDE
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION в-63534EN/o2
Límítations
Acceleratíon decelera Feedrate, time constant and method of automatíc acceleratíon/
tion for rapid traverse deceleration for manual rapíd traverse are the same as G00 іп programmed
command.
Change of modes Changíng the mode to the jog mode whíle pressíng a feed axís and
dírectíon selection swítch does not enable jog feed. To enab1e jog feed,
enter the jog mode fírst, then press a feed axís and dírectíon selection
swítch.
Rapid traverse prior to If reference posítíon return ís not performed after power on, pushing reference position return RAPID TRAVERSE button does not actuate the rapid traverse but the remaíns at the JOG feedrate. Thís functíon can Ьe dísabled by settíng
parameter RPD No.1401Ø1 .
OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
In the íncremental INC mode, pressíng a feed axis and dírection
selectíon swítch on the machine operator s panel moves the tool one step
1NCREMENTAL FEED
along the selected axís in the selected dírection. The mínímum distance
the tool ís moved ís the least ínput íncrement. Each step can Ьe 10, 100,
oг 1000 times the least ínput íncrement.
Thís mode ís effective when a manual pulse generator ís not
connected.
ZЉ
Each tíme a swítch is
Tooд pressed, the tooi moves one step in the dírection specifíed by the switch.
Procedure for lncremental Feed
1 Press the INC swítch, one of the mode selection swítches.
2 Select the dístance to be moved for each step wíth the
magnífícatíon dia1.
3 Press the feed axis and dírectíon selection switch corresponding to
the axís and dírection the tool ís to be moved. Each tíme a swítch
ís pressed, the tool moves one step. The feedrate ís the same as the
jog feedrate.
4 Pressíng the rapíd traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and dírectíon selectíon swítch moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate.
Rapid traverse ovenide Ьy the rapíd traverse override swítch is effectíve during rapid traverse.
The above ís an example. Refer to the appropriate manual provided
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/o2
In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the
manual pulse generator on the machíne operator s pane1. Select the axís MANUAL HANDLE
along whích the tool ís to be moved with the handle feed axís selection
FEED
swítches.
The mínimum dístance the tool ís moved when the manual pulse
generator is rotated by one graduatíon ís equal to the least input íncrement.
Or the dístance the tool ís moved when the manual pulse generator ís rotated by one graduatíon can be magnifıed by 10 tímes or by one of the
two magnifıcations specifıed by parameters No. 7113 and 7114 .
Procedure for Manual Handle Feed
1 Press the HANDLE switch, one of the mode selection swítches.
2 Select the axís along whích the tool is to be moved by pressing a handle feed axis selectíon swítch.
3 Select the magnifıcatíon for the distance the tool ís to be moved by pressíng a handle feed magnífıcation swítch. The mínimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator ís rotated by one graduation is equal to the least ínput íncrement.
4 Move the tool along the selected axís by rotatíng the handle. Rotatíng the handle 360 degrees moves the tool the dístance equívalent to 100 graduatíons.
The above is an example. Refer to the appropríate manual províded by the machíne tool builder for the actual operatíons.
Manual pulse generator
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
Explanatíons
Avaílabílíty of manual Parameter JHD bit 0 of No. 7100 enables or dísables the manual handlepulse generator ín Jog feed in the JOG mode.
mode JHD When the parameter JHD bit 0 of No. 7100 ís set 1,both manual handle
feed and íncremental feed are enabled.
Avaílabilíty of manual Parameter THD bit 1 of No. 7100 enables or dísables the manual handle
pulse generator in feed ín the TEACH IN JOG mode.
TEACH 1N JOG mode
THD
A command to the MPG Parameter HPF bít 4 of No. 7100 or No. 7117 specífıes as follows:
exceeding rapíd traverse
Parameter HPF bit 4 of No. 7100 rate HPF
Set value 0 : The feedrate ís clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are
distance the too1 is moved may not match
the graduatíons on the manual pulse generator.
Set value 1 : The feedrate ís clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapíd traverse rate are not
ígnored but accumulated in the CNC.
No longer rotatíng the handle does not immediately stop
the too1. The tool ís moved by the pulses accumulated
in the CNC before ít stops.
Parameter HPF No. 7117 It is available when parameter HPF ís 0.
Set value 0: The feedrate ís clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceedíng the rapid traverse rate are
í dístance the too1 ís moved may not match
the graduatíons on the mаnual pulse generator.
Other than 0: The feedrate ís clamped at the rapíd traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapíd traverse rate are not
ignored but accumulated in the CNC untíl the limit
specífıed in parameter No. 7117 ís reached.
No longerrotatíng the handle does not ímmedíately stop
the too1. The tool ís moved by the pulses accumulated
in the CNC before ít stops.
Movement dírectíon of Parameter HNGx No. 7102 0 swítches the dírectíon of MPG in whích an axís to the rotatíon of the tool moves along an axís, corresponding to the direction ín which the
MPG HNGX handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Restríctíons
Number of MPGs Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected, one for each axis.
The three manual pulse generators can be símultaneously operated.
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as x100 moves the tool too fast. The feedrate ís clamped at the rapid traverse feedrate.
NOTE
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of fíve rotations per second or lower. 1f the manual pulse generator is rotated at a rate higher than fíve rotatíons per second, the
tool may not stop ímmedíately after the handle ís no longer rotated or the dístance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the manual puise generator.
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operatíon ís added to
the coordinates can be selected by turníng the manual absolute swítch on MANUAL ABSOLUTE
or off on the machine operator s pane1. When the switch ís turned on, the
ON AND OFF
dístance the tool ís moved by manual operation is added to the
coordínates. When the switch is turned off, the dístance the tool ís moved
by manual operation ís not added to the coordinates.
Y axís
Manual operation
P1
O > X axis
The coordínates values change by the amount of manual operation.
Fíg. a Coordinates with the switch ON
Fíg. b Coordinates with the swítch OFF
761
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Explanatíon The followíng describes the relation between manual operatíon and
coordínates when the manual absolute swítch is turned on or off, usíng a
program example.
The subsequent figures use the following notation:
Movement of the tool when the switch ís on
--ł Movement of the tool when the switch is off
The coordinates after manual operation include the distance the tool is
moved by the manual operation. When the switch is off, therefore, subtract
the distance the tool is moved Ьy the manual operation.
Manual operation after Coordínates when block Г has been executed after manual operation
the end of block X axís , Y axis at the end of movement of block.
Manual operatìon after a Coordínates when the feed hold button is pressed while block ís beíng
feed hold executed, manual operatíon Y axís + ís performed, and the cycle
start button is pressed and released.
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
When reset after a Coordínates when the feed hold button is pressed whíle block ГЈ is being
manual operatíon executed. manual operatíon Y axis ís performed, the control unit
followíng a feed hold is reset with the RESET button, and block 0 is read again
When the next move When the followíng commands are íncremental commands, operatíon is
block is an íncremental the same as when the switch is OFF.
Manual operation duríng
cutter compensatíon
When the swítch is OFF
After manual operatíon is performed wíth the switch OFF during cutter
compensatíon, automatíc operation ís restarted then the tool moves
para11e1 to the movemen[ that would have been performed íf manual
movement had not been performed. The amount of separatíon equals to
the amount that was performed manually.
operation
Cutter patff / Programmed path
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
When the swítch is ON duríng cutter compensatíon
Operatíon of the machine upon return to automatic operatíon after manual
ínterventíon wíth the swítch ís ON during executíon wíth an absolute
command program іп the cutter compensation mode wi11 be descńbed.
The vector created from the remaíníng part of the current block and the
beginníng of the next block ís shífted in para11e1. A new vector is created
based on the next block,the block following the next block and the
amount of manual movement. Thís also applies when mаnual operatíon
ís performed duńng coıneńng.
Manua1 operatíon performed ín other than cornering
Assume that the feed hold was applied at point PH whíle movíng from PA
to PB of programmed path Pд, PB, and Pς and that the tool was manually
moved to Pц . The block end poínt Pg moves to the poínt PB Ьy the
amount of mаnual movement, and vectors VBt and VB, at PB also move
to VBt and VB, . Vectors Vςt and VC2 between the next two blocks PB
Pς and Pς PD are discarded and new vectors Vςt and Vς, VC2 =
VC2 in thís example are produced from the relation between PB Pς and
Pς PD. However, sínce VB2 is not a newly calculated vector, correct
offset ís not performed at block PB P. Offset is correctly performed
after VB2
Programmed path VBl X \ ρo absolute command
Cutter path after manual operation Cutter path before\ manual operation
OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Manua1 operatíon duríng cornering
This is an example when manual operatíon ís performed duríng corneríng.
Vp2 , and V g2 are vectors moved in para11e1 wíth Vp,, V s і and V g2
by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated
from Vς 1 and V2. Then correct cutter compensatíon ís performed for the
blocks following Pc.
Cutter path after \manual operation \
Cutter path before
Manual operatíon after síngle block stop
Manua1 operatíon was performed when execution of a block was
termínated by síngle block stop.
Vectors VB1 and VB2 are shífted by the amount of manual operation.
Sub sequent processing ís the same as case a descríbed above. An MDI
operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operatíon. The
movement is the same as that by manual operatíon.
. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION
Tool axís directíon handle feed moves the tool over a specífíed distance
Ьy handle feed in the dírectíon of the tool axis tilted by the rotation of the TOOL AXІ
rotary axis.
DIRECTION HANDLE
FEED/TOOL AXlS Tool axís dírectíon handle feed B has the function of tool axís dírectíon
handle feed, and also has the tool axís normal dírection handle feed whích DIRECTION HANDLE
ís handle feed at right angles to the tool axis.
FEED B
These functíons are used, for example, wíth 5 axís engraving machínes.
When the tool axis direction handle mode is selected and the manual pulse
generator ís rotated, the tool ís moved by the specífied travel distance ín Too1 Axís Dírection
the dírectíon of the tool axís tílted by the rotation of the rotary axís.
Handle Feed
Too1 Axís Normal Direction Handle Feed
Procedure 1 Select the HANDLE switch from the mode selectíon switches.
0 2 Select the tool axís dírectíon handle feed switch.
3 Select the tool axís dírectíon handle feed mode axis as the handle feed
axís for the first manual pulse coder parameter No. 7121 .
4 When the handle ís turned, the tool moves in the tool axis direction by
the correspondíng dístance.
When both the tool axís dírectíon handle feed mode and tool axís ríght angle dírection handle feed mode are selected, neíther mode is set, but the ordínary handle mode ís set.
The procedure above ís on1y an example. Refer to the relevant manual publíshed by the machine tool buílder for other possible operations.
B-63534EN 02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Explanations
Axís confíguratíon Assume that the rotary axes for basíc axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C, respectively. Assume also that the Z axis represents the tool axis.
Dependíng oп the axís confıguration of the machíne, four types of tool axis dírectíons are available. Specífy the directíon with parameter No.
1 A C axis type 2 B C axis type
Z tool axis Z tool axis
3 A B axis A axis master type 4 A B axis B axis master type
Z tool axis Z tool axis
Pulse dístríbutíon to The figure below shows handle pulse Hp distribution to the X axís,
basíc axes Y axis, and Z axis for each of the four directions.
1 A C axis type
Xp = Hp x sin a x sin c
Yp = Hp x sin a x cos c
Zp = Hp x cos a
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
2 B-C axís type
Xp = Hp x sin b x cos c
Yp = Hp x sin b x sin c
Zp = Hp x cos b
3 A B axis A axis master type
Xp = Hp x sin b
Yp =-Hp x cos b x sin a
Zp = Hp x cos b x cos a
4 A-B axis B axís master type
Xp = Hp x cos a x sin b
Yp = -Hp x sín a
Zp = Hp x cos a x cos b
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
In the fıgures aЬoуe, a, b, and c represent the positíons angles of the A axís, B axis, and C axís from the machine zero poínt; those values present when the tool axís dírectíon handle feed mode is set or a reset occurs are used. To change the feed direction, reenter the tool axis dírectíon handle feed mode, or press the reset key.
For tool axís directíon determination, the coordínates rotatíon angles of rotary axes can be set using bits 3 and 4 3D1X and 3D2X of parameter No. 7104, and parameter Nos. 7144 and 7145.
settíng basic axes and Basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No. 1022 plane rotary axes selectíon . Rotary axes A, B, and C are detenmined Ьy parameter No.
1020 axis name .
Too1 axís dírectíon The direction of the tool X axis ís determined by setting bít 0 TLX of
parameter No. 7104.
setting for 4 axís This functíon ís usually used wíth 5 axís machínes. However, 4 axís
machínes machines One axís ís for rotation can be used by settíng bít 2 CXC of
parameter No. 7104 to 1.
Restríctions
Axís configuratíon If eíther of the two axes selected in tvpe iıccifıcatíon based on the axis
configuration ís nonexístent as an axis, P/S alarm No. 5015 ís issued.
When the tool axis normal d цectíon handle mode ís selected and the
manual pulse generator ís rotated, the tool is moved by the specífıed travel Too1 Axis Normal
distance in the dírection normal to the tool axis tílted by the rotatíon of Directíon Handle Feed
the rotary axis.
A- arid C-axes
B- arid C-axes
Center of rotatíon
Tool A C,B C
Transverse direction
of the tool X axís /, ___ Longítudinal direction
of the tool
Transverse directíon
of the tool Y axís
Workpfece
769
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION 8-63534Erv/o2
Too1 Axïs Dírection Handle Feed
Procedure 1 Select the HANDLE swítch from the mode selection swítches.
2 Select the tool axis normal dírectíon handle feed swítch.
3 Select the tool axís dírectíon handle feed mode axís as the handle feed
axís for the fцst manual pulse coder parameter No. 7141, No. 7142 .
4 When the handle ís turned, the tool moves in normal direction to the
tool axis dírectíon by the correspondíng distance.
When both the tool axis dírectíon handle feed mode and tool axís
right angle directíon handle feed mode are selected, neither mode ís
set, but the ordinary handle mode ís set.
The procedure above ís on1y an example. Refer to the relevant manual
published by the machine tool buílder for other possíble operations.
Explanations
Axís configuratíon Assume that the rotary axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C,
respectívely. Assume also that the Z axis represents the too1 axís.
Depending on thc dírectíons in which X axis dírectíon and Y axís dírection are τrvaílable.
Specify the dírectíon wíth parameter No. 7120.
1 A-C axis type 2 B-C axis type
Z tool axis Z tool axis
OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
Pu1se dístríbutíon to The fıgure below shows handle pulse Hp distribution to the X-axis,
basíc axes Y-axis, and Z-axís for each of the four directions.
1 A-C axis type X-axis dírection
Xp = Hp x COS C
Yp = Hp x S1N C
The XY plane is drawn because A- and C-axes are specífied and because rotation
about the A-axis, whích ís on the X-axis, does not cause the tool to rotate about the X-axis at the tool tip. Suppose that Hp X dírectioň the Z-axis on this síde of the
XY plane ís positíve.
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
3 B-C axis type X-axis directíon
Xp = Hp x COS B x COS C
Yp = Hp x COS B x S1N C
Zp = -Hp x S1N B
Hp X
X direction
4 B-C axis type Y-axis dírectíon
Xp = -Hp x S1N C
Yp = Hp x COS C
Zp=O
X4
In the fıgures above, a, b, and c represent the posítíons angles of theA axis, B axís, and C axís from the machine zero poínt; those values present when the tool axís dírectíon handle feed mode ís set or a reset occurs are used. To change the feed dírectíon, reenter the tool axís dírectíon handle feed mode, or press the reset key.
For tool axís dírection determínatíon, the coordínates rotation angles of rotary axes can be set usíng bíts 3 and 4 3D1X and 3D2X of parameter
No. 7104, and parameter Nos. 7144 and 7145.
OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
settíng basíc axes and Basíc axes X, Y, and Z are determíned Ьy parameter No. 1022 plane rotary axes selectíon . Rotary axes A, B, and C aгe determíned hy parameter No.
1020 axís name .
Tool axís dírectíon The dírectíon of the tool X axís ís determined by settíng bit 0 TLX of
parameter No. 7104.
Settíng for 4 axis This functíon is usually used wíth 5 axís machínes. However, 4 axís
machínes machines Oпe axís ís for rotatíon can be used by setting bít 2 CXC of
parameter No. 7104 to 1.
Restrictions
Axís confíguratíon If either of the two axes selected in type specífícatíon based on the axis confıguratíon is nonexístent as an axís, P/S alarm No. 5015 ís íssued.
Moreover, the A C axís type or B C axís type must be selected as the axís
configuration type.
3 MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
In manual hand i c і cιł or jog feed, the followíng types of feed operations
MANUAL are enabled ín additiun to the conventional feed operatíon along a
specífied síngle axís X axís, Y axís, Z axís, and so forth based on
LINEAR/CIRCULAR
símultaneous 1 axís control:
INTERPOLATION Feed along a tílted straíght line ín the XY plane linear feed based on
símultaneous 2 axís control
Feed along a círcle in the XY plane circular feed based on símultaneous 2 axís control
NOTE
The X axis and Y axis must be the first controlled axis and second controlled axis,
respectively.
Procedure for Manual Línear/Círcular lnterpolation
Procedure 1 To perfonm manual handle feed, select manual handle feed mode. To
perform jog feed, select jog feed mode.
2 To perfonm manual handle feed, select a feed axís for simultaneous
1 axis feed along the X axís, Y axís, or Z axís, or for símultaneous
línear oг cігculаr 2 axís feed along a specífíed straight 1ine or cцcle іп
the XY p1аne subject to mаnual handle feed operatíon. Use the
handle feed axís select swítch for thís selectíon.
To perform jog feed, select a feed axis and dírectíon wíth the feed axis
dírection select swítch. Whí1e a feed axis and íts directíon are
specífıed, the tool moves ín the specífied axís dírectíon or along a
straíght 1ine or circ1e at the jog feedrate specífíed in parameter No.
1423.
3 For manual handle feed
The tool is moved along a specífied axís by turníng the respectíve
mаnual handle. The feedrate depends on the speed at whích the
mаnual handle is turned. A dístance to be traveled by the tool when
the manual handle is turned by one pulse can Ьe selected usíng the
mаnual handle feed travel distance magnificatíon switch.
774
B-6353-1EN 02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
For jog feed
The feedrate can be overrídden usíng the manual feedrate overríde
dia1.
The procedure above ís just an example. For actual operations, refer
to the relevant manual províded by the machíne tool buílder.
Explanatíons
Definítion of a straíght For feed along an axís, пo straight line/círcle defınítíon is requíred. For
líne/circle linear feed or círcular feed, a straíght line or círcle must be defıned
beforehand. For círcular feed, for example, data such as a radíus and the
center of a circle must be set. For detaíls, refer to the relevant mаnual
provided by the machíne tool buílder.
Manual handle feed In manual handle feed, the tool caп be moved along a specífıed axís
X axís, Y axís, Z axis, ..., or the 8th axís , or can be moved along a
tílted straight 1ine línear feed or a circle círcular feed .
1 Feed along a specifıed axís simultaneous 1 axis control
By turníng a mаnual handle, the tool can be moved along the desíred
axís such as X axís, Y axís, and Z axis ori a simultaneous 1 axís
control basís. Thís mode of feed ís the conventional type of manual
handle feed.
F Path of travel using the Y axis handle

Path of travel using the X axis handle
Feed along a specífíed axís
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION 8-6353aENıo2
2 Línear feed símultaneous 2 axís control
By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved along the straight
line parallel to a specífıed straíght line on a simultaneous 2 axís
control basís. This mаnual handle ís referred to as the guídance handle.
Moreover, Ьy turníng another manual handle, the tool can be moved
at ńght angles to a specífíed straíght line on a símultaneous 2 axís
control basis. Thís manual handle ís referred to as the approach
handle. When the guidance handle or approach handle ís turned
clockwise or counterclockwíse, the tool travels forward or backward
along the respectíve path.
Y
Path of travel usìng
the approach handle
Tool Y Specified straight line
Path of travel using the
guidance handle
X
Línear feed
3 Circu1ar feed símultaneous 2 axis control
By turníng a manual handle, the tool can be moved from the current posítíon along the concentńc circle that has the same center as a specífıed círcle oп a simultaneous 2 axis control basís. Thís mаnual handle ís referred to as the guidance handle. Moreover, by turníng another manual handle, the tool can be moved along the normal to a specífied círcle oп a simultaneous 2 axís control basis. Thís mаnual handle ís referred to as the approach handle. When the guidance handle or approach handle ís turned clockwíse or counterclockwíse, the tool travels forward oг backward along the respective path.
Y
А .E Path of travel using the
approach handle
Specified circle
Path of travel using the
guidance handle
X
Circularfeed
Feedrate
776
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
Feedrate for manual The feedrate depends oп the speed at which a manual handle is turned.
handle feed A dístance to be traveled by the tool along a tangent in the case of línear
or circular feed when a manual handle ís turned Ьy one pulse can be selected usíng the manual handle feed travel dístance magnífıcation switch.
Manual handle selectíon The Seńes 16/18 has three manual pulse generator ínterfaces to allow up to three mаnual handles to be connected. For information about how to
use the manual handles connected to the ínterfaces whether to use each mаnual handle as a handle for feed along an axis, as a guídance handle, or as an approach handle , refer to the relevant mаnual províded by the machine tool buílder.
Directíon of movement The user can specify the direction of the tool moved along a straíght line usíng manual handles or circle for example, whether to make a clockwíse or counterclockwíse movement along a circle when the guídance handle oг approach handle is turned clockwíse or counterclockwíse. For details, refer to the relevant
manual províded by the machíne tool builder.
Jog feed JOG In jog feed, the tool can be moved along a specífied axís X axís, Y axís,
Z axis, ..., or the 8th axis , or can be moved along a tílted straíght line línear feed or a círcle circular feed .
1 Feed along a specifıed axís símultaneous 1 axís control
Whí1e a feed axis and íts dírectíon are specífíed wíth the feed axís dírectíon select swítch, the tool moves in the specifıed axís directíon at the feedrate specífıed іп parameter No. 1423. The feedrate can be ovenidden usíng the mаnual feedrate overńde dial.
2 Línear feed símultaneous 2 axís control
By defining a straíght 1ine beforehand, the tool can be moved as follows:
While a feed axís and íts d цection are selected using the feed axís dírectíon select swítch, the tool moves along a straíght line parallel to the specífıed straight line on a simultaneous 2 axís control basís.
While a feed axís and íts dírectíon are selected using the feed axis directíon select swítch, the tool moves at ńght angles to the specifıed straíght line on a simultaneous 2 axís control basis.
The feedrate in the tangentíal direction is specífıed in parameter No.
1410. The feedrate can Ьe overridden usíng the mаnual feedrate overńde dial.
3 Circular feed símultaneous 2 axís control
By defıning a circle beforehand, the tool can be moved as follows:
Whíle a feed axís and íts d ırectíon are selected usíng the feed axís dírectíon select swítch, the tool moves from the current posítíon along the concentńc círcle that has the same center as the specífied círcle.
Whíle a feed axís and its direction are selected using the feed axís directíon select swítch, the tool moves along the normal to the specífied círcle.
The feedrate in the tangentíal dírectíon ís specifıed in parameter No.
1410. The feedrate can be oveıridden usíng the manual feedrate overńde dial.
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION
Manual handle feed in Even in JOG mode, manual handle feed can Ьe enabled usíng bít 0 JHD
JOG mode of parameter No. 7100. Iп thís case, however, manual handle feed i5
enabled on1y when the tool ís not moved along any axis by jog feed.
Limítations
Mirror ímage Never use the mírror image functíon when performing manual operatíon.
Perform manual operatíon when the mírror ímage swítch ís off, and
mirror ímage setting ís off.
oPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
For executíon of rigid tappíng, set rígíd mode, then swítch to handle mode
and move the tapping axís with a manual handle. For more ínformation MANUAL R1G1D
about rigid tappíng, see Section and refer to the relevant manual
TAPPING
províded by the machine tool buílder.
Procedure for Manual Rígid Tappíng
Procedure 1 Stop the spindle and servo axes, then set MDI mode Ьy pressing the
MDI swítch among the mode selection swítches.
2 Enter and execute the followin program:
M29 S 1000 ;
G91 G84 ZO F1000 ;
The program above ís requíred to determíne a screw lead and set rigid
tapping mode. In this program, a tapping axis must always be
specífıed. Specífy a va1ue that does not operate the tapping axís.
WARNING
1n thís MD1 programmíng, never specify commands to
position the tool at a dríllíng posítíon and at point R.
Otherwise, the tool moves along an axis.
3 When the entered program ís executed, rigid tapping mode ís set.
4 After rigíd mode ís set upon completíon of MDI program execution,
swítch to the handle mode Ьy pressíng the handle swítch among the
mode selectíon switches.
CAUTION
At thís tíme, never press the reset key. Otherwise, rigid
mode is canceled.
5 To perform rígíd tappíng, select a tapping axís with the handle feed
axís select switch, and move the tapping axís wíth the manual handle.
779
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Manual rígíd tappíng Manua1 rigid tappíng ís enabled by setting bít 0 HRG of parameter No.
5203 to 1.
Cancellation of rígíd To cancel ńgíd mode, specífy G80 as same the normal ňgid tappinQ.
mode When the reset key ís pressed, rigíd mode ís canceled, but the canned cycle
ís not canceled.
When the ńgíd mode swítch ís to be set to off for rígíd mode cancellatíon
when bít 2 CRG of parameter No. 5200 ís set to 0 , the G80 command
ends after the rigíd mode swítch ís set to off.
Spíndle rotation The rotatíon dírectíon of the spíndle ís determined Ьy a specífíed tappíng
directíon cycle G code and the settíng of bít 1 HRM of parameter No. 5203. For
example, when the HRM parameter ís set to 0 in G84 mode, the spíndle
makes forward rotatíons as the tapping axís moves in the minus dírectíon.
When the tappíng axis moves in the plus dírectíon, the spíndle makes
reverse rotatíons.
Arbítrary tappíng axis By setting bít 0 FXY of parameter No. 5101 to 1, an arbitrary tappíng
axís can be selected. In thís case, specífy a G code for plane selection and
tappíng axís address when rigíd mode ís set in MDI mode.
Specifícatíon of M29 and In aп MDI program for settíng ńgid mode, G84 can be used as a rigíd
G84 ín the same block tappíng G code, or M29 and G84 can be specífıed іп the same block.
Specífícatíon of manual Set bit 0 HPF of parameter No. 7100 to 0 so that when manual handle
handle feed faster than feed is specífıed whích ís faster than the rapíd traverse rate, the handle
the rapíd traverse rate pulses beyond the rapid traverse rate are ígnored.
Límítations
Excessíve error check In manual ńgíd tappíng, only an excessive error during movement ís
checked.
Too1 axís dírectíon Too1 axís direction handle feed ís disabled.
handle feed
Extractíon overríde In manual rígíd tappíng, the extractíon overňde function ís dísabled, and
the use of an acceleratíon/deceleratíon time constant for extraction ís
disabled.
Number of repeats In MDI programining, never specífy KO and L0, whích are used to specífy
that the number of repeats ís 0 and to dísable the executíon of a G84 block.
If KO or LO is specifíed, ńgid mode cannot Ьe set.
Posítíoníng of the tool to When posítíoning the tool to a drillíng posítíon, select the X axis or
a dríllíng posítíon Y axís with the axis select swítch in handle mode. Never use the method
of posítíoníng to a dríllíng posítíon in MDI mode or MEM mode. The
method can operate the tappíng axís.
780
в sзsз4EN 02 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
The manual numeric command functíon allows data programmed
through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system ís MANUAL NUMERIC
ready for jog feed, a manual numeric comnıand can be executed. The
COMMAND
following eíght functíons are supported:
1 Posítioníng G00
2 Línear ínterpolation GO1
3 Automatíc reference posítíon return G28
4 2пd/3rd/4th reference posítíon return G30
5 M codes míscellaneous functíons
6 S codes spindle functíons
7 T codes tool functions
8 B codes second auxílíary functions
By settíng the followíng parameters, the commands for axia1 motion and
the M, S, T, and B functíons can be disabled:
1 Positíoning G00 : .................
2 Línear interpolatíon GO 1 : ........... ı Bít 0 JAXx of
3 Automatíc reference posítíon return G28 : ..
Γparameter No. 7010
4 2пd/3rd/4th reference posítíon return G30 : .
5 M codes míscellaneous functíons :
Bit 0 JMF of parameter No. 7002
6 S codes spíndle functíons : .... Bit 1 JSF of parameter No. 7002
7 T codes tool functíons : ....... Bít 2 JSF of parameter No. 7002
8 B codes second auxilíary functions :
Bít 3 JBF of parameter No. 7002
Procedure Manual numeríc command
Procedure 1 Press the jog switch one of the mode selection swítches .
2 Press functíon key aaoc
3 Press soft key [JOG] on the screen. The followíng manual numeńc
command screen is dísplayed.
Example 1: When the maximum number of controlled axes ís sύc
PROGRAM JOG 00010 N00020
G00 P ARSOLUTE DISTANCE TO GO
4 Enter the requíred commands by usíng address keys and numeric keys
on the MDI pane1, then press soft key [INPUT] or the 1NPU key to set the entered data.
PROGRAM JOG 00010 N00020
G00 P ABSOLUTE DISTANCE TO GO
The followíng data can be set:
1. G00: Posítioníng
2. G01: Línear interpolatíon
З. G28: Automatíc reference posítíon return
4. G30: 2nd/3rd/4th reference posítíon return
5. M codes: Míscellaneous functíons
6. S codes: Spíndle functíons
7. T codes: Too1 functions
8. B codes: Second auxílíary functíons
The set data ís maíntained even when the screen or mode ís changed.
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
NOTE
When an alarm state exísts, data cannot be set.
5 Press the cycle start switch on the machine operatπr s pane1 to start
command executíon. The status is indícated as MSTR. When the
9 screen ís beíng used, the actual feedrate and spíndle
speed SACT appear on the key ínput 1ine. The automatic operatíon
signal, STL, can be turned on Ьy settíng bit 2 JST of parameter No.
NOTE
1f the cycle start switch is pressed while an alarm state
exísts, a sTART 1MPOSSIBLE warning is generated, and
the entered data cannot be executed.
6 Upon the completíon of execution, the MSTR status indication is
cleared from the screen, and automatíc operation sígnal STL is turned
off. The set data is cleared entirely. G codes are set to G00 or G01
accordíng to the setting of bít 0 GO1 of parameter No. 3402.
Explanatíons
Posítioníng An amount of travel ís given as a numeríc va1ue, preceded by an address
such as X, Y, or Z. Thís ís always regarded as beíng an íncremental
cornmand, regardless of whether G90 0г G91 ís specifıed.
The too1 moves along each axís índependently at the rapid traverse rate.
Linear ínterpolation type posítíoníng where the tool path ís línear can
also Ьe performed by settíng bít 1 LRP of parameter No. 1401.
Manua1 rapid traverse selectíon switch
Off O n
Feedrate Jog feedrate for each axís Rapíd traverse rate for each
parameter axís
N o. 1420
Automatic Exponentíal acceleratíon/ Linear acceleration/
acceleration/ deceleration in jog feed for deceleration ín rapid traverse
deceleration each axis for each axís
parameter
Override Manua1 feed override Rapid traverse override
783
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
NOTE
When the manual rapid traverse seiection switch is set to
the OFF position, the jog feedrate for each axis ís clamped
such that a parameter set feedrate, determíned by bit 1
LRP of parameter No. 1401 as shown below, is not
exceeded.
LRP = 0: Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
parameter No. 1424
LRP = 1: Rapid traverse rate for each axis
parameter No. 1420
Linear ínterpolatíon An amount of travel is gíven as a numeric va1ue, preceded by an address
G01 such as X, Y, or Z. Thís ís always regarded as beíng an incremental
command, regardless of whether G90 or G91 ís specified. Axia1
movements are always performed іп incremental mode even during
scalíng or polar coordínate ínterpolatíon. In addítion, movement ís
always performed in feed per mínute mode regardless of the specífication
of G94 or G95.
Feedrate Dry run feedrate
parameter No. 1410
Automatic acceleration/deceleratíon Exponentíal acceleration/deceleration
parameter in cuttíng feed for each axis
No. 1622
Overríde Manua1 feed override
NOTE
Since the feedrate ís always set to the dry run feedrate,
regardless of the setting of the dry run switch, the feedrate
cannot be specified usíng F. The feedrate is clamped such
that the maximum cutting feedrate, set ín parameter No.
1422, is not exceeded.
Automatic reference The tool returns direct1y to the reference positíon wíthout passíng through
posítíon return G28 any íntermedíate poínts, regardless of the specífıed amount of travel. For
axes for which no move command ís specífıed, however, a return
operation ís not performed.
Feedrate Rapid traverse rate
parameter No. 1420
Automatic acceleration/deceleration Lìnear acceleration/deceleratíon in
parameter rapid traverse for each axis
No. 1620
Override Rapid traverse override
784
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference The tool returns directly to the 2пd, 3rd, or 4th reference posítion wíthout
posítion return G30 passíng through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified
amount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2, P3, or P4 in
address P. If address P ís omitted, a return to the second reference posítíon
ís performed.
Feedrate Rapid traverse rate for each axis
parameter No. 1420
Automatíc acceleration/deceleration Línear acceleration/deceleration in
parameter rapid traverse for each axis
No. 1620
Override Rapid traverse override
NOTE
The function for 3rd/4th reference posítion return ís optional.
When the option is not seiected
Return to the 2nd reference position is performed,
regardless of the specifícatíon of address P.
When the option is selected
1f neíther P2, P3, nor P4 ís specifíed in address P, a
sTART 1MPOSSIBLE warníng is generated, and the
entered data cannot be executed.
M codes míscellaneous After address M, specify a numeric va1ue of no more than the number of
functíons digits specifıed by parameter No. 3030. When M98 or M99 is specified,
ít ís executed but not output to the PMC.
NOTE
Neither subprogram ca11s nor custom macro ca11s can be
performed using M codes.
S codes spindle After address Ѕ. specify a numeríc va1ue of no more than the number of
funetions dígíts specifíed by parameter No. 3031.
NOTE
subprogram ca11s cannot be performed using S codes.
T codes tool functions After address T, specífy a numeric va1ue of no more than the number of
digíts specífied by parameter No. 3032.
NOTE
Subprogram ca11s cannot be performed using T codes.
785
3. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
B eodes seeond After address B, specífy a numeric va1ue of no more than the number of
auxíiíary functíons dígíts specífıed by parameter No. 3033.
NOTE
1 B codes can be renamed U, V, W, A, or C by setting
parameter No. 3460. 1f the new name is the same as an axis
name address, B is used. When B is used, and axis
name B exists, B ís used as the axís address. 1n this
case, no second auxiiíary function can be specified.
2 subprogram calis cannot be performed using B codes.
Data input 1 When addresses and numeńc values ofa command are typed, then soft
key [INPUT] ίs pressed, the entered data is set. In this case, the ínput
unít is either the least input íncrement or calculator type ínput format,
according to the setting of bít 0 DPI of parameter No. 3401.
The [ Ј key on the MDI pane1 can be used instead of soft key
[INPUT].
2 Commands can be typed successívely.
3 Key entry ís dísabled during execution.
If soft key [1NPUT] or the l и,Pu,ј key on the MDI panel ís pressed duńng
execution, an EXECUTION/MODE SWITCHING IN PROGRESs
warning ís output.
4 If input data contains an error, the following warnings may appear:
Warníng Descríption
A G code other than G00, G01, and G28 has been
entered.
FORMAT ERROR
An address other than those displayed on the manual
numeric command screen has been entered.
A value that exceeds the following limitations has been
entered.
Address G: 2 digits
TOO MANY D1G1TS
Address P: 1 dígit
Axis address: 8 dígíts
M, S, T, B: The parameter set number of digits
NOTE
Even when the memory protection key ís set, key input can
nevertheiess be performed.
786
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
Erasíng data 1 When soft key [CLEAR] ís pressed, followed by soft key [EXEC], a11
the set data ís cleared. In thís case, however, the G codes are set to G00
or GO1, dependíng oп the settíng of bit 0 GO1 of parameter No. 3402.
Data can also be cleared Ьy pressíng the RES т key on the MDI pane1.
2 If soft key [CLEAR] ís pressed duríng executíon, an
EXECUTION/MODE SWITCHING IN PROGRESs warning is
output.
Haltíng execution If one of the followíng occurs duńng executíon, executíon ís halted, and
the data ís cleared іп the same way as when soft key [CLEAR] ís pressed.
The remaíning distance to be traveled ís canceled.
1 When a feed hold ís applied
2 When the mode ís changed to other than jog feed mode
3 When an alarm ís generated
4 When a reset or emergency stop ís applied
The M, S, T, and B functíons гemaіn effectíve even upon the occurrence
of the above events, wíth the exceptíon of 4 .
Moda1 ínformatíon Modal G codes and addresses used in automatíc operation or MDI
operatíon are not affected by the execution of commands specífied using
the manual numeńc command functíon.
Jog feed When the tool is moved along an axís usíng a feed axis and
dírectíon selectíon switch on the manual numeric command screen, the
remaíning amount of travel ís always shown as O.
Límítatíons
Constant surface speed S codes cannot be specífıed in constant surface speed control mode.
control
M, S, T, and B functíons Whí1e automatíc operation ís halted, manual numeńc commands can be
executed. In the followíng cases, however, a START IMPOSSIBLE
warning ís output, and command execution is dísabled.
1 When an M, S, T, or B functíon ís already being executed, a mаnual
numeric commаnd contaíníng an M, S, T, or B functíon cannot be
executed.
2 When an M, S, T, or B functíon ís already beíng executed, and that
functíon alone ís specífíed oг a block specífying that functíon also
contains another functíon such as a move command or dwe11
functíon which has already been completed, a manual numeric
commаnd cannot Ьe executed.
Jog feed When a manual numeric command is specified while the tool is beíng
moved along an axis Ьy usíng a feed axís and dírection selectíon swítch,
the axíal movement ís ínterrupted, and the mаnual numeńc commаnd ís
execu[ed. Therefore, the tool cannot be moved along an axís Ьy usíng a
feed axís and dírection selectíon swítch during execution of a manual
numeric command.
Mírror ímage A mírror ímage cannot Ьe produced for the dírectíon of a specified axial
movement.
З. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
REF mode The manual numeric comınand screen appears even when the mode is
changed to REF mode. If, however, an attempt ís made to set and execute
data, a WRONG MODE warning ís output and the attempt faíls.
lndexing of the index Commands cannot be specífıed for an axís along which operatíon ís beíng
tabie and chopping performed duńng índexing or choppíng.
If such an axís ís specified for executíon, a START IMPOSSIBLE
warníng ís output.
OPERATION B-63534EN 02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Programmed operatíon of a CNC machíne tool ís referred to as automatíc
operation.
This chapter explains the following types of automatíc operation:
MEMORY OPERATION
Operation by executíng a program regístered in CNC memory
MDIOPERATION
Operation by executíng a program entered from the MDI panel
DNC OPERATION
Operatíon whíle reading a program from an ínput/output device
SIMULTANEOUS 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Program execution and memory regístration can be performed
simultaneously.
PROGRAM RESTART
Restartíng a program for automatic operatíon from an íntermedíate
point
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
Scheduled operatíon Ьy executíng programs fıles registered in an
external input/output device Hаndy File, Floppy Cassette, or FA Card
SUBPROGRAM CALL FUNCTION
Function for calling and executing subprograms fıles regístered ín аn
external input/output device Hаndy Fí1e, Floppy Cassette, or FA
Card duríng memory operatíon
MANUAL HANDLE 1NTERRUPTION
Function for performíng mаnual feed during movement executed by
automatic operatíon
MIRROR 1MAGE
Functíon for enabling mírror ímage movement along an axis duńng
automatíc operatíon
TOOL WITHDRAWAL AND RETURN
Function for withdrawing the tool from a workpíece and for returning
the tool to restart machíníng
RETRACE FUNCTION
Function for movíng the tool ín the reverse directíon to retrace the path
followed, and for movíng the tool in the forward dírection agaín along
the retraced path.
MANUAL 1NTERVENTION AND RETURN
Functíon restarting automatíc operatíon by returníng the tool to the
position where manual interventíon was started duńng automatíc
operatíon
RETREAT AND RETRY FUNCTIONS
Thís funcıion cnablcs machiníng to be restarted from the start bloek.
MEMORY CARD BASED DNC OPERATION
Automatic operatíon by a program wńtten to a memory card
789
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Programs are registered in memory іп advance. When one of these
programs is selected and the cycle start swítch on the machíne operator s
MEMORY
panel ís pressed, automatíc operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes
OPERATION on.
When the feed hold swítch on the machine operator s panel ís pressed
duríng automatíc operation, automatíc operation ís stopped temporarily.
When the cycle start swítch ís pressed agaín, automatic operatíon is
restarted.
When the Rεвεт key on the MDI pane1 is pressed, automatíc operation
termínates and the reset state is entered.
For the two-path control, the programs for the two tool posts can be
executed símultaneously so the two tool posts can operate independently
at the same time.
The followíng procedure is gíven as an example. For actual operation,
refer to the manual supplíed by the machíne tool buílder.
Procedure for Memory Operatíon
Procedure 1 Press the MEMORY mode selectíon swítch.
2 Select a program from the regístered programs. To do thís, follow the
steps below.
2-1 Press PROG to dísplay the program screen.
2-2 Press address OO
2-3 Enter a program number usíng the numeríc keys.
2-4 Press the [O SRH] soft key.
3 For the two-path control, select the tool post to be operated wíth the
tool post selectíon switch on the machine operator s pаne1.
4 Press the cycle start switch on the machíne operator s panel.
Automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes on. When
automatíc operatíon terminates, the cycle start LED goes off.
5 To stop or cancel memory operatíon mídway through, follow the
steps below.
a. Stopping memoгу operation
Press the feed hold swítch on the machine operator s pаne1. The
feed hold LED goes on and the cycle start LED goes off. The
machine responds as follows:
i When the machíne was movíng, feed operatíon decelerates
and stops.
íi When dwe11 was being performed, dwe11 ís stopped.
iíi When M, S, or T was being executed, the operation is stopped
after M, S, or T is fmished.
When the cycle start swítch on the machine operator s pane1 ís
pressed whíle the feed hold LED ís on, machine operation restarts.
790
OPERATION
B-6353дEN 02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
b. Terminating memory operatíon
Press the key on the MDI pane1.
Automatíc operatíon is terminated and the reset state is entered.
When a reset ís applied during movement, movement decelerates
then stops.
Explanation
Memory operatíon After memory operation ís started, the following are executed:
1 A one block command ís read from the specífıed program.
2 The block command ís decoded.
3 The command executíon is started.
4 The command in the next block ís read.
5 Buffering ís executed. That ís, the command is decoded to a11ow
ímmedíate executíon.
6 Immedíately after the preceding block ís executed, executíon of the
next block can be started. Thís ís because buffering has been
executed.
7 Hereafteг memory operatíon can be executed by repeatíng the
steps 4
stoppíng and terminatíng Memory operatíon caп Ьe stopped usíng one of two methods: Specífy a
memory operation stop command, or press a key on the machíne operator s pane1.
The stop commands include M00 program stop , M01 optional
stop , and M02 and M30 program end .
There are two keys to stop memory operation: The feed hold key
and reset key.
Program stop M00 Memory operation is stopped after a block containíng M00 ís executed.
When the program ís stopped, a11 exísting modal ínformatíon remaíns
unchanged as in single block operatíon. The memory operation can Ьe
restarted by pressing the cycle start button. Operatíon may vary
depending on the machine tool buílder. Refer to the mаnual supplíed by
the machine tool builder.
Optíonal stop M01 Símílarly to M00, memory operation is stopped after a block contaíning
M01 ís executed. Thís code is on1y effectíve when the Optional 5top
swítch on the machíne operator s pаne1 is set to ON. Operatíon may vary
dependíng oп the machine tool buílder. Refer to the mаnual supplied by
the machíne tool buílder.
Program end When M02 or M30 specífíed at the end of the maín program is read,
M02, M30 memorу operatíon is terminated and the reset state is entered.
In some machínes, M30 returns control to the top of the program. For
detaíls, refer to the mаnual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Feed hold When Feed Ho1d button on the operator s panel ís pressed during memory
operatíon, the tool decelerates to a stop at a tíme.
Reset Automatic operatíon can be stopped and the system can be made to the
reset state by usíng key on the MDI panel or external reset sígnal.
When reset operatíon is applied to the system during a tool moving status,
the motíon is slowed down then stops.
791
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Optional biock skíp When the optíonal block skip switch on the machíne operator s pane1 ís
tumed on, blocks containing a slash / are ígnored..
Cyc1e start for the For the two-path control, a cycle start switch is províded for each tool
two-path control post. Thís allows the operator to activate a single tool posts to operate
them at the same tíme in memory operatíon oг MDI operatíon. In general,
select the tool post to be operated wíth the tool post selectíon switch on
the machíne operator s panel and then press the cycle start button to
actívate the selected tool post. The procedure may vary wíth the machíne
tool buílder.. Refer to the appropríate manual íssued by the machine tool
buílder.
Callíng a subprogram A fıle subprogram in an external input/output device such as a Floppy
stored ín an external Cassette caп be called and executed during memory operatíon. For
ínput/output device details, see Sectíon
792
OPERATION 6-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
In the MD1 mode, a program consisting of up to 101ínes can Ьe created
in the same format as normal programs and executed from the MDI pane1.
MD1 OPERATION
MDI operatíon ís used for símple test operatíons.
The following procedure ís gíven as an example. For actual operatíon,
refer to the manual supplíed by the machine tool builder.
Procedure for MD1 Operatíon
Procedure 1 Press the MD1 mode selectíon swítch.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích a program ís to
Ьe created with the tool post selection switch. Create a separate
program for each tool post.
2 Press the јРяоGј function key on the MDI panel to select the program
screen. The followíng screen appears:
PROGRAM MD1 0010 00002
00000;
G00 G90 G94 G40 G80 G50 G54 G69
G17 G22 G21 G49 G98 G67 G64 G15
B HM
T D
F S
>
M D1 20:40:05
PRGRM в CURRNT NEXT OPRT ,
\ J
Program number 00000 ís entered automatically.
3 Prepare a program co be executed by an operatíon símílar to normal
program edíting. M99 specífíed in the last block can return control to
the begínníng of the program after operatíon ends. Word insertion,
modífícatíon, deletíon, word search, address search, and program
seaτch аre available for programs created in the MDI mode. For
program editíng, see III-9.
4 To entirely erase a program created in MDI mode,use one of the
following methods:
a. Enter address O then press the key on the MDI pаne1.
b. Alternatívely, press the key. In thís case, set bit 7 of
parameter MCL No. 3203 to 1 in adуаnce.
793
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-ô3534EN/02
5 To execu[e a program, set the cursor on the head of the program. Start
from an íntennedíate point is possíble. Push Cyc1e start button on
the operator s pane1. By this action, the prepared program wi11 start.
For the two path control, select the tool post to be operated wíth the
tool post selectíon switch on the machíne operator s pane1
beforehand. When the program end M02, M30 or ER ís
executed, the prepared program wí11 Ьe automatícally erased and the
operatíon wí11 end.
By command of M99, control returns to the head of the prepared
program.

PROGRAM MD1 00001 N00003
G00 Y200. ;
M03 ;
G01 F500 ;
M93 P9010 ;
G00 ;
00
G00 G90 G94 G40 G80 G50 G54 G69
G17 G22 G21 G49 G98 G67 G64 G15
B HM
T D
F S
>
MD1 12:42:39
PRGRM , в , CURRNT, NEXT OPRT ,
\ J
6 To stop or terminate MDI operatíon in mídway through, follow the
steps below.
a. Stopping MD1 operation
Press the feed hold swítch on the machine operator s pаne1. The
feed hold LED goes on and the cycle start LED goes off. The
machíne responds as follows:
i When the machíne was moving, feed operatíon decelerates
and stops.
ii When dwe11 was being performed, dwe11 is stopped.
ííi When M, S, oг T was beíng executed, the operation ís stopped
after M, S, oг T ís fíníshed.
When the cycle start swítch on the machíne operator s pаne1 ís
pressed, machíne operatíon restarts.
b. Terminatíng MD1 operation
і І
Press the јяЕѕЕтј key on the MDI pаne1.
Automatíc operation ís tenmínated and the reset state ís entered.
When a reset ís applied during movement, movement decelerates
then stops.
794
Б-6з53aEN o2 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Explanatíon The prevíous explanatíon of how to execute and stop memory operation
also applies to MDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30 does
not return control to the beginníng of the program M99 peıforms this
functíon .
Erasíng the program Programs prepared in the MD1 mode wi11 be erased in the following cases:
In MDI operatíon, íf M02, M30 or ER is executed.
If bít 6 MER of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, however, the
program ís erased when executíon of the last block of the program
ís completed by síngle-block operatíon.
In MEMORY mode, íf inemory operation is performed.
ln ED1T mode, íf any edítíng ís performed.
Background edíting ís performed.
When the [Ђ] and keys are pressed.
Upon reset when bít 7 MCL of parameter No. 3203 ís set to 1
Restart After the editing operation duríng the stop of MDI operation was done,
operatíon starts from the current cursor posítíon.
Edíting a program duríng A program can be edíted duríng MDI operation. The edíting of a program,
MD1 operation however, ís disabled until the CNC ís reset, when bít 5 MIE of parameter
No. 3203 is set accordíngly.
Límítatíons
Program regístration Programs created in MDI mode cannot Ьe registered.
Number of lines in a A program can have as many línes as can fıt on one page of the screen.
program A program consisting of up to six lines can Ьe created. When parameter
MDL No. 3107 7 ís set to 0 to specífy a mode that suppresses the
dísplay of contínuous-state ínformatíon, a program of up to 101ínes can
be created.
If the created program exceeds the specífíed number of línes, ER ís
deleted prevents ínsertíon and modifıcation .
subprogram nestíng Ca11s to subprograms M98 can be specífıed іп a program created in the
MDI mode. Thís means that a program registered ín memorу caл be
called and executed duríng MDI operatíon. In addítíon to the maín
program executed by automatic operatíon, up to two 1evels of subprogram
nestíng are allowed when the custom macro optíon is provided, up to four
1evels are allowed .
Main program Subprogram Subprogram
00000; O 1000; 02000;
/ /
M98P 1000; M98P 2000; M98P 3000; \\Џ
ы
M30; M99; M99;
One-1eve1 nesting Two-1eve1 nesting
Fig. a Nesting Leve1 of subprograms Ca11ed from the MD1 Program
795
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Macro ca11 When the custom macro option is províded, macro programs can also Ьe
created, called, and executed in the MD1 mode. However, macro ca11
commands cannot be executed when the mode is changed to MD1 mode
after memory operation ís stopped during executíon of a subprogram.
Memory area When a program ís created in the MD1 mode, an empty area іп program
memory ís used. If program memory ís fu11, no programs can be created
in the MD1 ітіode.
796
B s353ıEгv 02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
By actívatíng automatic operatíon during the DNC operatíon mode
RMT , it ís possíble to perform machining DNC operation whíle a DNC OPERATION
program ís being read in vía reader/puncher ínterface, or remote buffer.
If the floppy cassette dírectory dísplay optíon ís avaílable, ít ís possíble
to select fıles programs saved in an external ínputloutput unít of a floppy
format Handy Fí1e, Floppy Cassettes, or FA card and specífy schedule
the sequence and frequency of executíon for automatíc operatíon.
see
To use the DNC operatíon functíon, it ís necessary to set the parameters
related to the reader/punch interface, and remote buffer in advance. 1
DNC OPERATION
Procedure 1 Search for the program fıle to be executed.
2 Press the REMOTE swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 to set
RMT mode, then press the cycle start switch. The selected fıle ís
executed. For detaíls of the use of the REMOTE switch, refer to the
relevant manual supplíed by the machine tool builder.
Program check screen
PROGRAM CHECK 00001 N00020 Seven soft key type
LCD в -
N030 ;
N050 ;
RELATIVE D1ST TO GO G00 G17 G90
X X G22 G94 G21
Y Y G41 G49 G80
Z Z G98 G50 G67
A A B
C C H M
D M
F S M
ACT. F SACT REPEAт
RMT STRT MTN 21:20:05
[ AвS ] ] [ ] [ ] [ OPRт ] -/,
797
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-s3534EN/02
Program screen
PROGRAM 00001 N00020 Seven soft key type LCD
в
N 030 :
N040 XØ.O :
N050 ;
N060 ;
N070 ;
N080 ;
N090 ;
N100 ;
N110 x ;
N 120 ;
RMT STRT MTN 21:20:05
[ І;Ге1;іі ] [ CHECK ] [ ] [ ] [ ιOPRт ј,,І
Program screen
/ \
Twelve soft key type LCD PROGRAг., F0001 N00020
N180
N030 ; N1θ0
N040 ; N200
N050 ; N210
NO60 : N220
N070 : N230 ;
NO80 N240 M02 ;
N090 :
N100
N110 ;
N120 ;
N130 ;
N 140 ;
N150 :
N 160 ;
N 170 ;
RMT STRT MTN ^ 22:23:24
CHE
` І і І І І і і ј І\ I 1 T
/
Duńng DNC operation, the program currently beíng executed ís
displayed on the program check screen and program screen.
The number of displayed program blocks depends on the program beíng
executed.
Aпy comment enclosed between a control-out mark and control-in
mark wíthín a block ís also dísplayed.
Explanatíons
Duňng DNC operatíon, programs stored in memory caп Ьe called.
Duńng DNC operatíon, macro programs stored in memory can be
called.
- 798 -
OPERATION 6-63534EN 02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Límitatíons
Limít on number of In program dísplay, no more than 256 characters can be displayed.
characters Accordíngly, character display may be truncated іп the middle of a block.
M198 command for In DNC operatíon, M198 cannot be executed. If M198 ís executed, P/S
callíng a program from alarm No. 210 ís íssued.
wíthín an external
input/output unit
Custom macro In DNC operatíon, custom macros can be specífíed, but no repeat
ínstructíon and branch instructíon can be programmed. If a repeat
instructíon or branch instructíon ís executed, P/5 alarm No. 123 ís íssued.
When reserved words such as IF, WHILE, COS, and NE used wíth
custom macros in DNC operatíon are dísplayed duríng program dísplay,
a blank ís inserted between adjacent characters.
Example
[During DNC operatíon]
102=SIN[ 100] ; > 102 = S I N[ 100] ;
IF[ 100NE0]GOTO5 ; > I F[ 100NE0] G O T O 5;
M99 When control ís returned from a subprogram or macro program to the
calling program duríng DNC operatíon, it becomes ímpossíble to use a
return command M99P for whích a sequence number ís specífied.
A1arm
Number Message Contents
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When enterıng dala in the memory Ьy
using Reader, Puncher interface, the
ready signal DR of reader / puncher
was turned off.
Power supply of 1/0 unit is off or cable ís
not connected or a is defective.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used during
COMMAND 1N DNC DNC operation.
Modify the program.
210 CAN NOT COMAND Or M198 is executed in the DNC ope5a-
M198/M199 tion. Modify the program.
799
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Whí1e an automatíon operatíon ís beíng performed, a program input from
an 1/0 device connected to the reader/punch ínterface caп Ьe executed and SIMULTANEOUS
output through the reader/punch interface at the same tíme.
1NPUT/OUTPUT
Símu[taneous lnputl0utput
Procedure
Basíc símultaneous 1 Search for the program fíle to be output and executed.
ínput procedure
2 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator s pane1 to set
RMT mode. For detaíls of the use of the REMOTE swítch, refer to the
relevant manual supplíed by the machíne tool builder.
3 Set the simultaneous output operatíon mode select sígnal to 1.
4 Press the cycle start swítch.
5 Program output and executíon ís performed on a block by block
basís.
Program check screen PROGRAM CHECK F0001 N00100
N200 G01 X50. Y50. ;
N300 G00 XO Y0;
RELATIVE D1ST TO GO G00 G17 G90
X X G22 G94 G21
Y Y G40 G49 G80
Z Z G98 G50 G67
A A B
C C H M
D M
F S M
SACT REPEAT
RMT STRT MTN 21:20:05
Aвs l [ ] [ ] [ ] [ OPRT ] Дr.
When a program ís displayed, three blocks are dísplayed: the block
currently beíng executed and the next two to be executed. When the síngle
block functíon ís selected, on1y the block currently beíng executed is
dísplayed.
Any comment enclosed between a control out mark and control ín
mark Q wíthín a block ís not dísplayed.
Basic simultaneous output 1 Search for the program fíle to be output аnd executed.
procedure
2 Press the REMOTE swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 to set
RMT mode. For detaíls of the use of the REMOTE swítch, refer to the
relevant manual supplied by the machíne tool builder.
3 Set the símultaneous output operatíon mode select signal to 1.
4 Press the cycle start swítch.
5 Program output аnd executíon is performed on a block by block
basís.
800
OPERATION 6-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Límítatíons
M198 command for M 198 cannot be executed ín the ínput, output and run símultaneous mode.
calling a program from An attempt to do so results in alarm No. 210.
wíthín an external
ínput/output unit
Macro control command A macro control command cannot be executed in the input, output and run
símultaneous mode. Aп attempt to do so results in P/S alarm No. 123.
A1arm If an a]arın condítion occurs duńng the ínput, output and run símultaneous
mode, a block being processed when the alarm condition occurs and a11
blocks before that are ínput or output.
Fi1e name In the output and run simultaneous mode, if a device used is a floppy disk
drive or FA card, the fíle name is the executíon program number.
Sub program ca11 When a program is being executed in the output and run simultaneous
mode, if a subprogram is called, on1y the main program is output.
A1arm
Number Message Contents
CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command ís used during
123 COMMAND 1N DNC DNC operation.
Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMAND M198 or M199 is executed in the DNC
210 M198/M199 operation. M198 is executed in the
DNC operatíon. Modify the program.
DNC OP. NOT AL- lnput and output are executed at a time
222 LOWED 1N BG. ED1T in the background edition.
Execute a correct operatíon.
801
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Thís function specífıes sequence No. of a block to be restarted when a tool
PROGRAM RESTART is broken down or when ít is desired to restart machiníng operation after
a day off, and restarts the machíníng operation from that block. It can also
be used as a high speed program check function.
There are two restart methods: the P type method and Q type method.
Operation can be restarted anywhere. This restart method ís
P TYPE used when operatíon is stopped because of a broken too1.
Program start point machíníng start poínt
/
/
/
/
Return operation
/
/
/
Restart positio
Before operation can be restarted, the machine must be moved
O TYPE to the programmed start point machining start point
Return operation
\
Program start poínt
machining start point \
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
Restart position
802
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Procedure for Program Restart by specífyíng a Sequence Number
Procedure 1
[PTYPE] 1 Retract the tool and replace ít wíth a new one. When necessary,
change the offset. Go to step 2.
[QTYPE] 1 When power ís turned ON or emergency stop ís released, perform a11
necessary operatíons at that tíme, íncludíng the reference posítíon
return.
2 Move the machine manually to the program starting poínt machining
start poínt , and keep the modal data and coordínate system in the
same condítíons as at the machiníng start.
3 If necessary, modífy the offset amount.
Procedure 2
[C O M M O N TO P TY P E/ 1 Turn the program restart swítch on the machíne operator s pаne1 ON.
Q TYPE] r
2 Press PROG key to display the desíred program.
3 Find the program head.
[Q TYPE] 4 Enter the sequence number of the block to be restarted, then press th
[P TYPE] or [О TYPE] soft key.
N :ю000 oL г
[P TYPE]
Sequencenumber
[Q TYPE]
If the same sequence number appears more than once, the location of
N 00000
oг the target block must be specifıed. Specify a frequency and a
sequence number. 1 [P TYPE]
Frequency
sequencenumber
803
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
5 The sequence number ís searched for, and the program restart screen
appears on the LCD dísplay.
PROGRAM RESTART 00002 N01000
DESTINATION M 1 2
X 57. 096 1 2
Y 56. 877 1 2
1 2
1 2
1,....,..
DISTANCE TO GO
1 X 1. 459 T
2 Y 10. 309
3 Z 7. 320 S
S 0 T0000
MEM .. <, _..... 10:10:40
[І:
, OPRT ,
J
DESTINATION shows the positíon at whích machiníng ís to restart.
DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from the current tool posítíon
to the position where machiníng ís to restart. A number to the left of
each axis name indicates the order of axes determined by parameter
settíng along whích the tool moves to the restart posítion.
The coordínates and amount of travel for restarting the program can
be dísplayed for up to fíve axes. If your system supports six or more
axes, pressíng the [RSTR] soft key agaín displays the data for the
síxth and subsequent axes. The program restart screen dísplays on1y
the data for CNC controlled axes.
M: Fourteen most recently specífíed M codes
T: Two most recently specífıed T codes
S: Most recently specifıed S code
B: Most recently specífıed B code
Codes are dísplayed in the order ín whích they are specífied. A11
codes are cleared by a program restart command or cycle start in the
reset state.
6 Turn the program re start swítch OFF. At this time, the fıgure at the
left side of axis name DISTANCE TO GO blínks.
7 Check the screen for the M, 5, T, and B codes to be executed. If they
are found, enter the MD1 mode, then execute the M, S, T, and B
functions. After executíon, restore the previous mode.
These codes are not dísplayed on the program restart screen.
8 Check that the distance índícated under DISTANCE TO GO ís correct.
A1so check whether there ís the possibílíty that the tool míght hít a
workpiece or other objects when ít moves to the machiníng restart
positíon. If such a possíbílíty exists, move the tool manually to a
position from which the tool can move to the machíning restart
position wíthout encounteńng any obstacles.
9 Press the cycle start button. The tool moves to the machíning restart
positíon at the dry run feedrate sequentíally along axes in the order
specifıed Ьy parameter settíngs No. 7310 . Machíning ís then
restarted.
8Ø
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Procedure for Program Restart by Specífyíng a B1ock Number
Procedure 1
[PTYPE] 1 Retract the tool and гeplace ít wíth a new one. When necessary,
change the offset. Go to step 2.
[QTYPE] 1 When power ís turned ON or emergency stop is released, perform a11
necessary operatíons at that tíme, íncludíng the reference posítíon
return.
2 Move the machíne manually to the program startíng poínt machíning
start point , and keep the modal data and coordinate system in the
same condítíons as ac the machiníng start.
3 If necessary, modify the offset amount.
Procedure 2
[COM MON TO P TYPE / 1 Turn the program restart swítch on the machíne operator s paпe1 ON.
Q TYPE] r
2 Press PROG key co dísplay the desired program.
3 Fínd the program head. Press function RESET key.
[Q TYPE] 4 Enter the number of the block to be restarted then press the [P TYPE]
oг [O TYPE] soft key. The block number cannot exceed eíght dígíts. B or
[P TYPE]
5 The block number ís searched for, and the program restart screen
appears on the CRT dísplay. L__ B1ock number
PROGRAM RESTART 00002 N01000
DESTINATION M 1 2
X 57. 096 1 2
Y 56. 877 1 2
1 2
1 2
1.....,..
DISTANCE TO GO
X 1. 459
T Y 10. 309
Z 7. 320 S
S 0 T0000
MEM 10:10:40
Ѕј 1 OPRT Ѕ
\
DESTINATION shows the posítíon at which machíning ís to restart.
D 1 STANC E TO GO shows the dístance from the current tool posítíon
to the posítíon where machíníng is to restart. A number to the left of
each axís naıne índícates the order of axes determíned by parameter
settíng along whích the tool moves to the restart posítíon.
805
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
The coordinates and amount of travel for restartíng the program can
be displayed for up to fíve axes. If your system supports síx or more
axes, pressing the [RSTR] soft key agaín dísplays the data for the
sixth and subsequent axes. The program restart screen dísplays on1y
the data for CNC controlled axes.
M: Fourteen most recently specífied M codes
T: Two most recently specífıed T codes
S: Most recently specífıed S code
B: Most recently specífıed B code
Codes are dísplayed in the order ín which they are specífied. A11
codes are cleaгed Ьy a program restart command or cycle start in the
reset state.
6 Turn the program re start swítch OFF. At thís tíme, the fıgure at the
1eft síde of axís name DISTANCE TO GO blínks.
7 Check the screen for the M, s, T, and B codes to be executed. If they
are found, enter the MD1 mode, then execute the M, S, T, and B
functions. After execution, restore the previous mode.
These codes are not dísplayed on the program restart screen.
8 Check that the dístance indícated under DISTANCE TO GO ís coırect.
A1so check whether there ís the possíbílíty that the tool might hit a
workpíece or other objects when it moves to the machíníng restart
positíon. If such a possíbílíty exísts, move the tool mаnually to a
posítíon from whích the tool can move to the machining restart
position wíthout encounteńng any obstacles.
9 Press the cycle start button. The tool moves to the machíníng restart
positíon a[ the dry run feedrate sequentíally along axes ín the order
specifıed Ьy parameter settíngs No. 7310 . Machíníng is then
restarted.
Explanatíons
B1ock number When the CNC is stopped, the number of executed blocks ís dísplayed on
the program screen or program restart screen. The operator can specify
the number of the block from which the program ís to be restarted, by
referencíng the number dísplayed on the CRT. The displayed number
indicates the number of the block that was executed most recently. For
example, to restart the program from the block at whích executíon
stopped, specify the dísplayed number, plus one.
The number of blocks ís counted from the start of machiníng, assuming
one NC line of a CNC program to be one block.
< Example 1 >
CNC Program Number of blocks
O 0001 ; 1
G90 G92 XO YO ZO ; 2
G01 X100. F100 ; 3
G03 X01 -50. F50 ; 4
M30 ; 5
806
B-63534EN02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
< Example 2 >
CNC Program Number of blocks
00001 ; 1
G90 G92 XO YO ZO ; 2
G90 G00 Z100. ; 3
G81 X100. Y0. Z-120. R-80. F50. ; 4
1= 1; 4
2= 2 ; 4
3= 3 ; 4
G00 XO ZO ; 5
M30 ; 6
Macгo statements are not counted as blocks.
Storíng / clearing the The block number is held in memory whíle no power is supplied. The
block number number can Ьe cleazed Ьy cycle start in the reset state.
B1ock number when a The program screen usually displays the number of the block currently
program is halted or beíng executed. When the executíon of a block ís completed, the CNC
stopped ís reset, or the program ís executed іп síngle block stop mode, the
program screen dísplays the number of the program that was executed
most recently.
When a CNC program ís halted or stopped by feed ho1d, reset, or
single block stop, the followíng block numbers are dísplayed:
Feed hold : B1ock beíng executed
Reset : B1ock executed most recently
Síngle block stop : B1ock executed most recently
For example, when the CNC ís reset duńng the executíon of block 10, the
dísplayed block number changes from 10 to 9.
MD1 interventíon When MDI interventíon ís performed whíle the program is stopped by
single blосk stop, the CNC commands used for ínterventíon are not
counted as a block.
B1ock number exceedíng When the blосk number dísplayed on the program screen exceeds eíght
eíght digíts dígíts, the block number ís reset to 0 and counting contínues.
Límítatíons
P-type restart Under any of the followíng condítíons, P type restart cannot be
performed:
When automatíc operatíon has not been performed sínce the power
was turned oп
When automatíc operatíon has not been performed sínce an
emergency stop was released
When automatíc operation has not been perfornıed sínce the
coordinate system was changed or shifted change in aп external
offset from the workpíece reference point
Restart block The Ь1осk to be restarted need not be the block whích was ínterrupted;
operation caп restart wíth any block. When P type restart is performed,
the restart block must use the same coordinate system as when operation
was internıpted.
807
1
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Síngle block When single block operatíon ís ON during movement to the restart
positíon, operatíon stops every time the tool completes movement along
an axís. When operatíon ís stopped ín the single block mode, MDI
ínterventíon cannot be performed.
Manual ínterventíon Duríng movement to the restart posítíon, manual ínterventíon can be used
to perform a return operatíon for an axís íf ít has not yet been performed
for the axís. A return operatíon cannot be done further on axes for whích
a return has already been comple[ed.
Reset Never reset during the time from the start of a search at restart until
machíníng is restarted. Otherwíse, restart must be performed agaín from
the first step.
Manual absolute Reáardless of whether machiníng has started or not, manua1 operation
must be performed when the manual absolute mode ís on.
Reference posítíon return If no absolute position detector absolute pulse coder is provided. Ьe
sure to perform reference position return after turníng on the power and
before performíng restart.
A1aгm
A1aгm No. Contents
071 The specífied block number for restartíng the program is not
found.
094 After interruption, a coordínate system was set, then P type
restart was specified.
095 After interruption, the coordinate system shift was changed,
then P type restart was specífied.
096 After interruption, the coordínate system was changed, then
P type restart was specifíed.
When automatic operation has not been performed since
097 the power was turned on, emergency stop was released, or
P/S a1aгm 094 to 097 was reset, P type restart was speci-
fied.
After the power was turned on, restart operation was per-
098 formed without reference positíon return, but a G28 com-
mand was found ín the program.
099 A move command was specífied from the MD1 panel duríng
a restart operatíon.
5020 An erroneous parameter was specìfifed for restarting a pro-
gram.
WARNING
As a ru1e, the tool cannot be returned to a correct positíon under the following conditions.
Special caгe must be taken ín the followíng cases since none of them cause an a1arm:
Manual operation is performed when the manual absolute mode ís OFF.
Manual operatíon ís performed when the machíne is locked.
When the mirror image is used.
When manual operation is performed in the course of axis movementfor returning operation.
When the program restart is commanded for a block between the block for skip cutting and
subsequent absolute command block.
808
OPERATION B-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The schedule function allows the operator to select fıles programs
SCHEDULING regístered on a floppy dísk іп an external input/output devíce Handy
FUNCTION Fi1e, Floppy Cassette, oг FA Card and specífy the execution order and
number of repetítions schedulíng for performing automatíc operatíon.
It ís also possíble to select on1y one fıle from the fıles іп the external
ínput/output device and execute ít during automatíc operatíon.
This functíon ís effectíve, when the floppy cassette directory dísplay
optíon ís avaírable and the floppy cassette ís selected as the valíd I/O
devíce.
F1LE DIRECTORY
F1LE NO. F1LE NAME
0001 00010
0002 00020
0003 00030
0004 00040
List of files in an external input/output device
j Set file number and
ORDER F1LE NO REPET1T10N
01 0002 2
02 0003 1
03 0004 3
04 0001 2
Scheduling screen
Executing automatic operation
809
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Procedure for Schedulíng Function
Procedure
Procedure for executing 1 Press the MEMORY swítch on the machíne operator s panel, then
one file press the PROG functíon key on the MDI panel.
2 Press the ňghtmost soft key contínuous menu key , then press the
[FL. SDL] soft key. A líst of files registered in the Floppy Cassette is
dísplayed on screen No. 1. To display more files that are not
dísplayed on this screen, press the page key on the MDI pane1. Fí1es
regístered in the Floppy Cassette can also be dísplayed successívely.
F1LE DIRECTORY 00001 N00000
CURRENT SELECTED : SCHEDULE
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER
0002 ALL PROGRAM
0003 00001
0004 00002
0005 00010
0006 00020
0007 00040
0008 00050
MEM _ 19:14:47
PRGRM I. uii SCHDUL OPRT , ı

Screen
3 Press the [ OPRT ] and [SELECT] soft keys to display SELECT
FILE NO. on screen No. 2 . Enter a fíle number, then press the [F
SET] and [EXEC] soft keys. The file for the entered fi1e number ís
selected, and the fıle пame ís indicated after CURRENT
SELECTED: .
/
F1LE DIRECTORY 00001 N00000
CURRENT SELECTED:00040
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER
0002 ALL PROGRAM
0003 00001
0004 00002
0005 00010
0006 00020
0007 00040
0008 00050
SELECT F1LE N0.=7
>_
MEM 19:17:10
F SET І EXEC 1

Screen
810
OPERATION B-63534E N/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
4 Press the REMOTE switch on the machíne operator s pane1 to enter
the RMT mode, then press the cycle start swítch. The selected fi1e is
executed. For detaíls oп the REMOTE switch, refer to the manual
supplíed by the machíne tool buílder. The selected fıle number ís
indicated at the upper right corner of the screen as an F number
ínstead of an O number .
F1LE DIRECTORY F0007 N00000
CURRENT SELECTED:00040
RMT ^ 13 : 27 : 54
PRGRM Lĺ1åI SCHDUL OPRT
і Ѕ
Screen
Procedure for executíng 1 Display the líst of files regístered in the Floppy Cassette. The dísplay
the schedulíng functíon procedure ís the same as in steps 1 and 2 for executíng one fí1e.
2 Oп screen No. 2, press the [ OPRT ] and [SELECT] soft kevs to
display SELECT F1LE NO.
3 Enter fi1e number 0, and press the [F SET], aіd [EXEC] soft keys.
SCHEDULE is indícated after CURRENT SELECTED.
4 Press the leftmost soft key return menu key and the [SCHDUL] soft
key. Screen No. 4 appears.
F1LE DIRECTORY F0000 N02000
ORDER F1LE NO.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
>
MEM ..,. . . ,,. 22:07:00
PRGRM D1R І.іІ11,ЈІ OPRT

Screen
SI1
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Move the cursor and enter the fıle numbers and number of repetítíons
ín the order ín which to execute the fıles. At thís time, the current
number of repetítíons ís 0.
5 Press the REMOTE swítch on the machíne operator s panel to enter
the RMT mode, then press the start switch. The fıles are executed in
the specífıed order. When a fıle ís beíng executed, the cursor ís
positíoned at the number of that fi1e.
The current number of repetitions ís íncreased when M02
or M30 ís executed in the program beíng run. -
F1LE DIRECTORY 00000 N02000
ORDER F1LE NO.
01 5 5
02 0003 23 23
03 0004 9999 156
04 0005 LOOP 0
05
06
07
08
09
10
RMT - .- 10:10:-λ0
Г PRGRM , D1R Е ,іі1
OPRT ?.

Screen
Explanatíons
Specífying no file If no fıle number ís specífıed on screen No. 4 the fıle number fıeld ís left
number blank , program executíon ís stopped at that poínt. To leave the fíle
number fıeld blank, press numeric key l p ј then 1NPU
Endless repetítion If a negatíve va1ue ís set as the number of repetítíons, ís
dísplayed, and the fıle ís repeated índefınítely.
C1ear When the [ OPRT ]. [CLEAR], and [EXEC] soft keys are pressed on
screen No. 4, a11 data is cleared. However, these keys do not functíon
whíle a fıle ís beíng executed.
Return to the program When the soft key [PRGRM] is pressed on screen No. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, the
screen program screen ís dísplayed.
Restríctíons
Number of repetítíons Up to 9999 can Ьe specífíed as the number of repetítíons. If 0 ís set for a
fı1e, the fıle becomes invalíd and is not executed.
Number of files By pressíng the page key on screen No. 4, up to 20 fıles can be regístered.
regístered
M code When M codes other than M02 and M30 are executed in a program, the
current number of repetitíons ís not increased.
812
OPERATION в-6з5з-3EN o2 4. AUTOMATiC OPERATION
Dìsplayíng the floppy During the executíon of fi1e, the floppy dírectory display of background
disk directory duríng fíle edítíng cannot be referenced.
executíon
Restarting automatic To resume automatíc operatíon after it is suspended for scheduled
operation operatíon, press the reset button.
schedulíng function for The schedulíng function caп be used on1y for a síngle tool post.
the two path control
A1arm
A1aгm No. Descríptíon
086 Aп attempt was made to execute a file that was not regis-
tered in the floppy dísk.
210 M198 and M099 were executed during scheduled opera-
tion, or M198 was executed during DNC operatíon.
8]3
4. AUTOMATtC OPERATION OPERATION 8-63534EN/o2
The subprogram ca11 function ís províded to ca11 and execute subprogram
SUBPROGRAM CALL files stored in an external ínput/output device Handy Fí1e, FLOPPY
FUNCTION M198 CASSETTE, FA Card during memory operatíon.
When the followíng block in a program in CNC memory is executed, a
subprogram fıle in the external ínput/output device ís called:
To use thís functíon, the Floppy Cassette directory display optíon must
Ьe installed.
Format
1. FS15 tape format
M198 P000C LΔΔΔΔ ;
Number of repetitions
Fi1e number for a fiie in the 1/0 device
1/0 devices ca11 instruction
2. Other than FS15 tape format
M198 Р000 ΔΔΔΔ ;
Fi1e number for a file
in the 1/O device
Number of repetitions
1/O devices ca11 instruction
Explanation The subprogram ca11 functíon is enabled when parameter for the
input/output device is set to 3. When the custom macro optíon ís províded,
either format 1 or 2 can be used. A dífferent M code can be used for a
subprogram ca11 depending on the settíng of parameter In this
case, M 198 is executed as a normal M code. The fíle number ís specified
at address P. If the SBP bit bít 2 of parameter ís set to 1, a
program number can be specifíed. When a fíle number is specífied at
address P, Fxxxx is indicated ínstead of Oxxxx.
Programs in memory Program ín the external
execution mode ínput/output devíce
N1 ;
N2 ; J0123 .... Fi1e number
N3 M198 P0003 0123 ;
N4 ,
N5 .
_________ : Fírst ca11/return
_ : Second ca11/return
_ : Third ca11/return
Fíg. a Program F1ow When M198 ís Specifíed
814
в-6зsз4εN/o2 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Restríctíons
subprogram ca11 For the two--path control, subprograms in a floppy cassette cannot be
function wíth two path called for the two tool posts at the same tíme.
control
NOTE
1 When M198 in the program of the file saved ín a floppy
cassette is executed, a P/S alarm is gíven. When
a program in the memory of CNC is called and M198 is
executed duríng executíon of a program of the file saved in
a floppy cassette, M198 is changed to an ordinary M code.
2 When MD1 is íntervened and M198 is executed after M198
ís commanded in the memory mode, M198 is changed to an
ordinary M code. When the reset operation ís done ín the
MD1 mode after M198 ís commanded in the MEMORY
mode, it does not influence on the memory operation and
the operatíon is continued by restaıting it in the MEMORY
mode.
815
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION
B-63534EN/02
The movement by manual handle operatíon can be done by overlapping
MANUAL HANDLE ít wíth the movement by automatic operatíon ín the automatíc operatíon
1NTERRUPTION mode.
Too1 position during
Z automaticoperation
Too1 position after
handleinterruption
s
Programme d
depth of cut
\
X
Depth of cut by
handleínterruption
Fíg Manual Hand1e lnterruptíon
Handle ínterruption axís selectíon signals
For the handle interruption axís selectíon signals, refer [o the manual
supplíed Ьy the machine tool builder.
During automatíc operatíon, handle ínten-uptíon is enabled for an axis
íf the handle interruption axis selection sígnal for that axis ís on.
Hand1e interruptíon ís performed Ьy turníng the handle of the manual
pulse generator.
WARNING
The travel distance by handle ínterruptíon is determined
according to the amount by which the manual pulse
generator ís turned and the handle feed magnífication x1,
x10, xM, xN .
Since thís movement ís not accelerated or decelerated, ít ís
very dangerous to use a large magníficatíon value for
handle interruption.
The move amount per scale at x1 magnífícatíon ís mm
metric output or ínch inch output .
NOTE
Handle interruptíon ís disabled when the machine is locked
during automatíc operatíon.
816
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Explanatíons
Relatíon wíth other The followíná table índícates the relatíon between other functíons and the
functíons movement by handle ínterrupt.
Dísplay Relatíon
Machine lock Machine lock is effectíve. The tool does not move
even when thís sígnal turns on.
lnterlock lnterlock is effective. The tool does not move even
when this sígnal turns on.
Mirror image Mirror image ís not effective. lnterrupt functions on
the plus dírectíon by plus dírectíon command, even if
this sígnal turns on.
Posítíon dísplay The following table shows the relatíon between varíous posítion display
data and the movement by handle ínterrupt.
Dísplay Relatíon
Absolute Hand1e interruption does not change absolute
coordinate value coordínates.
Relative Hand1e interruption does not change relative
coordinate value coordinates.
Machíne Machine coordínates are changed by the travel
coordinate value distance specified by handle interruption.
Travel dístance dísplay
Press the functíon key u, then a pr o e s ss the chapter selectíon soft key
[HNDL].
The move amount by the handle interrupt is displayed. The following 4
kinds of data are displayed concurrently.

HANDLE 1NTERRUPTION 00000 N02000
1NPUT UN1T OUTPUT UN1T
X X
Y Y
Z Z
RELATIVE DISTANCE TO GO
X X
Y Y
Z Z
PART COUNT 287
RUN T1ME 1 H 12M CYCLE T1ME OH OM OS
MD1 10:29:51
Г ABS REL ALL OPRT
817
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
a 1NPUT UN1T : Hand1e interrupt move amount in input unit
system
Indícates the travel dístance specífıed Ьy handle
interruptíon accordíng to the least input
íncrement.
b OUTPUT UN1 : Hand1e interrupt move amount in output unit
system
Indicates the travel distance specífıed Ьy handle
ínterruptíon according to the least command
increment.
c RELATIVE : Posítíon in relatíve coordínate system
These values have rio effect on the travel dístance
specífıed Ьy handle interruption.
d D 1 STA N C E TO GO : The remaíníng travel dístance in the current
block has no effect oп the travel distance
specifíed Ьy handle interruption.
The handle ínterrupt move amount is cleared when the manual reference
posítíon return ends every axís.
Display for five-axís Systems havíng fıve or moгe axes províde the same dísplay as the overall
systems or better posítíon display. See IΠ
818
OPERATION B-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Duríng automatic operatíon, the mirror ímage functíon can be used for
MIRROR 1MAGE movement along an axis. To use this function, set the mírror image swítch
to ON on the machíne operator s pane1, or set the mirror image settíng to
ON from the MDI pane1.
Y axis mirror image goes on.
Programmed tool path
.
--
Too1 path atter the mirror
image function is used
Too1
a χ
Fig Mіпoг lmage
Procedure The followíng procedure is given as an example. For actual operatíon,
refer to the manual supplíed by the machine tool buílder.
1 Press the síngle block swítch to stop automatic operation. When the
m vror image functíon ís used from the begíníng of operatíon, thís step
ís omitted.
2 Press the mírror image switch for the target axís on the machíne
operator s pаne1.
Alternatively, turn on the mirror ímage setting by following the steps
below:
2-1 Set the MD1 mode.
2-2 Press the function key.
2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selection to display the
setting screen.

SETTING MIRROR 1MAGE 00020 N00001
MIRROR 1MAGE X= 0 0 : OFF 1: ON
MIRROR 1MAGE Y= 0 0 : OFF 1: ON
MIRROR 1MAGE Z= 0 0 : OFF 1: OM
>
MEM ł - 14:47:57
ı OFFSET , WORK OPRT 1
819
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
2-4 Move the cursor to the mírror image setting posítíon, then set the
target axís to 1.
3 Enter an automatic operation mode memory mode or MDI mode ,
then press the cycle start button to start automatic operatíon. 1
Explanatíons The mirror ímage function caп also be turned on and off by settíng bít
0 of parameter 0012 MIRx to 1 or 0.
For the mirror ímage switches, refer to the manual supplíed Ьy the
machíne tool buílder.
Límítatíons The dírection of movement during manual operatíon, the dírectíon of
movement from an íntemídíate poínt to the reference position duńng
automatic reference posítion return G28 , the dírection of approach
during unídírectíonal posítíoníng G60 , and the shíft direction in aboring
cycle G76, G87 cannot be reserved.
820
OPERATION B-63534EN-02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The tool can be withdrawn from a workpíece in order to replace the tool
when ít ís damaged duríng machíníng, or meгely to check the status of
TOOL WITHDRAWAL
machíníng. The tool can then be advanced agaín to restart machíníng
AND RETURN effícíently.
Position where the TOOL WITHDRAW swıtch ıs turned on
Programmed position .
: Position to which the tool is retracted by manual operation о
Retractíon path 1
: Manua1 operation withdraw path
--- : Return path
_ _ : Reposítíoníng
Procedure for tool wíthdrawal and return
Procedurel Specífy a retractíon axís and dístance in command G10.6IP_
Programmíng the sample program below, the N20 block specífıes that the
Z axís ís the retractíon axis and the retraction distance is to be 50 mm.
Sample program
N10 G91 Z-50. ;
N20 Z50. ;
N30 G01 X150. F500. ;
821

4. AUTOMATIC OPERATiON OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Pгoceduгe2 Suppose that the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator s
R etra ct panel ís turned on when the tool ís positíoned at poínt A duríng execution
of the N30 block.
Machine operator s panel
о 0
TOOL RETRAC-
BE1NG T10N
W1TH- POS1T10N
DRAWN

TOOL TOOL
WlTH- RETURN DRAW
Next, the tool withdrawal mode ís set and the TOOL BEING
WITHDRAWN LED goes on. At thís time, automatic operation ís
temporaríly halted. The tool ís then retracted by the programmed
distance. If point A ís the end poínt of the block, retraction ís performed
after automatíc operatíon is stopped.Retractíon ís based on linear
ínterpolation. The dry run feedrate ís used for retractí
completíon of retractíon, the RETRACT POSITION LED on the
operator s pane1 goes on.
Machírıe_operator s panei
, .
-;
ф-
TOOL BE RETRAC-
1NG W1TH- T10N
DRAWN POS1T10N
TQOL .OIL
л тH
5L, 1uR
Screen Duríng retractíon, the screen dísplays PTRR and sTRT.
MEM STRT MTN ή` 0: 00 : 00 PTRR
L
l
PTRR blínks in the fíeld for índicatíng states such as the program
editing status.
STRT is dísplayed in the automatíc operation status fıeld.
MTN ís displayed in the fıeld for indícating status such as movement
along an axís.
822
OPERATION в 6з5з4εN o2 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Procedure3 Set the manual operatíon mode, then withdraw the too1. For manual
Wíthdrawal operation, either jog feed or handle feed is possíble.
- 823 -
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
P r o c e d u гe4 After wíthdrawíng the tool and any addítional operation such as replacíng
Return the too1, move the tool back to the prevíous retractíon positíon.
To return the tool to the retractíon positíon, return the mode to automatíc
operatíon mode, then turn the TOOL RETURN swítch on the operator s
panel on then off agaín. The tool returns to the retractíon posítíon at the
dry run feedrate, regardless of whether the dry run swítch ís on or off.
When the tool has returned to the retractíon position, the RETRACTION
POSΓTION LED comes on.
Screen Duríng return operation, the CRT screen dísplays PTRR and 1v1STR.
MEM MSTR MTN 0: 00 : 00 PTRR

;Ј
ØR blínks in the fíeld for indicatíng states such as program editing
status.
MSTR ís displayed in the automatíc operatíon status fíeld.
MTN ís displayed in the fıeld for índícatíng states such as movement
along an axís.
824
OPERATION вбз5з EN 02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Procedure 5 Whí1e the tool ís at the retractíon posítíon poínt E in the fıgure below
Reposítioníng and the RETRACTION POSTTION LED is on, press the cycle start
switch. The tool is then reposítioned at the poínt where retraction was
started і.e. where the TOOL WITHDRAW switch was turned oп .
Upon completion of repositioníng, the tool withdraw mode ís cancelled,
and the TOOL BEING ØRAWN LED goes off and restart N30.
Explanation 1
Retractíon
When no retractíon If no retractíon dístance or direction required for retraction are specifıed,
distance ís specífíed retraction is not performed when the TOOL WITHDRAW swítch on the
operator s pane1 is turned on. Instead, the block being executed in
automatíc operation ís interrupted automatic operatíon is held or
stopped . In thís state, the tool can be withdrawn and returned.
Retractíon from the When the síngle block swítch ís turned on duńng automatíc operatíon, or
automatíc operatíon the TOOL WITHDRAW swítch ís turned on after the automatic operation
hold or stop state hold or stop state is set by feed ho1d: Retraction ís performed, then the
automatic operatíon hold or stop state ís set again.
Stoppíng retractíon Duńng retractíon, feed hold operatíon ís ígnored. However, reset
operatíon ís enabled retractíon ís stopped at reset . When an alarm is
issued duńng retraction, the retractíon ís stopped ímmedíately.
Reposítíoning After retractíon is completed, tool reposítíoning can be started wíthout
ímmedíately after performing the wíthdraw and return operations.
retractíon
825
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Explanatíon 2
Withdrawal
Axís selectíon To move the tool along an axís, select the correspondíng axís selectíon
sígnal. Never specífy axís selectíon sígnals for two or more axes at a tíme.
Path memorizatíon When the tool is moved in manual operatíon along an axís, the control unít
memorizes up to ten paths of movements. If the tool is stopped after beíng
moved along a selected axís and is then moved along another selected
axís, the posítíon where this swítch takes place ís memorized. After ten
paths have been memorized, the control unít does not memońze any
addítíonal switching poínts.
Reset Upon reset, memońzed posítíon data ís lost and the tool withdraw mode
is cancelled.
Explanaíton 3 Return
Return path When there are more than ten return paths, the tool first moves to the tenth
posítíon, then to the nínth posítion, then to the eighth position, and so
forth until the retractíon positíon ís reached.
síngle block The single block swítch ís enabled during return operatíon. If the síngle
block swítch ís turned off, continuous return operatíon is performed. If
the síngle block switch is turned off, the tool stops at each memorized
position. In thís case, return operatíon can be resumed by tuıníng the
TOOL RETURN swítch on then off agaín.
lnterruption of return When an alarm ís issued duńng return operatíon, return operation stops.
operatíon
Feed hold The feed hold functíon ís enabled duńng return operatíon.
Explanatíon 4
Reposítíoning
Feed hold The feed hold functíon ís dísabled during reposítíoning.
Operation after The operatíon after completíon of reposítíoníng depends on the automatíc
completíon of operation state presentwhen the TOOL WITHDRAW swítch ís turned on.
reposítíoníng
1. When automatic operatíon ís beíng started
After completíon of reposítioning, the ínterrupted executíon of the
block ís resumed.
2. When automatic operation ís held or stopped
After completion of reposítíoníng, the tool stops once at the
reposítíoned poínt, then the original automatic operatíon hold or stop
state ís set. When the cycle start swítch ís pressed, automatic operatíon
ís resumed.
826
OPERATION 6-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Wíth the retrace funetíon, the tool can be moved in the reverse dírectíon
reverse movement by using the REVERSE swítch duńng automatíc
RETRACE FUNCTION
operatíon to trace the progranımed path. The retrace functíon also enables
the user to move the tool in the forward direction agaín forward return
movement along the retraced path untíl the retrace start posítion ís
reached. When the tool reaches the retrace start positíon, the tool resumes
movement accordíng to the program.
Procedure for Retrace Operation
Procedure
Forward movement -> To move the tool ín the forward directíon, turn off the REVERSE switch
Reverse movement on the operator s pane1, then press the cycle start swítch. If the REVERSE
switch on the operator s pane1 ís on, the tool moves in the reverse dírectíon
or completes reverse movement.
Three methods are aуaіlaЬle for movíng the tool in the reverse directíon
along the programmed path.
1 When the tool ís moving in the forward d цectіon, turn on the
REVERSE switch on the operator s pane1 duríng block execution.
2 When the tool is movíng in the forward dírectíon, turn on the
REVERSE switch on the operator s panel after a síngle block stop.
3 When the tool ís moving in the forward dírection, turn on the
REVERSE switch on the operator s pane1 after a feed hold stop.
In the case of 1 above, the tool starts reverse movement after completíon
of the block currently being executed after execution up to the posítíon
of a single block stop . Turníng on the REVERSE swítch on the
operator s pаne1 does not ímmediately start reverse movement.
REVERSE swtch rurned on
Cyc1e start ф Forward movement
forvııard movement started Reverse movement
,-- ,
,
Reverse movement started
In the case of 2 above, the tool starts reverse movement at the position
of a single block stop when the cycle start switch ís pressed.
Single biock stop
REVERSE swítch
turned on cycle start
Cyc1e start Ї
Forward movement
forward movement started Reverse movement

Reverse movement started
In the case of 3 above, the tool starts reverse movement at the positíon
of a feed hold stop when the cycle start switch ís pressed.
827
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPEβAT10N B-ô3534EN/02
Feed hold stop
REVERSE switch
rurned on cycle start
Cyc1e start Forward movement
forward movement started F--
ł Reverse movement
ı ı
Reverse movement started
Reverse movement - Three methods are avaílable for moving the tool ín the forward dírectíon
Forward return movement agaín along the retraced path.
1 When the tool is movíng in the reverse directíon, turn off the
REVERSE swítch on the operator s pane1 during block executíon.
2 When the tool ís movíng in the reverse dírectíon, turn off the
REVERSE swítch on the operator s pane1 after a síngle block stop.
3 When the tool ís movíng ín the reverse dírection, turn off
theREVERSE swítch on the operator s pane1 after a feed hold stop.
In the case of 1 above, the tool starts forward return movement after
completíon of the block currently beíng executed after executíon up to
the position of a single block stop . Turning off the REVERSE switch on
the operator s pane1 does not ímmediately start forward return movement.
Cyc1e start
f o иa d movement started F
ıJ
- ї Reverse mo vement
F--1 started
Forward relur n REVERSE -- Forward movement
movement switch Reverse movement
started turned off - Forward return movement
In the case of 2 above, the tool starts forward return movement at the
posítíon of a síngle block stop when the cycle start switch ís pressed.
Cyc1e start
forward movement started -- t
Single block stop 1,
REVERSE switch Reverse movement
E----- turned off started
Cyc1e start Ф Forward movement
t
Reverse movement Forward return movement started Forward return
movemnt
In the case of 3 above, the tool starts forward return movement at the
posítíon of a feed hold stop when the cycle start switch ís pressed.
828
B-63534EN 02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cyc1e start
forward movement started ?
1 Reverse movement
Feed hold stop started REVERSE
switch turned off Forward movement
t Reverse movement C c1e start y Forwardreturn Forward return
movement started movement
Reverse movement When there are no moгe blocks for which to perform reverse movement
Reverse movement when the tool has moved back to the ínitial forward movement block or
completíon Forward the tool has not yet started forward movement , the reverse movement
return movement completíon state ís entered and operation stops.
Even when the cycle start swítch ís pressed wíth the REVERSE swítch
oп the operator s panel turned on, no operation ís performed the reverse
movement completíon state remains unchanged . When the cycle start
switch ís pressed after turníng off the REVERSE swítch on the operator s
pane1, the tool starts forward return movement or forward movement.
Cyc1e start
forward movement started
t Reverse movement
Reverse movement E------- started
completed
REVERSE switch t . Forward movement
turned off Forward return .ł Reverse movement
Cyc1e start movement Forward return movement
started
Forward return movement When the tool completes a forward return movement up to the block
Forward movement where reverse movement was started, the tool automatically resumes
forward movement. Programmed commands are read and program
execution ís continued. No parcicular operatíon ís requíred to resume
forward movement.
When too1 movement swítches from forward return movement to forward
movement, the display of RTRY Re TRY in the lower ńght corner of
the CRT screen dísappears.
Cyc1e start Reverse movement started
forward movement started i
I-orward movement
started
F
ł
. Forward movement
i Reverse movement
Forward return movement started _ . Forward return movement
If the tool moves in the reverse directíon after a feed hold stop, the tool
stops forward return movement at the position of the feed hold stop, then
resumes forward movement. If the tool moves in the reverse directíon
after a single block stop, the tool also stops forward return movement at
the position of the single block stop.
829
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Feed hold stop
Reverse movement Cyc1e start
signal=l,cycle start forward movement started
1 -
ť-- t F Reverse movement
started
ı
F
Forward movement started
t
Forward movement Forward return movement started
Reverse movement
. Forward return
movement
Explanations
Forward movement and In automatíc operation, a program ís usually executed in the order that
reverse movement comınands are specífíed. This mode of executíon is referred to as forward
movement. The retrace functíon can execute in reverse, program blocks
that have already been executed. Thís mode of execution ís referred to as
reverse movement. In reverse movement, the tool can retrace the tool path
followed by forward movement.
A program can Ьe executed in the reverse dírectíon on1y for those blocks
that have already been executed in the forward dírectíon.
Approxímately 40 to 80 blocks can be executed ín the reverse direction,
depending on the program.
Duńng reverse movement, the REVERSE MOVEMENT LED is on and
RVRS blínks ín the lower right corner of the screen to índicate that the
too1 ís undergoíng reverse movement.
The tool can perform reverse movement one block at a time when the
single block mode ís set.
Forward return The tool can be moved again along the retraced path of the blocks ín the
movement forward dírectíon up to the block where reverse movement was started.
This movement is referred to as forward return movement. In forward
return movement, the tool moves along the same path as forward
movement up to the posítíon where reverse movement started.
When the tool returns to the block where reverse movement was started,
the too1 resumes forward movement accordíng to the program.
In forward return movement, the REVERSE MOVEMENT LED ís off
and RTRY Re TRY blínks in the lower right corner of the screen to
índícate that the tool ís undergoíng forward return movement. When the
tool swítches from forward return movement to forward movement,
RTRY Re TRY dísappears from the lower ríght corner of the screen.
The tool can perform forward return movement one block at a time when
the síngle block mode ís set.
Reverse movement When there are пo more blocks for whích to perform reverse movement
completíon when the tool has moved back along the path of a11 memońzed blocks
or the tool has not yet started forward movement , operatíon stops. Thís
ís referred to as reverse movement completion.
Upon reverse movement completíon, the REVERSE MOVEMENT LED
goes off, and RVED ReVerse EnD blínks ín the lower ńght corner of
the screen to indícate that reverse movement ís completed.
830
OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 6-6353дEN/02
Reset Upon reset when the RESET key on the MDI pane1 ís pressed, the
external reset sígnal ís applied, or the reset and rewind sígnal ís applied ,
the memorized reverse movement blocks are cleared.
Feedrate A feedrate for reverse movement can be specífied usíng parameter No.
1414 . When thís parameter is set to 0, the feedrate used for forward
movement is used.
For forward return movement, the feedrate for forward movement ís
always used.
In reverse movement and forward return movement, the feedrate overńde
function, rapid traverse overńde functíon, and dry run functíon are
enabled.
Límitatíons
B1ock that dísables Reverse movement stops when any of the commands or modes listed
reverse movement below appears. If an attempt ís made during forward movement to stop
forward movement with feed hold stop and then move the tool in the
reverse dírection when any of the commands and modes below is
specífied, the reverse movement completíon state occurs.
1nvolute interpolation
Exponential interpolation
Cylindrical interpoiatíon , G107
Po1ar coordinate interpolation mode
lnch/metric conversion G20/ G21
Reference position return check G27
Return to reference position G28
Return from reference position G29
2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position return G30
Floating reference position return
Thread cutting G33
Machine coordinate system selection G53
Chopping operation command
See the chopping functíon descríbed later.
Rigid tapping cycle M29, G84
High speed cycle machiníng G05
High speed remote buffer A G05
High speed remote buffer B G05
High precisíon contour control R1SC G05
Advanced prevíew control G08
Cs contour control
831
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION
F-6з5зaEN 02
Circular łŠC uгι tıı , , ífy the radíus of an arc with R.
ínterpolatíon G02,G03
WARNING
1f an end point is not correctly placed on an arc if a leading
line is produced when an arc center is specified using 1, J,
and K, the tool does not perform correct reverse movement.
lnterrupt type custom 1. Never ínítiate an interrupt duńng reverse movement.
macro 2. Never perform reverse movement for an interrupte block and the
program that has íssure the ínterrupt.
Too1 life management The retrace functíon does not support the toollífe management funcíton.
Switchíng automatíc If the operatíon mode ís swítched after a síngle block stop from memory
operatíon mode operatíon to MDI operation or více versa duńng reverse movement or
forward return movement, reverse movement, forward return movement,
and forward movement can no longer be perforıned. To restart operation,
return the mode to the ońginal mode, then press the cycle start swítch.
Posítioning G00 When the tool is posítíoned based on nonlinear ínterpolatíon Ьy setting
bit 1 LRP of parameter No. 1401 to 0, the path of the tool for reverse
movement does not match the path for forward movement. The path for
forward return movement ís the same as the path for forward movement.
When the too1 is posítíoned based on linear ínterpolatíon Ьy settíng bít 1
LRP of parameter No. 1401 to 1, the path of the tool for reverse
movement matches the path for forward movement.
Posítíoning based on nonlínear Positioníng based on linear
ínterpolatíon LRP=O interpolatíon LRP=1

Forward movement L
-ł Reverse movement
Forward return
X movement
Dwe11 G04 The dwe11 command G04 is executed ín reverse movement and forward
return movement in the same way as duńng ordínary operatíon.
Programmable data A tool compensatíon va1ue, parameter, pítch error data, workpíece zero
settíng G10 poínt offset value, and toollífe management setting specifíed or modífıed
usíng the programmable data setting code G10 are ígnored in reverse
movement and forward return movement.
Stored stroke check The on/off state of the stored stroke check functíon present at the end of
function on/off G22,G23 forward movement remaíns unchanged duńng reverse movement and
forward return movement. Thís means that the actual on/off state may
díffer from the modal G22/G23 índícatíon. When reverse movement or
forward return movement ís cancelled upon reset, the modal G22/G23
índícatíon at that time becomes va1id.
The settíng of an area wíth G22 X_Y_Z_I_J_K at the end of forward
movement remains unchanged.
832
OPERATION в-іЅз5з4εN 02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Skíp funtíon G31 , In reverse movement and forward return movement, the skíp sígnal and
automatíc tool length automatíc too1 length measurement signal are ignored. In reverse
measurement G37 movement and forward return movement, the tool moves along the path
actually followed in forward movement.
Forward return
movement
Reverse I i 1
movement ј 1
I
N When the sígnal is not applied
E-------- G31 Programmed path
1
Forward movement skip signal on G31 or automatic tool
actual path length measurement signal on G37
Choppíng functíon Whether the choppíng operatíon ís performed іп reverse movement and
forward return movement is determíned by whether the choppíng
operation was performed at the end of forward movement.
If the tool starts reverse movement with the choppíng mode off and moves
in the reverse directíon along the path of a block where the choppíng mode
ís oп, the chopping axis maintaíns íts posítion at poínt R.
When a block specífyíng chopping cominand appears during
reverse movement, reverse movement ends and operation stops.
lnverse tíme feed G93 A1ong the path of a block where the tool moved accordíng to inverse time
feed in forward movement, the cool moves in the reverse dírectíon
according to the feedrate specífıed Ьy parameter = 0 for reverse
movement.
If parameter No. 1414 for specifyíng the feedrate for reverse movement
is not set = 0 , the tool moves in the reverse dírectíon at the same feedrate
as during forward movement.
Constant surface speed If the on/off mode of constant surface speed control is specified іп reverse
control on/off G96,G97 movement, the specífıed mode is used in subsequent reverse movement.
In other words, when a block specifyíng G96Sxxxx; appears іп reverse
movement, constant surface speed control ís on for subsequent reverse
movement. When a block specífying G97Sxxxx; appears in reverse
movement, constant surface speed control ís off for subsequent reverse
movement.
Note that the on/off mode of constant surface speed control in forward
movement ís reversed in reverse movement.
Clampíng maxímum If the coımnand for clamping maxіmum spíndle speed is specifıed in
spíndle speed reverse movement, the specifıed clamp ís applied to subsequent reverse
G92Sxxxx movement. In other words, when G92Sxxxx appears in reverse
movement, the spindle speed ís clamped at Sxxxx. Note, however, that
the spíndle speed is clamped on1y when the G96 mode ís set.
833
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
auxiliary function The M, S, and T functíons, and secondary auxílíary functíons B
functions are output directly in reverse movement and forward return
movement.
When an M, S, oг T functíon, or secondary auxíliary function B function
ís specifıed in a block contaíning a move command, the functíon and the
move command are output at the same time ín forward movement, reverse
movement, and forward return movement. Thís means that the posítíon
where an M, S, oг T function, or secondary auxiliary function B functíon
ís output díffers ín forward movement, reverse movement, and forward
return movement.
Too1 compensation value Even if a cutter compensatíon value or toollength compensatíon value is
modifíed ín reverse movement or forward return movement, the tool
moves according to the compensatíon value used when the block was
executed ín the forward movement.
Custom macro operatíon A11 custom macro operations are ignored in reverse movement and
forward return movement. 1
The values of macro varíables present at the end of forward movement ;
remaín unchanged.
Manual interventíon When the tool has been moved by manual ínterventíon, return the tool to
the origínal position before movíng the tool ín the reverse dírectíon after
a feed hold stop or single block reverse movement, the tool cannot
move along the path made duńng manual interventíon. A11 movements
made by manual intervention агe ígnored іп reverse movement and
forward return movement.
Too1 withdrawal and The tool cannot move along the path retractíon or reposítioning
return functíon performed using the tool wíthdrawal and return function. A11 retractíon
and repositíoníng operatíons are ígnored ín reverse movement and
forward return movement.
Mírror image When a block wíth the mírror ímage function specifıed Ьy a sígnal or
settíng ís memońzed іп forward movement, the mírror image functíon is
elíminated; the block is memońzed as ońginally programmed.
Accordingly, in reverse movement and forward return movement, the tool
moves along the programmed reverse movement or forward
return movement, the mírror image functíon can Ьe specífíed by a signal
or settíng.
When the tool performs reverse movement or forward return movement
for a block where the mirror image functíon is specífïed by the
programmable mirror image code , the tool moves along the
actual path incorporating the mírror ímage functíon.
834
OPERATION B-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
In cases such as when tool movement along aп axís ís stopped by feed hold
during automatic operation so that manual ínterventíon can be used to
MANUAL
replace the too1: When automatíc operatíon ís restarted, this functíon
1NTERVENTION AND returns the tool to the positíon where manual ínterventíon was started.
RETURN To use the conventional program restart functíon and tool withdrawal and
return functíon, the switches on the operator s pаne1 must be used in
conjunction with the MDI keys. Thís functíon does not requíre such
operatíons.
Before thís function can be used, MIN bít 0 of parameter No. 7001 must
Ьe set to 1.
Explanations
Manual absolute on/off In manual absolute off mode, the tool does not return to the stop positíon,
but ínstead operates accordíng to the manual absolute on/off functíon.
Overríde For the return operation, the dry run feedrate ís used, and the jog feedrate
overríde functíon ís enabled.
Return operatíon Return operatíon is performed accordíng to posítíoníng based on
nonlínear ínterpolatíon.
síngle block If the síngle block stop switch is on duríng return operatíon, the tool stops
at the stop posítíon and restarts movement when the cycle start swítch ís
pressed.
Cancellation If a reset occurs or an alarm is issued during maпual ínterventíon or the
return operation, this functíon is cancelled.
MD1 mode Thís functíon can be used in the MDI mode as we11.
Limítatíons
Enablíng and dísablíng This function is enabled on1y when the automatíc operation hold LED ís
manual ínterventíon and on. When there ís no travel dístance remainíng, thís functíon has no effect
return even if a feed hold stop is performed wíth the automatic operatíon hold
signal SP bit 5 of G008 .
Offset When the tool ís replaced usíng manual íntervention for a reason such as
damage, the tool movement cannot Ьe restarted by a changed offset in the
middle of the interrupted block.
Machíne 1ock, mirror When performing manual intervention, never use the nıachine 1ock,
ímage, and scalíng mirror image, or scalíng functíons.
835
OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63534EN 02
Example
1. The N1 block cuts a workpiece
N2 Tπo1

Bİock start point N1
2. The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold switch in
the middle of the N1 block point A .
N2
.а

N1 Point A
3. After retracting the tool manually to point B. tool movement is restarted.
ЦPnint B
R Manual
intervention N2
_.--

1 N Point A
4. After automatic return to point A at the dry run feedrate. the remaining
move co nmand of the N1 block is executed.
B
\
\ N2
\ __ 1

ł
N1 Point A
WARNING
When performing manual intervention, pay particular
attention of machining and the shape of the workpiece so
that the machine and tool are not damaged.
N 36
OPERATION B-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

DNC OPERATION
W1TH MEMORY
CARD
DNC operation with Memory Card ís a function that ít is possíble to
perform machíníng with executíng the program in the memory card, Specificatíon
whích is assembled to the memory card interface, where is the left side
of the screen.
There are two methods to use thís functíon as follows.
a By startíng automatíc operatíon cycle start during the DNC
operatíon mode RMT , ít is possíble to perform machíning DNC
operation while a program ís beíng read from a memory card, as by
using the extemal ínput/output unit such as a floppy cassette and so on.
Fig. a
b It ís possible to read sub programs written in the memory card and
execute them by the command subprogram ca11 1VI198 . Fíg.
b
1t ís possible to do the DNC
Memoгу in CNC Memory Card operation with Memorу card
Program Program instead of the norma1 memorу
\ operatíon by memorу ín the CNC.
\
Normal Memory \\ DNC operation
operation by \ with Memory
\ memo the \ card
CNC \
Execution of programs
Fíg. a
1t is possible to execute the
Memorу ín CNC Memorу Card subprogram ín the memorу card
Program Sub Program duríng memorу operation.
\
\
\
Normal Memorу \ Subprogram
operation by memorу \ Ca11 M198
\ in the CNC \
\
Executíon of programs
Fí Ь
837
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
NOTE
1 To use this function, it ís necessary to set the parameter of
to 4 by setting screen.
[1/0 CHANEL: setting to select an input]output unit]
setting value ís 4.: 1t means usíng the memory card
ínterface.
2 When CNC control unit ís a stand alone type, the memory
card interface on the 1eft síde of the screen of the display unit
ís available. But the ínterface on the control unít is not
avaílable.

Operatíons

DNC Operatíon
Procedure Please set the parameter of to 4 ín the setting screen іп advance.
1 Change to RMT mode.
2 Push [PROGRAM] functíon key.
3 Push [ > ] soft key continuance menu .
4 When [DNC CD] soft key ís pushed, the following screen ís
displayed.
5 The screen can be scrolled by page key. An arbítrary fıle number ís
ínput, and [F SRH] soft key is pushed. Then the arbítrary fıle name
ís dísplayed at the top of DNC operation memory card screen.
6 When the fi1e number that ís executed ís input and the [DNC ST] soft
key ís pushed, the file name that ís selected is set to DNC FILE.
7 When the cycle start ís done, the program that ís selected is executed.
Пλ1Γ π?PRÁ. TтΩ?ri i?л Сι P.Г tзØtiгг з λ 4 Ø sз
U ί, г L г ry h г Ï
ØPλИ1 MAIN. PRG 13 qa из 3
DNC 1. PRG 5Ø 99-Ø -23
йØИ1 ΠA1Γ?. PRG Rt3 99 И:3 94
ØØØ4 DNC3. PRG 32 99-Ø3-24
ИØP1 ı ПNС4. PRG г,P1 99 И ? 23
ØØØ6 234 99-Ø3-24
0007 TOOLOГ>T. DAT Q00 99 0C 24
ØØØ8 01234 170 99-03-24
Ø009 07777 20 99 Ø 24
Cз1 í=P.` T I_ P; I;.ME : MA I N. [ ΣtС
, 1 4 20 : 23
F Ѕ iř. Н
јѕтј_ј
838
OPERATION B-63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
When the following block in a program ín CNC memory ís executed, a
subprogram fíle in memory card ís called. Subprogram Ca11 M198
Format
1. Normal format
M 198 P` Г`C`Γ: ΔΔΔΔ ;
Fi1e number for a file in
the memory card
Number of repetition
Memory card ca11 instructíon
2. FS15 tape format

Fi1e number of repetition
Fi1e number for a file in the
memory card
Memory card ca11 instruction
Explanatíon When the custom macro optíon ís províded, both format 1 and 2 can be
used. A dífferent M code can be used for a subprogram ca11 dependíng
on the setting of parameter No. 6030. In thís case, M198 ís executed as
a normal M code. The fıle number ís specified at address P. If the SBP
bít 2 of parameter No. 3404 ís set to 1, a program number can be
specífıed. When a fıle number ís specífíed at address P, Fxxxx ís indícated
ínstead of Oxxxx.
NOTE
Please set the parameter of No. 0020 to 4 ín the settíng
screen ín advance.
839
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
1 The memory card can not be accessed, such as dísplay of inemory card
Limítation and Notes líst and so on, duńng the DNC operation wíth memory card.
2 It ís possíble to execute the DNC operatíon wíth memory card on multí
path system. However, ít ís not possible to ca11 programs from the
p1ura1 paths at the same time.
3 The selectíon of DNC operation fıle that ís set at DNC OPEØTION
screen is cleared Ьy the power supply turn off and oп. After the power
supply ís turned on agaín, ít ís necessary to select the DNC operatíon
fıle agaín.
4 Please do not pu11 out and ínsert memory card duńng the DNC
operation with memory cагd.
5 It ís not possíble to ca11 a program іп the memorу card from the DNC
operation program.
6 In case of using thís function, the PMCIA card attachment wńtten at
sectíon 6 must be used to prevent a poor connection or drop out of the
memoгу cагd from occurríng Ьy víbratíon of the machíne.
7 In case of the stand alone type i seríes that the dísplay unít ís a Display
línk unít, thís function can not be used.
8 The memorу card ínterface on the stand alone type controller is not
avaílable. Please use the memory card ínterface oп the display unít.

7 6 >> 2 Parameter 3 1 0
0138 DNM
[Data type] Bít
7 DNM The DNC operatíon wíth memory card functíon ís
0 : dísable.
1 : eпaЬ1e.
OPERATION 6-63534E N/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Connecting PCMCIA
Card Attachment

Specífícatíon Number
Specífícatíon Remarks
A026-0236-K160 For LCD or LCD
A02B-0236-K161 For LCD or LCD
1 How to assemble to the unit
Assemble an attachment guide and a control unit to the cabínet by Assemblíng
screwing together as follow figure.
The attachment guíde ís thick. Pay attention for the length of
the screws when you assemble them.
841
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
2 How to mount the card
a Insert the card to slit of the attachment. Please pay attentíon to the
directíon of the card. Please mach the dírectíon of ditch on the.
card.
b Push up the card to the upper end of the attachment.
3 Assemblíng of the attachment
Insert the memory card with the attachment ínto the nıemory card
ínterface as followíng fígure. And, fíx the attachment guide by
screwíná the screw of the attachment guide by manual.
842
B-6353θEN 02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
-λ 1 aftcr cπnncctiπn
NOTE
1 1n both case of stand alone type i series and LCD mounted
type i series, the memory card interface where is the left side
of the screen of the display unit. The memory card interface
on the stand alone type controller is not available.
2 1t is impossible to assemble the display unit and the
attachment guide from inside of the cabinet.
3 The memory card must be used in the condition, as the
coolant cannot be poured directly on it.

Recommended
Maker Type Capacity
Memory Card
Hitachi LTD HB289016A4 16MB
H B289032A4 32M B
HB289160A4 160MB
Matushita electric BN-012AB 12MB
BN-020AB 20MB
BN-040AB 40MB
SanDisk SDP3B-4 4MB
SDP3B-20 20MB
SDP3B-40 40ME3
ĺ4
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
5 TEST OPERATION
The followínº functions are used to check before actual machininσ
whether the machíne operates as specífíed by the created program.
Machíne Lock and Auxiliary Function Lock
Feedrate Overríde
Rapíd Traverse Override
Dry Run
Síngle B1ock

в-sз534εNıo2 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
To dísplay the change ín the posítion wíthout movíng the too1, use
machine 1ock. MACHINE LOCK AND
There are two types of machíne 1ock: a11 axis machíne 1ock, whích stops
AUXILIARY the movement along a11 axes, and specifıed axís machíne 1ock, whích
FUNCTION LOCK stops the movement along specífıed axes oп1y. In additíon, auxílíary
functíon 1ock, whích disables M, S, and T commands, ís avaílable for
checkíng a program together with machíne 1ock.
MD1
XO0000
y....
Tooі Z
The tool does not move but the
posítion along each axis changes
on the display.
Fig. Machíne lock
Procedure for Machíne Lock and Auxílíary Functíon Lock
Machíne Lock Press the machíne lock swítch on the operator s pane1. The tool does not
move but the posítion along each axis changes on the dísplay as if the tool
were movíng.
Some machínes have a machíne lock switch for each axís. On such
machines, press the machíne lock swítches for the axes along whích the
tool is to be stopped. Refer to the appropriate mаnual províded by the
machíne tool buílder for machíne 1ock.
WARNING
The positional relationship between the workpiece
coordinates and machine coordinates may differ before and
aftet automatic operation using machine 1ock. 1n such a
case,. specify the workpiece coordinate system by using a
coordinate setting command or by performing manual
reference position return.
Auxilíary Functíon Lock Press the auxíliary functíon lock swítch on the operator s pаne1. M, S, T
and B codes are dísabled and not executed. Refer to the appropriate
manual provided by the machíne tool buílder for auxílíary functíon 1ock.
845
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION в-6з5з4EN/02
Restrictions
M, Ѕ. T, B command by M, S, T and B commands are executed in the machíne lock state.
only machíne lock
Reference posítíon When a G27, G28, or G30 command ís íssued in the machine lock state,
return under Machíne the command ís accepted but the tool does not move to the reference
Lock posítíon and the reference position return LED does not go on.
M codes not locked by M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 commands are executed even iri
auxílíary function lock the auxiliary function lock state. M codes for calling a subprogram
parameters No. 6071 to 6079 and those for callíng a custom macro
parameter No. 6080 to 6089 are also executed.
846
в бзбзıEгvıo2 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
A programmed feedrate can be reduced or íncreased by a percentage
selected by the override díal.Thís feature ís used to check a program. FEEDRATE
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/mпn ís specifıed in the program,
OVERRIDE setting the override dia1 to 50 moves the t001 at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/min
Specified Ьy programmed Check the machining
____ by altering the feedrate
Feedrate 50 mm/min after from the value speci-
feedrate override fied in the program.
Fig. Feedrate override
Procedure for Feedrate Overríde
Set the feedrate overríde dia1 to the desired percentage oп the machíne
operator s pane1, before or duńng automatíc operatíon.
Oп some machínes, the same dial is used for the feedrate overríde dia1 and
jog feedrate dia1. Refer to the appropríate manual províded by the
machine tool builder for feedrate override.
200
JOG FEED RATE OVERRIDE
Restríctíons
Overríde Range The overríde that can be specífied ranges from 0 to 254 . For indívidual
machínes, the range depends on the specífıcatíons of the machine tool
buílder.
Override duríng thread Duńng threadíng, the overríde ís ignored and the feedrate remaíns as
specífíed by program.
847
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
An override of four steps F0, 25 , 50 , and 100 can be applíed to the
rapíd traverse rate. FO ís set by a parameter No. 1421 . RAP1D TRAVERSE
OVERRIDE
Rapid traverse Override
ratel0m/min 50
Fíg. Rapíd traverse override
Rapíd Traverse Overríde
Procedure Select one of the four feedrates with the rapid traverse override swítch
during rapíd traverse. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the
machíne tool builder for rapíd traverse override.
Rapid traverse override
Explanation The followíng types of rapid traverse are avaílable. Rapid traverse
oveıride can Ьe applied for each of them.
1 Rapíd traverse by G00
2 Rapid traverse during a canned cycle
3 Rapíd traverse ín G27, G28, G29, G30, G53
4 Manua1 rapíd traverse
5 Rapid traverse of mаnual reference posítíon return
ι
848
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
The tool is moved at the feedrate specífíed Ьy a parameter regardless of
DRY RUN the feedrate specífied in the program. Thís functíon ís used for checkíng
the movement of the tool under the state taht the workpíece ís removed
from the table.
Fíg. Dry run
Procedure for Dry Run
Procedure Press the dry run switch on the machíne operator s panel duríng automatic
operation.
The tool moves at the feedrate specifíed ín a parameter. The rapid traverse
swítch can also be used for changing the feedrate.
Refer to the appropńate manual províded by the machine tool builder for
dry run.
Explanatíon
Dry run feedrate The dry run feedrate changes as shown in the table below accordíng to the
rapíd traverse swítch and parameters.
Rapíd traverse Program command
button Rapíd traverse Feed
ON Rapíd traverse rate Dry run feedrate x 2
OFF Dry run speed x JV,or Dry run feedrate x JV
rapid traverse rate 1 2
Max. cutting feedrate ..... Settíng by parameter
Rapíd traverse rate ....... Settíng by parameter
Dry run feedrate ......... Settíng by parameter
JV: Jog feedrate oveıríde
1 Dry run feedrate x JV when parameter RDR bit 6 of No. 1401 ís
1. Rapíd traverse rate when parameter RDR ís 0.
2 Clamped to the maximum cuttíng feedrate
JVmax: Maximum value of jog feedrate overıide
849
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Pressíng the síngle block swítch starts the síngle block ınode. When the
SINGLE BLOCK cycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool stops after
a síngle block in the program is executed. Check the program in the síngle
block mode by executíng the program block by block.
Fíg. a Síngle block
Procedure for Síngle block
Procedure 1 Press the síngle block swítch on the machine operator s pane1. The
execution of the program ís stopped after the current block is
executed.
2 Press the cycle start button to execute the next block. The tool stops
after the block is executed.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder
for single block execution.
850
B-s3534EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
Explanatíon
Reference posítíon If G28 to G30 are íssued, the single block functíon ís effective at the
return and síngle block íntermedíate point.
single block during a In a canned cycle, the síngle block stop poínts are the end of ІІ, 0, and
canned cycle shown below. When the single block stop is made after the point 1
or 2 , the feed hold LED líghts.
σ
------.
, ,
σ ,o
------
: ;
Rapid traverse
4
0 ,σ Feed

Fig. b Single block during canned cycle
subprogram ca11 and síngle block stop ís not performed in a block containing M98P_;. M99;
síngle block or G65.
However, síngle block stop is even performed in a block wíth M98P_ or
M99 command, íf the block contaíns an address other than O, N, P. L.
851
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-s3534EN/o2
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
To immedíately stop the machíne for safety, press the Emergency stop
button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel
check and Stroke check are avaílable. Thís chapter describes emergency
stop., overtravel check, and stroke check.
852
B-δ3534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator s paпe1, thc
machíne movement stops in a moment. EMERGENCY STOP
Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Fíg. Emergency stop
This button ís locked when ít ís pressed. Although it varíes with the
machíne tool builder, the button can usually be unlocked by twísting ít.
Explanation EMERGE1vCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.
Causes of trouble must be removed before the button ís released.
853
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machíne tool
OVERTRAVEL limit swítch, the tool decelerates and stops because of workíng the limít
switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.
Fí Overtravel
Explanatíon
Overtravel duríng When the tool touches a limít switch along an axís duríng automatíc
automatíc operatíon operatíon, the tool ís decelerated and stopped along a11 axes and an
overtravel alarm ís dísplayed.
Overtravel duríng In manual operation, the tool ís decelerated and stopped on1y along the
manual operatíon axís for whích the tool has touched a límít swítch. The tool stí11 moves
along the other axes.
Releasíng overtravel Press the reset button to reset the a1aпті after movíng the tool to the safety
dírectíon by manual operatíon. For details on operation, refer to the
operator s manual of the machíne tool buílder.
A1arm
A1aгm Message Descri
No. ptíon
The tool has exceeded the hardware specífíed
506 Overtravel: +n overtravel límít along the positíve nth axis
n: 1 to 8 .
The tool has exceeded the hardware specified
507 Overtravel: n overtravel limit along the negative nth axis
п: 1 to 8 .
854
6-63534E N/02 O P E RAT 1 O N 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Three areas whích the tool cannot enter can Ьe specifíed wíth stored stroke
check 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3. STORED STROKE
CHECK
x,Y Z
1,J,K
1 Forbídden aгea ís insíde.
2 Forbidden area is outside
: Forbidden area for the tool
Fíg. a Stroke check
When the tool exceeds a stored stroke límit, an alarm ís displayed and the
too1 is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbídden area and an alarm ís generated, the tool
caп Ьe moved in the reverse dírectíon from which the tool came.
Explanatíon
Stored stroke check 1 Parameters Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327 set boundary. Outside
the area of the set límíts ís a forbídden area. The machine tool builder
usually sets thís area as the maximum stroke.
Stored stroke check 2 Parameters Nos. 1322, 1323 or commands set these boundaries. Inside
G22, G23 or outsíde the аrea of the límit can be set as the forbídden area. Parameter
OUT No. 1300Ø selects either insíde or outsíde as the forbidden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the
forbídden аrea, and a G23 command permíts the tool to enter the
forbídden аrea. Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded
índependently of another commands ín a block.
The commaпd below creates or changes the forbídden area:
855
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
G 22X_Y_Z_1_J_K_;
X,Y,Z
1,J,K
X>1, Y>J, Z>K
X-1 > 1n least command increment
> 1n least command íncrement
Z-K > 1n least command increment
F
t mm =
7500
F=Rapid traverse speed mm/min
Fig. b Creatíng or changíng the forbidden aгea using a program
When setting the area Ьy parameters, poínts A and B ín the fígure below
must be set.
A
B 1,J,K
X>1, Y>J, Z>K
X-1 >t 1n least command increment
Y-,1 > 1n least command íncrement
Z-K > 1n least command íncrement
t mm = F
7500
F=Rapid traverse speed mm/min
Fíg. c Creatíng or changíng the forbidden area usíng a parameters
In stored stroke check 2, even íf you místake the order of the coordinate
va1ue of the two points, a rectangular, wíth the two poínts beíng the
apexes, wi11 be set as the area.
When you set the forbidden аrea through parameters Nos. 1322, 1323 ,
the data should be specified Ьy the distance from the machíne coordínate
system ín the least command íncrement. Output íncrement
If ít ís set by a G22 command, specify the data by the distance from the
machíne coordínate system in the least input íncrement Input increment.
The programmed data are then converted into the numeńcal values in the
least comniand increment, and the values are set as the parameters.
Stored stroke check 3 Set the boundary with parameters No. 1324 and 1325. The area ínsíde the
boundary becomes the forbidden area.
856
в-6зззaEгv π2 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Checkpoínt for the Confírm the checkíng posítíon the top of the tool or the tool chuck before
forbídden area programming the forbidden area.
If poínt A The top of the tool is checked in Fíg. d , the distance a
should be set as the data for the stored stroke límít functíon. If poínt B
The tool chuck ís checked, the dístance must be set. When checkíng
the tool típ líke poínt A , and íf the toollength varies for each too1, setting
the forbídden area for the longest tool requíres no re settíng and results
in safe operation.
The position of the
tool after reference
position return
Area boündary
////// ///////
Fíg. d Settíng the forbídden area
Forbídden area Area can be set in píles.
over lappíng
Fíg. e setting the forbidden aгea over lappíng
Unnecessary limíts should be set beyond the machíne stroke.
Overrun amount of If the maximum rapíd traverse rate ís F mm/min , the maximum oveırun
stored stroke límít amount, L mm , of the stored stroke limit is obtained from the followíng
expression:
L mm = FΠ500
The tool enters the specifıed inhíbíted area by up to L mm . Bit 7 BFA
of parameter No. 1300 can Ьe used to stop the tool when ít reaches a poínt
L mrn short of the specífied area. In this case, the tool wi11 not enter the
ínhíbíted area.
Effectíve tíme for a Each límit becomes effective after the power ís turned on аnd manual
forbídden area reference positíon retunı or automatíc reference position return by G28
has been performed.
After the power ís turned oп, íf the reference posítion ís in the forbídden
area of each limít, an alarm is generated ímmedíately. 0n1y in G22 mode
for stored stroke límít 2 .
857
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERArION в-63534εNıo2
Releasíng the alarms If the enters a forbídden area and an alarm ís generated, the tool can be
moved on1y in the backward directíon. To cancel the alarm, move the tool
backward untíl ít ís outsíde the forbidden area and reset the system. When
the alarm is canceled, the tool can be moved both backward and forward.
Change from G23 to When G23 is swítched to G22 in the forbídden area, the followíng results.
G22 ín a forbidden area 1 When the forbidden агea ís insíde, an alarm ís informed in the next
move.
2 When the forbidden area is outsíde, an alarm ís ínformed immediately.
Tímíng for dísplaying Parameter BFA bít 7 of No. 1300 selects whether an alarm ís dísplayed
an a1arm ímmedíately before the tool enters the forbídden area or immediately after
the tool has entered the forbidden area.
setting a forbídden area For two path control, set a fobidden area for each path.
for two path control
NOTE
1n settíng a forbidden area, if the two points to be set are the
same, the area is as follows:
1 When the forbidden area is stored stroke check 1, a11 areas
are forbidden areas.
2 When the forbidden area is stored stroke check 2 or stored
stroke check 3, a11 areas are movable areas.
Alarms
A1aгm Message Contents
Number
500 OVER TRAVEL: +n Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 + side stored
stroke límít I.
501 OVER TRAVEL: -n Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 - síde
stored stroke limit I.
502 OVER TRAVEL: +n Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 + síde stored
stroke límít 11.
503 OVER TRAVEL: -n Exceeded the n-th axís 1-8 - síde
stored stroke limít 11.
504 OVER TRAVEL: +n Exceeded the n-th axís 1-8 + side stored
stroke límít 111.
505 OVER TRAVEL: -n Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 - side
stored stroke límít 111.
858
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
During automatíc operatíon, before the movement specifíed Ьy a gíven
block ís started, whether the tool enters the inhíbited area defíned Ьy
STROKE L1M1T
stored stroke límit 1, ?, or 3 ís checked by determíníng the posítíon of the
CHECK PR10R TO end poini from the current posítíon of the machine and a specified amount
PERFORMING of travel. If the tool ís found to enter the ínhíbíted area defıned by a stored
stroke límít, the too1 ís stopped immediately upon the start of movement
MOVEMENT
for that block, and an alarm is displayed.
WARNING
Whether the coordínates of the end point, reached as a
result of traversing the distance specífíed in each block, are
in a ínhíbited area is checked. 1n this case, the path followed
by a move command ís not checked. However, íf the tool
enters the ínhibited area defíned by stored stroke límit 1, 2,
oг 3, an a1aгm is issued. See the examples below.
Example 1
Inhibited area defined by
stored stroke límít 1 0г 2
1
End poínt
Start poínt \
The tool ís stopped at poínt a according
to stored stroke limít 1 0г 2.
lnhíbited area defíned by
stored stroke límít 1 0г 2
End poínt . ѕ,

..
lmmedíately upon movement commencing
from the start poínt, the too1 is stopped to
enable a stroke límít check to be pertormed
before movement.
859
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Example 2
End point
lnhibíted area defined by a+
stored stroke limit 1 0г2 _ ïr
a \
The tool is stopped at poínt a according
Start point to stored stroke limít 1 0г 2.
lnhibited area defined by
stored stroke limit 1 0г 2 End point
.r
r
lmmediately upon movement commencing
from the start point, the tool is stopped to
enable a stroke limit check to be performed
before movement.
Explanatíons When a stroke límit check prior to movement ís performed, whether to
check the movement performed by a G31 skip block and G37 automatic
too1 length measurement block can Ьe determined using NPC bít 2 of i
parameter No. 1301 .

Límitatíons
Machíne lock If machíne lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke límít check
made before movement ís performed.
G23 When stored stroke límít 2 ís disabled G23 mode , no check ís made to
determine whether the tool enters the ínhibíted area defıned Ьy stored
stroke limit 2.
Program restart When a program is restarted, an alarm ís issued if the restart position is
wíthín a inhibíted area.
Manual interventíon When the execution of a block is restarted after manual intervention
following a feed hold followíng a feed hold stop, no a1arm is íssued even if the end point
stop followíng a manual ínterventíon ís wíthin a inhibíted area.
A block consístíng of If a block consístíng of multiple operatíons such as a canned cycle and
multíple operations exponential ínterpolatíon ís executed, an alarm ís íssued at the start point
of any operation whose end point fa11s within a ínhíbited area.
860
в-6353aEN/o2 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Cyríndrícal ínterpolation In cylíndrícal ínterpolatíon mode, no check ís made.
mode
Po1ar coordinate In po1aг coordínate ínterpolatíon mode, no check is made.
interpolation mode
Angular axis control When the angulalr axís control optíon is selected, no check ís made.
Símple synchronous In símple synchronous control, only the master axís is checked; no slave
control axes are checked.
Three dímensíonal In three-dímensional coordinate conversíon mode, no check is made.
coordínate conversíon
Drawing No check is performed whíle drawíng ís beíná performed as part of
dynamíc graphic display only drawing no machining is beíng
performed .
PMC axís control No check ís made for a movement based on PMC axís control.
High speed No check ís made for a movement based on high-speed, high-precísíon
high precísíon contour contour control HPCC .
control HPCC
A1arm
Number Message Contents
The pre-movement stroke limit check re-
510 OVER TRAVEL :+n veals that the block end point enters the
prohíbited aгea for the positive stroke límít
along the n axis. Correct the program.
The pre-movement stroke limit check re-
511 OVER TRAVEL :-n veals that the block end point enters the
prohibited area for the negatíve stroke limit
along the n axis. Correct the program.
861
7. ALARM AND SELF DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION в-sз5зІEN 02
7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
When an alarm occurs, the correspondíng alarm screen appears to indícate
the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classífıed by error codes.
Up to 25 prevíous alarms can be stored and displayed on the screen alarm
hístory dísplay .
The system may sometimes seem to be at a ha1t, although no alarm ís
dísplayed. In thís case, the system may be performíng some processíng.
The state of the system can be checked usíng the self diagnostíc functíon.
862
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B-s353 ıFN 02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

ALARM DISPLAY
Explanatíons
A1arm screen When an alarm occurs, the alarm screen appears.
ALARM MESSAGE 0000 00000
100 PARAMETER WR1TE ENABLE
510 OVER TR1AVEί :+к
520 OVER TRAVEL :
530 OVER TRAVEL :
S 0 T0000
MD1 18:52:05 ι
уі J MSG ı HISTRYJ

-ф,
Another method for In some cases, the alarm screen does not appear, but an ALM is dísplayed
alarm displays - at the bottom of the screen.
PARAMETER RS232C 1NTERFACE 01000 N00010
0100 ENS NCR CTV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0101 NFD X1K AS1 SB2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0102 DEVICE NUM. CHO
0103 BAUDRATE CHO 10
0111 NFD AS1 SB2
Ó 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0112 DEVICE NUM. CH1 0
0113 BAUDRATE CH1 0
_ S 0 T0000
MEM . .. .. ... 08:41:27
ON:1 i OFF:O ГNPUT 1NPUT Ѕ
In thís case, display the alarm screen as follows:
1. Press the function key
2. Press the chapter selection soft key [ALARM].
863
7 . ALARM AND SELF DIAGNOS1s
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Reset of the a 1a rm Eпor codes and messages índícate the cause of an alarm. To recover from
an alarm, elímínate the cause and press the reset key.
Error codes The error codes are classífíed as follows:
No. 000 to 255 : P/S alarm Program errors
No. 300 to 349 : Absolute pulse coder APC alarms
No. 350 and 399 : Seńa1 pulse coder SPC alarms
No. 400 to 499 : Servo alarms
No. 500 to 599 : Overtravel alarms
No. 700 to 739 : Overheat alarms
No. 740 to 748 : Rigid tapping alarms
No. 749 to 799 : Spíndle alarms
No. 900 to 999 : System alarms
No. 5000 to : P/S alarm Program errors
For an alarm No. 000 to 255 that occurs ín assocíatíon with
background operatíon, the indication xxxBP/S alarm ís provided
where xxx ís an alarm number . 0n1y a BP/S alarm ís províded for
No. 140.
See the error code líst ín the Appendix G for detaíls of the error codes.
864
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
в-635з4εNı02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
7. 2 Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the
screen. ALARM HISTORY
Dísplay the alarm hístory as follows:
DISPLAY
Procedure for A1arm History Dísplay
Procedure
1 Press the functíon key
2 Press the chapter selectíon soft key [HISTRY].
The alarm history appears.
The following ínformatíon ítems are displayed.
1 The date the alarm was issued
2 A1arm No.
3 A1aгm message some contains no message
4 Page No.
3 Change the page by the 1-page change key.
4 To delete the recorded ínformatíon, press the softkey [ OPRT ] then
the [DELETE] key.
ALARM HISTORY 00100 N00001
1 16:43:48 PAG E=1
2 010 3 MPROPER G CODE 4
8:22:21
506 OVER TRAVEL :
20:15:43
417 SERVO ALARM : X AX1S DGTL PARAM
MEM..,. ,.. ,,. 19:47:45
OPRT
CALARM, MSG ,

865
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION 6-63534ENı02
The system may sometimes seem to be at a ha1t, although no alarm has
occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing.
CHECKING BY
The state of the system can be checked by displayíng the self-diagnostic
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC screen.
SCREEN
Procedure for Diagnois
Procedure
1 Press the function key _ =TEМ
2 Press the chapter select key [DGNOs].
3 The díagnostic screen has more than 1 pages. Select the screen by the
following operation.
1 Change the page by the 1-page change key.
2 Method by soft key
- Key input the number of the diagnostíc data to be dísplayed.
- Press [N sRCH].

DIAGNOSTIC GENERAL 00000 N0000
000 WAITING FOR F1N SIGNAL :0
001 MOT10N :0
002 DWELL :0
003 1N POS1T10N CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0 :0
005 1 NTE R LOCK/STA RT LOCK :0
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
>
ED1T 14:51 :55
PMC
CPARAM 1 1 J ı SYSTEM, OPRT
ί J
Explanatíons
Se1f diagnostíc screen at For the two-path control, the diagnostic screen for the path selected with
2-path control the path selectíon swítch is displayed. When dísplayíng the díagnostic
screen for the other tool post, specífy the path wíth the tool post selectíon
switch.
866
7. ALARM AND SELF DIAGNOSIS
B-бз7з1EN 02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
Explanatíons Díagnostic numbers 000 to 015 índícate states when a command ís beíng
specífıed but appears as íf ít were not beíng executed. The table below
lísts the ínternal states when 1 ís dísplayed at the ríght end of each líne on
the screen.
Tab1e a A1arm dísplays when a command ís specífied but appears as íf ít were not beíng executed
No. Dísplay lnternal status when 1 ís dísplayed
000 WAITING FOR F1N SIGNAL M, S. T functíon being executed
001 MOT10N Move command ín automatíc operation being executed
002 DWELL Dwe11 being executed
003 1N POS1T10N CHECK 1n posítion check beíng executed
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0 Cuttíng feed override 0
005 1NTERLOCK/START LOCK lnterlock ON
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waítíng for spíndle speed arrival signal to turn on
010 PUNCHING Data being output vía reader puncher interface
011 READING Data beíng ínput via reader puncher interface
012 WAITING FOR UN CLAMP Waiting for index table clamp/unclamp before B axis in-
dex table índexing start/after B axís índex table indexing
end to complete
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0 ó Jog overríde 0
014 WAITING FOR Emergency stop, external reset, reset rewind, or MD1
pane1 reset key on
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM External program number searching
NUMBER SEARCH
Díagnostíc numbers 020 to 025 índícate states when an automatíc
operatíon is stopped or paused.
Tab1e b A1arm dísplays when an automatíc operatíon ís stopped or paused.
No. Dísplay lnternal status when 1 ís displayed
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN Set when emergency stop turns on or when servo a1aгm
occurs
021 RESET BUTTON ON Set when reset key turns on
022 RESET AND REWIND ON Reset and rewínd turned on
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON Set when emergency stop turns on
024 RESET ON Set when external reset, emergency stop, reset, or reset
rewínd key tums on
025 STOP MOT10N OR DWELL A flag whích stops pulse distribution. 1t is set in the fo1-
lowing cases.
1 External reset turned on.
2 Reset rewínd turned on.
3 Emergency stop turned on.
4 Feed hold turned on.
5 The MD1 panel reset key turned on.
6 Switched to the manual mode JOG/HANDLE/1NC .
7 Otheralarm occurred.
There is also a1aгm which is not set.
867
ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The table below shows the signals and states whích are enabled when each
díagnostic data ítem ís 1. Each combínatíon of the values of the díagnostic
data indícates a unique state.
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 p 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOT10N OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Emergency stop signal input
External reset signal input
MD1 reset button tumed on
Reset rewind input
Senıo a1arm generation
Changed to another mode or feed hold
Single block stop
Díagnostíc numbers 030 and 031 índícate TH alarm states.
Díagnostíc numbers 030 and 031 índícate TH a1aгm states.
No. Dísplay Meaníng of data
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH DATA The position of the character which caused TH a1arm is
displayed by the number of characters from the begin-
ning of the block at TH a1aгm
031 TH DATA Read code of character which caused TH a1arm
868
B-бз;3дEN o2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
8 DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
NC data ís transferred between the NC and external ínput/output devíces
such as the Handy Fi1e.
The memory card ínterface 1ocated to the left of the dísplay can be used
to read ínformatíon oп a memory card in the CNC or write ít to the card.
The followíng types of data can be entered and output :
1.Program
data
3.Parameter
4.Pítch error compensation data
macro commoп vańable
Before an input/output devíce can be used, the ínput/output related
parameters must be set.
For how to set parameters, see llI-2 OPERATIONAL DEVICEs .
RS -422
interface
Memory card
RS-232-C
interface
ANUC Fi1e
Memoгy card
interface г
\ i
RS-232-C or
RS-422 interface
Punch panel etc...
External 1i0 device
869
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Of the external input/output devíces, the FANUC Handy Fí1e use floppy
dísks as theír ínput/output medium. F1LES
In thís manual, these ínput/output medium is generally referred to as a
floPPY
Unlíke an NC tape, a floppy allows the user to freely choose from several
types of data stored on one medium on a fíle by fïle basís.
Input/output ís possíble wíth data extendíng over more than one floppy
dísk.
Explanatíons
What is a Fí1e The unít of data, whích ís ínput/output between the floppy and the CNC
Ьy one input/output operatíon pressing the VREADW or VPUNCHW
key , is called a Hfi1eI. When ínputting CNC programs from, or
outputting them to the floppy, for example, one or a11 programs withín the
CNC memory are handled as one fí1e.
Fí1es are assigned automatically fíle numbers 1,2,3,4 and so on, with the
lead fıle as 1.
Fí1e 1 Fi1e 2 Fi1e 3 Fi1e n B1ank
Request for floppy When one fíle has been entered over two floppies, LEDs on the adaptor
replacement flash alternately on completíon of data ínput/output between the fırst
floppy and the CNC, promptíng floppy replacement. In this case, take the
fírst floppy out of the adaptor and ínsert a second floppy in íts place. Then,
data ínput/output wí11 contínue automatícally.
Floppy replacement ís prompted when the second floppy and later ís
requíred duńng fıle search out, data ínput/output between the CNC and
the floppy, or fıle deletíon.
Floppy 1
Fí1e 1 Fí1e 2 Fi1e 3 Fi1e k-1 Fi1e k Z
Floppy 2
ConÚnuatíonof Fi1e k Fi1e n B1ank Iiiek
Sínce floppy replacement is processed by the input/output device, no
specíal operatíon ís requíred. The CNC wí11 ínterrupt data ínput/output
operatíon until the next floppy ís inserted ínto the adaptor.
When reset operatíon is applied to the CNC duńng a request for floppy
replacement, the CNC ís not reset at once, but reset after the floppy has
been replaced.
870
B-63534ENl02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Protect switch The floppy ís provided with the write protect swítch. Set the switch to
the write enab1e state. Then, start output operatíon.
Write protect switch of a cassette
1 Wríte-protected 2 Wríte-enabled
onIy readíng ís Readíng, wríting,
possíble. and deletíon aгe possíble.
Fíg. Protect swtíah
Wrítíng memo Oпce written in the cassette or card, data can subsequently be read out by
correspondence between the data contents and fıle numbers. This
correspondence cannot Ьe verífied, unless the data contents and file
numbers are output to the CNC and dísplayed. The data contents caл Ьe
displayed wíth dísplay function for directory of floppy dísk
See Sectíon
To display the contents,wríte the fïle numbers and the contents oп the
memo column which is the back of floppy.
Entry example oп MEMO
Fi1e 1 CNC parameters
Fí1e 2 Offset data
Fí1e 3 NC program 00100
Fi1e n-1 NC program 00500
Fí1e n NC program 00600
871
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
When the program ís ínput from the floppy, the fıle to be ínput fırst
must be searched. F1LE SEARCH
For this purpose, proceed as follows:
Fí1e 1 Fí1e 2 Fí1e 3 Fi1e n B1ank
τ
Fi1e searching of the file n
Fi1e headíng
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT or MEMORY swítch on the machíne operator s
pane1.
2 Press functíon key PROG , then the program contents display screen or
program check screen appears.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
4 Press the ríghtmost soft keva next menu key .
5 Enter address N.
6 Enter the number of the fíle to search for.
NO
The begínning of the cassette or card ís searched.
One of N 1 to N9999
Of the fıle Nos. 1 to 9999, a designated fıle ís searched.
N-9999
The fıle next to that accessed just before is searched.
N-9998
When N-9998 ís desígnated, N-9999 ís automatically ínserted
each tíme a fıle is ínput or output. This condítion ís reset by the
designation of N 1,N 1 to 9999, or N 9999 or reset.
7 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC].
The specífıed fi1e ís searched for.
Explanatíon
Fí1e search by N-9999 The same result ís obtained both by sequentíally searchíng the fıles by
specífyíng Nos. N1 to N9999 and Ьy first searchíng one of N1 to N9999
and then usíng the N-9999 searchíng method. The searching tíme ís
shorter in the latter case.
872
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
A1arm
A1aгm No. Description
The ready signal DR of an input/output device is off.
Aп alarm ís not immedíately índicated in the CNC even when an
a1aгm occurs during head searchíng when a file is not found, or
86 the like .
Aп a1aгm is gíven when the ínpuNoutput operation is performed
afterthat. This a1arm is also raísed when N1 is specified for writ-
íng data to an empty floppy. 1n thís case, specify No.
873
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-s353aEN/o2
Fi1es stored on a floppy can Ьe deleted file Ьy fıle as requíred.
F1LE DELETION
Fí1e deletíon
Frocedure 1 Insert the floppy ínto the input/output device so that it is ready for
writíng.
2 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
3 Press functíon key u, t P h R e OG n the program contents display screen
appears.
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ]
5 Press the ríghtmost soft key next menu key .
6 Enter address N.
7 Enter the number from 1 to 9999 of the file to delete.
8 Press soft key [DELETE] and then press soft key [DELETE].
The fıle spec ed in step 7 ís deleted.
Explanatíons
Fí1e number after the fíle When a fıle ís deleted, the fıle numbers after the deleted fíle are each
is deleted decremented by one. Suppose that a fïle numbered k was deleted. In thís
case, fíles aгe renumbered as follows:
Before deletíon after deletion
1 to k>1 1 to 1c>1
k Deleted
k to n k to ıv1
ProteCt swítch Set the wńte protect swítch to the wńte enab1e state to delete the fıles.
874
B-s3534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT

PROGRAM
1NPUT/OUTPUT
8,4, 1 Thís sectíon descńbes how to load a program into the CNC from a floppy
or NC tape. lnputting a Program
lnputtíng a program
Procedure 1 Make sure the ínput device ís ready for readíng.
For the two path control, select the tool post for whích a program to
Ьe input is used with the tool post selection swítch.
2 Press the EDIT swítch on the machine operator s pane1.
3 When usíng a floppy, search for the requíred fıle according to the
procedure ín
4 Press function key јPRoGј , then the program contents display screen or
program dírectory screen appears.
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press the ńghtmost soft key ј ј next menu key .
7 After entering address O, specify a program number to be assígned to
the program. When no program number ís specífıed here, the
program number used on the floppy or NC tape ís assígned.
8 Press soft keys [READ] and [EXEC]
The program is input and the program number specífıed in step 7 is
assigned to the program.
Explanatíons
Collatíon If a program is input whíle the data protect key on the machíne operator s
paпe1 turns ON, the program loaded ínto the memory is verifíed agaínst
the contents of the floppy or NC tape.
If a mísmatch ís found duríng collatíon, the collatíon ís termínated wíth
an a1aгm P/S No. 079 .
If the operation above is performed wíth the data protection key turns
OFF, collatíon is not performed, but programs are registered in memory.
lnputtíng multiple When a tape holds multíple programs, the tape is rcad up tcı ER ог rn .
programs from an NC
tape
01111 M02; - - - 02222 M30;_ - - 03333 M02; - - - ER o
< ѕ
875
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Program numbers on a When a program ís entered wíthout specífyíng a program number.
NC tape The O-number of the program on the NC tape ís assigned to the
program.
If the program has no O-number, the N-number in the fírst block is
assigned to the program.
When the program has neíther an O-number nor N-number, the
previous program number ís íncremented by one and the result is
assigned to the program.
When the program does not have an O-number but has a fıve-dígít
sequence number at the start of the program, the lower four digíts of
the sequence number are used as the program number. If the lower
four dígíts are zeros, the prevíously registered program number is
íncremented by one and the result ís assigned to the program.
When a program ís entered wíth a program number
The O-number oп the NC tape is ígnored and the specifíed number ís
assígned to the program. When the program is followed by additíonal
programs, the fírst addítional program ís gíven the program number.
Additíonal program numbers are calculated by adding one to the last
program.
Program registratíon ín The method of regístratíon operatíon is the same as the method of
the background foreground operation. However, this operation regísters a program in the
background edítíng area. As wíth edít operatíon, the operations described
below are requíred at the end to regíster a program in foreground program
memoгy.
[ OPRT ] [BG-END]
Addítional program input You can input a program to be appended to the end of a registered
program.
Registered program lnput program Program after input
01234 ; 05678 ; 01234 ;
σσ; 0000000; DDDDDDD;
σ; 00000; ;
; 0000; DDDD;
; 000; ;
ıo
05678 ;
0000000;
ÓOOOÓ;
0000;
000;

In the above example, a111ínes of program 05678 are appended to the end
of program O 1234. In thís case, program number 05678 ís not regístered.
When ínputtíng a program to be appended to a regístered program, press
the [READ] soft key wíthout specifyíng a program number ín step 8.
Then, press the [CHA1N] and [EXEC] soft keys.
In entire program ínput, a111ínes of a program are appended, except for
íts O number.
When cancelíng addítìonal ínput mode, press the reset key or the [CAN]
υг [STOP] soft key.
876
8-635з4EN/o2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Pressiná the [CHA1N] soft key posítions the cursor to the end of the
registered program. Once a program has been ínput, the cursor ís
positioned to the start of the new program.
Additional ínput ís possíble on1y when a program has already been
regístered.
Defíníng the same If an attempt has been made to regíster a program havíng the same number
program number as that as that of a previously regístered program, P/S alarm 073 is issued and the
of an exístíng program program cannot be registered.
A1arm
A1aгm No. Description
70 The size of inemory is not sufficient to store the input pro-
grams
73 An attempt was made to store a program with an existıng pro-
gram number.
The verification operation found a mismatch between a pro-
79 gram loaded into memorу and the contents of the program on
the floppy or NC tape.
877
8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
,4,2 A program stored in the memory of the CNC unít ís output to a floppy or
NC tape. Outputtíng a Program
Outputtíng a program
Procedure 1 Make sure the output device ís ready for output.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích a program to
be output ís used with the tool post selectíon swítch.
2 To output to an NC tape, specífy the punch code system ISO or EIA
using a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
4 Press functíon key PROG , then the program contents dísplay screen or
program dírectory screen appears.
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press the ńghtmost soft key next-menu key .
7 Enter address O.
8 Enter a program number. If -9999 ís entered, a11 programs stored in
memory are output.
To output multíple programs at one tíme, enter a range as follows :
OΔΔΔΔ,O
Programs No.ΔΔΔΔ to No. are output.
The program líbrary screen displays program numbers in ascendíng
order when bít 4 SOR of parameter No. 3107 ís set to 1.
9 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC]
The specifıed program or programs are output.
Explanatíons
Output to a floppy
Fí1e output locatíon When output is conducted to the floppy, the program ís output as the new
fíle after the fıles existing in the floppy. New fíles are to be wńtten from
the begínning wíth makíng the o1d fíles inva1id, use the above output
operatíon after the NO head searching.
An alarm whíle a When P/S alarm No. 86 occurs duńng program output, the 17oppy is
program ís output restored to the condítíon before the output.
Outputtíng a program When program output is conducted after N1 to N9999 head searchíng, the
after file headíng new fíle ís output as the desígnated n-th posítíon. In thís case, 1 to n-1
fıles are effectíve, but the fíles after the o1d n-th one are deleted. If an
alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n-1 fíles are restored.
Effícíent use of inemory To effíciently use the memory in the cassette or card, output the program
Ьy setting parameter NFD No. 0101 7,No. 0111 7 or 0121 7 to 1. This
parameter makes the feed is not output, utílízíng the memory efficíently.
878
B-63534EN 02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
On the memo record Head searchíng wíth a fíle No. ís necessary when a fíle output from the
CNC to the floppy ís agaín ínput to the CNC memory oг compared with
the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, ímmediately after a fıle ís
output from the CNC to the floppy, record the fıle No. on the memo.
Punchíng programs ín Punch operatíon can Ьe performed in the same way as in the foreground.
the background This functíon a1one can punch out a program selected for foreground
operation.
Program No. [PUNCH] [EXEC]: Punches out a specifíed program.
H-9999I [PUNCH] [EXEC]: Punches out a11 programs.
Explanatíons
Output to an NC tape
Format A program is output to paper [ape ín the following format:
ER Program ER

. ., . . .. .
Feed of 3 feet Feed of 3 feet
If three-feet feeding ís too 1ong, press the CAN key during feed
punchíng to cаncel the subsequent feed punchíng.
TV check A space code for TV check ís automatically punched.
1S0 code When a program is punched in ISO code, two CR codes are punched after
an LF code.
LF CR CR
By settíng NCR bít 3 of parameter No. 0100 , CRs can be omitted so that
each LF appears without a CR.
Stopping the punch
Press the дES key to stop punch operation.
Punching a11 programs A11 programs are output to paper tape iıı the followíng format.
ER P o Program Program ER
---
, .. ,. .
Feed of 1-feet Feed of 3-feet
The sequence of the programs punched ís undefíned.
879
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02

OFFSET DATA 1NPUT
AND OUTPUT
Offset data ís loaded ínto the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC
lnputtíng Offset Data tape. The ínput format ís the same as for offset va1ue output. See III
When an offset va1ue ís loaded whích has the same offset number as an
offset number already regístered in the memory, the loaded offset data
replaces exístíng data.
lnputtíng offset data
Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
For the two path control, select the tool post for which offset data to
be ínput ís used wíth the tool post selection switch.
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator s pane1.
3 When using a floppy, search for the requíred file according to the
procedure in
4 Press function kev ј, then the tool compensation screen appears.
5 Press soft keys [ OPRT ].
6 Press rightmost soft key ј next menu key .
7 Press soft keys [READ] and [EXEC].
8 The ínput offset data wí11 be dísplayed on the screen after completion
of input operation.
880
B s35зaEw π2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
A11 offset data ís output in a output format from the memory of the CNC
to a floppy oг NC tape. Outputting Offset Data
Outpuiting offset data
Procedure 1 Make sure the output devíce ís ready for output.
For the two path control, select the tool post for whích offset data to
Ьe ínput is used wíth the tool post selection swítch.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO oг EIA usíng a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
4 Press functíon key OFF E 9E T T n , Nt hen the tool compensatíon screen appears.
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press the rightmost soft key next menu key
7 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC].
Offset data ís output in the output format descríbed below.
Explanatíons
Output format Output format is as follows:
Format
1 For tool compensation memory A
G 10 G90 P_R_;
where P_: Offset No.
R_: Too1 compensation amount
Wíth OSUEthernet or DNC1/Ethernet, the output format ís as
follows:
2 For tool compensation memory B
Setting/changíng the geometńc compensation amount
G10 G90 L10 P_R_;
Settíng/changing the wear compensatíon amount
G 10 G90 L 11 P_R_;
3 For tool compensation memory C
Setting/changing the geometńc compensation amount for H code
G10G90L10P R_;
Setting/changíng the geometńc compensatíon amount for D code
G 10 G90 L12 P_R_;
Setting/changing the wear compensatíon amount for H code
G10 G90 L11 P_R_;
Setting/changíng the wear compensatíon amount for D code
G 10 G90 L 13 P_R_;
The L1 command may be used ínstead of L11 for format compatibilíty of
the conventíonal CNC.
Output f11e name When the floppy dísk directory dísplay function ís used, the name of the
output fi1e ís OFFSET.
881
8. DATA 1NPUTİOUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Parameters and pitch error compensation data are ínput and output from
1NPUTTING AND dífferent screens, respectívely. Thís chapter descríbes how to enter them.
OUTPUTTING
PARAMETERS AND
P1TCH ERROR
COMPENSATION
DATA
Parameters are loaded ínto the memory of the CNC unít from a floppy or
NC tape. The ínput format ís the same as the output format. See IΠ lnputting Parameters
When a parameter ís loaded whích has the same data number as a
parameter already regístered in the memory, the loaded parameter
replaces the existíng parameter.
lnputtíng parameters
Procedure 1 Make sure the ínput device ís ready for readíng.
For the two path control, select the tool post for whích parameters to
be ínput are used wíth the tool post selection swítch.
2 When usíng a floppy, search for the required fıle according to the
procedure in IΠ
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machíne operator s
pane1.
4 Press functíon key І.
5 Press the soft key [SETING] for chapter selectíon, then the settíng
screen appears.
6 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for PARAMETER WRITE
PWE in setting data. A1arm P/S 100 indicatíng that parameters can
be written appears.
7 Press soft key ISV3TEMI .
8 Press chapter selectíon soft key [PARAM], then the parameter screen
appears.
9 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
10 Press the ríghtmost soft keya next menu key .
11 Press soft keys [READ] and [EXEC].
Parameters are read ínto memory. Upon completíon of ínput, the
INPUT índícator at the lower ríght corner of the screen dísappears.
12 Press functíon key
13 Press soft key [sET1NG] for chapter selectíon.
14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for PARAMETER WRITE
PWE in settíng data.
882
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
15 Turn the power to the CNC back on.
16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machíne operator s
paпe1.
,6,2 A11 parameters are output in the defıned format from the memory of the
CNC to a floppy or NC tape. Outputting Parameters
Outputtíng parameters
Procedure 1 Make sure the output devíce ís ready for output.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for which parameters to
Ьe ínput are used wíth the tool post selectíon swítch.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO or EIA usíng a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
4 Press function key , then the parameter screen appears.
5 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM].
6 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
7 Press ríghtmost soft key a next-menu key .
8 Press soft keys [PUNCH].
9 To output a11 parameters, press the [ALL] soft key. To output only
parameters which are set to other than 0, press the [NON-0] soft key.
10 Press soft key [EXEC].
A11 parameters are output in the defıned format.
Explanatíons
Output format Output format is as follows:
N... P .... ;
N ... A 1 P . A2P .. AпP .. ;
;
N ... : Parameter No.
A...: Axis ís the number of control axís
P ... : Parameter settíng value .
Suppressíng output of To suppress the output of the following parameters, press the [PUNCH]
parameters set to 0 soft key then [NON-0] soft key.
Other than axís type Axís type
Bít type Parameter for whích a11 bíts Parameter for an axis for
aгe set to 0 which a11 bits are set to O.
Va1ue type Paramter whose value is O. Parameter for an axis for
which the value is O.
883
8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT OPERATION в-sзsз4εwoг
Output file name When the floрр : di sk dírectory dísplay functíon ís used, the name of the
output fıle ís PAØMETER.
Once a11 parameters have been output, the output fíle ís named ALL
PARAMETER. Once only parameters whích are set to other than 0 have
Ьeeп output, the output fíle ís named NON-0. PARAMETER.
Pítch error compensatíon data are loaded ínto the memory of the CNC
from a floppy oг NC tape. The input format ís the same as the output lnputtíng Pítch Error
format. See When a pítch error compensation data ís loaded
Compensatíon Data
which has the correspondíng data number as a pitch error compensation
data already regístered in the memory, the loaded data replaces the
existíng data.
Pitch error compensatíon data
Procedure 1 Make sure the ínput devíce is ready for readíng.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích pítch error
compensation data to be ínput ís used wíth the tool post selection
swítch.
2 When usíng a floppy, search for the requíred file according to the
procedure in Ш
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator s
paпe1.
4 Press functíon key јº 4 .
5 Press the soft key [SETING] for chapter selection.
6 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for writíng parameters PWE .
A1aτm P/S 100 índícatíng that parameters can be wńtten appears.
7 Press soft key SYsτεм
8 Press the ńghtmost soft key O next-menu key and press
chapter selectíon soft key [P1TCH].
9 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
10 Press the ńghtmost soft keyQ next-menu key .
11 Press soft keys [READ] and [EXEC].
Parameters are read into memory. Upon completíon of ínput, the
INPUT índícator at the lower-ríght corner of the screen dísappears.
12 Press function key OFF3ET 4E TІчβ
13 Press soft key [SETING] for chapter selectíon.
14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for PAØMETER WRITE
PWE in setting data.
884
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
15 Turn the power to the CNC back on.
16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator s
panel.
Explanatíons
Pítch error Parameters 3620 to 3624 and pítch error compensatíon data must be set
compensatíon correctly to apply pitch error compensation correctly See
A11 pitch error compensation data are output in the defıned format from
the memory of the CNC to a floppy or NC tape. Outputting Pitch Error
Compensatíon Data
Procedure for Outputtíng Pítch Error Compensatíon Data
1 Make sure the output device ís ready for output.
For the two path control, select the tool post for which pitch error
compensatíon data to be output ís used wíth the tool post selectíon
switch.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO or EIA using a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
4 Press functíon key ØVSTEM
5 Press the ńghtmost soft key next menu key and press chapter
selection soft key [P1TCH].
6 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
7 Press ńghtmost soft key [ next menu key .
8 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC].
A11 pítch enror compensatíon data are output in the defined format.
Explanatíons
Output format Output format is as follows :
N 10000 P.... ;
N11023 P.... ;
N: Pitch error compensation poínt + 10000
P: Pítch error compensation data
When bí lírectíonal pitch eıror compensatíon ís used, output format ís
as follows :
N20000 P.... ;
N21023 P.... ;
N23000 P.... ;
N24023 P.... ;
N: Pitch error compensatíon poínt + 20000
P: Pitch enor compensatíon data
Output fíle name When the floppy dísk directory dísplay functíon ís used, the name of the
output fi1e ís PITCH ERROR .
885
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02

1NPUTTING/
OUTPUTTING
CUSTOM MACRO
COMMON
VARIABLES
The value of a custom macro common varíable 500 to Ø99 ís loaded
ínto the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC tape. The same format lnputting Custom
used to output custom macro common vańables ís used for input. See
Macro Common
For a custom macro common variable to be valíd, the ínput data
Varíables
must be executed Ьy pressíng the cycle start button after data ís ínput.
When the va1ue of a common variable ís loaded ínto memory, this va1ue
replaces the va1ue of the same common varíable already existing if any
in memory.
lnputtíng custom macro common varíables
Procedure 1 Register the program which has been output, as descńbed in Section
, in memory accordíng to the program input procedure
described іп Section
2 Press the MEMORY switch on the machine operator s panel upon
completíng input.
3 Press the cycle start button to execute the loaded program.
4 Display the macro vńable screen to chek whether the values of the
common vańables have been set correctly.
Dísplay of the macгo variable screen
Press functíon key OFFSET
Press the ńghtmost soft key next menu key .
Press soft key [MACRO].
Select a vańable wíth the page keys or numeńc keys and
soft key [].
Explanatíons
Common variabies The common variables 500 to 531 caп be input and output.
When the option for adding a common vańable is specífıed, values from
500 to Ø99 can be ínput and output. 100 to 199 can be ínput and
output when bit 3 PU5 of parameter No. 6001 ís set to 1.
886
в-sз5з1Eгv 02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUTı OUTPUT
Custom macro common vańables 500 to Ø99 stored ín the memory
of the CNC can be output ín the defined format to a floppy or NC tape. Outputtíng Custom
Macro Common
Varíable
Outputtíng custom macro common varíable
pYocedure 1 Make sure the output devíce ís ready for output.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO or EIA usíng a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
4 Press function key OFF9ET SETTMG
5 Press the ńghtmost soft key next menu key , then press soft
key [MACRO].
6 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
7 Press the ńghtmost soft key J nex ι t menu key .
ł 8 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC].
Commoп variables are output in the defined format.
Explanatíons
Output format The πut ıut format ís as follows:

;
500=[25283 65536]/134217728 ....... .1. ...
501= 0; ................................. .2. .....
502=0; .................................. .3. .....
503= .................
....................... :
....................... :
531= ;
M02;

1 The precision of a vańable ís maíntaíned Ьy outputting the va1ue of the
vańable as <expressíon>.
2 Undefined vańable
3 When the va1ue of a vańable ís 0
Output fíle name When the floppy disk dírectory dísplay functíon is used, the name of the
output fıle ís MACRO VAR .
Common variable The common variables 500 to 531 caп Ьe input and output.
When the option for adding a commoп vańable ís specifíed, values from
500 to Ø99 can be input and output.
100 to 199 can be input and output when bit 3 PU5 of parameter No.
6001 ís set to 1.
887
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
On the floppy dírectory display screen, a directory of the FANUC Handy
Fí1e, FANUC Floppy Cassette, or FANUC FA Card fıles caп be displayed.
DISPLAYING
In addítíon, those files can be loaded, output, and deleted.
DIRECTORY OF
FLOPPY CASSETTE
-
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 00001
0003 00002
0004 00010
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100
0008 01000
0009 09500
ED1T ... ... 11 :51 :12
1 і- 1 OPRT
CPRGRM 1 f __ђ.Ј

888
в-sз5зaEN 02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT

Dísplayíng the
Dírectory
Dísplaying the directory of floppy cassette fíles
Procedure 1 Use the followíng procedure to display a dírectory of a11 the
files stored ín a floppy:
1 Press the ED1T swítch on the machine operator s pane1.
2 Press functíon key PROG
3 Press the rightmost soft key next menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
1
5 Press page key or
6 The screen below appears.

DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 00001
0003 00002
0004 00010
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100
0008 01000
0009 09500
ED1T = 11 : 53 : 04
F SRH READ PUNCH 1 DELETE ЅЅ ѓ J
Fig. a
7 Press a page key agaín to display another page of the dírectory.
889
8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
PrOeedure 2 Use the following procedure to display a directory of fıles
starting with a specifíed file number :
1 Press the EDĺ Г swítch ou the machíne operator s pane1.
2 Press functíon keylPROGI .
3 Press the ríghtmost soft keyQ next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [F SRH].
7 Enter a fi1e number.
8 Press soft keys [F SET] and [EXEC].
9 Press a page key to dísplay another page of the dírectory.
10 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key display shown in the
screen of Fig a .
DIRECTORY ćFLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NÀME METER VOL
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100
0008 01000
0009 09500
SEARCH
F1LE NO. =
ED1T - 11 :54: 19
F SET , C C , CAN EXEC
-/
Fíg. b
Š90
в sзsзaEN o2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT
Explanatíons
Screen fíelds and theír NO:Dísplays the fıle number
meaníngs FILE NAME: Dísplays the fıle пame.
METER : Converts and prints out the fıle capacíty to paper tape
caп also produce H
FEET I by setting the INPUT UN1T to INCH of the setting data.
VOL. : When the fıle ís multi volume, that state ís displayed.
Floppy or card A
Floppy or card B
Floppy or card C
C01
002
L03
C number means CONTINUE
L number means LAST
number number of floppies or cards
891
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-ô3534EN/02
The contents of the specífíed fíle number are read to the memory of NC.
Readíng Fi1es
Reading files
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
For the two path control, select the tool post for whích a fıle ís to be
ínput in memory wíth the tool post selectíon swítch.
2 Press functíon key PRo .
3 Press the rightmost soft keyQ next menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [READ].
-
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 00001
0003 00002 1,9
0004 00010 1,3
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100 1,9
0008 01000
0009 09500
READ
F1LE NO. = PROGRAM NO. _
.
ED1T 11 : 55 : 04
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
\
7 Enter a fıle number.
8 Press soft key [F sET].
9 To modífy the program number, enter the program number, then press
soft key [O sET].
10 Press soft key [EXEC]. The fıle number indicated in the lower left
corner of the screen ís automatícally íncremented by one.
11 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key dísplay shown in
the screen of Fíg.
892
B-s3534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
8,8,3 Aпy program ín the memory of the CNC unít can be output to a floppy
as a fi1e. Outputting Programs
Outputtíng programs
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT swítch on the machine operator s pane1.
For the two path control, select the tool post for which a fíle ís to be
ínput ín memory wíth the tool post selectíon switch.
2 Press functíon key PROG
3 Press the rightmost soft keyQ next menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [PUNCH].
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00002 N01000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 00001
0003 00002 1,9
0004 00010
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100 1,9
0008 01000 1,9
0009 09500
PUNCH
F1LE NO. = PROGRAM NO. =
>
ED1T 11 : 55 : 26
F SET O SET, STOP , CAN EXEC , ı
.
7 Enter a program number. To write a11 programs into a single fı1e, enter
9999 in the program number fıeld. In this case, the fıle name
ALL.PROGRAM ís regístered.
8 Press soft key [O SET].
9 Press soft key [EXEC]. The program or programs specífıed iri step 7
are written after the last fıle oп the floppy. To output the progı am after
deletíng fıles startíng wíth an existíng fıle number, key ín the file
number, then press soft key [F sET] followed by soft key [EXEC].
10 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key dísplay shown in
the screen of Fig. a .
893
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-s3534EN/o2
The fıle with the specified fíle number ís deleted.
Deleting Fi1es
Deleting fíles
P r o c e d u re 1 Press the ED1T swítch on the machíne operator s pane1.
2 Press function key rROG
a
3 Press the ńghtmost soft key next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [DELETE].
-
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 00001
0003 00002
0004 00010
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100
0008 01000
0009 09500
DELETE
F1LE NO. = NAME=
>
ED1T.. ... 11 :55:51
J
F SET F NAME CAN EXEC
I
\
7 Specífy the fıle to be deleted.
When specifyíng the fi1e wíth a fi1e number, type the number and
press soft key [F sET]. When specifying the fıle wíth a fi1e name,
type the name and press soft key [F NAME].
8 Press soft key [EXEC].
The fíle specífıed ín the file number field ís deleted. When a fi1e ís
deleted, the fıle numbers after the deleted fíle are each decremented
by one.
9 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key dísplay shown in
the screen of Fíg. a .
894
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Restrictions
lnputtíng fíle numbers If [F SET] or [O sET] ís pressed wíthout key ínputtíng fıle number and
and program numbers program number, fıle number or program number shows blank. When
wíth keys 0 ís entered for fıle numbers or program numbers, 1 ís displayed.
1/0 devices To use channel0 ,set a device number in parameter No. 102 .
Set the 1/0 device number to parameter No. 112 when canne1 1 ís used.
Set ít to No. 0122 when channel 2 ís used.
sígníficant dígíts For the numeral ínput in the data input area wíth FILE No. and
PROGRAM No., on1y lower 4 dígíts become va1id.
Collatíon When the data protectíon key on the machíne operator s pane1
ís ON, no programs are read from the floppy. They are verifıed agaínst
the contents of the memory of the CNC instead.
ALARM
A1aгm No. Contents
71 Aп invalid file number or program number was entered.
Specífied program number ís not found.
79 Veńfícatíon operatíon found a mísmatch between a program
loaded into memory and the contents of the floppy
The dataset-ready sígnal DR for the input/output device ís
86 tumed off. The no fíle error or duplícate fíle error occurred on
the inpuUoutput device because an invalíd file number, pro-
gram number, or fíle name was entered.
895
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
CNC programs stored in memory can be grouped accordíng to their
names, thus enablíng the output of CNC programs in group units. Sectíon OUTPUTTING A
explaíns the dísplay of a program lístíng for a specífíed group.
PROGRAM L1ST FOR
A SPECIFIED GROUP
Procedure for Outputtíng a Program Líst for a Specífíed Group
P roc ed u re 1 Dísplay the program líst screen for a group of programs, as described
in Sectíon IП
PROGRAM DIRECTORY GROUP 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00020 GEAR-1000 MA1N
00040 GEAR-1000 SUB-1
00200 GEAR-1000 SUB-2
02000 GEAR-1000 SUB-3
>
ED1T 16:52:13
D1R C , C OPRT 1
\ CPRGRM1
2 Press the [ OPRT ] operatíon soft key.
O RH C GROUP 3 Press the ríght most soft key contínuous menu key .
Lѕ-ЕD S
L
J 4 Press the [PUNCH] operatíon soft key.
5 Press the [AL GRP] operation soft key.
C s ııD sтoг cAи ExEc J
The CNC programs in the group for which a seareh ís made are
output. When these programs are output to a floppy dísk, they are
output to a fıle named GROUP.PROGRAM.
896
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen ís
usually selected. For example, the parameter screen ís used for parameter DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
input from or output to an external inpuUoutput unít, whíle the program
ON THE ALL 10 screen ís used for program ínput or output. However, programs,
SCREEN parameters. offset da[a, and macro varíables can a11 be input and output
usíng a single common screen, that is, the ALL IO screen.
READ/PUNCH PROGRAM 01234 N12345
1/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE 0.
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP 61T 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 232C OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
1NTERFACE R5422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASC11
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
,.. .,. MD1 =___ _ 12:34:56
f PRGRM1 PARAM 1 OFFSET1 rMACRO OPRT 1
Fíg. ALL 10 screen when channel3 ís beíng
used for ínput/output
897
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Input/output related parameters can be set on the ALL 10 screen.
Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode. Settíng
lnput/Output Related
Parameters
settíng ínput/output related parameters
Procedure
1 Press functíon key =Y=TEM
2 Press the rightmost soft key next menu key several times.
3 Press soft key [ALL 10] to display the ALL IO screen.
NOTE
1 1f program or floppy is selected in ED1T mode, the program
directory or fioppy screen ís displayed.
2 When the power is first turned on, program ís selected by
default.
READ/PUNCH PROGRAM 01234 N12345
1/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE .
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP 61T 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 232C OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
1NTERFACE R5422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASC11
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
MD1 12:34:56
CPRGRM1 f PARAM 1 rOFFSET1 rMA R01 OPRT _ 1 гј
NOTE
Baud rate ciock, CD check 232C , reset/alarm report, and
the parity bit for parameter No. 134, as we11 as the
communication code, end code, communication protocol,
interface, and SAT command for parameter No. 135 are
displayed only when channel 3 is being used for
input/output.
4 Select the soft key corresponding to the desired type of data program,
parameter, and so forth .
5 Set the parameters correspondíng to the type of ínput/output unít to be
used. Parameter setting is possíble regardless of the mode.
898
в-6зπз ЕNго2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
A program can Ьe ínput and output using the ALL IO screen.
When entering a program usíng a cassette or card, the user must specify lnputtíng and
the ínput fıle containíng the program fıle search .
Outputtíng Programs
Fí1e search
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section

2 Select ED1T mode. A program directory is dísplayed.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
A program dírectory is dísplayed on1y in EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen ís dísplayed.

00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
00010 00001 00003 00002 00555 00999
00062 00004 00005 01111 00969 06666
00021 01234 00588 00020 00040
>
ED1T 14:46:09
f F SRH Г ГPUNCH fDELETE OPRT ]
4 Enter address N.
5 Enter the number of the fıle to be found.
NO
The fırst floppy file ís found.
One of N 1 to N9999
Among the fíles numbered from 1 to 9999, a specífíed fıle ís found.
N-9999
The fıle immediately after that used most recently ís found.
N-9998
When 9998 ís specifıed, the next fi1e ís found. Then, each tíme
a fıle input/output operatíon is performed, N-9999 ís automatícally
ínserted. Thís means that subsequent files can be sequentíally
found automatícally.
Thís state ís canceled by specífying N0, N1 to N9999, or N-9999,
or upon a reset.
899
8. DATA 1NPUTíOUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC I.
1 CAN EXEC J
The specífıed fíle ís found.
Explanatíons
Difference between NO When a fíle already exists in a cassette or card, specífying NO or N1 has
and N1 the same effect. If N1 ís specífıed when there ís no fıle on the cassette or
card, an alarm is íssued because the fırst fíle cannot be found. specífyíng
NO places the head at the start of the cassette or card, regardless of whether
the cassette/card already contaíns fıles. So, no alarm ís íssued in this case.
NO can be used, for example, when a program ís wrítten ínto a new
cassette or card, or when a prevíously used cassette or card ís used once
a11 the fıles ít contaíns have been erased.
A1arm íssue duríng fíle If an alarm fıle search faílure, for example ís generated duríng fıle
search search, the CNC does not íssue an alarm ímmedíately. However, a F/S
alarm No. 086 ís issued íf ínput/output ís subsequently performed on
that fı1e.
Fí1e search usíng N-9999 Instead of sequentially searchíng for files by specífying actual fíle
numbers every time, the user can specify the fvst fıle number, then fmd
the subsequent fıles by specifyíng N-9999. When N-9999 ís specífied,
the tíme required for fıle search can be reduced.
9Π0
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
lnputtíng a program
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described іп Sectíon

2 Select EDIT mode. A program dírectory ís dísplayed.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
A program dírectory is displayed on1y in EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen is dísplayed.
i
00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
00010 00001 00003 00002 00555 00999
00062 00004 00005 01111 00969 06666
00021 01234 00588 00020 00040
E D1T ^ 14:46:09
;1 ;Ј_] F SRH PUNCH DELETE OPRT
4 To specífy a program number to be assígned to an input program,
enter address O, followed by the desíred program number.
If no program number ís specífied, the program number in the fıle oг
on the NC tape is assïgned as ís.
5 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
sтoP cAи εxεc The program ís ínput wíth the program number specífıed in step 4
assígned.
To cancel ínput, press soft key [CAN].
To stop ínput pńor to its completion, press soft ke\ [STOP].
901
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Outputtíng programs
ProCedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, descríbed ín Sectíon

2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory ís displayed.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
A program dírectory ís dísplayed on1y in EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen ís displayed.

00001 N00010
PROGRAΓι1 NUNi. MEMORY CHAR.
USED 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
00010 00001 00003 00002 00555 00999
00062 00004 00005 01 11 1 00969 06666
00021 01234 00588 00020 00040
>_
ED1T 14:46:09
f F SRH Г ГPUNCH DELETE OPRTj
,
\
4 Enter address O.
5 Enter a desíred program number.
If -9999 ís entered, a11 programs ín memory are output.
To output a range of programs, enter OAAAA, O .. The
programs numbered from AAAA to are output.
When bit 4 SOR of parameter No. 3107 for sorted display ís set to 1
on the program library screen, programs are output in order, startíng
from those havíng the smallest program numbers.
6 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC The specifıed program or programs are output. If steps 4 and 5 are
omítted, the currently selected program ís output.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
To stop output príor to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
902
6-63534εN/o2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Deletíng files
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described ín Sectíon

2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory ís dísplayed.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
A program dírectory ís displayed only in EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen ís dísplayed.

00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
00010 00001 00003 00002 00555 00999
00062 00004 00005 01111 00969 06666
00021 01234 00588 00020 00040
>
ED1T 14:46:09
F SRH И ;ј і ι1 rPUNCH 1 rDELETE1 OPRT
L
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
5 Enter a fıle number, from 1 to 9999, to indicate the fíle to be deleted.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
CAN EXEC J The k-th fi1e, specified in step 5, is deleted.
Explanatíons
Fi1e numbers after After deletíon of the k-th fí1e, the prevíous fıle numbers k to n are
deletíon decremented by 1 to k to n-1 .
Before deletíon After deletíon
1 to k-1 1 to k-1
K Delete
k to n k to n-1
Wríte protect Before a fíle can be deleted, the write protect swítch of the cassette must
be set to make the cassette wrítable.
903
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
8. 1 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
lnputting and
Outputting Parameters
lnputtíng parameters
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Sectíon

2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
READ/PUNCH PARAMETER 01234 N12345
1/0 CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE 1S0
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP 61T 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 232C OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF COM CODE ASC11
END CODE EXT COM PROTCOL A
1NTERFACE R5422 SAT COMMAND HOST
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
MD1 12:34:56
C 1 ґ READ 1 PUNCH1 f 1 1
__..,
4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
CAN EXEc The parameters are read, and the INPUT índicator blinks at the
lower right corner of the screen. Upon the completíon of ínput, the
INPUT índicator is cleared from the screen.
To caпcel input, press soft key [CAN].
904
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUTOUTPUT
Outputtíng parameters
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, descňbed іп Sectíon

2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. Tiic screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
READ/PUNCH PARAMETER 01234 N12345
1/0 CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE 150
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP 61T 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 232C OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF COM CODE ASC11
END CODE EXT COM PROTCOL A
1NTERFACE RS422 SAT COMMAND HOST
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
MD1 ..., ,., ... 12:34:56
C 1 READ 1 Г PUNCH1 1 1
\
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
cAN EXEC The parameters are output, and the OUTPUT indicator blínks at the
lower right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
OUTPUT índícator ís cleared from the screen.
To caпcel output, press soft key [CAN].
905
8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT OPERATION в-63534EN/02
Offset data can be input and output usíng the ALL IO screen.
lnputting and
Outputtíng Offset Data
lnputtíng offset data
Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL 10 screen, descńbed in Section

2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. Th сі ι п ınci c fı 1 \ s change as shown
below.

READ/PUNCH OFFSET 01234 N12345
1/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE 1S0
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP B1T 2 FEEDOUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 232C OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF COM CODE ASC11
END CODE EXT COM PROTCOL A
1NTERFACE RS422 SAT COMMAND HOST
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
MD1 .,. ,.. ... .., 12:34:56
C 1 Г READ Г PUNCH1 1 1
4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
CAN EXEC The offset data ís read, and the INPUT índicator blínks at the
lower ńght corner of the screen.
Upon the completion of input, the INPUT índicator ís cleared from
the screen.
To cancel ínput, press soft key [CAN].
906
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
Outputting offset data
ProCedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSEη ι τı the ALL IO screen, descńbed ín Sectíon

2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
READ/PUNCH OFFSET 01234 N12345
1/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE 1S0
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP B1T 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 232C OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF COM CODE ASC11
END CODE EXT COM PROTCOL A
1NTERFACE RS422 SAT COMMAND HOST
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
MD1 12:34:56
1 READ PUNCH1 1 1
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
CAN EXEC The offset data ís output, and the OUTPUT índicator blínks at the
lower ríght corner of the screen. Upon the completíon of output, the
OUTPUT indicator ís cleared from the screen.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
907
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.
Outputtíng Custom
Macro Common
Varíables
Outputtíng custom macro common variables
Procedure 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section

2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
READIPUNCH MACRO 01234 N12345
1/0 CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF
DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE 1S0
BAUDRATE 4800 1NPUT CODE ASC11
STOP 61T 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL 1NPUT E1A NO EOB OUTPUT 1S0 CR
TV CHECK NOTES ON BAUDRATE CLK. 1NNER
CD CHECK 2320 OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY B1T OFF COM CODE ASC11
END CODE EXT COM PROTCOL A
1NTERFACE R S422 sAT COMMAND HOST
O:E1A 1:1S0 >1_
MD1 12:34:56
Г READ І Г PUNCH Г Г 1
\
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
CAN EXEC The custom macro common varíables are output, and the OUTPUT
indícator blinks at the lower ríght corner of the screen. Upon the
completíon of output, the OUTPUT índícator ís cleared from the
screen.
To caпcel output, press soft key [CAN].
NOTE
To input a macro variable, read the desired custom macro
statement as a program, then execute the program.
908
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
O.β The ALL IO screen supports the dísplay of a directory of floppy fíles, as
lnputting and we11 as the input and ou[put of floppy files.
Outputtíng Floppy
Fí1es
Dísplayíng a file directory
Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key next-menu key on the ALL IO
screen, described in Section
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen ís displayed.
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen ís dísplayed only ín EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL 10 screen ís dísplayed.
READ/PUNCH FLOPPY 01234 N12345
>
MD1 12:34:56
F SRH 1 READ 1 Г PUNCH1 DELETE1 1
\ J
5 Press soft key [F sRH].
6 Enter the number of the desíred fi1e, then press soft key [F SET].
CAN EXEC
LFsET 7 Press soft key [EXEC]. A dírectory ís dísplayed, with the specifíed
file uppermost. Subsequent files ín the dírectory can be displayed by
pressíng the page key.
909
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
READ/PUNCH FLOPPY 01234 N12345
No. F1LE NAME Meter VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 ALL.PROGRAM
0003 00001
0004 00002 19
0005 00003 19
0006 00004 19
0007 00005
0008 00010
0009 00020

F SRH
Fi1e No.=2
>2
ED1T t 12:34:56
LJ
CAN EXEC
L FsRH
A directory in which the first file is uppermost can be dísplayed
simply by pressíng the page key. Soft key [F SRH] need not be
pressed.
910
B s35зaFNгo2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
lnputtíng a file
Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key і: next menu key on the ALL IO
screen, descńbed in Sectíon
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is dísplayed.
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen ís dísplayed on1y in EDIT mode. in a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen ís displayed.
READ/PUNCH FLOPPY 01234 N12345
>
M D 1 12:34:56
READ 1 Г PUNCH1 DELETE1 Г 1
ί CF SRH ___ђ,
5 Press soft key [READ].
6 Enter the number of a fıle or program to be input.
F sET o sEY STOP CAN EXEC J
Settíng a fıle number: Enter the number of the desired fi1e, then
press soft key [F SET].
Settíng a program number: Enter the number of the desíred
program, then press soft key [O SET].
7 Press soft key [EXEC].
The specífıed fıle or program is read, and the INPUT indícator
blinks at the lower right corner of the screen. Upon the completíon of
ínput, the INPUT índicator ís cleared from the screen.
911
8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT OPERATION B-в3534EN/02
Outputtíng a fíle
Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key a next menu key on the ALL IO
screen, described ín Sectíon
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen ís dísplayed.
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is dísplayed on1y in EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen ís dísplayed.
READ/PUNCH FLOPPY 01234 N12345
>
MD1 12:34:56
READ 1 Г PUNCHI rDELETE1 1
CF SRH 1
../
5 Press soft key [PUNCH].
6 Enter the number of the program to be output, together with a desíred
1 F 5ET O SET ЅTOP CAN EXEC J
output fíle number.
Setting a fıle number: Enter the number of the desíred fı1e, then
press soft key [F SET].
Settíng a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
7 Press soft key [EXEC].
The specífıed program is output, and the OUTPUT índícator blínks
at the lower ríght corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
output, the OUTPUT índicator ís cleared from the screen.
If no fıle number is specifıed, the program ís wńtten at the end of the
currently registered fıles.
912
в-6з5з4εN/o2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Deletíng a fíle
Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key ј next menu key on the ALL IO
screen, descňbed in Sectíon
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen ís dísplayed.
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is dísplayed only in EDIT mode. In a11 other
modes, the ALL IO screen is dísplayed.
READ/PUNCH FLOPPY 01234 N12345
>
MD1 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH rDELETE1
\
J
5 Press soft key [DELETE].
6 Enter the number of the desíred fı1e, then press soft key [F 8ET].
LF sET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specífied fi1e ís deleted. After the fíle has
been deleted, the subsequent fíles are shífted up.
913
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION в-63534Enu02
By setting the UO channel parameter No. 0020 to 4, fíles on a memoгу
card inserted ínto the memory card ínterface located to the left of the DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
display can be referenced. Dífferent types of data such as part programs,
US1NG A MEMORY
parameters, and offset data on a memory card can also be ínput and output
CARD in text fi1e fonmat.
The major functíons are listed below.
Displayíng a dírectory of stored files
The files stored on a memory card caп be displayed on the directory
screen.
searchíng for a fıle
A search is made for a fi1e on a memory cагd and, íf found, ít is
displayed on the dírectory screen.
Reading a fıle
Text format files can be read from a memory card.
Wrítíng a file
Data such as part programs can be stored to a memory card in text fi1e
format.
Deleting a fi1e
A fi1e can be selected and deleted from a memory card.
CNC
Writing a file
Reading a file 4
Displaying a directory Memory card
searching for a file
Deleting a file
914
B-б353дEN 02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Dísplaying a directory of stored files
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator s pane1.
2 Press functíon key PROG
a
3 Press the ríghtmost soft key next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below ís dísplayed. Usíng
page keys l f l and , the screen can be scrolled.

DIRECTORY M CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 01000 123456 96/07/10
0002 01001 8458 96/07/30
0003 00002 3250 96/07/30
0004 02000 73456 96/07/31
0005 02001 3444 96/07/31
0006 03001 8483 96/08/02
0007 03300 406 96/08/05
0008 03400 2420 96/07/31
0009 03500 7460 96/07/31
PROG 1 1 D1R + 1 OPRT ı
5 Comments relatíng to each fi1e can be dísplayed by pressíng soft key
[D1R+].
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME COMMENT
0001 01000 COMMENT
0002 01001 SUB PROGRAM
0003 00002 12345678
0004 02000
0005 02001
0006 03001 SK1P K
0007 03300 H1 SPEED
0008 03400
0009 03500 TEST PROGRAM
1 D1R + OPRT ı
6 Repeatedly pressing soft key [D1R+] toggles the screen between the
dísplay of comments and the display of sizes аnd dates.
Any comnıent described after the O number in the fíle ís dísplayed.
Up to 18 characters can Ьe dísplayed on the screen.
915
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Searchíng for a fíle
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s panel.
2 Press functíon key PROG
3 Press the rightmost soft key next-menu key .

4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below ís dísplayed.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 01000 123456 96/07/10
0002 01001 8458 96/07/30
0003 00002 3250 96/07/30
0004 02000 73456 96/07/31
0005 02001 3444 96/07/31
0006 03001 8483 96/08/02
0007 03300 406 96/08/05
0008 03400 2420 96/07/31
0009 03500 7460 96/07/31
ı PROG 1 DIR + 1 ı
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Set the number of the desíred fi1e number with soft key [F SRH].
1 F SRH F READ N READ PUNCH DELETE J Then, starl the search by pressíng soft key [EXEC]. If found, the fíle ís
dísplayed at the top of the dírectory screen.
When a search ís made for fíle number 19
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME COMMENT
0019 01000 MA1N PROGRAM
0020 01010 SUBPROGRAM-1
0021 01020 COMMENT
0022 01030 COMMENT
916
6-63534EN/o2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Readíng a fíle
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s panel.
2 Press functíon key PROG.
3 Press the rightmost soft key next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below ís dísplayed.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 01000 123456 96/07/10
0002 01001 8458 96/07/30
0003 00002 3250 96/07/30
0004 02000 73456 96/07/31
0005 02001 3444 96/07/31
0006 03001 8483 96/08/02
0007 03300 406 96/08/05
0008 03400 2420 96/07/31
0009 03500 7460 96/07/31
ı PROG D1R + OPRT
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
` F sRH F READ N READ PUNCH DELETE J
6 To specífy a fíle number, press soft key [F READ]. The screen shown
below is dísplayed.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00001 N00010
No. F1LE NAME COMMENT
0019 01000 MA1N PROGRAM
0020 01010 SUBPROGRAM-1
0021 01030 COMMENT
READ
F1LE NAME=20 PROGRAM No.=120
>
ED1T _ _ 15:40:21
F NAME O SET STOP CAN EXEC
\
7 Enter fıle number 20 from the MDI pane1, then set the fıle number by
pressíng soft key [F SET]. Next, enter program number 120, then set
the program number by pressíng soft key [O SET]. Then, press soft
key [EXEC].
Fí1e number 20 ís registered as 00120 ín the CNC.
Set a program number to register a read fıle with a separate O
number. If no program number is set, the O number in the fíle name
column ís regístered.
917
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
8 To specífy a fíle wíth íts fíle name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6
above. The screen shown below ís dísplayed.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00001 N00010
No. F1LE NAME COMMENT
0012 00050 MA1N PROGRAM
0013 TESTPRO SUB PROGRAM-1
0014 00060 MACRO PROGRAM
READ F1LE NAME =TESTPRO
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
ED1T 15:40:21
EXEC
CF NAME1 O SET STOP CAN

9 To regíster fi1e пame TESTPRO as O 1230, enter file name TESTPRO
from the MDI pane1, then set the fíle name wíth soft key [F NAME].
Next, enter program number 1230, then set the program number with
soft key [O SET]. Then, press soft key [EXEC].
918
в-sз5з4EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Writíng a fiie
PrOCedUre 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s paпe1.
2 Press functíon key PROG
3 Press the ríghtmost soft key ј Ј next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 01000 123456 96/07/10
0002 01001 8458 96/07/30
0003 00002 3250 96/07/30
0004 02000 73456 96/07/31
0005 02001 3444 96/07/31
0006 03001 8483 96/08/02
0007 03300 406 96/08/05
0008 03400 2420 96/07/31
0009 03500 7460 96/07/31
PROG D1R + OPRT 1 ı
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [PUNCH].
F ØRH F READ N READ PUNCH DELETE 7 Enter a desíred O number from the MDI panel, then set the program
number wíth soft key [O SET].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed after the setting shown below has
been made, for example, the fi1e ís wrítten under program number
01?30.
PUNCH F1LE NAME =
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
ED1T _ 15:40:21
F NAME O SET STOP CAN EXEC ,
\
8 In the same way as for O number settíng, enter a desíred fi1e name
from the MDI pane1, then set the fi1e name with soft key [F SET].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed after the setting shown below has
been made, for example, the fíle ís wrítten under program number
01230 and fi1e пame ABCD 12.
ı PUNCH F1LE NAME =ABCD12
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
15:40:21
FNАМЕ 0ЅЕТМ М STOP 1 CAN EXEC
LED1T
919
8. DATA 1NPUT.`OUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Regísteríng the same fíle When a ñ1e havíng the same пame ís already registered in the memory
name card, the exístíng file wí11 be overwrítten.
Writing a11 programs To wńte a11 programs, set program number =-9999. If no fıle пame ís
specifıed ín thís case, fıle name ís used for regístratíon.
Fí1e name restrictíons The following restńctions are ímposed on fıle name settíng:
<Fí1e name settíng> x x x x x x x x . 0
f T
Not longer than 8 Extension not longer
characters than 3 characters
920
B-s3534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Deleting a fíle
PrOCedure 1 Press the EDIT swítch on the machine operator s panel.
2 Press function key PROG
3 Press the rightmost soft key next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 01000 123456 96/07/10
0002 01001 8458 96/07/30
0003 00002 3250 96/07/30
0004 02000 73456 96/07/31
0005 02001 3444 96/07/31
0006 03001 8483 96/08/02
0007 03300 406 96/08/05
0008 03400 2420 96/07/31
0009 03500 7460 96/07/31
PROG D1R + OPRT 1
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Set the number of the desired fıle with soft key [DELETE], then press
1 F 3RH F READ N READ PUNCH DELETE J
soft key [EXEC]. The fíle ís deleted, and the directory screen ís
displayed again.
When file number 21 ís deleted

DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME COMMENT
0019 01000 MA1N PROGRAM
0020 01010 SUBPROGRAM-1
0021 01020 COMMENT
0022 01030 COMMENT
Fi1e name 01020 is deleted.
DIRECTORY M-CARD 00034 N00045
No. F1LE NAME COMMENT
0019 01000 MA1N PROGRAM
0020 01010 SUBPROGRAM-1
0021 01020 COMMENT
0022 01030 COMMENT
Fí1e number 21 ís assígned to the next fíle name.
921
8. DATA OPERATION в-63534EN/02
Batch input/output with a memory card
On the ALL 10 screen, different types of data includíng part programs,
parameters, offset data, pítch error data, custom macros, and workpíece
coordinate system data can be ínput and output usíng a memoгу card; the
screen for each type of data need not be dísplayed for ínput/output.
Data item name
Part program
Parameter
Offset data
Memory card ALL 10 screen Pitch error data
ј Custom macгo
Workpiece coordinate system
data
addítional coordinate systems
PrOCedure 1 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s panel.
2 Press functíon key
3 Press the ríghtmost soft key next-menu key several tímes.
4 Press soft key [ALL 10]. The screen shown below ís displayed.
-
READ/PUNCH PROGRAM 00001 N00001
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 00222 332010 96-04-06
0002 01003 334450 96-05-04
0003 653400 96-05-12
0004 00002 341205 96-05-13
[PROGRAM]
00001 00002 00003 00005 00100 00020
00006 00004 00110 00200 02200 00441
00330
>
ED1T 10:07:37
1 OPRT 1
CPROG PARAM, OFFSET1
J
Upper part : Dírectory of files on the memory card
Lower part : Dircctory of regístered programs
5 With cursor keys and O , the user can choose between upper
part scrollíng and lower part scrolling. An asterísk dísplayed at
the left edge índícates the part for whích scrollíng ís possíble.
t
: Used for memory card fıle dírectory scrollíng.
i : Used for program directory scrollíng.
6 Wíth page keys O and [] , scroll through the fíle directory or
program directory.
922
B-ô3534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Explanations
Each data ítem When thís screen ís dísplayed, the program data ítem is selected. The soft
keys for other screens are dísplayed by pressing the rightmost soft key
next menu key .
P1TCH WORK OPRT ,
LMA CR0
When a data item other than program is selected, the screen dísplays on1y
a fıle d vectory.
A data ítem is índícated, in parentheses, on the títle 1ine.

READ/PUNCH PARAMETER 00001 N00001
No. F1LE NAME S1ZE DATE
0001 00222 32010 96/04/06
0002 01003 4450 96/05/04
0003 653400 96/05/12
0004 00003 4610 96/05/04
0005 00001 4254 96/06/04
0006 00002 750 96/06/04
0007 34453 96/06/04
Program directory Program dírectory dísplay does not match bít 0 NAM of parameter No.
dísplay 3107, or bít 4 SOR of parameter No. 3107.
Usíng each functíon Dísplay the following soft keys with soft key [ OPRT ].
C 1 F READ rN READ 1 rPUNCH 1 DELETE
LFЅRН
The operatíon of each functíon ís the same as oп the directory memorу
card screen. Soft key [O BET], used for program number settíng, and the
PROGRAM NUMBER = índícatíon are not dísplayed for data ítems
other than program.
[F SRH] : Fínds a specífied fıle number.
[F READ] : Reads a specifíed fíle number.
[ P U N C H] : Wrítes a fı1e.
[N READ] : Reads a fıle under a specífıed fıle name.
[DELETE] : Deletes a specífied fıle number.
NOTE
With a memory card, RMT mode operation and the
subprogram ca11 function based on the M198 command
cannot be used.
8. DATA 1NPUT,OUTPUT OPERATION B-s3534EN/o2
Fi1e format and error messages
Format A11 files that are read from and wrítten to a memory card are of text forınat.
The format ís described below.
A fıle starts wíth or LF, followed by the actual data. A fıle always ends
wíth . In a read operation, data between the fırst and the next LF ís
skípped. Each block ends with an LF, not a semicolon ; .
- LF: OA hexadecimal of ASCII code
When a fıle contaíníng lowercase letters, kana characters, and several
specíal characters such as , \, and ís read, those letters and
characters are ígnored.
Example:

00001 MEMORY CARD SAMPLE FILE
G 17 G49 G97
G92
M30

ASCII code is used for ínput/output, regardless of the settíng
parameter ISO/EIA .
Bít 3 of parameter No. 0100 can be used to specify whether the end of
block code EOB is output as LF on1y, or as LF, CR, CR.
E rror messages If an error occurs duríng memory card input/output, a correspondíng error
message is dísplayed.
0028 00003 7382 01-06-14
M-CARD ERROR , x x
F1LE No. = 1 PROGRAM No. =13
>
ED1T 15:40:21
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC

x x x x represents a memory card error code.
924
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Memory Card Error
Codes
Code Meaníng
99 A part preceding the FAT area on the memory card is destroyed.
102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space.
105 No memory card ís mounted.
106 A memory card ís already mounted.
110 The specified directory cannot be found.
111 There are too many files under the root directory to a11ow a
directory to be added.
114 The specified fíle cannot be found.
115 The specified file is protected.
117 The fíle has not yet been opened.
118 The fíle is already open.
119 The fíle is locked.
121 The memoгу card does not have suffícient free space.
122 The specified fíle name is invalíd.
124 The extension of the specifíed file is invalíd.
129 A non corresponding function was specifíed.
130 The specification of a device is invalid.
131 The specificatíon of a pathname ís invalíd.
133 Multiple files are open at the same time.
135 The device ís not formatted.
140 The fíle has the read/write disabled attribute.
925
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02

DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
BY EMBEDDED
ETHERNET
The operatíon of the FTP fıle transfer function ís described below.
FTP Fí1e Transfer
Functíon
A líst of the fıles held on the hard dísk embedded to the host computer ís
dísplayed. Host fíle list dísplay
Procedure
1 Press the function key PROG
2 Press the contínuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key dísplay.
3 Press the [HOST] soft key. The host fíle list screen appears, The
Ethenıet functíons currently avaílable are dísplayed.

о T oооεз
10 QB:ÉEì
]
The upper row dísplays the usable embedded Ethernet function
device.
The embedded port or PCMCIA card is dísplayed.
The lower row displays the usable Etheınet optíon boards. When no
option board ís ínstalled, no ínformatíon ís displayed.
4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key, a líst of the fíles held on the
host computer specifıed wíth the embedded Ethernet port ís
displayed.
926
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
HiJS[ E Ikk k1К i t i нkςł . fit: 3:
ίΦEfпİ TέłέE i ií 1
t i1kГ2 К`з с CT 1
HFа1 El Ω[ 8015 TΩ[[ц ØS
t1θØО2. DAi Eθ1b MORf OІS
Ωf 1З О p
ØОО4 OØ 6?
QFű1 Uíłf 3
Fł[iΩ ΩNΩΩ9
ØΩFł7 01ł14Ч
СО 3B qSfЭÍtì
0809 Ω5Ω? 1
05ьЭ22
ØX 1 05 23
üEł12 0582t1
QQi3 Ω.::П25
0014 f Rí:FMiETFR
в тe τ
g RB: ØQ 1

sü2тсв ,ì aεY
NOTE
Depending on the FTP server software, the number of
díspiayed programs may díffer between the host file líst
screen above and the host file list detail screen described
below.
5 When a list of fíles ís larger than one page, the screen dísplay can be
і
switched usíng the page keys t
6 Press the [UPDATE] soft key to update the screen dísplay.
7 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The host file list detail screen
appears.
927
8. DATA 1NPUT,iOUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
ИО5T fit1. Øä 3 Y:1 έ fiέΣì
ı
9βΣlΣ 1 oaзπ п . ,rоцp 362 Móг 25 2г 17 ØΓº1. AflΓ
ОU0ιJ ---. 362 i4_г ?`í ?: +? É1E 1iF12_bA7
IΣìł8Оa ____._,_.ø....-a. 1 362 lyчr 25 4: C + i λО6
k1EЭFiII 1 - ыp 36? 25 2 г ii7 ïí83βfł7
0885 1 362 M г 25 2: EIï f1βi3Eλβ
ςśОО8 -- 1 raшp 382 25 2: β? 88889
i, ΓGL+p 38? Γlwг ?5 2:ίt7 88199
1 гa пe^r r r,зцtı 382 ff έ ь ηι:ť9? 85028
f1Ø 1 ιia+ngr п цμ 362 σ º. 2: έ 7 85021
UCLD _ _,......_.... . 2 uπeг гG ap 36? h 25 2:07 ű5022
0011 -- 1 a πвr в auп 1468 Ma 25 1 :24 15023
1 ωn r raϋp 52828f2 f 27 ?:27 [ï5fi24
ťiÝ 13 .,,._ _......-____ 1 г>ь_ısrıп г ы зtί , 524288 ł, ?7 4 ?Ј 05025
0818 __ 1 oue 988 Ťi ? 4:47 Pf й1FTξR
[l 1 ίł łβ
10 8000
ı šUETсiЭ iРDRλЕ ,ξ лT_О ј ј t εΐkt:+t τ .= з<
NOTE
The host file list detail screen shown above is an example
of screen display, and information displayed may vary
according to the specification of the FTP server used wíth
the host computer.
Display items
Number of regístered The number of fíles registered in the directory folder of the host
program fíles computer currently connected ís displayed.
Currently connected The number of the host currently connected is displayed.
host
Líst of operatíons
SWITCH This operation switches between normal display and detaíl display.
UPDATE Thís operatíon updates ínformation dísplayed.
STO P Thís operatíon stops [SEARCH] operatíon.
SEARCH Thís operation updates screen ínformation so that a file specífied by íts
fíle number ís placed at the start of the 1íst.
DELETE Thís operatíon deletes a fıle held on the hard dísk embedded to the host
computer.
READ Thís operation reads a file held on the hard disk embedded to the host
computer to the CNC part program storage. Thís soft key ís displayed
on1y when 9 ís set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and the
CNC is placed in the EDIT mode.
928
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT
PUNCH This operatíon outputs a file held in the CNC part program storage to the
hard dísk embedded to the host computer. This soft key is displayed on1y
when 9 is set as the ínput/output device number of the CNC, and the CNC
ís placed ín the EDIT mode.
When a líst of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host
computer is dísplayed, a fíle can be placed at the start of the list by Host fíle search
specífying its fıle number.
Procedure 1 Display the host fıle list screen.
2 Press the [SEARCH] soft key.
3 Type the fıle number of a fıle to be displayed at the start of the list with
the MDI keys.
[Input format]

4 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
5 During search, SEARCH blinks in the lower right corner of the
screen.
A file held on the hard disk embedded to the host computer can be deleted.
Host fíle deletion
P r o c e d u re 1 Dísplay the host fíle líst screen.
2 Press the [DELETE] soft key.
3 Type the fıle number or fıle пame of a file to be deleted, with the MDI
keys.
[Input format]
<fıle number>
or
<fıle name>
4 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
5 Duríng deletíon, DELETE blinks ín the lower ňght corner of the
screen.
NOTE
1 When a file number is used for deletion, only a file displayed
on the host file list screen can be deleted.
2 The information displayed at the right end of the host file list
detail screen is recognized as a file name. So, when
deleting a host file from the host file list detail screen by
specifying its file number, check that a file name is displayed
at the right end of the screen, before specifying the file
number.
8. DATA iNPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
,1 2,1,4 A fíle NC program on the host computer can be read to the CNC
memory. NC program ínput
For the host fíle list screen
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the host file líst screen.
3 Press the [READ] soft key.
4 Type the fíle number or fıle name of an NC program to be ínput, wíth
the MDI keys.
[Input format]
<fíle number>
or
<fíle пame>
5 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
6 During input, INPUT blínks in the lower ńght corner of the screen.
CAUTION
1 1f the CNC memory hoids an NC program that has the same
O number as that of an NC program to be ínput, the NC
program in the CNC memory is overwritten when bít 2 of
parameter No. 3201 ís set to 1.
2 1f an NC program ís input when bít 0 of parameter No. 3201
ís set to 1, ai1 NC programs in the CNC memory are
automaticaily deleted before NC program input.
[Example of use]
When a file wíth the file name held on the hard disk
embedded to the host computer ís to be input to the CNC memory, enter
Note, however, that the O number ínput to the CNC memory
depends on the O number descríbed in the fíle named
> зέiε3cзı. ı ε ; J
S θ Σооіi
suıreн јιαα srnн cгжг εxrc
І І sτtiм
NOTE
When a file is input from this screen to the CNC memory, the
O number descríbed in the file ís input.
930
в-6зηз ENo2 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
For the program screen
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key PROG
3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.
4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Type the O number of an NC program to be input, wíth the MDI keys.
[Input format]

9 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
10 Duıíng ínput, INPUT blínks in the lower ńght corner of the screen.
CAUTION
1 1f the CNC memory holds an NC program that has the same
O number as that of an NC program to be input, the NC
program in the CNC memory is overwritten when bit 2 of
parameter No. 3201 is set to 1.
2 1f an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. 3201
is set to 1, a11 NC programs in the CNC memory are
automatically deleted before NC program input.
NOTE
The valid O number of a file to be input to the CNC memory
is Oxxxx wìth xxxx representing a number onty.
- Ч;1 -
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
8,12,1,5 A file NC program in the CNC memory can be output to the host
computer. NC program output
For the host fíle líst screen
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Dísplay the host fıle líst screen.
3 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
4 Type the O number of an NC program to be output, wíth the MDI
keys.
[Input format]
5 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
6 During output, blínks іп the lower right corner of the
screen.
[Example of use]
When an NC program 00001 in the CNC memory ís to be output to the
hard disk embedded to the host computer, enter 00001.
1 A 3θ:?3

NOTE
An outputted file name is Oxxxx.
For the program screen
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key PROG
3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the continuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key dísplay.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Type the O number of an NC program to be output, wíth the MDI
keys.
[Input format]

932
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
9 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
10 Duńng output, blinks in the lower ńght corner of the
screen.
NOTE
An outputted file name is Oxxxx.
With the FTP fıle transfer functíon, the types of data listed below can Ьe
ínput/output. This subsectíon descńbes the ínput/output method. lnput/output of various
types of data
A NC parameter
B Too1 offset va1ue
C Custom macro vańable
D Workpíece orogín offset va1ue
E Pitch error compensation data
F M code group
G Operatíon hístory data
Parameter ínput
The fıle NC parameter oп the host computer can be ínput to the CNC
memoгу.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key BV3TEA1
3 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
4 Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the right end of the soft key dísplay.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng ínput, INPITI blinks ín the lower ríght corner of the screen.
F ί 1 e n a m e The fixed fíle name PRAMETER ís used.
Fiie format, restrictíons Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
933
8. DATA 1NPUT OUTPUT OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Parameter output
The fíle NC parameter in the CNC memory can be output to the host
computer.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key =УЅTEM
3 Press the contínuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key dísplay.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng output, OUTPUT blínks in the lower ńght corner of the
screen.
F i 1 e n a m e The fixed fıle name PRAMETER ís used.
Fi1e format, restrictions Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
Too1 offset va1ue ínput
The fi1e tool offset value on the host computer can be ínput to the CNC
memory.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
. 2 Press the functíon key
3 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [OFFSET] soft key. The tool compensatíon screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng ínput, INPUT blinks in the lower ńght corner of the screen.
Fí1e name The fíxed file name TOOLOFS ís used.
Fí1e format, restrictions Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
934
B-63534EN02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT,/OUTPUT
Too1 offset va1ue output
The fïle tool offset value in the CNC memory can be output to the host
computer.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
. 2 Press the functíon key Ѕ..ІNе
3 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [OFFSET] soft key. The tool compensatíon screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duríng output, blinks in the lower right corner of the
screen.
Fí1e name The fixed fíle name TOOLOFS ís used.
FiIe format, restrictions Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
Workpiece origín offset value ínput
The fıle workpiece origín offset va1ue on the host computer can be input
to the CNC memorу.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
. 2 Press the functíon key ..
3 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [WORK] soft key. The workpíece coordínate system setting
scτeeп appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duríng ínput, INPUT blínks ín the lower ríght corner of the screen.
F i 1 e n a m e The fixed f ile name WORKOFS ís used.
Fí1e format, restrictions Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
935
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION в-sзsз4εwoг
Workpíece origín offset value output
The fıle workpíece origin offset va1ue in the CNC memory can Ьe output
to the host computer.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
тЅѕ, 2 Press the functíon key ЅЄ ТЅє
3 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
4 Press the [WROK] soft key. The workpíece coordínate system settíng
screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 During output, blínks in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
Fi1e name The fıxed fíle name WORKOFS ís used.
Fí1e format, restríctíons Refer to the operator s mаnual of each CNC.
Pitch error compensatíon ínput
The f 1e pitch enror compensation on the host computer can Ьe input to
the CNC memory.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key ЅТЅТEM
3 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
4 Press the [PITCH] soft key. The pítch error setting screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng ínput, INPUT blínks in the lower-ńght corner of the screen.
F i 1 e n a m e The fıxed fıle name PITCH is used.
Fí1e format, restrictions Refer to the operator s mаnual of each CNC.
936
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Pítch error compensatíon output
The fıle pitch error compensation in the CNC memory can be output to
the host computer.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key Y TEM
3 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [PITCH] soft key. The pítch error settíng screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng output, OUTPUT blinks in the lower right corner of the
screen.
F i 1 e n a m e The fíxed fïle name PITCH ís used.
File format, restrictions Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
M code group ínput
The fíle M code group on the host computer can be input to the CNC
memory.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key gY=TEμ
3 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. The M code group settíng screen
appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng input, INPUT blinks in the lower ńght corner of the screen.
Fí1e name The fıxed file name M CODE is used.
Fi1e format, restríctíons Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
937
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
M code group output
The fıle M code group in the CNC memory can be output to the host
computer.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key sYBTEiA ,
3 Press the contínuous menu key at the right end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. The M code group settíng screen
appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng output, OUTPUT blínks in the lower ríght corner of the
screen.
Fí1e name The fıxed file name M CODE ís used.
Fí1e format, restrictions Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
Operation hístory data ínput
The fíle operatíon hístory data on the host computer can be input to the
CNC memory.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDTΓ mode.
2 Press the functíon key sУЅТЕM
3 Press the contínuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key dísplay.
4 Press the [OPEHIS] soft key. The operatíon history screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the contínuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [READ] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 During input, INPUT blinks іп the lower right corner of the screen.
Fí1e name The fixed file name HISTORY ís used.
Fí1e format, restríctíons Refer to the operator s manual of each CNC.
938
β-6353dEN 02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Operatíon hístory data output
The file operatíon hístory data in the CNC memory can Ьe output to the
host computer.
Procedure 1 P1ace the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Press the functíon key ØVØ
3 Press the continuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key display.
4 Press the [OPEHIS] soft key. The operatíon hístory screen appears.
5 Press the [ OPRT ] soft key.
6 Press the continuous menu key at the ńght end of the soft key display.
7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
8 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
9 Duńng output, OUTPUT blínks in the lower ríght corner of the
screen.
Fí1e name The fixed ŕıle name HISTORY is used.
Fí1e format, restríctíons Refer to the operator s mаnual of each CNC.
The host computer to whích the FTP fıle transfer function attempts to
make a connectíon as the current communicatíon destínatíon can be
Checking and changing
checked.
of the connectíon host
Procedure
1 Press the functíon key PROG
2 Press the contínuous menu key at the ríght end of the soft key dísplay.
3 Press the [CONECT] soft key. The connectíon host change screen
appears. The Ethernet functions currently avaílable are displayed.
939
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-63534EN/02
S Ø TØΣа
ј
The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet functíon
device.
The embedded port or PCMCIA card ís dísplayed.
The lower row dísplays the usable Ethernet optíon boards. When no
optíon board ís ínstalled, no information ís displayed.
4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key, a líst of the connectíon host
computers specifıed wíth the embedded Ethernet port ís displayed.
If the usable embedded Ethernet function device ís the PCMCIA card,
the [PCMCIA] soft key ís dísplayed instead of the [EMBEDD] soft
key. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key, a list of the connection
host computers specifıed wíth the PCMCIA Ethernet card ís
dísplayed.
cc εcτ ьØт
21
áØk , ; 192. 1Ćıű. І. λãы
F łi ł1F : FØttς
ěí1 3N G pTtt ØO6Rf 1 FAGT 19/4I Ўfi ØíPEä1ϊ ε.
192. 8. Ѕ. 151
ıыrt

21
1у г. 3λз . 1. 152
τıε ;т
ıe вы: a
940
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
NOTE
The title of the host computer that ís the current
communícatíon destinatíon of the data server board is
displayed in reverse vídeo.
5 The connected host can be changed by pressíng the [CON-1],
[CON-2], or [CON-3] soft key.
Dísplay ítems
Port number, 1P address, Those values that are set on the Ethernet parameter settíng screen are
user name, logín D1R displayed.
Líst of operatíons
CON-1 Thís operatíon changes the connected host to host 1.
CON-2 This operatíon changes the connected host to host 2.
CON-3 This operation changes the connected host to host 3.
941
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
9 EDITING PROGRA MS
General This chapter descríbes how to edit programs registered in the CNC.
Editing includes the insertion, modifícation, deletion, and replacement of
words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic
insertion of sequence numbers. The extended part program edítíng
function can copy, move, and merge programs. Thís chapter also
descríbes program number search, sequence number search, word search,
and address search, whích are performed before editing the program.
Registration
Edíting
1 Program number search: See
Search for part 2 Sequence number search: See
of program to be 3 Word search: See
edited 4 Address search: See
1 lnserting, alteńng, and deleting a word: See to
1 n serting, altering, 2 Replacing words and addresses: See
and deleting 3 Deletíng blocks: See
programs 4 Copyíng, moving, and merging programs: See and
5 Deleting programs: See
,
942
в-sзsзaEгv o2 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
This sectíon outlínes the procedure for insertíng, modífyíng, and deleting
a word in a program regístered in meınory.
1NSERTING,
ALTERING AND
DELETING A WORD
Procedure for ínsertíng, alteríng and deletíng a word
1 Select ED1T mode.
2 Press PROG
3 Select a program to be edíted.
If a program to be edited is selected, perform the operatíon 4.
If a program to be edited is not selected, search for the program
number.
4 Search for a word to be modífıed.
Scan method
Word search method
5 Perform aп operatíon such as altering, insertíng, or deleting a word.
Explanatíon
Concept of word and A word ís an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the
edítíng unít concept of word is ambiguous.
So the edítíng unít ís consídered here.
The editíng unit ís a unit subject to alteratíon or deletion in one operatíon.
In one scan operation, the cursor indicates the start of an edíting unit.
Aп ínsertion is made after an edítíng unit.
Defınítíon of edítíng unít
i Program portíon from an address to ímmediately before the next
address
ii An address is an alphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=,or ; EOB .
Accordíng to thís defínítion, a word ís an edítíng unít.
The word word, when used in the descriptíon of edíting, means an
editing unit according to the precise defınítíon.
WARNING
The user cannot continue program execution after altering, inserting, or deleting data of the
program by suspending machining in progress by means of an operation such as a single block
stop or feed hold operatìon during program execution. 1f such a modification is made.. the
program may not be executed exactly according to the contents of the program displayed on
the screen after machinìng is resumed. So, when the contents of inemory are to be modified
by part program editing, be sure to enter the reset state or reset the system upon completion
of editing before executìng the program.
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-sзsз4εwo2
A word can be searched for by merely movíng the cursor through the text
scanníng , Ьy word search, or Ьy address search. Word Search
Procedure for scanníng a program
1 Press the cursor key -
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor ís
displayed at a selected word.
2 Press the cursor key

The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; the cursor ís
dísplayed at a selected word.
Example When is scanned

P rogram 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N01234
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;
ıó
3 Holding down the cursor key ui cans words
continuously.
4 The fırst word of the next block ís searched for when the cursor key
,
is pressed.
5 The first word of the previous block is searched for when the cursor
key ís pressed.
6 Holding down the cursor key or moves the cursor to the
head of a block contínuously.
PAGE 7 Pressing the page key displays the next page and searches for
the first word of the page.
8 Pressíng the page key dísplays the prevíous page and searches
PAGE
for the fírst word of the page.
9 Holdíng down the page key or dísplays one page after
FAüE
another.
9Ø
в-6з5з4EN 02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Procedure for searchíng a word
I;лaпіμle of Śeяrching for S12
\
PROGRAM 00050 N01234 ı
N01234 is being
00050 ; searched for/
; scanned currently.
S12; S12 is searched
N56789 M03 : for.
M02 ;
0
1 Key in address
2 Key іп 1 2
S 12 cannot be searched for íf on1y S 1 ís keyed in.
S09 cannot be searched for by keying in on1y S9.
To search for S09, be sure to key in S09.
3 Pressíng the [SRH. ] key starts search operatíon.
Upon completion of search operation, the cursor ís dísplayed at S 12.
Pressíng the [SRHT] key rather than the [SRH.[] key performs search
operatíon in the reverse dírection.
Procedure for searchíng an address
Eкaіnple of Searching for Лí03
\
PROGRAM 00050 N01234
N01234 is being 00050 ;
searched for/
; scanned currently.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 : M03 is searched
M02 ; for.

1 Key іп address M
ł
2 Press the [SRH ј-] key.
Upon completion of search operation, the cursor is dísplayed at M03.
Pressíng the [SRHT] key rather than the [] key performs search
operatíon in the reverse dírection.
A1arm
A1arm number Description
71 The word or address beíng searched for was not found.
945
1
1
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. Thís function is called
Heading a Program heading the program poínter. Thís section describes the three methods
for headíng the program pointer.
Procedure for Heading a Program
Method 1
1 Press when the program screen is selected in EDIT mode.
When the cursor has returned to the start of the program, the contents
of the program are dísplayed from íts start on the screen.
Method 2 Search for the program number.
1 Press address I O l,when a program screen ís selected in the
MEMORY or ED1T mode.
2 Input a program number.
3 Press the soft key [O SRH].
Method 3 1 Select [MEMORY] or [ED1T] rnodc.
2 Press
3 Press the [ OPRT ] kev.
4 Press the [REW1NDj ke .
946
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS

lnserting a Word
Procedure for insertíng a word
1 Search for or scan the word ímmediately before a word to be ínserted.
2 Key in an address to be inserted.
3 Key in data.
4 Press the key.
ExamPle of lnsertíng T15
Procedure 1 Search for or scan Z1250.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ; ís
N01234 ; i searched for/
S12 ; scanned.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

σ
2 Key ín 1
3 Press the NSER7 key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N01234 T15 ; -- T15 is ínserted.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

947
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02

Alteríng a Word
Procedure for alteríng a word
1 Search for or scan a word to Ьe altered.
2 Key ín an address to be inserted.
3 Key ín data.
4
Press
k

e
t
y.
he ЕЈ
Example of changíng T15 to M15
Procedure 1 Search for or scan T15.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ; T15 ís searched
N01234 ; for/scanned.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

2 Key in 1 5
3 PresS the пιтεR key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N1234 M15 ; s T15 is changed to
S12 ; M15.
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
/b
948
в-sз5з4Eгv 02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS

Deleting a Word
Procedure for deleting a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted.
2 Press the key.
Exampie of deletíng
Procedure 1 Search for or scan
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ; is
N 01234 M15 ; searched for/
S12 ; scanned.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

2 Press the key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N01234 M15 ; is deleted.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;
ıb
949
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
A block or blocks can be deleted ín a program.
DELETING BLOCKS
The procedure below deletes a block up to íts EOB code; the cursor
advances to the address of the next word. Deleting a B1ock
Procedure for deletíng a block
1 Search for or scan address N for a block to be deleted.
2 Key ín εoв
3 Press the DELETE
Example of deletíng a block of N01234
Procedure 1 Search for or scan N01234.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
1 ; N01234 is
searched for S12 ;
scarıned.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

2 Key in EOB
3 Press the oE ETE key.
1
Program 00050 N01234
B1ock containing
00050 N01234 has
S12 ; been deleted.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

4 0
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
The blocks from the currently dísplayed word to the block wíth a specífied
sequence number can be deleted. Deleting Multíple
Blocks
Procedure for deleting multipie blocks
1 Search for or scan a word ín the fírst block of a portion to be deleted.
2 Key in address
3 Key ín the sequence number for the last block of the portion to be
deleted.
4 Press the E ETE key.
Example of deletíng blocks from a block contaíníng N01234 to a block contaíníng N56789
Procedure 1 Search for or scan N01234.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
M15 ; N01234 ís
S12 ; searched for/
scanned. N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

D
2 Key in []N 6 7
,
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
M15
Underlined S12 ;
part is de-
N 56789 M03 leted.
M02 ;

3 Press the key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
Blocks from block
M02 ; containing
N01234 to block
contaíníng
N56789 have
been deleted.
951
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-6з5з4εN/o2
When memory holds multíple programs, a program can be searched for.
There are three methods as follows. PROGRAM NUMBER
SEARCH
Procedure for program number search
Method 1 1 Scicct ED1T or MEMORY mode.
2 Press PROG to display the program screen.
3 Key ín address O
4 Key in a program number to be searched for.
5 Press the [O SRH] key.
6 Upon completíon of search operatíon, the program number searched
for is dísplayed in the upper right corner of the CRT screen
If the program is not found , P/S alarm No. 71 occurs.
Method 2 1 Select ED1T or MEMORY mode.
2 Press PROG to dísplay the program screen.
3 Press the [O S R H] key.
In thís case, thc next program in the dírectory ís searched for..
Method 3 Thís method searches for the program number 0001 to 0015
corresponding to a signal on the machíne tool side to start automatic
operatíon. Refer to the relevant manual prepared by the machine tool
builder for detailed ínformatíon oп operation.
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Set the reset state 1
The reset state ís the state where the LED for índícatíng that
automatíc operatíon ís in progress is off. Refer to the relevant
manual of the machine tool buílder.
3 Set the program number selectíon sígnal on the machíne tool side to a
number from 01 to 15.
If the program corresponding to a sígnal on the machíne tool
síde ís not regístered, P/S alarm No. 059 ís raísed.
4 Press the cycle start button.
When the sígnal oп the machíne tool side represents 00,
program number search operation is not performed.
A1arm No. Contents
79 The program wìth the selected number cannot be searched
during external program number search.
71 The specified program number was not found during
program number search.
952
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Sequence number search operatíon ís usually used to search for a
sequence number ín the middle of a program so that executíon can be SEQUENCE NUMBER
started or restarted at the block of the sequence number.
SEARCH
Example Sequence number 02346 іл a program 00002 ís
searched for.
Program
00001 ;
N01234 ;
S12 ;
Selected program 00002 ; This section is
N02345 ; searched startíng at
Target sequence N02346 ; the begínníng.
number is found. Search operation is
00003 ; performed on1y wíthin a
program.
Procedure for sequence number search
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Press P oc
3 If the program contaíns a sequence number to be searchedfor,
perform the operations 4 to 7 below.
If the program does not contain a sequence number to be searched
for,select the program number of the program that contains the
sequence number to be searched for.
4 Key in address ON .
5 Key in a sequence number to be searched for.
6 Press the [N SRH] key.
7 Upon completion of search operatíon, the sequence number searched
for ís dísplayed in the upper right corner of the CRT screen.
If the specified sequence number is not found ín the program currently
selected. P/S alarm No. 060 occurs.
953
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Operatíon duríng Search Those blocks that are skípped do not affect the CNC. Thís means that the
data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does
not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values.
So, in the first block where executíon ís to be started or restarted by using
a sequence number search command, be sure to enter required M, S, and
T codes and coordínates. A block searched for by sequence number
search usually represents a poínt of shifting from one process to another.
When a block in the middle of a process must be searched for to restart
executíon at the block, specífy M, S, and T codes, G codes, coordínates,
and so forth as requíred from the MDI after closely checking the machíne
tool and NC states at that poínt.
Checking duríng search During search operatíon, the following checks are made:
Optíonal block skip
P/S alarm No. 003 to 010
Límítations
searchíng ín During sequence number search operatíon, M98Pxxxx subprogram ca11
sub program ís not executed. So a P/S alarm ís raísed if an attempt ís made
to search for a sequence number in a subprogram called by the program
currently selected.
Main program Subprogram
01234 ЛО5678
N8888 8
M98 P5678 ;
- M99 ;
1f an attempt is made to search for N8888 in the example above, aп alarm is raised.
A1arm
Number Contents
60 Command sequence number was not found in the se-
quence number search.
954
в-6зsз4εN/o2 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Programs regístered in memory can be deleted,eíther one program by one
program or a11 at once. A1so, More than one program can Ьe deleted by DELETING
specífyíng a range.
PROGRAMS
9,5,1 A program regístered in memory caп be deleted.
Deletíng One Program
Procedure for deletíng one program
1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 Press PROG to dísplay the program screen.
3 Key in address 0 .
4 Key іп a desíred program number.
5 Press the key.
The program with the entered program number is deleted.
A11 programs regístered in menıπry caii he delcted.
Deleting A11 Programs
Procedure for deleting a11 programs
1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 Press PROG to dísplay the program screen.
3 Key in address O
4 Key in 9999.
5 Press edit key to delete a11 programs.
955
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-s3534εNıo2
Programs wíthín a specífied range in memory are deleted.
Deletíng More than
One Program by
Specífyíng a Range
Procedure for deletíng more than one program by specífyíng a range
1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 Press to dísplay the program screen.
3 Enter the range of program numbers to be deleted wíth address and
numeric keys in the followíng format:
oXXXX,oYYYY
where XXXX is the starting number of the programs to be deleted and
YYYY is the endíng number of the programs to be deleted.
4 Press edit key to delete programs No. XXXX to No. YYYY.
956
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Wíth the extended part program edíting functíon, the operatíons descńbed
EXTENDED PART below can be performed usíng soft keys for programs that have been
registered ín memory.
PROGRAM EDITING
Followíng edítíng operatíons are avaílable :
FUNCTtON - A11 or part of a program can be copied or moved to another program.
One program can be merged at free posítíon into other programs.
A specífíed word or address in a program can be replaced wíth another
word or address.
957
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION 6-63534E N/02
A new program can be created by copying a program.
Copyíng an Entíre
Program
Fíg. Copyíng aп Entíre Program
In Fig. , the program with program number xxxx ís copied to a newly
created program wíth program number yyyy. The program created by
copy operatíon ís the same as the oriáínal program except the program
number.
Procedure of copyíng an entíre program
1 Enter the ED1T mode.
2 Press functíon key PROG
C C C,oPеT J 3 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
L C
aσσσσσ
Continuous Ј 4 Press the continuous menu key.
menu key
C C C ς εx-εoтј 5 Press soft key [EX EDT].
aσσσ σσ
6 Check that the screen for the program to be copied ís selected
ςсoPх C c
and press soft key [COPY].
aσσσ σσ
7 Press soft key [ALL]. C L C C ALl
aσσσ σσ
8 Enter the number of the new program with on1y numeric keys and
Numeríc keys 0 0
press theІ NPU1j key.
[ C εxεС J
9 Press soft key [EXEC]. aσσσσσ
958
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
A new program can be created by copying part of a program.
Copyíng Part of a
Program Before copy After copy
oXXXx oxXXX ovvvv
A copy A LB

в в
c c
Fig. Copyíng Part of a Program
In Fíg. , part B of the program with program number xxxx ís copíed
to a newly created program wíth program number yyyy. The program for
whích an editíng range ís specífíed remains unchanged after copy
operatíon.
Procedure for copyíng part of a program
1 Perform steps 1 to 6 іп
2 Move the cursor to the start of the range to be copied and press soft key
эc C c
[CRSR- ].
a 0 C 0 0 0
3 Move the cursor to the end of the range to be copied аnd press soft key
εasq -eπq C

[ CRSR] or [ BTTM] in the latter case, the range to the end of the
program is copied regardless of the posítíon of the cursor . a00000
4 Enter the number of the new program wíth on1y numeric keys and
Numeric keys 0 press the key.
5 Press soft key [EXEC].
C LC
a00000
959
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
A new program can be created by movíng part of a program.
Movíng Part of a
Program
Fíg. Movíng Part of a Program
In Fíg. , part B of the program wíth program number xxxx ís moved
to a newly created program wíth program number yyyy; part B ís deleted
from the program wíth program number xxxx.
Procedure for moving part of a program
1 Perform steps 1 to 5 ín
2 Check that the screen for the program to be moved ís selected and
Cмоvε J
ι press soft key [MOVE].
aσσσσσ
3 Move the cursor to the start of the range to be moved and press soft
C J key [CRSRti].
aσσσσσ
4 Move the cursor to the end of the range to be moved and press soft key
[ CRSR] or [ BTTM] ín the latter case, the range to the end of the
C C-casql вπ J
ιC program ís copied regardless of the posítíon of the cursor .
aσσσσσ
5 Enter the number of the new program wíth only numeric keys and
press the иP, key.
Numeric keys Q Q
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
C C ιC
a σ σ σ σσ
960
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Another program can be ínserted at an arbítrary positíon ín the current
program. Mergíng a Program
Before merge After merge
Oxxxx Оyyyy Oxxxx OYYYY
L A B Mergε A B

C B
Merge
location ς
Fig. Merging a program at a specífíed locatíon
In Fíg. , the program wíth program number XXXX ís merged wíth the
program with program number YYYY. The oYYYY program remains
unchanged after merge operatíon.
Procedure for mergíng a program
1 Perform steps 1 to 5 ín
ι
1 2 Check that the screen for the program to be edíted is selected and press
мЕRG
soft key [MERGE].
cooσг o
3 Move the cursor to the posítíon at whích another program is to be
inserted and press soft key [ CRSR] or [--61TM ] іn the latter case, ι
the end of the current program is displayed .
ся5 .:Θπм
c O 0 σσo 4 Enter the number of the program to be inserted with on1y numeríc
keys and press the 1NPU key.
5 Press soft key [EXEC].
Numeric keys The program wíth the number specified in step 4 ís ínserted before the
cursor positioned in step 3.
L С
c00000
961
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02

Supplementary
Explanation for
Copyíng, Moving and
Merging
Explanations
settíng an edítíng range The settíng of an editíng range start poínt wíth [CRSR ] can be changed
freely until an edítíng range end poínt ís set wíth [tiCRSR] or [].
If an edítíng range start poínt ís set after an edítíng range end poínt, the
editing range must be reset startíng wíth a start poínt.
The setting of an edítíng range start poínt and end poínt remaíns valíd untíl
an operatíon ís performed to invalídate the settíng.
One of the followíng operatíons ínvalídates a settíng:
Aп edít operatíon other than address search, word search/scan, and
search for the start of a program ís performed after a start point or end
poínt is set.
Processíng ís returned to operatíon selectíon after a start poínt or end
point ís set.
Wíthout specífyíng a In copyíng program and movíng program, íf [EXEC] is pressed wíthout
program number specífyíng a program number after an editing range end poínt ís set, a
program wíth program number 00000 ís registered as a work program.
This 00000 program has the following features:
The program can be edited in the same way as a general program.
Do not run the program.
If a copy or move operation ís newly performed, the previous
ínformatíon ís deleted at executíon tíme, and newly set ínformation
a11 or part of the program is reregístered. In merge operatíon, the
previous informatíon ís not deleted. However, the program, when
selected for foreground operation, cannot be reregístered ín the
background. A BP/S alarm No. 140 ís raised. When the program ís
reregistered, a free area ís produced. Delete such a free area wíth the
aεsετ key.
When the program becomes unnecessary, delete the program by a
normal edíting operatíon.
Edítíng when the system When the system is waitíng for a program number to be entered,
waítíng for a program no edit operatíon can be performed.
number to be entered
Limitatíons
Number of dígits for If a program number ís specífíed by 5 or more dígíts, a format error ís
program number generated.
962
8-63534EN o2 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
A1arm
A1arm пo. Contents
70 Memory became insufficient whiie copying υr inserting
a program. Copy πr insertion is terminated.
The power was interrupted during copying, moving, or
ìnserting a program and memory used for editing must
101 Ьe cleaced. When this alarm occurs, press the key
while pressing function key .
Πnіy the proqram hning sditod is λelPteг1
96;
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Replace oпe or more specífíed words.
Replacement can be applied to a11 occurrences or just one occurrence of Replacement of
specified words or addresses in the program.
Words and Addresses
Procedure for hange of words or addresses
1 Perform steps 1 to 5 in
L 2 Press soft key [CHANGE].
C C,,: J
a00000
3 Enter the word or address to be replaced.
C C ιC-= 4 Press soft key [BEFORE].
a00000
5 Enter the new word or address. ι
і C
6 Press soft key [AFTER].
ι
СSKіP i_EXEС C 7 Press soft key [EXEC] to replace a11 the specified words or addresses
a 0 0 after the cursor.
Press soft key [1 EXEC] to search for and replace the fírst occurrence
of the specifíed word or adress after the cursor.
Press soft key [sK1P] to on1y search for the fírst occurrence of the
specífíed word or address after the cursor.
EXamples
0
0
Replace X100 wíth Y200
[CHANGE] 0 0 [BEFORE] Y 2
, ,
[AFTER][EXEC]
Replace X100Y200 wíth
[CHANGE] X 1 0 2 0 0 [BEFORE]
X30

3 0 [AFTER][EXEC]
0
Replace 1F wíth WH1LE
[CHANGE] F [BEFORE] W H 1 L E [AFTER]
,
[εxεC]
Replace X wíth ,C10
[CHANGE] X [BEFORE] C 1 0 [AFTER][EXEC]
96
в εзsзaEw-o2 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Explanatíon
Replacíng custom The followíng custom macro words are replaceable:
macros IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, BPRNT, DPRINT, POPEN, PCLOS
The abbreviations of custom macro words can Ьe specífıed.
When abbreviatíons are used, however, the screen dísplays the
abbreviatíons as they are key ínput, even after soft key [BEFORE] and
[AFTER] are pressed.
Restríctíons
The number of Up to 15 characters can be specífíed for words before or after replacement.
characters for Síxteen or more characters cannot Ьe specífıed.
replacement
The characters for Words before or after replacement must start wíth a character representíng
replacement an format error occurs.
965
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Unlike ordínary programs, custom macro programs are modífïed,
ínserted, or deleted based on edíting uníts. EDITING OF
Custom macro words can be entered in abbrevíated form.
CUSTOM MACROS Comments can be entered in a program.
Refer to the for the comments of a program.
Explanatíons
Editíng unít When edítíng a custom macro already entered, the user can move the
cursor to each editíng unít that starts wíth any of the following characters
and symbols:
a Address
Ь located at the start of the left síde of a substítutíon statement
c /, ,=, and ;
d Fírst character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, POPEN, BPRNT,
DPRNT and PCLOS
On the screen, a blank ís placed before each of the above characters and
symbols.
Example Head positíons where the cursor is placed
N001 X 100
1 123s
N002 /2 X[12/ 3]s
N003 X SQRT[ 3/3 [Ø]]1
N004 X 2 Z 1
N005 5 =1 10Ś
IF[ 1NE0] GOT0103
WHILE[ 2LE5] DO1i
[200 2] = 2 10
2 = 2i
ÉND1Ś
Abbreviatíons of custom When a custom macro word ís altered or inserted, the fírst two characters
macro word or more can replace the entire word.
Namely,
WHILE WH GOTO --i GO XOR XO AND i AN
SIN SI ASIN AS COS CO ACOS > AC
TAN э TA ATAN > AT SQRT -> SQ ABS -> AB
BCD BC BIN > BI FIX > FI FUP э FU
ROUND -> RO END > EN EXP > EX THEN -> TH
POPEN -> PO BPRNT > BP DPRNT > DP PCLOS - PC
Example Keying in
WH [AB [ 2 ] LE RO [ 3 ] ]
has the same effect as
WHILE [ABS [ 2 ] LE ROUND [ 3 ] ]
The program ís also displayed in thís way.
966
в-sзsзaEN o2 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Edíting a program whíle executing another program ís called background
BACKGROUND edíting. The method of edítíng is the same as for ordínary edítíng
foreground edítíng .
EDITING A program edited in the background should be registered іп foreground
program memory Ьy performíng the followíng operatíon:
Duńng background edítíng, a11 programs cannot be deleted at once.
Procedure for background editing
1 Enter ED1T or MEMORY mode.
Memory mode is allowed even while the program ís being executed.
2 Press function key IPROGI .
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ], then press soft key [BG EDT].
The background edítíng screen is dísplayed PROGRAM
BG EDIT ís dísplayed at the top left of the screen .
4 Edít a program on the background edítíng screen in the same way as
for ordínary program edítíng.
5 After edítíng ís completed, press soft key [ OPRT ], then press soft
key [BG EDT]. The edíted program is regístered in foregгound
program memory.
Explanatíon
Alarms duríng Alarms that may occur duríng background editing do not affect
background edítíng foreground operation. Conversely, alarms that may occur duńng
foreground operation do not affect background editíng. In background
edíting, íf an attempt is made to edít a program selected for foreground
operatíon, a BP/S alarm No. 140 is raísed. On the other hand, íf an
attempt is made to select a program subjected to background edíting
duríng foreground operatíon by means of subprogram calling or program
number search operatíon usíng an external sígnal , a P/S alarm Nos. 059,
078 ís raísed in foreground operatíon. As with foreground program
edíting, P/S alarms occur in background editíng. However, to distinguish
these alarms from foreground alarms, BP/S ís dísplayed in the data ínput
line on the background edítíng screen.
967
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-s3534EN/o2
The password functíon bit 4 NE9 of parameter No. 3202 caп Ьe locked
usíng parameter No. 3210 PASSWD and parameter No. 3211
PASSWORD
KEYWD to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999. In the locked state,
FUNCTION parameter NE9 cannot Ьe set to 0. In this state, program Nos. 9000 to 9999
cannot Ьe modífíed unless the correct keyword ís set.
A locked state means that the va1ue set in the parameter PASSWD díffers
from the value set in the parameter KEYWD. The values set in these
parameters are not dísplayed. The locked state is released when the value
already set in the parameter PASSWD ís also set in parameter KEYWD.
When 0 ís displayed in parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD ís not
set.
Procedure for locking and unlocking
Locking 1 Set the MDI mode.
2 EпaЬ1e parameter writíng. At this time, P/S alarm No. 100 ís íssued
on the CNC.
3 Set parameter No. 3210 PASSWD . At thís tíme, the locked state ís
set.
4 Dísable parameter writíng.
5 Press the REвEт key to release the alarm state.
Unlocking 1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter wrítíng. At thís tíme, P/S alarm No. 100 ís issued
on the CNC.
3 In parameter No. 3211 KEYWD , set the same va1ue as set in
parameter No. 3210 PASSWD for lockíng. At thís time, the locked
state ís released.
4 Set bít 4 NE9 of parameter No. 3202 to 0.
5 Dísable parameter writíng.
6 Press the RES т key to release the alarm state.
7 Subprograms from program Nos. 9000 to 9999 can now be edíted.
Expianations
Settíng parameter The locked state ís set when a va1ue ís set in the parameter PASSWD.
PASSW D However, note that parameter PASSWD can be set on1y when the locked
state ís not set when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD . If an
attempt ís made to set parameter PASSWD in other cases, a warníng ís
gíven to índicate that writíng ís dísabled. When the locked state ís set
when PASSWD = 0 and PASSWD = KEYWD , parameter NE9 ís
automatically set to 1. If an attempt ís made to set NE9 to 0, a warníng
ís given to índicate that wńtíng ís dísabled.
Changíng parameter Parameter PASSWD caп be changed when the locked state is released
PASSWD when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD . After step 3 in the
procedure for unlocking, a new va1ue can be set in the parameter
PASSWD. From that tíme on, thís new va1ue must be set ín parameter
KEYWD to release the locked state.
968
в sзsзaεrvıo2 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Settíng 0 ín parameter When 0 ís set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 ís displayed, and
PASSWD the password functíon ís dísabled. In other words, the password functíon
can Ьe disabled by eíther not settíng parameter PASSWD at a11, or by
setting 0 in parameter PASSWD after step 3 of the procedure for
unlocking. To ensure that the locked state ís not entered, care must be
taken not to set a va1ue other than 0 ín parameter PASSWD.
Re lockíng After the locked state has been released, ít can be set agaín by setting a
different va1ue in parameter PASSWD, or by turníng the power to the NC
off then on agaín to reset parameter KEYWD.
CAUTION
Once the locked state is set, parameter NE9 cannot be set
to 0 and parameter PASSWD cannot be changed until the
locked state is released or the memory a11 clear operation
is performed. Special care must be taken in setting
parameter PASSWD.
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
For a 2-path control CNC, settíng bit 0 PCP of parameter No. 3206 to
1 enables the copying of a specifíed machíníng program from one path to COPYING A
another. Single-program copy and specífíed-range copy are supported.
PROGRAM
BETWEEN TWO
PATH S
Procedure for copyíng a program between two paths
Procedure 1 Select EDIT mode for both paths.
2 Press function P k RO e G y
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
4 Press soft key [P COPY].
The followíng soft keys appear.
PROGRAM 01357 N00130
01357 HEAD-1 MA1N PROGRAM ;
N010 G90 G00 ;
N020 T0101 ;
N030 S30000 M03 ;
N040 G40 G00 ;
-,..
N 080 X ;
N090 ;
N100 ;
>
ED1T >+<=кж ж 14:25:36 HEAD1
PATH1 , PATH2 , CAN
5 Press soft key [PATH1] or [PATH2] to select the path from whích a
program ís to be copied.
Example Pressing soft key [PATH1] causes an operation guidance,
shown below, to appear on the screen.
-... -...
SOURCE : PATH1 =1357
DEST:PATH2 = REPLACE : OFF
>
14:25:36 HEAD1
c
sOURcE DEST REPLACE CAN EXEC
LED1T
J
Fírst, the program currently selected for the copy source path is
displayed as the program to be copied. If no program has been
selected for the copy śource path, 0000 ís displayed.
970
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
6 Select oпe or more programs to be copied.
Síngle program copy
1 Enter the number of the program to be copied.
xxxx
2 Press soft key [SOURCE] to set the number.
--i SOURCE:PATH?= x x x x
Specífíed range copy
1 Enter the range of the programs to be copied, as a nunıber.
- x x x x- σ σ
r Range symbol
[Entry format] x x x x
L Range end largest number
Range start smallest number
2 Press soft key [SOURCE] to set the number.
SOURCE:PATH?= x x x x σ
To cancel the selectíon of the program s to be copied, press
[SOURCE] agaín.
7 Select the copy destínatíon number.
The selected program s can be copied by assigning numbers other
than their ońgínal numbers.
1 Type the destínatíon number.
Аллл
2 Press soft key [DEST] to set the number.
DEST:PATH?=AAAA
Pressíng [DESη wíthout enteńng any nunıber causes the original
program number s to be used as is.
To cаncel the set number, press [DESη again.
For specífıed range copy, the set number ís assigned to the fırst
program of the specífıed range. The subsequent programs are
assígned numbers obtained Ьy repeatedly incrementíng the set
number by one.
8 Specífy replacement.
If any number to be assígned to a program to be copied ís already
beíng used for a program registered for the destínation path, specify
whether the existing program ís to be replaced wíth that to be copied.
If replacement is currently dísabled, pressing soft key [REPLACE]
enables replacement. Pressíng [REPLACE] repeatedly toggles
between replacement beíng enabled and dísabled.
REPLACE=ON índícates that replacement ís enabled.
REPLACE=OFF indicates that replacement is disabled.
9 Press soft key [EXEC] to start copyíng.
91
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPFRATION 6-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Operatíon flow
Program screen
Edit mode/BG edit mode
Set the data protection key to ON eпaЬ1e editing
i
Soft key for startíng setting for copy between paths [P COPY]
Copy source selection soft key [PATH1 ] oc [PATH2]
Not set selected O number
< SOURCE set?>
Set
Not set selected O пumЬeг
< DEST set?>
Set
Yes
<Operatíon cancel soft key [CAN]?>
I No

To be replaced Not to Ьe replaced
REPLACE=ON REPLACE=OFF
Start copying: sott key [EXEC]
Copycompleted Alarmtermination
Background editing Copying can also be performed duríng background edítíng.
972
в-ε353aEwı02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Major related alarms Major related alarm ııumhcr
A1aгm number Descríptíon Relevant path
P/S 70,70 eP/SO lnsufficıent free memory Copy destination
P/S 71,71 BP/S Specified program not found Copy source
P/S 72,72 BP/S Too many programs Copy destination
P/S 73,73 BP/S Duplicate regístration Copy destination
P/S 75,75 BP/S Protected program number Copy source/destination
BP/S indícates an alarm output duríng background editíng.
Each alarm ís issued to the path for which the operatíon causíng the
a1aгm is being performed.
Restrictíons
Condítíons under whích Copying ís not performed under any of the following conditíons:
copyíng cannot be
The data protectíon key for the copy destínatíon path ís set to OFF.
performed
The specífıed O number ís protected.
The specífıed O number ís already beíng used for a program registered
for the copy destinatíon path íf replacement ís dísabled .
The part program storage for the copy destínatíon path does not have
sufficíent free space.
The copy source or destínatíon path ís placed in the a1arm state.
During background edítíng, however, only P/S alarms 000 and 101
disable copying.
specífíed-range copy Duríng specífíed range copy, íf the part program storage for the copy
destinatíon path becomes ínsuffıcíent, if the maximum number of
programs whích can Ьe registered for the destínation path ís exceeded, if
a specífíed program number has already been regístered for the
destínation path, or íf a specífıed program number ís protected, an alarm
is íssued ímmedíately and copyíng is stopped.
Copy destinatìon Copy source
00001 - 00001
00020 00020
- 00200 00200
1nsulfícíent storage, 01100
duplicate registratíon, 02000
protectednumber, or maximum
number of programs exceeded
.1
A1arm issued, copying stopped
973
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Replacement Even íf replacement is enabled, the program is not replaced íf the part
program storage for the copy destinatíon path does not have suffıcíent free
space. Duríng background edítíng, copyíng by replacíng the currently
runníng program ís not allowed.
CAUTION
Once the copying of a program between paths has been
started, it cannot be canceled. Carefully confirm a11 the
settings before starting copying.
974
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
1 O CREATING PROGRAMS
Programs can be created usíng any of the following methods:
MD1 keyboard
PROGRAMMING 1N TEACH 1N MODE
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING 1NPUT W1TH GRAPHIC
FUNCTION
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM PREPARATION DEVICE FANUC
SYSTEM P
This chapter describes creating programs usíng the MDI pane1, Teach IN
mode, and conversatíonal programmíng wíth graphíc functíon. This
chapter also descríbes the automatic ínsertion of sequence numbers.

Γ
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Programs can be created in the EDIT mode usíng the program edíting
functíons described in IП-9. CREATING
PROGRAMS US1NG
THE MD1 PANEL
Procedure for Creatíng Programs Usíng the MD1 Pane1
Procedure 1 Enter the ED1T mode.
2 Press th P e ROG key.
3 Press address key O and enter the program number.
4 Press th N e SERT key.
5 Create a program usíng the program edítíng functíons descńbed іп
III-9.
Explanation
Comments ín a program Comпıents can be wńtten in a program usíng the control ín/out codes.
Example 00001 FANUC SERIES 16 ;
M08 COOLANT ON ;
When the 1NSEдт key ís pressed after the control out code ,
comments, and control ín code have been typed, the typed
comments are regístered..
When the ET key is pressed mídway through comments, to enter
the rest of comments later, the data typed before the ј Т key ís
pressed may not be correctly regístered not entered, modifíed, or lost
because the data ís subject to an entry check which ís performed ín
normal edíting.
Note the following to enter a comment:
Control ín code cannot be regïstered by ítself.
Comments entered after the 1NSERT key is pressed must not begín with
a number, space, or address O.
If an abbrevíatíon for a macro is entered, the abbreviation ís converted
ínto a macro word and regístered see Sectíon
Address O and subsequent numbers, or a space can be entered but are
omitted when regístered.
976
в εз5зaεгv o2 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a
program ís created usíng the MDI keys in the EDIT mode.
QUTOMATIC
Set the íncrement for sequence numbers in parameter 3216.
1NSERTION OF
SEQUENCE
NUMBERS
Procedure for automatíc ínsertion of sequence numbers
Procedure 1 Set 1 for SEQUENCE NO. see
2 Enter the ED1T mode.
3 Press IPRoGI to dísplay the program screen.
4 Search for or regíster the number of a program to be edíted and move
the cursor to the EOB ; of the block after whích automatíc ínsertion
of sequence numbers ís started.
When a program number is regístered and an EOB ; ís entered with
the INsERT key, sequence numbers are automatícally ínserted startíng
with O. Change the ínítial va1ue, íf requíred, according to step 10, then
skíp to step 7.
5 Press address key and enter the ínitial va1ue of N.
6 Press 1NSER7
7 Enter each word of a block.
8 Press 1 εoв ј,
977
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
9 Press lINsERTI . The EOB ís registered in memory and sequence numbers
are automatícally ínserted. For example, íf the ínítíal va1ue of N is 10
and the parameter for the íncrement ís set to 2, N 12 ínserted and
dísplayed below the line where a new block ís specifıed.
Г0GRАМ 00040 N00012
00040 ;
N10G92XOYOZO;
1
>
ED1T 13:18:08
L1B , ґ , OPRT
J
10 In the example above, íf N12 ís not necessary in the next block,
pressing the key after N12 ís displayed deletes N 12.
To ínsert N 100 ín the next block ínstead of N 12, enter N 100 and
press ALTER after N 1 2 ís displayed. N100 ís regístered and ínítial
value ís changed to 100.
978
в sз5з εNo: OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
When the playback option ís selected, the TEACH 1N JOG mode and
TEACH 1N HANDLE mode are added. In these modes, a machíne position
CREATING
along the X, Y, and Z axes obtaíned Ьy manual operation is stored in
PROGRAMS 1N memory as a program positíon to create a program.
TEACH 1N MODE The words other than X, Y, and Z, whích include O, N, G, R, F, C, M, S,
T, P, Q, and EOB, can be stored in memory ín the same way as in ED1T
PLAYBACK
mode.
Procedure for Creatíng Programs in TEACH 1N Mode
Procedure The procedure described below can be used to store a machíne posítíon
along the X, Y, and Z axes.
1 Select the TEACH 1N JOG mode or TEACH 1N HANDLE mode.
2 Move the tool to the desíred posítíon with jog or handle.
3 Press lPRoGI key to dísplay the program screen. Search for or regíster
the number of a program to be edíted and move the cursor to the
position where the machíne posítíon along each axís is to be
regístered ínserted .
4 Key ín address O
5 Press the INЅEλT key. Then a machine positíon along the X axís ís
stored ín memoгу.
Example Absolute positon for mm input
X10521 Data stored in memorу
6 Símílarly, key in Y then press the ІNSERT key. Then a machíne
posítion along the Y axis is stored in memorу. Further, key in Z
then press the NSERT key. Then a machine posítíon along the Z axís ís
stored in memory.
A11 coordinates stored using thís method are absolute coordínates.
Examples
O 1234 ;
N1 G92 X10000 YO Z10000 ;
N2 G00 G90 X3025 Y23723 ;
N3 G01 Z-325 F300 ;
N4 M02 ; ,
P1
, ,
PO
Y

, ,
P2
979
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-63534EN/02
1 Set the settíng data SEQUENCE NO. to 1 on . The íncremental value
parameter No. 3216 ís assumed to be 1 .
2 Select the TEACH 1N HANDLE mode.
3 Make positíoníng at posítíon PO by the manual pulse generator.
4 Selectthe program screen.
5 Enter program number 01234 as follows:
Ú U U U U 1N ER7
Thís operatíon regísters program number 01234 in memory.
Next, press the followíng keys:
EOв 1 1 иsεaτ
An EOB ; ís entered after program number 01234. Because no
number is specífıed after N, sequence numbers are automatícally
ínserted for NO and the fírst block N 1 ís regístered in memory.
6 Enter the PO machíne posítíon for data of the fírst block as follows:
G 9 2 NSERT 1NSεRT 1NSERT
иsεRт εoв 1NSERT
Thís operatíon regísters G92X10000YOZ10000; іп memory. The
automatíc sequence number ínsertíon functíon registers N2 of the
second block in memory.
7 Position the tool at P1 wíth the manual pulse generator.
8 Enter the P1 machíne posítíon for data of the second block as follows:
0 0 1N EFiT o o a 1иsεRT o
1NSERT E в 1NSERT
Thís operatíon regísters GOOG90X3025Z23723; іп memory. The
automatíc sequence number insertion functíon regísters N3 of the thírd
block in memorу.
9 Posítion the tool at P2 wíth the manual pulse generator.
10 Enter the P2 machíne posítíon for data of the thírd block as follows:

G 0 1 3 1NSERT 1NSERT O 0 0
NSERT EOв 1NSERT
Thís operatíon regísters GO1Z -325F300; ín memorу.
The automatíc sequence number ínsertíon function regísters N4 of the
fourth block in memory.
11 Regíster M02; in memorу as follows:
EOв 1NSERT O ρ1N5ER7
N5 índicating the fífth block ís stored in memory usíng the automatic
sequence number insertion functíon. Press the key to delete it.
This completes the regístration of the sample program.
980
B-63534E N/02 O P E R AT 1 O N 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
Explanatíons
Checkíng contents of the The contents of inemory can be checked in the TEACH 1N mode by usíng
memory the same procedure as in ED1T mode.
PROGRAM 01234 N00004
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
X x
Y Y
Z Z
01234 ;
N 1 G92 X10000 YO Z10000 ;
N2 G00 G90 X3025 Y23723 ;
N3 G01 Z-325 F300 ;
N4 M02 Θ
o
>_
.... ... ... THND 14:17:27
i L1B , OPRT 1
J
Regístering a posítion
When a va1ue is keyed in after keying ín address X Y Z
with compensatíon
then the ј т key ís pressed, the value keyed in for a machíne posítíon
ís added for regístratíon. Thís operatíon is useful to correct a machine
posítíon by key ín operatíon.
Regísteríng commands Commands to be entered before and after a machíne posítion must be
other than position entered before and after the machine position is registered, Ьy using the
commands same operation as program editing in ED1T mode.
981
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen
while dísplayíng the G code menu.
CONVERSATIONAL
Blocks in a program can be modifíed, inserted, or deleted usíng the G code
PROGRAMMING menu and conversational screen.
W1TH GRAPHIC
FUNCTION
Procedure for Conversational Programmíng wíth Graphíc Function
Procedure 1 1 Enter the ED1T mode.
Creatíng a program
2 Press Pдo . If пo program is regístered, the followíng screen ís
dísplayed. If a program ís registered, the program currently selected
ís dísplayed.
PROGRAM 00000 N0000
>
ED1T 11 : 59 : 46
ІaζеіaĽĺі ĺ L1B oPRт
J

3 Key іп the program number of a program to be registered after keyíng
in address O, then press For example, when a program with
program number 10 ís to be regístered, key in OO 1O pO , then
press NSER7 . Thís regísters a new program 00010.
982
в-6з5з4εNı02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
4 Press the [] soft key. The followíng G code menu is dísplayed
on the screen.
If soft keys dífferent from those shown in step 2 are dísplayed, press
the menu return key O to display the correct soft keys.
PROGRAM 01234 N00004
G00 : POS1T10N1NG
G01 : LINEAR 1PL
G02 : CIRCULAR 1PL. CW
G03 : CIRCULAR 1PL. CCW
G04 : DWELL
G09 : EXACT STOP CHECK
G10 : OFFSET TLC VALUE SETTING 0
G17 : XY PLANE
G18 : ZX PLANE
G19 : YZ PLANE
G20 : 1NCH
G21 : METRIC
>
ED1T - 14:26:15
PRGRM , BLOCK
J
5 Key in the G code correspondíng to a function to be programmed.
When the positíoning functíon ís desíred, for example, the G code
menu lísts the functíon wíth the G code G00. So key in G00. If the
screen does not indícate a functíon to be programmed, press the page
key to display the next G code menu this
operation untíl a desíred functíon appears. If a desíred functíon ís not
a G code, key in no data.
6 Press the soft key [BLOCK] to dísplay a detailed screen for a keyed in
G code. The fígure below shows an example of detailed screen for
G00.
-
PROGRAM 01234 N00000
G00 : POSITIONING
G00 G G G
X 100. Y
Z X, Y, Z,
H OFFSET NO.
M
S
T
B
ED1T 14:32:57
PRGRM : в 1 Г OPRT 1

When no keys are pressed, the standard details screen is dísplayed.
983
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63534E N/02
\
PROGRAM 00010 N00000
G G G G
X Y
Z
H F
R M
S T
B 1
J K
P Q
L
ED1T 14:41:10
ι

P
_
RGRM = OPRT
7 Move the cursor to the block to be modifíed on the program screen.
At this tíme, a data address wíth the cursor blínks.
8 Enter numeríc data by pressing the numeńc keys and press the
[1NPUT] soft key or key. Thís completes the ínput of one data
ítem.
9 Repeat thís operatíon untíl a11 data requíred for the entered G code ís
entered.
10 Press the ІІNSE І key. Thís completes the regístratíon of data of one
block in program memory. On the screen, the G code menu screen ís
dísplayed, allowíng the user to enter data for another block. Repeat
the procedure startíng wíth 5 as required.
11 After regísteríng a11 programs, press the [PRGRM] soft key. The
regístered programs are converted to the converssational format and
dísplayed.
12 Press the іRESEтІ key to return to the prograrn head.
Procedure 2 1 Move the cursor to the block to be modífıed on the program screen
Modifying a block and press the [] soft key. Or, press the [] soft key fírst to
dísplay the conversatíonal screen, then press the f Ј or ρ page
key untíl the block to be modífíed ís dísplayed.
2 When data other than a G code is to be altered, just move the cursor to
the data and key in a desíred va1ue, then press the [1NPUT] soft key or
иPu key.
3 When a G code ís to be altered, press the menu return key and the
soft key []. Then the G code menu appears. Select a desíred
G code, then key ín the value. For exaınple, to specífy a cuttíng feed,
since the G code menu índícates GO1, key ín GO1. Then press the soft
key [BLOCK]. The detailed screen of the G code is dísplayed, so enter
the data.
984
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
4 After data ís changed completely, press the key. Thís operatíon
replaces an entire block of a program.
Procedure 3 1 On the conversatíonal screen, display the block ímrnedíately before a
lnserting a block new block is to be ínserted, by usíng the page keys. On the program
screen, move the cursor with the page keys and cursor keys to
ímınediately before the poínt where a new block is to be inserted.
2 Press the soft key [] to dísplay the G code menu. Then enter
new block data.
3 When ínput of one block of data ís completed in step 2, press the
key. Thís operatíon ínserts a block of data.
Procedure 4 1 On the conversational screen, dísplay the contents of a block to be
Deleting a block
deleted, then press the key.
2 The contents of the blосk displayed are deleted from program
memory. Then the contents of the next block are displayed on the
conversatíonal screen.
985
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
1 1
General To operate a CNC machíne too1, various data must be set on the MDI panel
for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operatíon wíth data
dísplayed during operatíon.
Thís chapter describes how to dísplay and set data for each function.
Explanatíons
Screen transition chart The screen transition for when each functíon key on the MDI pane1 ís
pressed ís shown below. The subsectíons referenced for each screen are
also shown. See the appropńate subsectíon for details of each screen and
PO PRCHâ1 сu=Tом
the settíng procedure on the screen. See other chapters for screens not
descńbed іп thís chapter.
GRAPH
See Chapter 7 for the screen that appears when function key ís
MD1 functíon keys pressed. See Chapter 12 for the screen that appears when functíon key
Shaded keys 0 aгe described
in this chapter. GRAPн ís pressed. See Chapter 13 for the screen that appears when functíon
key HELP ís pressed. In general, functíon key l ís prepared Ьy the
machíne tool builder and used for macros. Refer to the manual íssued by
the machíne tool buílder for the screen that appears when function key
ύ5 ^ ís pressed.
Data protection key The machine may have a data protectíon key to protect part programs,
tool compensatíon values, settíng data, and custom macro variables.
Refer to the manual íssued by the machíne tool builder for where the data
protectíon key ís located and how to use ít.
986
в-6з5здEw π2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
POS1T10N DISPLAY SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key F
-τ J
POS

Curreut posittou ćrreen
,, , , , , , ,
Џ__CАВЅ REL ALL HNDL OPRT
-
Position display of Posítiπn disptuys ın,πition áiвpløy Maоua1 handle
workpiece coordi- relative coordinate o+ eдch coorainate inteíruption
nate system systeni rvstem.
Ѕeо ,ІІ see ttІ
- See - See 1, - 1 2
Display of pan Dispıay cf pan Dioptuv of pan
count and run couni and run count and run
time time ime
See 111- > Soo 11111 .1 .6. : Son 111- 11 .1 .6.
Dispıay of Display of actual Dispıay of ac:ua
speec speed speeć
See tI - 1 ı . Soo ttt - 1 1 .1 .5 See1C- 5.
` /
Settirtg of fIoating Setting of floating Setting of floating
reference positiorı eŕerence position reference position
See 11-111J See 7- See 111-1 t_1 7
Se ing of relative Setting of relative
cooroinate values coordìnate values
- 3ee G-1І.12 - See ııi ı ı_L2-
Current posıtıon screen

-Ѕ - - - - -_- --- -
C MON1 OPRT
- -

Display of oper-
ating monitor
ıu- t1_ .,,
J
y 7
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN 02
Screen transition triggered by the function key PROGRAM SCREEN
in the MEMORY or MD1 mode 1ı

PROG
: Displayed in MD1 mode
Program screen

MEM MD1 1
.- -
PRGRM CHECK CURRNT N EXT OPRT .1
_
i
Display of pro- Dispiay of cucrent Dispıay of current
gram contents block and moda. block and next
block , Śee 111-1 .2.1_ áata
See1 -,ıί _> See
Display of program
number and se-
quence number
See Π1-1ı-6-1.
J
u u ı
[AвS] [REL]
GomnıanG
V for MD1 operation
Procrarr beırıg executed See 11І г Procrrarn beınc; executeC
Ahscvute cccгπσıaіe vaiue Reiatıve 000rdinate vaiuε
Dista ce г_ _ Distaııce to go Displayed in the
гΠooa va ues modaI values
: SeP І1І -1 о ы see ııı ı 1-24 MD1 mode
/
Program screen
η
MEM
-.--
, RSTR C C ĺOPRT> Ј
л

Program restart [PRGRM] [D1R] [SCHDUL]
д screen
-- see Гіі-4ь-
Display of file Setting of
directory schedule
5ee 11Н-4 6 Sce 111-2_6-
yѕ5
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
PROGRAM SGREEN
Screen transition triggered by the function key
in the ED1T mode
τ
PROG

Prngram screen.
ED1T
\
ί PRGRM L1B OPRт
- .-..... -..

п
Pгπgгam e litìng Program merrnry Gonversationaı
screen and program di- programmıng
screen ; See 11і-9 rectory
, See І11- -- See ııı-ı J ί
Program screen \

ED1T , , ,
., .-.- ,...
, , ,
C FLOPPY J OPRт 1

Fi1e directory
screen for
floppy disks
-; See ІіІ
ygy
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Screen transítíon triggered by the function key OFFs
_ЕТТГГ
OFFSET
SETTING
ι
Too1 offset value
, ,
.-=
ί OFFSET SETTINGJ C WORK j C OPRT j =-.-
/

Display of tool Display of set- Display of work-
offset va1ue tíng data piece coordínate
system 3ee Ѕеe
See 1І

Settíng of tool Parameter settíng settíng of work
See offset data origin offset va1ue
= See Setting sequence = See
number comparison
Too1 length and stop
See measurement
See Setting nun time and
parts count
See
Settíng the number of parts required
See
Dísplayíng set-
tíng tíme
See
Too1 offset value
ı \ -.=
MACRO C MENU OPR j C TOOLLF OPRT
=-= -. .== =--
V
Displayíng pattern Displaying soft- Displaying tool lífe Dísplay of ware operator s menu management data macro varíables paгіe1
See subsec. =фSee subsec.
See subsec. =ЕSee subsec.

і і і
settíng macro Displayíng pattern Software opera- Presetting tool lífe counter
varíables data tor s paneI switch Clearing executing data
=sSee subsec. See subsec. =ЕSee subsec. =ЕSee subsec.
Dísplayíng extended tool life management data
=ѕSee subsec.
diting extended tool life management data
=ѕSee subsec.
990
Гв sз5з4εNІО 2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
SYSTEM SCREEN Screeгı trarsitiun triggered by łhe function key

SYSTEм

Parameter screen
-,.. . . -
C PARAM DGNOS Ј C PMC SYSTEM OPRT
- d -..,
ў
п

Dıspiay ot Dısplay of
diagnosis parameter screen
screen
See ,1
See111-73

setting of parameter
See 111-11 5-1
Parameter screen \
ı ı .- -a
P1TCH Ј OPRT
-.-. -

ı
Display of pitch
error data
See 1-1
yyІ
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Setting screens The table below lists the data set on each screen.
Tab1e. 11 Settíng screens and data on them
No. setting screen Contents of settíng Reference
ítem
1 Too1 offset value Too1 offset va1ue
Too1 length offset value
Cutter compensation value
Too1 length measurement
2 Setting data handy Parameter write
Tv check
Punch code
lnput unit mm/inch
1/O channel
Automatíc insert of Sequence No.
Conversíon of tape format F15
Sequence number comparíson and stop
3 Setting data mirror ímage Mirror image
4 Setting data timer Parts required
5 Macгo varíables Custom macro common varíables
100 to 149 or 100 to 199
500 to 531 or 500 to 599
6 Parameter Parameter
7 Pítch error Pítch error compensatíon data
8 software operator s panel Mode selection
Jog feed axis selectíon
Jog rapíd traverse
Axís selection for Manual pulse generator
Multíplication for manual pulse generator
Jog feedrate
Feedrate override
Rapíd traverse overríde
Optional block skip
Síngle block
Machíne lock
Dry run
Protect key
Feed hold
9 Too1 life data Life count
Toollife management
10 Too1 lífe data Life count type cycle or minute
Extended tool lífe man- Life value
agement Lífe counter
Too1 number
H code
D code
New tool group
New tool number
Skíppíng tool
Clearíng tool
11 Work coordínate system Work origín offset value
settíng
12 Current position display Floatíng reference positíon
screen
992
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
,
Press functíon key U to dísplay the current posítion of the too1.
SCREENS
The following three screens are used to display the current position of the
DISPLAYED BY too1:
FUNCTION KEY aos Position display ίreeп for the work coordínate system.
Position display screen for the relatíve coordínate system.
Overall positíon display screen.
The above screens can also dísplay the feedrate, run tíme, and the number
of parts. In addítion, a floatíng reference positíon can be set on these
screens.
Functíon key ј Pоs caп also be used to dísplay the load on the servo motor
and spindle motor and the rotation speed of the spíndle motor operating
monítor display .
Function key гos can also be used to dísplay the screen for displayíng
the distance moved by handle ínterruption. See III for details on thís
screen.
y9 ;
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Displays the current posítíon of the tool ín the workpiece coordínate
system. The current posítíon changes as the tool moves. The least ínput Position Display in the
increment ís used as the unít for numeríc values. The títle at the top of
Work Coordínate
the screen indícates that absolute coordínates are used.
System
Dísplay procedureforthe current positíon screen ín the workpíece coordínate system
1 Press function key Pos
2 Press soft key [ABs].
3 Press the [ABS] soft key one more time to display the coordínates
along axes other than the síx standard axes.
Dísplay wíth one path control
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 01000 N00010
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN 09:06:35
[ ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
\ /
Dísplay wíth two path control /
7 soft keys dìsp[ay unít ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 01000 N00010
X,
Z,
X,
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN 09:06:35 HEAD1
[ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
/
994
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplay with two path control
12 soft keys display unít
ACTUAL POS1T10N 01000 N10010 02000 N2 l , .
ACTUAL ACTUAL
XІ X2
Y1 Y2
Z1 Z2
ACTUAL SPEED F : OMM/M1N ACTUAL SPEED F : OMM/M1N S: ORPM S: ORPM
PARTS COUNT 114 PARTS COUNT 114
RUN T1ME 5H 3M RUN T1ME 5H 3M
CYCLE T1ME OH OM BS CYCLE T1ME OH OM βS
MEM STOP 12:34:58 HEAD1
ι ΓΓT=Π REL ALL
і јL 1 L
Explanatíons
Dísplay inciuding Bits 6 and 7 of parameter 3104 DAL, DAC can Ьe used to select whether
compensatíon vaiues the dísplayed values include toollength offset and cutter compensatíon.
Dísplayíng the síxth and 0п1y the coordínates for the fırst to fıfth axes are dísplayed ínítíally
subsequentaxes whenever when there are síx oг moгe controlled axes. Pressing the [ABS]
soft key dísplays the coordínates for the sixth and subsequent axes.
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Displays the current posítion of the tool in a relative coordinate system
based on the coordinates set by the operator. The current position changes Positíon Dísplay ín the
as the tool moves. The íncrement system ís used as the unit for numeńc
Relatíve Coordínate
values. The títle at the top of the screen índícates that relative coordínates
System
are used.
Dísplay procedure for the current posítion screen wíth the relative coordinate system
1 Press function key Pos
2 Press soft key [REL].
3 Press the [REL] soft key one more tíme to display the coordinates
along axes other than the six standard axes.
Dísplay wíth one path control
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE 01000 N00010
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ І [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
J
See Explanations for the procedure for setting the coordínates.
Dísplay wíth two path control 1
7 soft keys dísplay unit ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE 01000 N00010
X,
Y1
Z,
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN 09:06:35 HEAD1
[ ABS ] [ [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
J
996
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplay wíth two path control
12 soft keys display unít
ACTUAL POS1T10N 01000 N10010 02000 N20010
RELATIVE RELATIVE
X1 X2
Y1 Y2
Z1 Z2
ACTUAL SPEED F : OMM/M1N ACTUAL SPEED F : OMM/M1N S: ORPM S: ORPM
PARTS COUNT 114 PARTS COUNT 114
RUN T1ME 5H 3M RUN T1ME 5H 3M
CYCLE T1ME OH OM 65 CYCLE T1ME OH OM 6S
MEM STOP 12:34:56 HEAD1
ALL HNDL OPR
ıABS J

Explanatíons
settíng the relatíve The current posítíon of the tool ín the relatíve coordínate system can be
:oordínates reset to 0 or preset to a specífied value as follows:
Procedure to set the axis coordínate to a specífíed va1ue
Procedure 1 Enter an axís address such as X or Y on the screen for the relatíve
coordinates. The índícatíon for the specífıed axís blínks and the soft
keys change as shown on the 1eft.
2 . To reset the coordínate to 0, press soft key [ORG1N]. The relatíve
Y coordínate for the blinking axís ís reset to O.
Z
>x To preset the coordínate to a specífıed va1ue, enter the value and
мεм
press soft key [PRESET]. The relatíve coordínate for the blínkíng
tг εsε7 tOR1G1 t
axís ís set to the entered va1ue.
aσσ 0 0 0
Procedure to reset a11 axes
Procedure 1 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
JC OO O
2 Press soft key [OR1G1N].
L зJ
a00000
3 Press soft key [ALLEXE].
C The relatíve coordínates for a11 axes are reset to O.
a O O 0 0 0
997
r.
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-б3534EN/02
Display íncluding Bits 6 and 7 of parameter 3104 DRL, DRC can be used to select whether
compensatíon values the displayed values include toollength offset and cutter compensatíon.
Presettíng by settíng a Bít 3 of parameter 3104 PPD ís used to specífy whether the displayed
coordínate system posítíons in the relatíve coordínate system are preset to the same values
as in the workpíece coordinate system when a coordínate system ís set by
a G92 command or when the manual reference posítíon return ís made.
Dísplayíng the sixth and On1y the coordinates for the fırst to fıfth axes are dísplayed ínítíally
subsequent axes whenever when there are síx or more controlled axes. Pressíng the [ABS]
soft key dísplays the coordinates for the sixth and subsequent axes.
998
в-6з5з4εN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the
tool in the workpiece coordinate system, relatíve coordínate system, and Overa[1 Position
machíne coordínate system, and the remaining dístance. The relatíve
Display
coordinates can also be set on thís screen. See for the
procedure.
Procedure for dísplaying overall posítíon dísplay screen
Procedure 1 Press function key Pos
2 Press soft key [ALL].
Display wíth one-path control
ACTUAL POS1T10N 01000 N00010
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
X X
Y Y
Z Z
MACHINE DISTANCE TO GO
X X
Y Y
Z Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM.,,.....,. 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ [HNDL] [OPRT]

J
Display with two-path control 1
7 soft keys display unít ACTUAL POS1T10N 01000 N00010
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
X 1 X 1
Y1 Y1
Z1 Z1
MACHINE DISTANCE TO GO
X 1 X1
Y1 Y 1
Z1 Z1
Z2
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM ....... ,.. 09:06:35 HEAD1
[ABS] [REL] [ [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
\ J
999
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION Bfi3Б3дEN 02
Display wíth two path control 1
12 soft keys dísplay unít
ACTUAL POSITION 01000 N10010 02000 NØ10
i RELATIVE AвsOωτε RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
X1 X1 X1 X7
Y1 Y1 Y1 Y7
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
MACHINE DıSTANCE TO GO MACHINE DISTANCE TO GO
X1 X1 X1 X1
Y1 Y1 Y1 Y1
21 Z1 21 Z1
ACTUAL SPEED F : OMM/M1N ACTUAL SPEED F : OMM/M1N
S : ORPM S: ORPM
PARTS COUNT 114 PARTS COUNT 114
RUN T1ME 5H 3M RUN T1ME 5H 3M
CYCLE T1ME OH OM 65 CYCLE T1ME OH OM 65
MEM TOP 12:34:56 HEAD1
1 1 1 1 ABS AEL
Γ
1
J
Explanatíons
Coordínate display The current positíons of the tool in the following coordínate systeıns пг e
dísplayed at the same time:
Current posítíon ín the relative coordinate system
relative coordinate
Current posítíon in the work coordinate system
absolute coordinate
Current posítíon in the machine coordínate system
machíne coordínate
Dístance to go distance to go
Dístance to go The dístance remaining is dísplayed in the MEMORY or MDI mode. The
dístance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
Machine coordinate The least command íncrement is used as the unit for values displayed in
system the machíne coordínate system. However, the least ínput íncrement can
be used by setting bit 0 MCN of parameter 3104.
Displaíng the síxth and 0n1y the coordinates for the fırst to fıfth axes are dísplayed ínítíally
subsequent axes whenever there are síx or more controlled axes. Pressíng the [ALL] soft
key displays the coordínates for the sixth and subsequent axes.
Dísplayíng the fífth and Relatíve coordínates cannot be dísplayed together wíth absolute
subsequent axes coordínates whenever there are fíve oг more controlled axes. Pressíng the
[ALL] soft key toggles the dísplay between absolute and relatíve
coordínates.
Resettíng the relatíve The total positíon display screen also supports the resettíng of the relatíve
coordínates coordíntes to 0 or presettíng of them to specífied values. See the procedure
for resettíng the relatíve coordíntes described in Subsectíon
1000
в-sз5з4εNıo2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
A workpíece coordínate system shífted by an operation such as manual
Presettíng the íntervention caп be preset usíng MDI operations to a pre shíft workpiece
coordinate system. The latter coordínate system is displaced from the
Workpíece Coordínate
machine zero poínt by a workpíece zero point offset value.
System
A command caп be programmed to preset a workpíece coordínate
system. See in the sectíon for programming.
Procedure for Presettíng the Workpíece Coordinate System
Procedure
1 Press function key
2 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
ABS REL АІ ĺ OPR;
a 0 0 0 0 0
3 When [WRK CD] ís not displayed, press the continuous menu
key
C
ao 000 4 Press soft key [WRK CD].
ςμL ^ѕ- ί C
5 Press soft key [ALLAXs] to preset a11 axes.
a 0 0
6 T preset a particular axís ín step 5, enter the axis name ι X Y
... ancl 0 then press soft key [AXs CD].
Explanatíons
Operatíon mode Thís functíon can be executed when the reset state or automatic operatíon
stop state is entered, regardless of the operation mode.
Presettíng relative As with absolute coordinates, bit 3 PPD of parameter No. 31 Ø ís used
coordinates to specífy whether to preset relative coordinates RELATIVE .
1001
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
The actual feedrate oп the machíne per minute can be dísplayed on a
current posítíon dísplay screen or program check screen by settíng bít 0 Actual Feedrate
DPF of parameter 3105. On the 12 soft keys dísplay unít, the actual
Display
feedrate ís always dísplayed.
Dísplay procedure for the actual feedrate on the current positíon dísplay screen
Procedure
1 Press function key Pos to dísplay a current position display screen.
,е-
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 01000 N00010
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM ЅТRТ MTN 09:06:35
[ : ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

Actual feedrate is dísplayed after
Explanatíons The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min
depending on the specifíed least input increment under the display of the
current positíon.
Actual feedrate va1ue The actual rate ís calculated by the following expressíon:
Fact =
where
n : Number of axes
fi : Cuttíng feed rate in the tangentíal dírection of each axis or rapid
traverse rate
Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The dísplay unit: mm/min metric ínput .
inch/min Inch ínput, Two digíts below the decimal
poínt are displayed.
The feedrate along the PMC axís can be omítted by settíng bít 1 PCF of
parameter 3105.
Actual feedrate dísplay In the case of feed per revolution and thread cuttíng, the actual feedrate
of feed per revolutíon dísplayed is the feed per mínute rather than feed per revolutíon.
1002
в-6з5з-ıEгv 02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Actual feedrate display In the case of movement of rotary axís, the speed ís dísplayed in uníts of
of rotary axís deg/min but is displayed on the screen ín units of ínput system at that tíme.
For example, when the rotary axís moves at 50 deg/nıin, the followíng is
displayed: INCH/M
Actual feedrate display The program check screen also dísplays the actual feedrate.
on the other screen
1003
17. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-63534εN/o2
The run tíme, cycle time, and the number of machíned parts are displayed
on the current position dísplay screens. Display of Run Time
and Parts Count
Procedure for dísp[ayíng run time and parts count on the current posítíon display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key Pos to dísplay a current posítíon dísplay screen.
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE 01000 N00010
X
Y
Z
PARTCOUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME oH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000,
MEM STRT MTN 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

The number of machíned parts PART COUNT , run tíme RUN
TIME , and cycle tíme CYCLE TIME are dísplayed under the
current position.
Explanatíons
PART COUNT Indícates the number of machíned parts. The number is íncremented each
tíme M02, M30, or an M code specifıed Ьy parameter 6710 ís executed.
RUN T1ME Indícates the total run time duríng automatíc operatíon, excludíng the stop
and feed hold tíme.
CYCLE T1ME Indícates the run tíme of one automatíc operatíon, excludíng the stop and
feed hold tíme. Thís ís automatícally preset to 0 when a cycle start ís
performed at reset state. It ís preset to 0 even when power ís removed.
Dísplay on the other Detaíls of the run tíme and the number of machined parts are dísplayed
screen on the settíng screen. See
Parameter settíng The number of machíned parts and run time cannot be set on current
positíon dísplay screens. They can be set by parameters No. 6711, 6751,
and 6752 or oп the settíng screen.
lncrementing the number Bít 0 PCM of parameter 6700 ís used to specify whether the number of
of machined parts machined parts ís íncremented each time M02, M30, or an M code
specífıed by parameter 6710 ís executed, or on1y each time an M code
specífıed by parameter 6710 ís executed.
1004
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
To perform floating reference posítíon return with a command, the
setting the Floatíng floatíng reference posítíon must be set beforehand.
Reference Posítion
Procedure for settíng the fioatíng reference posítion
Procedure
1 Press functíon key ј Pos
Ј to display a screen used for dísplaying the
current posítíon.
2 Move the tool to the floating reference posítíon by jogging.
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
^RRT
L 4 Press soft key [SET FRP].
aσσσσσ
5 To regíster the floating reference positíons for a11 axes, press soft key
[ALLEXE].
C RET FNF To regíster the floatíng reference position of a specífıc axís, enter the
4σσσCdσ
name of the axís [O , , etc. , then press soft key [EXEC]. Two

. 4LLćКE ØC J o or a more names can be entered consecutívely ,
aσσσσσ Z [εxεc] . ` 1 l
The above operatíon stores the floatíng reference posítíon. It can be
checked wíth parameter пo. 1244 .
6 In step 4, the floatíng reference posítíon along a specífıed axís can
also be stored by enteríng the axis name such as ρX or ργ and
pressing soft key [SET FRP].
Explanatíons
Presetting the relative By parameter FPC bit 3 of parameter 1201 , the relative positíon can be
coordínate system preset to 0 when a floating reference posítíon ís regístered.
1005
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
The readíng on the load meter can be dísplayed for each servo axis and
the seńal spíndle by setting bit 5 OPM of parameter 3111 to 1. The Operatíng Monítor
readíng on the speedometer can also be displayed for the seńal spíndle.
Dísplay
Procedure for dispiayíng the operating monítor
Procedure
1 Press functíon key Pos to dísplay a current posítíon dísplay screen.
2 Press the continuous menu key Ј.
3 Press soft key [MON1].

OPERATING MONITOR 00001 N00001
LOAD METER
X: 800/ S1: 01
Y : 0 SPEED METER RPM
Z : 0 o S 1 : 1500
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
ACT. F 3000 M M/M
MEM STRT MTN 09:06:35
] [ 1 [ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
-ј
Explanations
Display of the servo axes The readíng on the load meter can be dísplayed for up to eíght servo axes
Ьy settíng parameters 3151 to 3158.
When a11 these parameters are set to 0, data ís dísplayed on1y to the 3rd
axís.
Display of the spíndle When seńal spíndles are used, the readíng on the load meter and
axes speedometer can be dísplayed on1y for the main seńal spindle.
Unít of graph The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200 oп1y a va1ue ís
dísplayed for load exceedíng 200 . The bar graph for the speedometer
shows the ratío of the current spíndle speed to the maximum spindle speed
100 .
Load meter The reading on the laad meter depends on servo parameter 2086 and
spíndle parameter 4127.
1006
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Speedometer Although the speedometer normally índicates the speed of the spíndle
motor, it can also be used to índicate the speed of the spíndle by settíng
bit 6 OPS of parameter 3111 to 1.
The spíndle speed to be dísplayed duńng operatíon monítońng ís
calculated from the speed of the spíndle motor see the formula below .
The spíndle speed can therefore be displayed, duńng operatíon
monítońng, even when no posítíon coder ís used. To dísplay the correct
spíndle speed, however, the maximum spíndle speed for each gear
spíndle speed at each gear ratío when the spindle motor rotates at the
maximum speed must be set in parameters No. 3741 to 3744.
The ínput of the clutch and gear sígnals for the fırst seríal spíndle ís used
to determíne the gear whích is currently selected. Control the ínput of the
CTH1A and CTH2A sígnals accordíng to the gear selectíon, by referńng
to the table below.
Formula for calculatíng the spíndle speed to be dísplayed
Spíndle speed Speed of spíndle motor Maximum spindle
dísplayed duríng - x speed with the
operation monìtorìng Maximum speed of gear being used
spindle motor
The followíng table lists the correspondence between clutch and gear
selectíon sígnals CTH1A and CTH2A, used to determíne the gear being
used, and parameters:
Seríal
CTH1A CTH2A Parameter spíndle
spec
0 0 Maximum spindle speed with gear 1 H1GH
0 1 Maximum spindle speed with gear 2 MEDIUM
H1GH
1 0 Maximum spindle speed with gear 3 MEDIUM
LOW
1 1 Maximum spindle speed with gear 4 LOW
The speed of the spíndle motor and spíndle can Ьe dísplayed, duńng
operatíon monítońng, only for the fírst seńal spíndle and the spindle
swítching axis for the fírst seńal spíndle. It cannot Ьe displayed for the
second spindle.
Co1oг of graph If the va1ue of a load meter exceeds 100 Io, the bar graph turns purple.
1007
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s3534EN/o2
Thís sectíon describes the screens dísplayed by pressíng functíon key
ςΓ REENς PROG in MEMORY or MDI fírst four of the followíng screens
DISPLAYED BY dísplay the execution state for the program currently being executed in
PλJ , MEMORY or MDI mode and the last screen dísplays the command values
FUNCTION KEY
for MDI operation ín the MDI mode:
1N MEMORY MODE
OR MD1 MODE 1. Program contents display screen
2. Current block display screen
З. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
5. Program screen for MD1 operation
6. Stamping the machining time
Function key PROG caп also be pressed in MEMORY mode to dísplay the
program restart screen and scheduling screen.
See for the program restart screen.
See for the scheduling screen.
1008
в-Cз5з EN o? OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplays the program currently beíng executed in MEMORY or MDI
Program Contents mode.
Dísplay
Procedure for díspiaying the program contents
1 Press functíon key PROG to dísplay the program screen.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PRGRM].
The cursor ís posítíoned at the block cuпently beíng executed.
PROGRAM 02000 N00130
02000 ;
N100 G92 XO YO Z70. ;
N110 G91 G00 Y-70. ;
N 120 Z-70. ;
. .
N140G41 ;
N150 G01 X-25. ;
N160 G02 ;
N 170 G01 x20. ;
N180 G02 X45. Y45. R45. ;
> S 0 T0000
MEM STRT 16:05:59
[ І;Іс91ІІ [ CHECK ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ OPRT ]
Explanatíons
12 soft keys display unit On the 12 soft keys dísplay unit, the contents of the program are displayed
on the right half of the screen or on the entire screen switched each time
soft key [PRGRM] ís pressed .

PROGRAM 00006 N00000
00003; N015
N001 G92XOYOZO; F70;
N002 G90 G00 T11 M6; N016 ;
N003 G43 ZO H11; N017 ;
N004 S30 M3 N018 ;
N005 G99 G81 R N019 GOOXOYOM5;
F120; N020 M8;
N006 ; N021 G43ZOH31;
N007 ; N022 S10M3;
N008 ; N023
N009 ; ;
N010 ; N024 G91 ; N011 GOOXOYOM5; N025 G28XOYOM5;
N012 ; N026 G49Z0; N013 G43ZOH15; N027 M0; N014 S20M3;
ED1T 07:12:55
I π SR sRHT SRH εw иo
J
\
1009
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Dísplays the block currently beíng executed and modal data ín the
MEMORY or MDI mode. Current B1ock Display
Screen
Procedure for disp[aying the current block dísplay screen
Procedure
1 Press functíon key PROG
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [CURRNT].
The block currently beíng executed and modal data are dísplayed.
The screen dísplays up to 22 modal G codes and up to 11 G codes
specífıed in the current block.
PROGRAM 02000 N00130
CURRNT MODAL
G01 X G67 G01 F 2000
G17 F 2000 G54 G17
G41 H 2 G64 G91
G80 G69 G22
G15 G94
G21 H 2 D
G25 G41
G49 T
G80
G98 S
G50
> _ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT 16:05:59
J
Explanatíons
12 soft keys display unít The current block dísplay screen ís not províded for 12 soft keys dísplay
unít. Press soft key [PRGRM] to dísplay the contents of the program on
the ríght half of the screen. The block currently beíng executed ís
índícated by the cursor. Moda1 data ís displayed on the left half of the
screen. The screen dísplays up to 18 modal G codes.

ACTUAL POS1T10N 03001 N00000
nвsoштE,
F O MM/MIN
X
Y
Z PROGRAM
03001 ;
G40 ;
G49 M06 T9 ;
GO G54 G90 XO YO ;
MODAL G43 Z30. H5 S6000 M3 ; м0;
G00 G40 G54 F 500 M 3 X Y-22 ;
G17 G43 G64 ;
G90 GBO G69 H 5 G10 P11 F500 ;
G22 G90 G15 D T 9 M30 ;
G94 G50 G25
G21 G67 S 6000
SACT 0 >_
MEΓ.1 07:07:40
c RćL EXT ÓPλη
J
101
г-
в sз5з4Eгv o2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
ı
1 1 Dısplays the block currently beın execu[ed a d the block to be executed
Next B1ock Display next in the MEMORY or MDI mode.
Screen

Procedure for displayíng the next block display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [NEXT].
The block currently beíng executed and the block to be executed next
are dísplayed.
The screen dísplays up to 11 G codes specífíed in the current block
and up to 11 G codes specified ín the next block.
PROGRAM 02000 N00130
CURRNT NEXT
G01 X G39 1
G17 F 2000 G42
G41 H 2
G80
> S 0 T0000
MEM STRT 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ][ CHECK ][ CURRNT ][ ІІ:іІ][ OPRT ]
1011
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6 3534EN/02
Dis 1a s the roσram currentl bein executed current osition of the P y P y g , P
too1, a d modal data in the MEMORY mode. Program Check Screen
Procedure for dísplayíng the program check screen
Procedure
1 Press functíon key PROG
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK].
The program currently being executed, current posítíon of the too1,
and modal data are dísplayed.
Dísplay wíth one-path control
7 soft keys display unít PROGRAM 02000 N00130

G92 G90 X100. Y200. Z50. ;
G00 XO YO ZO ;
G01 Z250. F1000 ;
ABSOLUTE D1STT0 GO G00 G94
G80
X X G 17 G21 G98
Y Y G90 G40 G50
Z Z G22 G49 G67
B
H M
T D
F S
> S 0 T0000
MEM STRT 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ][[ І 4][ CURRNT ][ NEXT ][ OPRT ]
-,
Display wíth two-path control
7 soft keys display unít PROGRAM 02000 N00130

G92 G90 X100. Z50. ;
G00 XO YO ZO ;
G01 Z250. F1000 ;
ABSOLUTE D1ST TO GO G00 G94 G80
X1 X1 G17 G21 G98
Y1 Y1 G90 G40 G50
Z1 Z1 G22 G49 G67
B
H M
T D
F S
MEM STRT 16:05:59 HEAD1
[ PRGRM ] [ [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ OPRT ]
\
1012
B-63534E N/02 O P E RAT 1 ON 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplay with two path control
12 soft keys display unít
PROGRAM CHECK 01000 N01010 PROGRAM CHECK 02000 N02010
вј. в
G92 G90 Y200. Z50. ; G28 X10. Y70. Z10. ;
G00 XO YO ZO ; G00 X50. Y20. Z-50. ;
G01 Z250. F1000 ; X100.;
X50. Y20. ; GO1 Z-100. F2000 ;
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE D1ST TO GO RELATIVE ABSOLUTE D1STT0 GO
X1 X1 X7 X2 X2 X2
Y1 Y1 Y7 Y2 Y2 Y2 Z1 Z1 Z1 22 Z2 Z2
MODAL MODAL
G00 G22 G40 G98 M G00 G98 025 G67 M
G17 G94 G49 G50 M G97 G21 G22 G54 M
G90 G21 080 G67 M G69 G40 090 G18 M
H T H T
B B
F OMM/M1N F 0MM/M1N
S 20 ACTS ORPM 90 ORPM
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STOP 14:00:00 HEA01
PRGR NEXT ιoaaη
/
Explanatíons
Program dísplay The screen displays up to four blocks of the current program, starting from
the block currently being executed. The block currently being executed
is displayed in reverse vídeo. During DNC operatíon, however, only three
blocks can be dísplayed.
Current posítíon dísplay The positíon ín the workpíece coordinate system or relatíve coordinate
system and the remaíníng dístance are displayed. The absolute posítíons
and relatíve positions are swítched by soft keys [ABS] and [REL].
When there are six or more controlled axes, pressíng the [ABS] soft key
toggles the dísplay between the absolute coordinates for the first to fıfth
axes and those for the síxth to eíghth axes. Pressing the [REL] soft key
toggles the relatíve coordinate dísplay in the same way.
Moda1 G codes Up to 12 modal G codes are dísplayed.
Dísplay duríng automatic Duńng automatic operation, the actual speed, sACT, and repeat count are
operation dísplayed. The key ínput prompt >_ ís dísplayed otherwise.
T codes Then bit 2 PCT of parameter No. 3108 is set to 1, the T codes specifıed
with the PMC are displayed ínstead of those specifïed ín
the program. Refer to the FANUC PMC Programming Manua1
B-61863E for detaíls of
1013
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-63534EN/o2
12 soft keys dísplay unít The program check screen ís not províded for 12 soft keys dísplay unit.
Press soft key [PRGRM] to display the contents of the program on the
ńght half of the screen. The block currently beíng executed ís índícated
Ьy the cursor. The current posítíon of the tool and modal data are
displayed on the left half of the screen.
Up to 18 modal G codes are dísplayed.
/
ACTUAL POS1T10N 03001 N00000
ABSOLUTE
X F 0 MMiMIN
Y
PROGRAM Z 03001 ;
G40;
G49 M06 T9 ;
GO 054 G90 XO YO ;
MODAL G43 Z30. H5 S8000 M3 ; м0;
G00 G40 G54 F 500 M 3 Y-22 ;
G17 G43 Ge4 ;
G10 P11 F500 ;
G90 G80 G69 H 5 M30;
G22 G90 G15 D T 9
GØ G50 G25 >_
G21 G67 S 6000 MEM 070740
SACT ı
RLL Au i εxГ ј юP η J

1014
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplays the program ínput from the MDI and modal data ín the MDI
mode. Program Screen for
MD1 Operatíon
Procedure for dísplayíng the program screen for MD1 operatíon
Procedure
1 Press function key јPROGј .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [MD1].
The program input from the MDI and modal data are displayed.
PROGRAM MD1 02000 N00130
00000 G00 ;
M03 ;
Program G01 F500 ;
M98 P9010 ;
G00 ;

G00 G90 G94 G40 G80 G50 G54 G69
Modalinformation G17 G22 G21 G49 G98 G67 G64 G15
H M
T D
F S
>_ S 0 T0000
MD1.,..... ,,, 16:05:59
[PRGRM][ , ` [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ OPRT ]
\
J
Explanatíons
MD1 operatíon See for MDI operatíon.
Moda1 ínformatíon The modal data ís dísplayed when bít 7 MDL of parameter 3107 ís set
[o 1. Up to 16 modal G codes are dísplayed. On the 12 soft keys display
unit, however, the contents of the program are displayed on the ríght half
of the screen and the modal daca ís displayed on the left half of the screen,
regardless of this parameter.
Dísplayíng during Duriná automatic operatíon, the actual speed, SACT, and repeat count are
automatic operatíon dísplayed. The key inpu[ prompt >_ ís displayed otherwise.
1015
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/o2
When a machíníng program ís executed, the machiníng time of the main
Stamping the program ís dísplayed on the program machíníng tíme dísplay screen. The
machíníng tímes of up to ten main programs are dísplayed in
Machining Time
hours/mínutes/seconds. When moгe than ten programs are executed, data
for the oldest programs ís discarded.
Procedure for stamping Machíníng Time
Procedure 1
1 Select the memory operatíon mode, then press the јRESEтј key.
Machiníng time
caiculation and díspiay
2 Select the program screen, then select a program whose machíníng
tíme ís to be calculated.
3 Execute the program to perform actual machíníng.
4 When the REθE7 key ís pressed, or M02 or M30 ís executed, the
machíníng tíme count operatíon stops. When the machining tíme
display screen ís selected, the program number of the stopped main
program and íts machíning tíme are dísplayed.
To dísplay the machiníng tíme display screen, use the procedure
below. Machiníng time data can be dísplayed ín any mode and
during background edítíng.
Press the function key PROG
Press the rightmost soft key once or twice to dísplay soft key [T1ME].
Press soft key [T1ME]. The machiníng time dísplay screen appears.
Machíníng tíme dísplay screen
ГРRОGRАМ T1ME 00010 N00002
NO. T1ME
00020 12H48M02S
>_
ED1T..., ,., . . 16:52:13
І [ ] [ ] [ ] [ 1 [ ιOPR η 1 ,
1016
і
8-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

5 To calculate the machíníng tímes of additional programs, repeat the
above procedure. The machíníng time dísplay screen dísplays the
executed main program numbers and theír machíning times
sequentíally.
Note, that machíníng tíme data cannot Ьe dísplayed for more than ten
main programs. When more than ten programs are executed, data for
the oldest programs is díscarded. The screens below show how the
screen dísplay changes from the ínítíal state where the machíníng times
of ten maіn programs 00020, 00040, ..., and 00200 are dísplayed
to the state where the machining time of the main program 00220 ís
calculated.
PROGRAM T1ME 00000 N00000
NO. T1ME
00020 12H48M01 S
00040 OH48M01S
00060 4H16MO1S
00080 OH16MO1S
00100 1H2OM01S
00120 2H08M025
00140 2H32M01S
00160 OH51 M01 S
00180 15H04M01 S
00200 OH56M01 S
>_
ED1T 16:52:13
[ ][ ][ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
\ -ф,
δ
PROGRAM T1ME 00000 N00000
NO. T1ME
00040 OH48M01 S
00060 4H16M01S
00080 OH16M01S
00100 1H2OM01S
00120 2H08M02S
00140 2H32M01S
00160 OH51 M01 S
00180 15H04M01S
00200 OH56M01S
00220 OH03M01 S
>
ED1T 16:52:20
][ ][ 1; [ OPRT ]
\
1017
11. SETT[NG AND DISPLAY[NG DATA OPERATION в-s3534EN/02
Procedure 2 1 To ínsert the calculated machiníng time of a program in a program as a
Stamping machíníng comrnent, the machíníng tíme of the program must be dísplayed on
time the machiníng time dísplay screen. Before stampíng the machining
tíme of the program, check that the machining tíme display screen
shows the program number
2 Set the part program storage and edít mode or background edít state
and select the program screen. Then select the program whose
machining tíme is to be ínserted.
3 Suppose that the machíníng tíme of 00100 is dísplayed on the
machining tíme display soft key [ OPRT ] to display the
operatíon soft keys. Then, hold down the ríghtmost soft key untíl soft
key [T1ME-1NSERT] appears. When soft key [T1ME-1NSERT] ís
pressed, the cursor moves to the start of the program, and the
machining tíme of the program ís ínserted after the program number.
1
PROGRAM 00100 N00000
00100;
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03;
N30 G00 75. T0101 ;
N40 G01 X-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40.;
X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N100 X80. ;
ED1T 16:05:59
[ 1NS-TΛΛ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
\ J
δ
Г
PROGRAM 00100 N00000
00100 [ ] ;
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 G01 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50.;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N100 X80. ;
ED1T ` ` 16:05:59
` [ 1NS-TM ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
/
- 1018 -
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETT[NG AND DISPLAY[NG DATA
4 If a comment already exists in the block contaíning the program
number of a program whose machíníng time is to be inserted, the
machining time ís ínserted after the exísting comment.
PROGRAM 00100 ON0000
SHAFT XSF001 ;
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 G01 X-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40. ;
X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N 100 X80. ;
ED1T 16:52:13
[ 1NS-TM ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
\ -
δ
\ PROGRAM 00100 N00000
00100 SHAFT XSF001 ,
;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 G01 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50.;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N 100 X80. ;
ED1T ` 16:52:13
[ 1NS-TM ] [ 1 [ 1 [ ] [ ]
J
5 The machining time of a program inserted as a comment can be
dísplayed after an exístíng program comment on the program
dírectory screen.

1
PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00020 GEAR XGR001 : 012H48M01 S
00002 GEAR XGR002 : OOOH48M01 S
00010 BOLTYBT001 : 004H16M01S
00020 BOLT YВТОО2 : 000H16M01S
00040 SHAFT XSF001 : 001 H2OM01 S
00050 SHAFT XSF002 : 002H08M01 S
00100 SHAFT XSF011 : 002H32M02S
00200 PLATE XPL100 : OOOH51 M01 S
>_
ED1T 14:46:09
[PRGRM][ 1][ ] [ ] [ O PRT ] J

- 1019 -
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-fi3534EN/02
Explanatíons
Machíníng tíme Machíníng tíme ís counted from the ínítíal start after a reset іп memory
operatíon mode to the next reset. If a reset does not occur duríng
operatíon, machíníng time ís counted from the start to M03 or M30 .
However, note that the tíme during which operation ís held ís not counted,
but the tíme used to waít for completion of M, S, T, and/or B functions
ís counted.
Stampíng the machíníng The dísplayed machiníng time can Ьe ínserted stamped as a comment
tíme in a program stored in memory. Machíníng tíme ís inserted as a comment
after the program number.
Program directory The machíníng tíme ínserted after a program number can be dísplayed on
the program directory screen by settíng bit 0 NAM of parameter No.
3107 to 1. Thís lets the user know the machiníng time of each program.
Thís ínformatíon ís useful as reference data when planníng processíng.
Límítatíons
A1aгm When program executíon ís termínated by an alarm during the machíning
tíme count, the machíníng time untíl the alarm is released ís counted.
M02 If the user specifíes that M02 does not reset the CNC but returns
completion sígnal FIN to the CNC to restart the program from the
begínníng successívely wíth bít 5 M02 of parameter No. 3404 set to 0 ,
the machíníng tíme count stops when M02 returns completíon sígnal FIN.
stampíng the machining When the machíning tíme of a program to be stamped ís not dísplayed on
tíme the machíníng time dísplay screen, the machíning tíme cannot be inserted
ínto the program even íf soft key [1NS TM] is pressed.
1020
B-63534EN 02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Program dírectory When the machiníng tíme inserted ínto a program is dísplayed on the
program directory screen and the comment after the program number
consists of on1y machíníng tíme data, the machíníng time ís dísplayed in
both the program name display field and machining tíme display fıeld.
If machíning time data ís ínserted into a program as shown below, the
program dírectory screen does not dísplay the data or dísplays only part
of the data.
Example 1: Program dírectory screen when a program name
longer than 16 characters
PROGRAM 00100 N00000 1
О024 І І
001 H2OM01 S ;
;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
NØ G01 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
ED1T ` 16:52:13
[ 1NS-TM ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]
-,,
δ
A11 characters after the first 16 characters of the
program comment are discarded and the machíning time
display fíeld ís left blank.

PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
U S E D: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00240 SHAFT XSF301 :
>_
ED1T ` 16:52:13
[PRGRM] [l І. ] [ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]

11. SETTING AND DISPLAY[NG DATA OPERATION B-63534EN; 02
Example 2: Program dírectory screen when two or moгe machíning
tímes are stamped.
/
PROGRAM 00260 N00000
00260 SHAFT XSF302 001 H 15M59S
N10 G92 X100. Z10. :
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 G01 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
ED1T 16:52:13
[ 1NS-TM ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ]

δ
0п1y the fírst machíning tíme is dísplayed.
PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010 \
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00260 SHAFT XSF302 : 001 H15M59S
>_
ED1T 16:52:13
[PRGRM] 0 ]І: 1 1 ί ] ί l [ OPRT j
\ /
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETT[NG AND DISPLAYING DATA
Example 3: Program dírectory screen when ínserted machíníng time data
does not conform to the format hhhHmmMssS 3-digit
number foliowed by H, 2-dígít number followed by M, and
2-digít number followed by S, in thís order
PROGRAM 00280 N00000
00280 SHAFT XSF303 ,]
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 G01 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 G01 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N 100 X80. ;
ED1T ` 16:52:13
[ 1NS-TM ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] J
δ
The machíning tíme dísplay fíeld ís blank.

PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00260 SHAFTXSF302 : OO1H15M59S
00280 sнAFτ xsFзoз :
>
ED1T 16:52:13
[ PRGRM ] [ ,- І ľ ľ ί ][ OPRT J

Correcting the If an íncorrect machíning time is calculated such as when a reset occurs
machíníng tíme duríng program executíon , reexecute the program to calculate the correct
machíníng tíme. If the machíning time dísplay screen dísplays multíple
programs with the same program number, select the machíníng time of the
latest program number for ínsertíon ínto the program.
1023
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Thís sectíon describes the screens displayed by pressíng function key
SCREENS PROG in the EDIT mode. Functíon key l PRoG I in the EDIT mode can
DISPLAYED BY dísplay the program edítíng screen and the program list screen dísplays
FUNCTION KEY memory used and a líst of programs . Pressíng functíon key јPROGј fl the
1N THE ED1T MODE EDIT mode can also dísplay the conversatíonal graphics programming
screen and the floppy fi1e directory screen. See III-9 and 10 for the
program editíng screen and conversational graphícs programmíng screen.
See III-8 for the floppy fíle dírectory screen.
Displays the number of registered programs, memory used, and a list of
Displaying Memory registered programs.
Used and a Líst of
Programs
Procedure for dísplayíng memory used and a líst of programs
Procedure 1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 Press function key PROG .
3 Press chapter selectíon soft key [D1R].
- \
PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00010 00001 00003 00002 00555 00999
00062 00004 00005 01111 00969 06666
00021 01234 00588 00020 00040
>_ S 0 T0000
MD 1 ....... ,.. 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] [ 1і ][ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
\
10N
OPERATıON 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 6-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Details of inemory used PROGRAM NO. USED
PROGRAM NO. USED : The number of the programs registered
íncludíng the subprograms
FREE : The number of programs which can be
regístered addítíonally.
MEMORY AREA USED
MEMORY AREA USED : The capacíty of the program memory in whích
data ís registered índícated by the number of
characters .
FREE : The capacity of the program memory which
can be used addítionally índícated by the
number of characters .
Program library list Program Nos. regístered are índicated.
A1so, the program name can be displayed in the program table by setting
parameter NAM No. 3107 0 to 1.
PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00001
00002
00010 TEST-PROGRAM.ARTHMETIC
00020
00040
00050
00100 1NCH MM CONVERT CHECK
00200
>
ED1T 16:05:59
[PRGRM] [ ,. ] [ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
Program name Always enter a program name between the control out and control in
codes ímmedíately after the program number.
Up to 31 characters can be used for namíng a program wíthin the
parentheses. If 31 characters are exceeded, the exceeded characters are
not dísplayed.
0n1y program number ís dísplayed for the program wíthout any program
name.
о ΔΔΔΔ...Δ ;
1 1
Program number Program name up to 31 characters
Order in whích programs Programs are dísplayed ín the same order that they агe regístered in the
are díspiayed ín the program líbrary 1ist. However, íf bit 4 SOR of parameter 3107 ís set to
program líbrary líst 1, programs are dísplayed in the order of program number starting from
the smallest one.
1025
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Order ín whích programs When no program has been deleted from the 1íst, each program is
are registered regístered at the end of the 1íst.
If some programs in the list were deleted, then a new program ís
registered, the new program is ínserted in the empty location in the líst
created by the deleted programs.
Exainple When bít 4 SOR of parameter 3107 ís 0
1. After clearing a11 programs, register prograins 00001, 00002, 00003,
00004, and 00005 ín thís order. The program library list displays the
programs in the following order:
00001, 00002, 00003, 00004, 00005
2. Delete 00002 and 00004. The program líbrary líst dísplays the
programs ín the following order:
00001, 00003, 00005
3. Regíster 00009. The program líbrary list dísplays the programs ín the
followíng order:
00001, 00009, 00003, 00005
1026
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
In additíon to the normal listíng of the numbers and names of CNC
Dísplayíng a Program programs stored ín memory, programs can be listed in uníts of groups,
accordíng to the product to be machined, for example.
List for a Specified
G ro u p To assígn CNC programs to the same group, assígn names to those
programs, begínníng each name wíth the same character string.
By searchíng through the program names for a specífíed character string,
the program numbers and names of a11 the programs havíng names
íncluding that string are listed.
Procedure for Dísplaying a Program List for a Specifíed Group
Procedure 1 Enter EDIT or background editing mode.
2 Press th P e ROG function key.
3 Press the functíon key or [D1R] soft key to dísplay the program
1íst.
PROGRAM DIRECTORY 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
U S E D: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00020 GEAR-1000 MA N
00040 GEAR-1000 SUB-1
00060 SHAFT-2000 MA1N
00100 SHAFT-2000 SUB-1
00200 GEAR-1000 SUB-2
01000 FRANGE-3000 MA1N
02000 GEAR-1000 SUB-3
03000 SHAFT-2000 SUB-2
ED1T,....,< .,..., 16:52:13
[ PRGRM ] [ ,- ĺ ľ ľ[ ] [ OPRT
4 Press the [ OPRT ] operation soft key.
ι 0.δRH 5 Press the [G R O U P] operatíon soft key.
LеG-Ео
6 Press the [NAME] operatíon soft key.
7 Enter the character string correspondíng to the group for whích a
searchís to be made, usíng the MDI keys. No restríctíons are ímposed
on the length of a program name. Note, however, that search ís made
based on on1y the fırst 32 characters.
Example: To search for those CNC programs havíng names that
begín wíth character stríng GEAR-1000, enter the
followíng:
>GEAR-1000
1027
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
L 8 Pressíng the [EXEC] operatíon soft key dísplays the group-unít
C J
program list screen,lístíng a11 those programs whose name íncludes
the specifíed character string.
PROGRAM DIRECTORY GROUP 00001 N00010
PROGRAM NUM. MEMORY CHAR.
UςED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429
00020 GEAR-1000MAIN
00040 GEAR-1000 SUB-1
00200 GEAR-1000 SUB-2
02000 GEAR-1000 SUB-3
>_
ED1T..., . ,.. ,.. 16:52:25
[ PRGRM ] [ ,. ] [ ] [ Ľ OPRT l
\
[Group-unit program líst screen displayed
when a search ís made for GEAR-1000 ]
When the program líst consísts of two or more pages, the pages can be
changed by usíng a page key.
Explanatíons
and ? In the above example, the asterisk must not be omítted. The asterísk
indícates an arbítrary character stríng wíld card specífícation .
GEAR-1000 indícates that the fírst níne characters of the target
program names must be GEAR-1000, followed by an arbítrary
character stríng. If on1y GEAR-1000 ís entered, a search ís made on1y
for those CNC programs havíng the nine-charactername GEAR-1000.
A questíon mark ? can be used to specify a síngle arbítrary character.
For example, entering ????-1000 enables a search to be made for
programs havíng names whích start wíth four arbítrary characters,
followed by -1000.
1028
в-sз53aENıo2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
[Example of usíng wíld cards]
Entered character stńng Group for which the search wí11 be made
a CNC pr ograıns a h vıng a y ame
Ь AвC CNC programs havíng names whích end
wíth ABC
c ABC CNC programs havíng names whích start
with ABC
d CNC programs havíng names which
include ABC
e ?A?C CNC programs havíng four character
names, the second and fourth characters
of whích are A and C, respectively
f ??A?C CNC programs havíng fíve character
names, the thírd and fıfth characters of
whích are A and C, respectívely
g 123 456 CNC programs having names whích start
wíth 123 and which end wíth
When the specífíed If no program is located as a result of a search for an entered character
character stríng cannot stńng, warníng message DATA NOT FOUND ís dísplayed on the
be found program líst screen.
Holdíng the group for A group unít program 1íst, generated by a search, ís held untíl the power
whích a search ís made is turned off or until another search is performed.
Group for whích After changíng the screen from the group unít program list to another
prevíous search was screen, pressíng the [PR GRP] operation soft key dísplayed ín step 6
made redisplays the group unit program líst screen, on whích the program
names for the prevíously searched group are lísted. Using this soft key
elimínates the need to enter the relevant character stńng agaín to redisplay
the search results after changíng the screen.
Examples Assume that the main programs and subprograms for machiníng gear part
number 1000 a11 have names which include character stńng
GEAR-1000. The numbers and names of those programs can be lísted
Ьy searching through the names of a11 CNC programs for character stńng
GEAR-1000. Thís functíon facílítates the management of the CNC
programs stored in large capacity memory.
1029
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02

Press function key to dísplay or set tool compensation values and
SCREENS
other data.
DISPLAYED BY Thís section descríbes how to dísplay or set the followíng data:
FUNCTION KEY
1. Too1 offset value
2. Settings
3. Run time and part count
4. Workpiece origin offset value
5. Custom macro common variables
6. Pattern menu and pattern data
7. Software operator s panel
8. Too1 life management data
9. Chopping data
10. Rotary table dynamic fixture offset data
This sectíon also descríbes measurement of toollength and the sequence
number comparison and stop functíon.
The pattern menu, pattern data, software operator s pane1, and tool lífe
management data depend on the specífıcatíons of the machine tool
builder. See the mаnual íssued by the machíne tool builder for detaíls.
1030
в-63534εN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Too1 offset values, tool length offset values, and cutter compensatíon
values are specífíed Ьy D codes or H codes in a program. Compensatíon Settíng and Dísplayíng
values corresponding to D codes or H codes are dísplayed or set on the
the Too1 Offset Va1ue
screen.
Procedure for settíng and dísplayíng the tool offset va1ue
Procedure
1 Press functíon key
Ј.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích tool
compensation values are to be dísplayed with the tool post selection
swítch.
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [OFFSET] or press ЗTЗ several
tímes untíl the tool compensatíon screen is displayed.
The screen varies accordíng to the type of tool offset memory.
OFFSET 00001N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA
001 Ю .. 009
002 010
003 011
004 012
005 013
006 014
007 015
008 016
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE
X Y
Z
>_
M D1 .... ,..... 16:05:59
[ ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ]

Too1 offset memoгy A
-
OFFSET 00001 N00000
NO. GEOM H WEAR H GEOM D WEAR D
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE
X Y
Z
>_
MD1,<., ,,...> 16:05:59
в ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
\
Too1 offset memory C
- 1031 -
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-63534EN/o2
3 Move the cursor to the compensation va1ue to be set or changed usíng
page keys and cursor keys, or enter the compensatíon number for the
compensatíon value to be set or changed and press soft key
[].
4 To set a compensatíon value, enter a value and press soft key [1NPUT].
To change the compensatíon va1ue, enter a va1ue to add to the current
va1ue a negative value to reduce the current value and press soft key
[NPUT]. Or, enter a new va1ue and press soft key [1NPUT].
Explanatíons
Decímal poínt input A decimal point can be used when enteńng a compensatíon va1ue.
Other settíng method An external ínput/output device can be used to input or output a tool offset
va1ue. See III-8. A toollength offset va1ue can be set by measuńng the
tool length as descríbed in the next subsectíon.
Too1 offset memory There are tool offset memońes A, B, and C, which are classífíed as
follows:
Too1 offset memory A
D codes and H codes are treated the same. Too1 geometry compensatíon
and tool wear compensatíon are treated the same.
Too1 offset memory B
D codes and H codes are treated the same. Too1 geometry compensation
and tool wear compensation are treated dífferently.
Too1 offset memory C
D codes and H codes are treated dífferently. Too1 geometry
compensatíon and tool wear compensatíon are treated differently.
Dísabling entry of The entry of compensation values may be disabled by settíng bít 0 WOF
compensation values and bít 1 GOF of parameter 3290 not applied to tool offset memory A .
And then, the ínput of tool compensation values from the MDI can be
inhíbíted for a specífíed range of offset numbers. The fırst offset number
for whích the ínput of a va1ue ís ínhíbíted is set in parameter No. 3294.
The number of offset numbers, startíng from the specífıed fırst number,
for whích the ínput of a va1ue ís ínhibited is set in parameter No. 3295.
Consecutive input values are set as follows:
1 When values are input for offset numbers, startíng from one for whích
ínput ís not ínhíbited to one for whích ínput ís ính ıbíted, a warning ís
íssued and values are set on1y for those offset numbers for whích ínput
is not ínhíbíted.
2 When values are input for offset numbers, starting from one for whích
ínput ís ínhíbíted to one for whích ínput is not ínhíbited, a warning ís
íssued and no values are set.
1032
B-63534EN 02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
12 soft keys display unít
OFFSET 00000 N00000 \
NO. DATA NO. DATA ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE
001 017
002 018
003 019
004 020
005 021
006 022
007 023
008 024
009 025
010 026
011 027
012 028
013 029
014 030
015 031
016 032
>
20:J5:00
т,но
Π ОFRT /
Too1 offset memoгy A
OFFSET 00000 N00000 \
LENGTH RADIUS ACTUAL POS1T10N
NO. GEOM WEAR GEOM WEAR RELATIVE
001 X
002 Y
003 Z
004 A
005 0:000 B
006 C
007 7
008 8
009
010
011 0:000
012
013
014
015
016
>
MD1 20:45:00
Π
- sεττ иc І І
Too1 offset memory C
- 103 ; -
11. SETľ1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The length of the tool can Ьe measured and registered as the toollength
offset va1ue Ьy moving the reference tool and the tool to be measured untíl Too1 Length
they touch the specifíed position on the machine.
Measurement
The toollength can be measured along the X , Y , or Z axis.
Procedure for tool length measurement
Procedure 1 Use manual operatíon to move the reference tool untíl ít touches the
specífıed posítíon on the machíne or workpíece.
2 Press function key f several tímes until the current posítíon
Ј Pos
display screen wíth relatíve coordínates is displayed.
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE 01000 N00010
X
Y
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN ` 09:06:35
[ ARS 1 [ 1 ALL 1 [ HNDL 1 [ OPRT ]
_ђ ,
3 Reset the relatíve coordínate for the Z axís to 0 see for
detaíls .
4 Press function key s G everal tímes untíl the tool compensatíon
screen ís dísplayed.
5 Use mаnual operatíon to move the tool to be measured untíl ít touches
the same specífied posítion. The dífference between the length of the
reference tool and the tool to be measured ís displayed in the relative
coordínates on the screen.
6 Move the cursor to the compensatíon number for the target tool the
cursor can be moved in the same way as for settíng tool compensatíon
values .
7 Press the address key OZ

If eítherρX orργ key ís depressed instead of key, the X or Y
axís relatíve coordinate value ís ínput as an toollength compensatíon
va1ue.
1034
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-63534EN/02
8 Press the soft key []. The Z axís relatíve coordinate value is
ínput and dísplayed as an toollength offset va1ue.
ı l l J
The dífference ís set as a tool
length offset value
1035
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8--63534EN/02
Data such as the TV check flag and punch code ís set on the settíng data
screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disable parameter Displayíng and
writíng, enab1e/dísable the automatíc ínsertíon of sequence numbers ín
Enteríng Settíng Data
program edíting, and perform settíngs for the sequence number
comparison and stop functíon.
See for automatíc insertíon of sequence numbers.
See for the sequence number comparison and stop function.
This subsectíon descríbes how to set data.
Procedure for setting the setting data
Procedure 1 Select the MD1 mode.
2 Press function key
3 Press soft key [sET1NG] to dísplay the settíng data screen.
This screen consísts of several pages.
PAGE
Press page key or until the desíred screen ís dísplayed.
PAGE
Aп example of the setting data screen ís shown below.
SETTING HANDY 00001 N00000
P.ARAMETER WR1TE = O:DISABLE 1:ENABLE
TV CHECK = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
PUNCHCODE = 1 o:E1A 1:1S0
1NPUT UN1T = 0 O:MM 1:1NCH
1-0 CHANNEL = 0 0-3:CHANNEL NO.
SEOUENCE NO. = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
TAPE FORMAT = 0 O:NO CNV 1:F15
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 PROGRAM NO.
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 1SEOUENCE NO.
>_
M D1 ..., ,.....
16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
-,/

SETTING HANDY 00001N00000
MIRROR 1MAGE X = Qı O:OFF 1:ON
MIRROR 1MAGE Y = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
MIRROR 1MAGE Z = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
>_
MD1..... ...,
16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
1036
в sзsз4ENio2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
-1 Move the cursor to the ítem to be changed Ьy pressing cursor keys
t or
5 Enter a new va1ue and press soft key [1NPUT].
Contents of settings
PARAMETER WR1TE Setting whether parameter writing ís enabled or dísabled.
0: Dísabled
1 : Enab1ed
Tv CHECK Settíng to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
PUNCH CODE Settíng code when data is output through reader puncher interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
1NPUT UN1T Settíng a program ínput unít, ínch or metric system
0: Metric
1 : Inch
1/0 CHANNEL Using channel of reader/puncher ínterface.
0: Channel0
1 : Channel 1
2: Channel2
3 : Channel3
S E Q U E N C E STO P Setting of whether to perform automatíc ínsertíon of the sequence number
or not at program edít in the EDIT mode.
0: Does not perform automatic sequence number ínsertíon.
1: Perform automatíc sequence number ínsertion.
TAPE FORMAT Setting the F15 tape format conversion.
0: Tape format ís not converted.
1: Tape format is converted.
See I1. PROGRAMMING for the F 15 tape format.
S E Q U E N C E STO P Settíng the sequence number wíth whích the operatíon stops for the
sequence number comparíson and stop functíon and the number of the
program to whích the sequence number belongs
MIRROR 1MAGE Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Mirror ímage off
1 : Mírror ímage on
Others VAGE
Page key AGE or caл also be pressed to dísplay the SETTING
TIMER screen. See for thís screen.
1037
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
If a block contaíníng a specífıed sequence number appears in the program
beíng executed, operatíon enters síngle block mode after the block is Sequence Number
executed.
Comparíson and Stop
Procedure for sequence number comparíson and stop
Procedure 1 Select the MD1 mode.
2 Press functíon key зТтN
3 Press chapter selection soft key [sET1NG].
P
4 Press page key oг several tímes untíl the followíng screen P
ís displayed.
/ 1
SETTING HANDY 00001 N00000
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 O:DISABLE 1:ENABLE
TV CHECK = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
PUNCH CODE = 1 O:EIA 1:IS0
INPUT UNIT = 0 O:MM 1:INCH
I/O CHANNEL = 0 0-3:CHANNEL NO.
SEQUENCE N0. = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
TAPE FORMAT = 0 O:NO CNV 1:F10/11
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 PROGRAM NO.
SEQUENCE STOP = SEQUENCE NO.
> _
MD1..,.....,. 1 6:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ ј І ] [ WORK 1 [ ] [ OPRT ]
\
5 Enter in PROGRAM NO. for SEQUENCE STOP the number 1 to
9999 of the program contaíníng the sequence number wíth whích
operatíon stops.
6 Enter in SEQUENCE NO. for SEQUENCE STOP with fıve or less
digits the sequence number wíth whích operatíon ís stopped.
7 When automatic operatíon ís executed, operation enters síngle block
mode at the block containing the sequence number whích has been
set.
1038
в-sзsз4Eгv a2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Expianatíons
Sequence number after After the specífíed sequence number is found during the executíon of the
the program is executed program, the sequence number set for sequence number compensatíon
and stop is decremented by one. When the power ís turned on, the settíng
of the sequence number ís О.
Exceptíonal blocks If the predetermíned sequence number ís found in a block in whích a11
commands are those to be processed wíthín the CNC control unit, the
execution does not stop at that block.
Example
N1 1=1 ;
N2 IF [ 1 EQ 1] GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;
N5 M99 ;
In the example shown above, íf the predetermined sequence number is
found, the execution of the program does not stop.
Stop in the canned cycle If the predetermíned sequence number is found in a block whích has a
canned-cycle command, the execution of the program stops after the
return operation ís completed.
When the same If the predetermíned sequence number appears twíce or more in a
sequence number ís program, the executíon of the program stops after the block in whích the
found several tímes ín predetermíned sequence number is found for the fírst tíme ís executed.
the program
B1ock to be repeated a If the predetermíned sequence number is found in a block which is to be
specífíed number of executed repeatedly, the executíon of the program stops after the block ís
times executed specifıed tímes.
1039
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Vaňous run tímes, the total number of machíned parts, number of parts
Dísplayíng and Settíng required, and number of machíned parts can be dísplayed. Thís data caті
be set by parameters oг on thís screen except for the total number of
Run Time, Parts Count,
machíned parts and the tíme duňng whích the power ís on, which can be
and Time
set on1y by parameters .
Thís screen can also dísplay the clock tíme. The tíme can be set on the
screen.
Procedure for Dísplayíng and Setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
Procedure 1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press functíon key ј.
3 Press chapter selection soft key [sET1NG .
PAOE
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen
PA6E
ís dísplayed.
-

SETTING T1MER 00001N00000
PARTS TOTAL = 14
PARTS REOUIRED _- 0
PARTS COUNT = 23
POWER ON = 4H 31M
OPERATING T1ME = OH OM OS
CUTTING T1ME = OH 37M 5S
FREE PURPOSE = OH OM OS
CYCLE T1ME - OH OM OS
DATE = 2001/07/05
T1ME = 11:32:52
>_
MD1 ` 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ ІІ[е1] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
5 To set the number of parts requíred, move the cursor to PARTS
REQUIRED and enter the number of parts to be machíned.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date
or tíme, then press soft key [1NPUT].
Dísplay ítems
PARTS TOTAL Thís value ís íncremented by one when M02, M30, or aп M code specífıed
Ьy parameter 6710 ís executed. Thís value cannot be set on thís screen.
Set the value in parameter 6712.
PARTS REQUIRED It is used for settíng the number of machined parts requíred.
When the 0 ís set to ít, there ís no límítatíon to the number of parts.
A1so, íts settíng can be made by the parameter NO. 6713 .
1040
в-s3534εNı02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
PARTS COUNT Thís va1ue is íncremented by one when M02, M30, or aп M code specífíed
Ьy parameter 6710 ís executed. The value can also Ьe set by parameter
6711. In general, thís va1ue ís reset when it reaches the number of parts
requíred. Refer to the manual íssued by the machine tool buílder for
details.
POWER ON Dísplays the total tíme whích the power ís on. Thís va1ue cannot be set
on thís screen but can be preset in parameter 6750.
OPERATING T1ME Indícates the total run tíme duńng automatíc operatíon, excludíng the
stop and feed hold time.
Thís va1ue can be preset in parameter 6751 or 6752.
C U TT 1 N G T 1 M E Dísplays the total time taken Ьy cuttíng that ínvolves cuttíng feed such as
línear ínterpolation GO1 and circular ínterpolatíon G02 or G03 . This
value can be preset ín parameter 6753 or 6754.
F R E E P U R P O S E Thís va1ue can be used, for example, as the total time duríng whích coolant
flows. Refer to the manual íssued by the machine tool buílder for detaíls.
CYC LE T 1 M E Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and
feed hold tíme. Thís ís automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is
performed at reset state. It ís preset to 0 even when power ís removed.
DATA and T1ME Dísplays the current date and time. The date and time caп be set on thís
screen.
Límítatíons
Usage When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of
machined parts and the number of machined parts are incremented by one.
Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 ís executed every tíme
the processing of one part ís completed. Furthermore, íf an M code set
to the parameter NO. 6710 is executed, countíng is made in the similar
manner. A1so, it ís possíble to dísable counting even if M02 or M30 is
executed parameter PCM No. 6700Ø is set to 1 . For detaíls, see the
manual issued by machíne tool buílders.
Restrictíons
Ru n ti me and part count Negative va1ue cannot Ьe set. A1so, the settíng of M and S of run time
settíngs ís va1id from 0 to 59.
Negatíve value may not be set to the total number of machíned parts.
Tіme settíngs Neither negatíve va1ue nor the va1ue exceedíng the va1ue in the followíng
table can be set.
ltem Maximum value ltem Maximum value
Year 2085 Hour 23
Month 12 Minute 59
Day 31 Sгcond 59
1Ø1
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Displays the workpíece ońgín offset for each workpíece coordínate
Dísplaying and Settíng system G54 to G59, P1 to P48 and P1 to
P300 and external workpíece orígín offset. The workpíece ońgín offset
the Workpíece Orígín
and external workpiece origín offset can be set on this screen.
Offset Va1ue
Procedure for Dísplayíng and settíng the Workpiece Orígín Offset Va1ue
Procedure
1 Press functíon key . І.
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [WORK].
The workpíece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
WORK COORDINATES 00001 N00000
G54
NO. DATA NO. DATA
00 X 02 X
EXT Y G55 Y
Z Z
01 X 03 X
G54 Y G56 Y
Z Z
>_ S 0 T0000
MD1 ,.....,... 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ [ ] [ OPRT ]
3 The screen for dísplayíng the workpíece origin offset values consists
of two or more pages. Display a desired page in either of the
following two ways:
Press the page up ј pT ı or page down key.
Enter the workpíece coordinate system number 0 : external
workpiece ońgin offset,l to 6: workpíece coordínate systems G54
to G59, P1 to P48 : workpiece coordínate systems P1 to
P48, P1 to P300 : workpìece coordínate systems P1
to P300 and press operatíon selection soft key [].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enab1e writíng.
5 Move the cursor to the workpíece ońgín offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desíred value by pressíng numeríc keys, then press soft key
[1NPUT]. The enteredvalue ís specífïed in the the workpíece ońgín
offset value. Or, by enteríng a desíred value wíth numeríc keys and
pressíng soft key [NPUT], the entered va1ue can be added to the
previous offset va1ue.
7 Repeat 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to dísable wńtíng.
1042
в-6зsзaEw o2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
This functíon ís used to compensate for the difference between the
Direct lnput of programmed workpiece coordínate system and the actual workpiece
coordínate system. The measured offset for the origín of the workpiece
Measured Workpiece
coordínate system can Ьe ínput on the screen such that the command
Origín Offsets
values match the actual dímensíons.
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordinate
system with the actual coordínate system.
Procedure for Dírect lnputtíng of Measured Workpíece Orígin Offsets
Procedure
v

Surface A
Programmed a
workpiece origiň
Surface B
O
а.X
New offset , -ł x
- Previous
offset
Orìgin
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown above, posítíon the reference
tool manually untíl ít touches surface A of the workpíece.
2 Retract the tool wíthout changíng the Y coordínate.
3 Measure dístance a between surface A and the programmed orígin of
the workpíece coordinate system as shown above.
4 Press function key α sετ ЅεπгЅ
1043
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534E N/02
5 To dísplay the workpíece origin offset settíng screen, press the
chapter selectíon soft key [WORK].
1
WORKCOORDINATES 01234 N56789
G54
NO. DATA NO. DATA
00 X ЮЮІІ.Ј 02 X
EXT Y G55 Y
Z Z
01 X 03 X
G54 Y G56 Y
Z Z
> Z100. S 0 T0000
MD1... ,., ... 16:05:59
[ ] [ MEASUR ] [ ] [ NPUT ] [ 1NPUT ]

6 Posítion the cursor [o the workpíece orígín offset va1ue to be set.
7 Press the address key for the axis along whích the offset ís to be set
Y axís in thís example .
8 Enter the measured va1ue a then press the [MEASUR] soft key.
9 Move the reference tool manually untíl ít touches surface B of the
workpíece.
10 Retract the tool wíthout changíng the X coordínate.
11 Measure dístance β then enter the dístance at X oп the screen in the
saτne way as in steps 7 and 8.
Límítatíons
Consecutíve ínput Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time.
Duríng program This functíon cannot be used while a program ís beíng executed.
execution
1044
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-63534EN/02
Displays common variables 100 to 149 or 100 to 199, and 500 to
531 or 500 to 999 on the CRT. When the absolute va1ue for a common Displayíng and Settíng
varíable exceeds 99999999, is dísplayed. The values for
Custom Mac[o
variables can be set on thís screen. Relatíve coordinates can also be set
Common Variables
to valiables.
Procedure for dísplayíng and settíng custom macro common variables
Procedure
1 Press functíon key Ø
LС o t Ј 2 Press the contínuous menu key , then press chapter selectíon
soft key [MACRO].The followíng screen ís displayed:
aσσσσσ
Continuous menu key VARIABLE 00001N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA
100 іІі1. ііІі 108
101 109
102 110
103 111
104 112
105 113
106 114
107 115
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE
X Y
Z
>_ S 0 T0000
M D 1 16:05:59
] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ 1NPUT ]
\ J
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set usíng either of the
followíng methods:
Enter the variable number and press soft key [].
Move the cursor to the varíable number to set by pressíng page keys
and/or PaGE and cursor keys . . , and/or
P GE
4 Enter data wíth numeric keys and press soft key [1NPUT].
5 To set a relatíve coordínate in a уaгіaЬ1e, press address key X
, oг Z , then press soft key [].

6 To set a blank іп a variable, just press soft key [1NPUT]. The va1ue
fıeld for the variable becomes blank.
1045
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-δ3534EN/02
Thís subsectíon uses an example to descríbe how to dísplay or set
machining menus pattern menus created by the machine tool buílder. Dísplayíng Pattern
Refer to the manual íssued by the machine tool buílder for the actual
Data and Pattern Menu
pattern menus and pattern data. See H. PROGRAMMING for the pattern
data entry function.
Procedure for displaying the pattern data and the pattern menu
Procedure
1 Press functíon key
2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection
C l L MENU soft key [MENU]. aσσσσσ
? The following screen pattern menu screen is displayed:
Continuous menu key
MENU : HOLE PATTERN 00000 N00000
1. TAPPING
2. DRILLING
3. BORING
4. POCKET
5. BOLT HOLE
6. L1NE ANGLE
7. GR1D
8. PECK
9.
10.
>_
MD1 16:05:59
[MACRO] 1ІvІ 111 ][OPR][ ] [ OPRт ]
J
3 Enter a pattern number and press soft key [sELECT].
In this example, press 5o , then press [sELECT].
The following screen pattern data screen ís dísplayed:

VAR. : BOLT HOLE 00001 N00000
NO. NAME DATA COMMENT
500 TOOL І ,јІј,
501 STANDARD X BOLT HOLE
502 STANDARD Y CIRCLE
503 RADIUS SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO
506
507
ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE
X Y
> _ Z
MD1 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [SETING] [ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
1046
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-δ3534EN/02
4 Enter necessary pattern data and press 1NP
5 After enteríng a11 necessary data, enter the MEMORY mode and press
the cycle start button to start machíníng.
Explanatíons
Explanatíon of the HOLE PATTERN : Menu title
pattern menu screen An optíonal character string caп be dísplayed wíthin 12 characters.
BOLE HOLE: Pattem name
An optíonal character stríng can Ьe dísplayed withín 10 characters.
The machíne tool builder should program character stríngs of inenu títle
and pattern name Ьy custom macro, and load them ínto the program
memoгy.
Explanatíon of the BOLT HOLE : Pattern data title
pattern data screen An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters.
TOOL : Variable name
An optiona1 character stríng caл Ьe dísplayed wíthín 10 characters.
BOLT HOLE CIRCLE : Comment statement
An optíonal character stríng comment caп be dísplayed up to 12
characters/líne Ьy 8 línes.
The machíne tool buílder should program the character stríngs of variable
name and comment statement by custom macro, and load them ínto the
program memorу.
1047
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA O P E RAT 1 O N 8-63534E N/02
Wíth thís functíon, functíons of the switches on the machíne operator s
Displayíng and Settíng paпe1 can be controlled from the CRT/MDI pane1.
Jog feed can be performed usíng numeríc keys.
the Software
Operator s Pane1
Procedure for dísplayíng and settíng the software operator s panel
Procedure
1 Press function key і.
[ _ С MOP Ј
2 Press the contínuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft
aσσσσσ key [OPR].
3 The screen consists of several pages.
Continuous menu key
Press page key f or until the desired screen is dísplayed.
-
OPERATOR S PANEL 00000 N00000
MD1I MEM ED1T HNDL JOG REF
STEPMULTI. : 1 10 100
RAP1D OVRD. :I 100 50 25 FO
JOG FEED : ó
FEED OVRD. : 100 ıá
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE
X Y
Z
>_
MD 1 .....,.... 16:05:59
[MACRO][ ][ ЕЅЈ [TOOLLF] [ OPRT ]

i
1
OPERATOR S PANEL 00000 N00000
BLOCK SK1P OFF ON
SINGLE BLOCK OFF ON
MACHINE LOCK OFF ON
PROTECT KEY PROTECT RELEASE
FEED HOLD OFF
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE
X Y
Z
S 0 T0000
MD1..<. :...., 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ ][ ] [ TOOLLF ] [ OPRT ]

1048
в-sз5зlεгv o2 OPERAT1oN 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
4 Move the cursor to the desíred swítch by pressíng cursor key or
i
5 Push the cursor move key в
or to match the mark to an
arbitrary posítion and set the desired conditíon.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the
5 key together wíth an arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
7r gt

4
r 1 2j 31
Explanatíons
Va1íd operations The va1id operations on the software operator s panel are shown below.
Whether to use the CRT/MDI panel or machíne operator s panel for each
group of operatíons can be selected by parameter 7200.
G rou p 1: Mode selectíon
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, jog rapíd traverse
Group3 : Selectíon of manual pulse generator feed axís, selection of
mаnual pulse magnífıcation x1, x10, x100
G ro u p4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapíd traverse overríde
G гo u p5 : Optional block skíp, síngle block, machine 1ock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Gгoup7 : Feed hold
Display The groups for whích the machíne operator s panel ís selected by
parameter 7200 are not displayed on the software operator s panel.
Screens on whích jog When the CRT índicates other than the software operator s pane1 screen
feed ís valìd and díagnostíc screen, jog feed ís not conducted even íf the arrow key ís
pushed.
Jog feed and arrow keys The feed axís and dírection correspondíng to the arrow keys can be set
with parameters Nos. 7210 to 7217 .
General purpose Eíght optíonally defínable swítches are added as an extended functíon of
swítches the software operator s pаne1. The name of these switches can Ьe set by
parameters Nos. 7220 to 7283 as character strings of max. 8 characters.
For the meaníngs of these swítches, refer to the manual íssued by machíne
tool buílder.
1049
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-6зsз4εwoг
Toollife data can Ьe dísplayed to inform the operator of the current state
Displayíng and Setting of tool life management. Groups whích require tool changes are also
dí toollífe counter for each group can be preset to an arbitrary
Too1 Life Management
va1ue. Too1 data executíon data can be reset or cleared. To regíster or
Data
modífy too1 life management data, a program must be created and
executed. See Explanations in this section for details.
When bít 6 EXT of parameter 6801 ís 1, extended toollife management
applies. See
Procedure for dísplay and settíng the tool life management data
Procedure
1 Press functíon key
С J
2 Press the contínuous menu key Q to display chapter selection soft
o oo V key [TOOLLF].
3 Press softkey [TOOLLF].
4 Oпe page displays data on two groups. Pressíng page key
o
or successívely displays data on the followíng groups. Up
to four group Nos., for whích the Too1 Change sígnal is beíng issued,
are displayed at the bottom of each page. An arrow shown in the
figure is dísplayed for five or more groups, íf exísts.
1
TOOL L1FE DATA : 03000 N00060
SELECTED GROUP 000
;І.јіјЛіІі L1FE 0150 COUNT 0000
0034 0078 0012 0056
0090 0035 0026 0061
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
GROUP 002: L1FE 1400 COUNT 0000
0062 0024 0044 0074
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
TO BE CHANGED : 003 004 005 006 >
>_
M EM 16:05:59
] [ OPR ] [ [ MACRO ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
J
1050
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-6з5зaεwo2
5 To display the page contaíníng the data for a group, enter the group
number and press soft key [].
The cursor can be moved to an arbítrary group by pressíng cursor key
or O .
6 To changc the va1ue іп the life counter for a group, move the cursor to
the group, enter a new value four dígits , and press [1NPUT]. The life
counter for the group índícated by the cursor ís preset to the entered
value. Other data for the group is not changed.
7 To reset the tool data, move the cursor on the group to reset, then press
the [ OPRT ]. [CLEAR], and [EXEC] soft keys in thís order.
AІІ execution data for the group índícated by the cursor ís cleared
together wíth the marks , or .
1051
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION
B-65534EN 02
Explanatíons
e rJíspıa`,r cº;;to;,ts

TOOL L1FE DATA : 03000 N00060
SELECTED GROUP 000
L1FE 0150 COUNT 0007
0034 0078 0012 0056
0090 0035 0026 0061
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
GROUP 002: L1FE 1400 COUNT 0000
0062 0024 0044 0074
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
TO BE CHANGED : 003 004 005 006 ->
>_
MEM..,.....<, 16:05:59
[MACRO][ ] [ OPR ] [ OPRT ]
The first line is the title 1ine.
In the second 1ine the group number of the current command is
dísplayed.
When there ís no group number of the current command, 0 ís dísplayed.
In línes 3 to 7 the toollífe data of the group ís dísplayed.
The thírd 1іпe displays group number,lífe and the count used.
The lífe count is chosen by parameter LTM No. 6800 2 as eíther
minutes or hours or number of tímes used.
In línes 4 to 5, tool numbers are displayed. In thís case, the tool ís
selected in the order, 0034 -> 0078 э 0012 > 056 0090 ...
The meaníng of each mark before the tool numbers ís :
: Shows the lífe has fıníshed.
: Shows that the skip command has been accepted.
Shows that the tool is currently beíng used.
The lífe counter counts for tool wíth
ís displayed when the next command ís íssued by the group to
whích ít belongs.
Lines 8 to 12 are next group life data to the group displayed in línes 3
to 7.
In the thírteenth line the group number when the tool change sígnal ís
beíng emítted ís dísplayed. The group number dísplay appears in
ascendíng order. When ít cannot be completely displayed, > ís
dísplayed.
1052
в-s35здEwro2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
The extended toollífe management functíon provídes more detailed data
Dísplaying and Setting dísplay and more data editíng fùnctíons than the ordinary tool lífe
management function.
Extended Too1 Life
Moreover, íf the toollífe ís specífíed іп units of time, the tíme which has
Management
been set can be increased or reduced life count overríde .
When bit 6 EXT of parameter 6801 ís set to 0, the ordínary tool lífe
management functíon applies. See
Procedure for dísplayíng and Settíng extended tool lífe management
Procedure
1 Press functíon key І І.
2 Press the contínuous menu key L

J to dísplay chapter selection soft
1 tнo.sд cıEna EDП key [TOOLLF].
3 Press soft key [TOOLLF] to display the tool lífe management data
Continuous menu key screen.
On this screen, place the cursor on a group of items to be edíted.
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
1
5 Press soft key [ED1T].
The extended toollife management data edítíng screen for the group
índícated by the cursor is the dísplayed.

L1FE DATA ED1T GROUP : 001 00010 N00001
TYPE : 1 1:0 2:M NEXT GROUP:
L1FE : 9800 USE GROUP
COUNT : 6501 SELECTED GROUP : 001
NO. STATE T-CODE H-CODE D-CODE
01 0034 011 005
02 0078 000 033
03 Ø 0012 004 018
04 0056 000 000
05 0090 000 000
06 0076 023
>_
MD1 16:05:59
[ 1NSERT ] [ DELETE ] [ STATE ] [ END ] [ 1NPUT ]
Toollífe management data can be edited as follows:
6 Select the MD1 mode.
7 Stop, pause, or reset the CNC by the feed ho1d, single block stop, or
reset operatíon toollífe management data cannot be edíted whíle data
is set by a program. .
The followíng editing can be performed. See each step for detaíls:
Settíng the lífe count type, lífe va1ue, current lífe count,
and tool data T, H, or D code : 7-1
Adding a tool group : 7-2
Addíng a tool number T code : 7-3
1053
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534E N 02
Deletíng a tool group : 7-4
Deletíng tool data T, H, or D code : 7-5
Skippíng a tool : 7-6
Clearíng the life count
resetting the lífe : 7-7
7-1 Setting the lífe count type,lífe value, current lífe count, and tool
data T, H, or D code
1 Posítíon the cursor on the data item to be ch cd.
2 Enter a desired va1ue.
3 Press the softkey [1NPUT].
7-2 Addíng a tool group
1 In step 3, select a group for which no data is set and dísplay the
edíting screen.
2 Enter tool numbers.
3 Press soft key [1NSERT].
In thís case, the type of the life counter is determíned by the settíng of
LTM No. 6800 2 , and 0 ís set in both the life expectancy and lífe
counter.
0 is set in both the H code and D code.
The cursor remaíns on the tool number until the T code is specifıed.
7-3 Adding a tool number
1 Move the cursor to the tool data T. H. or D code after whích a new
number ís to be added.
2 Enter the tool number.
3 Press soft key [1NSERT].
Example ,Inserting tool No. 1500 between No. 1 and No. 2.
NO. STATE T-CODE H-CODE D-CODE
01 0034 11
02 0078 0 33
Move the cursor to 5 in D CODE column and press soft key
[1NSERT].
NO. STATE T-CODE H-CODE D-CODE
02 .1 0 1 0
03 0078 0 33
1Oî4
в-63s34εNıo2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
7-4 Deletíng a tool group
1 In step 3, posítíon the cusor on a group to be deleted and dísplay the
editíng screen.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
3 Press soft key [GROUP].
4 Press soft key [EXEC].
7-5 Deleting tool data T, H, or D code
1 Posítíon the cursor on the data item T, H, or D code to be
deleted.
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
3 Press soft key [].
The line containing the cursor ís deleted.
When a tool with mark used ís deleted, mark shífts to the
tool whose life has expíred most recently oг whích has been skípped.
In thís case, marks and are dísplayed ín reverse уіdeo.
7-6 Skipping a tool
1 Posítion the cursor on the data item T, H, or D code for the tool to
be skípped.
2 Press soft key [sTATE].
3 Press soft key [sK1P].
7-7 Clearing the life count resettíng the life
1 Posítíon the cursor on the data item T, H, oг D code of the tool to be
cleared.
2 Press soft key [STATE].
3 Press soft key [CLEAR].
8 To complete the edit operatíon, press soft key [END].
The toollífe management screen ís dísplayed agaín.
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Dísplays
L1FE DATA ED1T GROUP : 001 00010 N00001
TYPE : 1 1:C 2:M NEXT GROUP:
L1FE : 9800 USE GROUP :
COUNT : 6501 SELECTED GROUP : 001
NO. STATE T CODE H CODE D CODE
01 0034 011 005
02 0078 000 033
03 0012 004 018
04 0056 000 000
05 0090 000 000
06 0076 023
>_
MD1 ` 16:05:59
[ 1NSERT ] [ DELETE ] [ STATE ] [ END ] [ 1NPUT ]
\ J
NEXT GROUP:
Number of the tool group whose lífe ís to be calculated by the next M06
command
USE GROUP :
Number of the tool group whose lífe ís being calculated
SELECTED GROUP:
Number of the tool group whose lífe ís beíng calculated or was calculated
last
TYPE: 1: Lífe count ís represented ín units of cycles.
TYPE: 2: Life count is represented in uníts of mínutes.
LIFE : Lífe expectancy
COUNT : Lífe counter
STATE : State of the tool
Too1 state 1n use Not in use
Avaílable _ Space
Skip σ
Skipped W i Note = =
NOTE
When bit 3 EMD of parameter 6801 ís set to 0, is
displayed until the next tool is selected.
T CODE : Too1 number
H CODE : H code
D CODE : D code
в взsздвгv o2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Too1 lífe management When the extended tool life management function ís provided, the
screen following ítems are added to the toollífe management screen:
NEXT: Too1 group to be used next
USE: Too1 group in use
Life counter type for each tool group C: Cycles, M: Mínutes
TOOL L1FE DATA 00001 N00001
NEXT USE SELECTED GROUP: 001
GROUP 001: C L1FE 9800 COUNT .
0034 0078 0012 0056
0090 0076
GROUP 002 : C L1FE 9800 COUNT 1001
0011 0022 0201 0144
0155 0066 0176 0188
0019 0234 0007 0112
0156 0090 0016 0232
TO BE CHANGED : 006 012 013 014 >
>_ S 0 T0000
MD1.... ..... 16:05:59
[ ] [ ] [ CLEAR ] [ ED1T ] [ 1NPUT ]
Lífe count overríde The tool life count can be overrídden provided that the lífe counter ís
índícated in units of minutes and LFV bít 2 of parameter 6801 is 1.
Overríde values can be specifíed usíng the overríde switch on the
operator s pаne1 within the range from 0 to If 0 ís specified, toollífe
ís not counted. If the count of actual cuttíng tíme ís less than 4 seconds,
the override va1ue ís ínvalíd.
Example
When cuttíng ís performed for 10 mínutes wíth an override of , the tool
life counter counts oпe minute.
Dísplay of the mark The symbol for indicating that the lífe of a tool has expíred can be
índícatíng that the lífe of dísplayed eíther when the machíne starts usíng the next tool or when the
a tool has expired lífe of the tool actually expíres. Eíther of these methods can be selected
using EMD bit 3 of parameter 6801 .
1nfluence of changes in Modíficatíon of the life expectancy or lífe counter does not affect the
data tool states or tool change sígnal.
When the type of the lífe counter is changed, be sure to change the lífe
expectancy and lífe count as we11.
1057
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Chopping data, íncluding the reference poínt R poínt , upper dead poínt,
lower dead poínt, ánd choppíng feedrate, can be dísplayed and set by Displayíng and Settíng
using the choppíng screen.
Choppíng Data
Procedure for displayíng and settíng choppíng data
Procedure
1 Press the functíon key.
2 Press the contínuous menu key o several tímes until [CHOP] ís c c
dísplayed.
O O O O λ
3 Press the [CHOP] soft key.
The follawíng choppíng screen appears:
CHOPPING PARAMETER 01000 N10000
R REFERENCE PO1NT =
UPPER DEAD PO1NT =
LOWER DEAD PO1NT =
CHOPPING FEED RATE = 2000
>_
MD 1 ........, 22:07:08
[ ] [ ] [ TEACH ] [ NPUT ] [ 1NPUT ]
J
Explanatíons
Numerícal ínput Posítíon the cursor to the item to be set.
Enter data, then press the [1NPUT] soft key.
To append the entered data to the current data, press the [NPUT] soft
key.
The set data is dísplayed.
Teachíng the posítíon The reference poínt R poínt , upper dead poínt, and lower dead poínt can
be set by teachíng the current posítíon absolute coordínates .
Move the current posítíon absolute coordínates along the choppíng
axís to the posítion to be taught.
Posítíon the cursor to the ítem to be set.
Press the [TEACH] soft key, then the [EXEC] soft key.
The current position absolute coordinates ís set for that item.
The data for each ítem dísplayed on the choppíng screen can also be
changed by executíng a command.
1058
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-63534EN/02
Límítatíons
Choppíng feedrate If bít 7 CHPX of parameter No. 8360 is set to 1, the chopping feedrate
cannot Ьe set by usíng the choppíng screen.
Data settíng conditíons The choppíng screen can be used to set choppíng data regardless of the
current mode, even duríng automatíc or manual operatíon that íncludes
choppíng. If the 1eve1 of inemory protection signal KEY2 G046 4 ís
currently 1ow, however, choppíng data cannot be set.
To enable measurement of the tool length, the following functíons are
supported: automatic measurement of the toollength by usíng a program Too1 Length/Workpíece
command G37 automatic tool length measurement, described in
Orígín Measurement B
Sectíon and measurement of the toollength by mаnually movíng
the tool until ít touches a reference posítion, such as the workpíece top
surface toollength measurement, described in Subsectíon In
additíon to these functions, toollength/workpíece ońgín measurement B
ís supported to símplífy the tool length measurement procedure, thus
facilitating and reducing the time required for machiníng setup. Thís
function also facílítates the measurement of the workpiece origín offsets.
Thís function allows the operator to specífy T/M code commands or
reference posítíon return, Ьy means of a manual numeric command, while
the toollength offset measurement screen ís dísplayed.
Procedure for measuríng the tool length offset va1ue
The toollength offset value can be measured by manually movíng the tool
until ít touches the workpíece or a reference block. For detaíls of this
operation, refer to the manual supplíed Ьy the machíne tool builder.
Procedure 1 Move the tool to the tool change posítion by means of mаnual
reference posítion return, for example.
2 Press mode selection swítch HANDLE or JOG.
3 Set the tool offset value measurement mode swítch on the machíne
operator s pane1 to ON. The toollength offset measurement screen,
shown below, appears and OFST blínks in the status dísplay at the
bottom of the screen.
The toollength offset measurement screen varies slightly depending
on whether toollength offset memory A, B geometry compensatíon
and wear compensatíon are treated differently , oг C geometry
compensatíon and wear compensation are treated differently, and
cutter compensatíon and tool length compensation are treated
dífferently ís used.
1059
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534E N/02
OFFSET 01234 N12345
No. G EO METFiY MAC H1 NE
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009 T 12345678
010 M 12345678
HM
JOG ALM 13:14:15 OFST
ς j OFFSET ][ SETTING ][ WORK ][ ][ OPRT ]
Too1 length offset measurement screen for tool offset memory A

OFFSET 01234 N12345
No. GEOMETRY WEAR MACHINE
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009 T 12345678
010 M 12345678
HM
>
JOG ALM 13:14:15 OFST
Γ OFFSET ][ SETTING ][ WORK ][ ][ OPRT ]
/
Too1 length offset measurement screen for tool offset memorу B
OFFSET 01234 N 12345
LENGTH MACHINE
No. GEOMETRY WEAR
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008 T 12345678
009 M 12345678
010 HM
JOG ALM 13:14:15 OFST
][ SETTING ][ WORK ][ ][ OPRT ]
QOFFSET
Too1 length offset measurement screen for tool offset memory C
- 1060 -
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-63534EN/02 OPERATION
NOTE
Pressing the key resets the displayed T and M
addresses to O. Once MEM or MD mode has been
selected, however, the modal T and M codes are displayed.
4 Use the numeńc keys to enter the dístance from the base measurement
surface to the measurement surface, then press soft key [HM 1NPUT]
to set the dístance. For details of the measurement surface and base
measurement surface, see Explanatíons, below.
5 Select the tool for whích the toollength offset va1ue ís to be measured.
Whí1e OFST is blinkíng at the bottom of the tool length offset
measurement screen, a T code or M code can be specifıed in manual
handle feed or jog feed mode manual numeric comınand . First,
enter Ttttt where tttt ís a T code number , then press the cycle start
button on the machíne operator s panel or MDI pane1. The Ttttt
command ís executed, thus selecting the tool to be measured. Then,
usually, enter the M06 command to move the tool to the spíndle
position. Once the tool for whích the tool length offset ís to be
measured has been selected at the spíndle positíon, position the cursor
to the tool offset number wíth whích the tool length offset for the
selected tool is to be stored. The posítíoníng of the cursor to the offset
number is usually done by the operator. Some machines, however,
automatically posítíon the cursor to an appropńate tool offset number
upon the completíon of tool selection, íf bit 5 QNI of parameter No.
5005 ís set to 1.
6 Perform manual handle feed or jog feed to move the tool until ít
touches the measurement surface of the workpíece or reference block.
7 Press soft key [MEASURE B]. The toollength offset ís stored in the
tool offset memory. If tool offset memory B or C ís beíng used, the
toollength offset ís set as the tool geometry va1ue, whíle 0 ís set as the
tool wear offset. The cursor remaíns posítíoned to the set tool offset
number. To automatícally advance the cursor to the next tool offset
number upon the completíon of the settíng an offset, press soft key
[MEASURE B+], ínstead of [MEASURE B].
8 Once the tool length offset has been set, the tool is automatícally
moved to the tool change posítíon.
9 Thís completes toollength offset measurement for a síngle too1. To
measure the toollength offsets of other tools, repeat steps 5 to 8.
10 Oпce the toollength offsets of a11 tools have been measured, set the
tool offset measurement mode swítch on the machine operator s
panel to OFF. The OFST blínkíng índicatíon ís cleared from the
bottom of the screen.
- 1061 -
11. SETľ1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
Explanatíons
Defínition of tool length In general, the tool length offset value can Ьe defined in eíther of the
offset va1ue followíng two ways. Both methods are based on the same concept: The
dífference between the tip posítíon of the tool and that of a reference tool
ís used as the tool offset.
1 Defínítíon 1
The first method ínvolves usíng the actual toollength as the toollength
offset. In thís case, the reference tool is an imagínary tool whích has
íts típ at the machíne zero poínt when the machine ís posítíoned to the
Z axís machíne zero poínt. The dífference between the tip posítion of
the tool to be measured and that of the reference too1, that ís, the
dístance along the Z axis from the machine zero poínt to the tip of the
tool when the machíne ís posítíoned to the Z axís machíne zero poínt,
ís defined as the toollength offset.
Refer-
ence
tool
Machine zero
point
Reference tool Too1 Too1
tip position T01 T03
Too 1 OFSL01 T02
OFSL03
OFSL02
OFSL01 : Too1 length offset for tool T01
OFSL02 : Too1 length offset for tool T02
OFSL03 : Too1 length offset for tool T03
A1so, wíth thís function, the tool ís manually moved by means of jog
feed untíl íts tip touches the top surface of the workpíece or reference
block. Thís surface ís called the measurement surface. Assume that
the top surface of the machínes table ís set as the measurement surface,
although thís ís actually not allowed because the machíne would be
damaged. In such a case, dístance L from the machíne zero poínt to
the machíne table top surface ís specifíc to that machíne. Set dístance
L in a parameter No. 5022 . Assume Zt to be the machine coordinate
of the tool at the position where it would touch the machine table top
surface íf that surface were set as the measurement surface. The tool
length offset OFSL cаn then be easíly calculated from L and Zt.
Because the machine table top surface cannot actually be used as the
measurement surface, however, that surface ís defıned as the base
measurement surface and the dístance from the base measurement
surface to the actual measurement surface, that ís, the height of the
workpiece or reference block Hm must be set. The toollength offset
va1ue OFSL can thus be obtaíned from the formula shown below.
1062
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Machine zero
poínt
Reference tool OFSL I Too1 OFsL I Too1
tip positíon 01 T01
Zm
Zt Zm
Measurement
surface
Measurement Workpiece Hm
W
surface r
Reference block Hm
Base measure-
ment surface
Machine table Machine table
L : Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface machine coordinate
of the measurement surface
Hm : Distance from the base measurement surface to the actual measurement surface
Zm : Distance from the tip of the tool to be measured to the measurement surface when the tool ís
posítíoned to the machine zero point
Zt : Distance from the típ of the tool to be measured to the base measurement surface when the tool is
positioned to the machine zero poínt
OFSL : Too1 iength offset value OFSL = Zm - Hm - L
Defíníng the actual tool length as the tool length offset has the
advantage of elímínatíng the need for remeasuring, even if the
workpíece ís changed, provided the too1 ís not worn. Another
advantage is that the tool length offset need not be re set when
multíple workpíeces are machíned. In this case, assígn a workpíece
coordínate system to each workpíece, usíng G54 to G59, and set the
workpíece orígín offset for each workpiece. For an explanatíon of how
to measure the workpíece origín offset, see Measuríng the workpíece
orígín offset , below.
1063
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
2 Definition 2
In the second defınitíon method, the toollength offset is the distance
from the tool típ positíon to the workpiece coordinate system origín
when the machine is posítioned to the Z axis zero poínt. A toollength
offset defıned ín thís way wí11 be equal to the dífference between the
length of the tool to be measured and that of the reference too1, in the
same way as with defınítion 1. The reference tool for defınition 2 ís,
however, an ímaginary tool which has a típ at the workpíece coordinate
system origín when the machíne is posítíoned to the Z axís zero point.
Machine
zero point
Too1 Too1
T01 T03
Too1
T02
Refer-
ence
tool
OFSL01
OFSL02 OFSL03
ј Workpiece
L _ J coordinate
system origin
Workpiece
OFSL01 : Too1 length offset for tool T01
OFSL02 : Too1 length offset for tool T02
OFSL03 : Too1 length offset for tool T03
1064
B-δ3534EN 02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
The base measurement surface for thís definítíon ís located at the
workpíece coordínate system oňgín. Because the típ of the reference
tool ís also located at the workpiece coordínate system oňgín, dístance
L from the reference tool típ position to the base measurement surface
ís 0. Set, therefore, 0 ín the parameter for dístance L No. 5022 . The
actual measurement surface is usually the same as the base
measurement surface, located at the workpíece coordínate system
oňgín. If, however, the measurement surface ís the top surface of the
reference block, or íf the workpíece coordínate system orígín ís located
on other than the top surface of the workpíece for example, when the
ońgín ís shifted from the workpíece top surface by an amount equal
to the cuttíng allowance , set the distance from the base measurement
surface to the actual measurement surface as Hm, such that the tool
length offset OFSL can be calculated usíng the same formula as that
used for defínítíon 1.
Machíne
zero point
Too1 Too1
T01 T01
Zm
OFSL
Zm
OFSL
Measurement
surface
Hm
Workpiece coordinate
system origìn
base measurement
surface
Workpiece
Measurement
Y surface
Reference block
Machine table Machine table
L : Distance from the reference tool típ posítíon to the base measurement surface = 0
Hm : Dístance from the base measurement surface to the actual measurement surface
Zm : Dístance from the típ of the tool to be measured to the measurement surface when the
tool ís positioned to the machine zero point
OFSL : Toollength offset OFSL - Zm Hm L
1065
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
The reference tool for defınition 2 has a típ at the workpíece coordinate
system origín when the machine ís positioned to the Z axís zero poínt.
Whenever the workpíece ís changed, therefore, the toollength offset
must be remeasured. Remeasuńng is not, however, necessary íf the
dífference between the workpiece coordínate system origin for a new
workpíece and that when the toollength offset value was measured ís
set as the new workpíece orígin offset any of G54 to G59 . In such
a case, the tool length offset need not be modífied, even when the
workpíece ís changed.
Taking a dífferent poínt of víew, defınítíon 2 can be thought of as
settíng the workpíece oňgín offset as the too1 length offset for each
too1.
Measuríng the tool Because the tool ís usually mounted ín para11e1 with the Z-axis, the tool
length offset along a length offset is measured by movíng the tool along the Z axís. Some
specífíed axís machines, however, have theír W axís in para11e1 wíth the Z axís, making
ít necessary to measure the toollength offset by movíng the tool along the
W axis. Moreover, some machínes, when fıtted with an attachment,
suppoıt the mounting of the tool in para11e1 with an axís other than the
Z axís. For such a machíne, the toollength offset can Ьe measured along
a specífıed axís by setting bit 2 TMA of parameter No. 5007 to 1. To
measure the toollength offset along an axis other than the Z axis, fırst set
dístance L from the reference tool tip posítíon to the base measurement
surface, for each of the axes along whích the tool length offset may Ьe
measured, in parameter No. 5022, in addítíon to distance L along the
Z axís. Next, set distance Hm from the base measurement surface to the
actual measurement surface for the axís along which the toollength offset
ís to be measured see Explanations, below . Finally, move the tool along
that axís until ít touches the workpíece or reference block, then enter the
name of that axis before pressíng soft key [MEASURE B] or [MEASÜRE
B+]. When the tool offset is measured along the W axís, for example,
enter W then press soft key [MEASURE B] or [MEASURE B+].
Too1 change posítíon The tool change posítíon must be set beforehand, usíng bíts 1 TC3 and
0 TC2 of parameter No. 5007.
TC3 TC2 Meaníng
Π o The tool change position is the first reference position
G28
Π 1 The too1 change position is the second reference position
G30 P2
1 O The tool change position is the third reference position
G30 P3
1 1 The tool change position is the fourth reference position
G30 P4
1066
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 6-63534EN/02
Procedure for measuríng the workpiece origín offset
In addition to the workpiece ońgin offset along the toollengthwise axís,
that ís, the Z-axís, the workpíece ońgin offsets along the X- and Y-axes,
oп a p1ane perpendícular to the Z-axis, can also Ьe measured easily. The
workpíece origín offsets along the X- and Y-axes can be measured
regardless of whether the workpíece origin ís located on a surface of the
workpíece or at the center of a hole to be machíned. For details of thís
measurement, refer to the manual supplíed by the machíne tool buílder.
Measuríng the Z axís 1 Select a tool usíng an MDI command, then move ít to the spindle
workpíece orígín offset posítion see the explanation of the procedure for measuring the tool
length offset . The tool length offset for the selected tool must be
measured beforehand.
2 Press mode selectíon switch HANDLE or JOG.
3 Set the workpíece origín offset measurement mode swítch on the
machine operator s pane1 to ON. The workpíece ońgín offset screen
appears and WOFS blinks ín the status display at the bottom of the
screen.
4 Enter the toollength offset for the selected too1. Enter the offset usíng
numeríc keys then press soft key [TL 1NPUT].
,.- 1
WORK COORDINATES 01234 N12345
G54
No. DATA NO. DATA
00 02
EXT G55

01 03
G54 G56

MACHINE TL
>
JOG ALM 13:14:15 WOFS
Γ OFFSET ][ SETTING ][ WORK ]1 ][ OPRT ]
5 Position the cursor to the workpíece origín offset number to be used to
store the offset any of G54 to G59 . No problem wí11 arise even if the
cursor is posítioned to the offset for other than the Z-axis.
6 Move the tool by means of manual handle feed or jog feed untíl it
touches the top surface of the workpiece.
7 Enter the axís name, Z, press soft key [MEASURE B], then press soft
key [1NPUT]. The Z-axís workpíece ońgín offset va1ue is set and the
cursor is positioned to the set Z-axís workpíece ońgin offset. There ís
no need to enter Z províded the parameter has been set so that on1y the
Z-axís workpíece orígín offset ís to be measured bít 3 WMA of No.
5007 = 0 .
1067
11, SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
To set the workpíece ońgin on other than the workpiece top surface
for example, when the origín ís shífted from the workpíece top
surface by aп amount equal to the cuttíng allowance , enter the
amount of shíft S in the followíng fígure using the numeńc keys,
press soft key [MEASURE B], then press soft key [1NPUT].
Workpiece
-ΐ=
origin
Workpíece
8 To measure any subsequent workpíece orígíns, retract the tool from
the workpíece, then repeat steps 5 to 7.
Measuring the X /Y axís To set the X or Y axís workpiece origín offset on a specífıed surface of
workpíece orígín offset the workpíece, set bít 3 WMA of parameter No. 5007 to 1, then follow
based on a reference the same procedure as that for measuríng the Z axís workpíece ońgín
surface offset. In step 4, however, enter the cutter compensatíon va1ue for the
selected too1, ínstead of the toollength offset. After enteríng the cutter
compensatíon va1ue wíth the numeńc keys, press soft key [TL 1NPUT].
NOTE
When entering the cutter compensation value, ensure that
its sign is entered correctly.
When the measurement surface is located in the positive
+ direction relative to the too1, enter a minus sign.
When the measurement surface is located in the
negative direction relative to the too1, enter a plus +
sign.
Measuríng the X /Y axís 1 Connect a measurement probe, fitted wíth a sensor, to the spíndle.
workpíece orígín offset
2 Press mode selection swítch HANDLE or JOG.
based on a reference
hole 3 Set the workpíece orígín offset measurement mode swítch on the
machíne operator s pane1 to ON. The workpiece ońgin offset screen
appears and WOFS blínks in the status display at the bottom of the
screen, índicating that the preparatíon required prior to measuring the
workpiece origín offset has been completed.
4 Posítíon the cursor to the workpíece orígín offset number to be used to
store the offset any of G54 to G59 . No problem wí11 arise even if the
cursor ís posítíoned to the offset for other than the X- or Y axís.
5 Move the tool by means of manual handle feed or jog feed until the
measurement probe touches the círcumference of the ho1e. Do not
move the tool along more than one axís at any one tíme.
1068
e-6з5з4εNi02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
β As soon as the sensor detects contact with the círcumference, input a
skíp sígnal to the machine, thus stoppíng the axia1 movement of
manual handle feed or jog feed. Símultaneously, the posítíon at
whích feed stopped is stored as the first measurement poínt. The
machíne coordínates of the stored measurement poínt are displayed at
the bottom ńght of the screen, as follows:
WOFiK COORDINATES 01234 N12345
G54 TL
No. DATA MACHINE
00
EXT

HOLE MEASURED
1
00
G54 2

3

>
JOG ` ALM 13:14:15 WOFS
][ SETTING ][ WORK ][ ][ OPRT ]
QOFFSET /
7 Move the measurement probe to the second measurement poínt. At
thís tíme, the CNC ínterlocks the machine to prevent the probe from
movíng in the dírectíon in which it was moved so as to touch the
current measurement poínt. For example, when the probe touched the
measurement poínt after beíng moved in the +X dírection, movement
of the probe to the next measurement poínt ís allowed on1y in the -X
dírectíon. Movement in the +X, +Y, or -Y dírectíon ís ínterlocked
untíl the skíp sígnal ís set to O. Oпce the probe touches the second
measurement poínt, follow the same procedure as that for stońng the
fírst measurement point.
8 Once the probe has touched the thírd measurement point, press soft
key [MEASURE B], then [CENTER]. Thís calculates the center of
the hole from the coordinates of the three measured points, then sets
the X- and Y-axís workpíece ońgín offsets. To cancel and restart
measurement at any poínt, press the key. Pressíng the key
clears the coordínates of a11 stored measurement poínts.
Explanatíons
Z-axís workpíece orígín Defínítíons 1 and 2, descríbed in Defínítion of tool length offset іп
offset Explanatíons for measuńng the tool length offset, also apply to the
general concept of the Z-axís workpíece ońgín offset, as follows:
1 Defínítíon 1
In defınition 1, the Z-axís workpíece orígín offset ís defıned as the
dístance from the machíne zero poínt to the ońgín of the workpíece
coordinate system.
1069
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Machíne zero
point
Too1
OFSL
OFSWG54
ZmG54 OFSWG55 ZmG55
Workpiece
origin
G55
Workpiece
origin Workpiece G55
G54 Workpiece G54
OFSL : Too1 length offset forthe tool used to measure the workpíece orígín offset
ZmG54 : Amount of movement from the machíne zero point to the origín of the G54 workpiece
when measured with a tool having a length of OFSL
ZmG55 : Amount of movement from the machíne zero poínt to the orígín of the G55 workpiece
when measured with a tool having a length of OFSL
OFSWG54 : Workpíece orígín offset for the G54 workpíece
OFSWG55 : Workpíece orígín offset for the G55 workpíece
As can be seen from the above fıgure, the Z-axís workpíece ońgín
offset caп Ьe calculated from the followíng formula:
OFSW = Zm - OFSL
where
OFSW : Workpíece origín offset
OFSL : Too1 length offset for the tool used to measure the
workpiece origín offset
Zm : Amount of movement from the machíne zero poínt to the
workpíece origín when measured with a tool havíng a
length of OFSL
1070
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
2 Defınítíon 2
The tool length offset in defínítion 2 equals the Z-axis workpíece
ońgin offset, as described above. Usually in thís case, therefore, the
workpiece orígín offset need not be set. If, however, the workpiece is
changed after íts toollength offset has been measured, or íf multíple
workpieces are machined, the workpíece ońgín coordinates can be set
as follows when assigníng workpíece coordínate systems to G54 to
G59, thus elíminating the need to remeasure the toollength offset.
Machíne
zero point
Too1
OFSL ZmG55
Workpiece
origin
G55
OFSWG55
Workpíece
orígín
Workpiece G55
G54
Workpiece G54
OFSL Too1 length offset measured for the G54 workpiece
ZmG55 Amount of movement from the machine zero poìnt to the orígin of the G55 workpiece when
measured wíth a tool having a length of OFSL
OFSWG55 Workpiece orígin offset for the G55 workpiece The workpiece origin offset for the G54 work
píece is 0.
For defínítíon 2, the workpíece ońgín offset can be calculated using
the same formula as that used for defínítíon 1:
OFSW = Zm - OFSL
where
OFSW : Workpíece ońgín offset
OFSL : Too1 length offset for the tool used to measure the
workpíece ońgín offset
Zm : Amount of movement from the machíne zero poínt to the
workpíece origín when measured wíth a tool havíng a
length of OFSL
1071
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
X /Y axis workpíece The X and Y axís workpiece origín offsets can Ьe measured regardless
orígín offset of whether the workpiece ońgín ís located on a surface of the workpiece
or at the center of a hole to be machíned.
1 When the workpiece orígin ís located on a surface
->. X Workpíece
Workpiece
origin
Y axís workpíece
origin offset
Machine zero
point
X axis workpiece origin offset

In the above case, the workpiece ońgín is located on a síde surface of
the workpiece. The measurement of the X /Y axís workpíece origín
offset when the ońgin ís located on a surface of the workpiece is the
same as that for the Z axís workpiece origín offset, but wíth the
followíng exceptíon: The tool length offset for the tool used to
measure the offset ís used to calculate the Z axís workpiece ońgín
offset, whíle the cutter compensatíon value for the tool ís used to
calculate the X /Y axis workpiece orígin offset.
1072
в-sзsзaEw 02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
+Z

+X
ł
Too1

OFSR
Xm
OFSW
Machine Workpiece
ι zero point origin
OFSR : Cuttercompensatíon value forthe tool used to measure the workpíece orígin offset
Xm : Amount of movement from the machíne zero poínt to the workpiece origin when
measured wíth a tool having a length of OFSR
OFSW : Workpiece orígin offset
As can be seen from the above fıgure, the workpíece ońgin offset caп
be calcula[ed from the following formula:
OFSW = Xm - OFSR
Pay particularly careful attentíon, however, to the sign of the cutter
compensation va1ue OFSR:
The sígn of OFSR is - when the measurement surface ís located in the
positíve + dírectíon relatíve to the tool center.
The sign of OFSR is + when the measurement surface is located in the
negatíve - dírectíon relative to the too1 center.
1073
11. SETľ1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
2 When the workpíece origín ís located at the center of a ho1e.
+Y
T
ł +X
Workpiece
orígín
Y axis workpiece
origin offset
Machine
zero point X axis workpíece origin offset
In the above case, the workpiece orígin ís located at the center of a hole
in the workpiece. A measurement probe having a sensor at its típ ís
used to measure the posítions of three arbítrary poínts on the
círcumference of the ho1e. The three poínts prescńbe a uníque círcle,
the center of whích ís set as the X /Y axís workpíece ońgín. Set bít
4 WMH of parameter No. 5007 [o 1 before starting the measurement.
1074
в sз5з4ειvi02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Using a skip sígnal A measurement probe, fítted wíth a sensor, can also be used to measure
the Z axís workpíece origín offset or measure the X /Y axis workpiece
ońgín offset based on a surface, in the same way as when measuríng the
X /Y axís workpíece origín offset based on a ho1e. By ínputtíng a skíp
sígnal as soon as the probe touches the workpiece surface, feed ís
automatícally stopped. subsequently, apply the same procedure as that
for each measurement.
There are the followíng screens for the fıxture offset functíon: Screen for
checking the currently selected fixture offset va1ue fíxture offset ACT Dísplayíng and Settíng
screen and screen for settíng and checkíng eíght groups of fixture offset
Rotary Tab1e Dynamíc
values fíxture offset screen .
Fíxture Offset
Procedure for displaying the fíxture offset ACT screen
Procedure OFFsET
1 Press function key ѕЕТтØ
ι
2 Press contínuous menu C F-Ac, C key Q several tímes untíl [F ACT]
σ σ 0 σ appears.
1
3 Press soft key [F ACT].
ContInuous menu key
The following fıxture offset ACT screen appears::
FIXTURE OFFSET ACT
ACT P=01
X
Y
Z
C
B
A
[ ][ J[ ıt ] [ /
Explanatíons Thís screen dísplays the currently selected fıxture offset number P and
fıxture offset vector data.
1075
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-63534EN/o2
Procedure for dísplaying the fíxture offset screen and settíng data on the screen
Procedure ОFРЅ, 1 Press functíon key
ι
2 Press continuous menu key several tímes untíl [F OFS] o a
appears. 0 0 u[=]= o
1 3 Press soft key [F OFS].
Contínuous menu key
The followíng fıxture offset screen appears:
/ 1
FIXTURE OFFSET

X X
Y Y
Z Z
C C
B B
A A
[] [ ] [ PUNCH ] [NPUT ] [ 1NPUT ] J
Explanatíons On this screen, eíght groups of fïxture offset values can be set and
checked.
Press soft key [ OPRT ] to dísplay the above operation soft keys.
Enteríng numeríc values
Use the page and cursor keys, and soft key [NO. SRH] to place the
cursor at a desíred ítem to be set.
Enter data, then press soft key [1NPUT].
To add a value to already set data, press soft key [N P UT] .
The dísplayed data ís now changed to the set data.
Data can also be set usíng the INPUT MDI key.
Number of groups of NO. 01 to NO. 08 indicates the number of a group of fíxture offset values.
fíxture offset values There are eíght groups. Soft key [NO. SRH] can be used to search for a
desíred group number.
Outputtíng fíxture offset Soft key [PUNCH] can be used to output fíxture offset values to an
values external device. For details of the output format and how to ínput data,
see Sectíon , ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE
OFFSET, in thís manual.
1076
в-6з5зaEгv-o2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to
determine the specífications and functions of the machíne in order to fu11y SCREENS
utílize the characteristícs of the servo motor or other parts.
DISPLAYED BY
Thís chapter describes how to set parameters on the MDI pane1.
FUNCTION KEY Parameters can also Ьe set with external ínput/output devíces such as the
Handy Fí1e see 11I-8 .
In addítíon, pítch error compensatíon data used for ímprovíng the
precísion in posítioníng wíth the ba11 screw on the machíne can be set or
dísplayed by the operatíons under functíon key
See llI-7 for the diagnostic screens dísplayed by pressíng functíon key
5Y5TEMј ,
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to
determíne the specíficatíons and functíons of the machíne ín order to fu11y Displayíng and Settíng
utílíze the characteristícs of the servo motor. The setting of parameters
Parameters
depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter líst prepared by the
machíne tool buílder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter settíng.
Procedure for dísplayíng and settíng parameters
Procedure 1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WR1TE to enab1e wńtíng. See the procedure
for enabling/dísablíng parameter writing descríbed below.
2 Press functíon key M
3 Press chapter selectíon soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter
screen.
PARAMETER SETTING 00010 N00002
0000 SEO N1 ć0 TVC
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 M1R
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 1/O CHANNEL 0
0022 0
>_
THND 16:0559
[ І І] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM ] [ OPRT ]
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in
eíther of the followíng ways:
Enter the parameter number and press soft key [] .
1077
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys,
and
[ј] , and cursor keys, [ј] . u . , and
г OE
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value wíth numeńc keys and press
soft key [1NPUT]. The parameter ís set to the entered value and the
va1ue is dísplayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WR1TE to dísable wrítíng.
Procedure for enabling/dísplayíng parameter wríting
1 Select the MD1 mode or enter state emergency stop.
2 Press functíon key
3 Press soft key [SETING] to dísplay the setting screen.
/ф- 1
SETTING HANDY 00001N00000
PARAMETER WR1TE = П O:DISABLE 1:ENABLE
TV CHECK = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
PUNCH CODE = 1 O:E1A 1:1S0
1NPUT UN1T = 0 O:MM 1:1NCH
1/0 CHANNEL = 0 0-3:CHANNEL NO.
SEQUENCE NO. = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
TAPE FORMAT = 0 O:NO CNV 1:F10/11
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 PROGRAM NO.
SEQUENCE STOP = 11 SEQUENCE NO.
>_ S 0 T0000
MD1 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WR1TE usíng cursor keys.
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ], ıheıı μіe,ь [ON :1] to enab1e parameter
wńting.
At thís tíme, the CNC enters the P/S alarm state No. 100 .
6 After settíng parameters, return to the settíng screen. Move the cursor
t PARAMETER WR1TE and press soft key [ OPRT ] , then press
[OFF :0].
7 Depress the key to release the alarm conditíon. If P/S alarm No.
000 has occurred, however, turn off the power supply and then turn ít
oп, otherwíse the P/S alarm ís not released.
Exp[anatíons
Settíng parameters wíth See ΠI-8 for settíng parameters wíth external ínput/output devices such
external ínput/output as the Hаndy Fí1e.
devices
1078
в-6з5з4EN o2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Parameters that requíre Some parameters are not effectíve untíl the power ís turned off and on
turníng off the power agaín after they are set. Settíng such parameters causes P/S alarm 000.
In thís case, tunı off the power, then turn ít on again.
Parameter líst Refer to the Parameter Manua1 B-63530EN for the parameter 1íst.
setting data Some parameters can be set on the settíng screen if the parameter list
índicates Setting entry ís acceptable . Settíng 1 for PARAMETER
WR1TE is not necessary when three parameters are set on the settíng
screen.
If pitch error compensatíon data is specífíed, pítch errors of each axis can
be compensated in detectíon unít per axís. Displayíng and Settíng
Pitch error compensatíon data is set for each compensatíon point at the
Pitch Error
íntervals specífıed for each axís. The origín of compensatíon is the
Compensatíon Data
reference posítíon to which the tool ís returned.
The pítch error compensatíon data ís set accordíng to the characteristics
of the machíne connected to the NC. The content of thís data varies
accordíng to the machíne model. If ít ís changed, the machine accuracy
ís reduced.
In prínciple, the end user must not alter thís data.
Pítch error compensatíon data can be set wíth external devíces such as the
Hаndy Fi1e see Chapter III-8 . Compensation data can also be wńtten
directly wíth the MDI pаne1.
The followíng parameters must be set for pítch error compensatíon. Set
the pítch error compensatíon va1ue for each pítch error compensatíon
poínt number set by these parameters.
In the followíng example, 33 ís set for the pítch error compensatíon point
at the reference posítion.
Pitch error compensatíon va1ue absolute value
Compensatíon numberpa-
3 ] rameterforthe compensa- Compensatíonnumber parameter јtіоп poínt havíng the largest for the reference posìtion No.
L v _ alue _ No. 3622 , 3620 2
\
1 Γ J
---
1
3 і . 32 . 33 35 36 , 7
\ 1 Reference posí- I
J ; tion I_
Compensationmagnífícatíon
1 E parameter No. 3623
L_J
Compensation numberparamete r Compensation ínterval
for the compensation point having
the smallest value No. 3621 parameter No. 3624
Compensatíon 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
ti n number
Compensation -1 -1 -1 -3
value to be set
Number of the pítch error compensatíon poínt at the reference posítíon
for each axis : Parameter 3620
Number of the pítch error compensatíon poínt havíng the smallest
value for each axíś : Parameter 3621
1079
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION
8-63534EN/02
Number of the pitch error compensation point havíng the largest va1ue
for each axis : Parameter 3622
Pítch error compensation magnífıcatíon for each axis : Parameter
3623
Interval of the pítch error compensation poínts for each axís :
Parameter 3624
Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of the
rotary axís type for each axís : Parameter 3625
B i d i re c t ί o n a 1 p i t c h e ι г o r The bidírectíonal pítch error compensation functíon allows independent
c o m p e n s a t i o n pítch error compensatíon in dífferent travel directions. When the movement
is reversed, compensatíon ís automatícally caτrіed out as in a backlash.
To use thís functíon, specífy pitch error compensation for each travel
dírectíon, that is, separately for the posítíve and negative dírectíons of a
movement.
When using bidírectíonal pitch error compensatíon settíng the BDP bít
bít 0 of parameter 3605 to 1 , specífy the followíng parameters in
addition to the pitch error compensatíon parameter.
Number of the pítch error compensation poínt at the negative end for
travel in the positive dírection, for each axis : Parameter 3620
Number of the pítch error compensation point at the posítive end for
travel in the posítive dírectíon, for each axis : Parameter 3621
Number of the pitch error compensatíon poínt at the negative end for
travel in the negative dírectíon, for each axis : Parameter 3626
Number of the pítch error compensatíon poínt at the posítíve end for
travel in the negatíve d цection, for each axis : Parameter 3627
Procedure for displaying and settíng the pítch error compensatíon data
1 Set the followíng parameters:
Number of the pítch error compensatíon poínt at the reference
posítíon for each axís : Parameter 3620
Number of the pitch error compensatíon poínt having the smallest
va1ue for each axís : Parameter 3621
Number of the pítch error compensation point having the largest
value for each axis : Parameter 3622
Pitch error compensatíon magnífıcatíon for each axis : Parameter
3623
Interval of the pitch error compensation poínts for each axís :
Parameter 3624
Travel dístance per revolutíon of pitch error compensation of the
rotary axis type for each axís : Parameter 3625
When usíng bidirectional pítch error compensatíon settíng the BDP
bít bit 0 of parameter 3605 to 1 , specífy the followíng parameters
in addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
Number of the pitch error compensatíon poínt at the negative end
for travel ín the positíve direction, for each axís : Parameter 3620
1080
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Number of the pítch error compensation point at the posítíve end
for travel in the posítíve dírectíon, for each axís : Parameter 3621
Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negatíve end
for travel in the negatíve directíon, for each axís : Parameter 3626
Number of the pítch error compensatíon point at the posítíve end
for travel in the negative directíon, for each axis : Parameter 3627
2 Press function key SVS,ѕMј .
3 Press the contínuous menu key , then press chapter selectíon soft ј
key [P1TCH].
0 0 0 0 0
The followíng screen is dísplayed: 1
Continuous menu key
P1T ERROR SETTING 00000 N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA
0000 0 0010 0 0020 0
0001 0 0011 0 0021 0
0002 0 0012 0 0022 0
0003 0 0013 0 0023 0
X 0004 0 0014 0 0024 0
0005 0 0015 0 0025 0
0006 0 0016 0 0026 0
0007 0 0017 0 0027 0
0008 0 0018 0 0028 0
0009 0 0019 0 0029 0
>_
MEM 16:05:59
[ ] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:O 1 [ NPUT ] [ -1NPUT ]
4 Move the cursor to the compensation poínt number to be set in either
of the following ways:
Enter the compensatíon poínt number and press the [] soft
key.
Move the cursor to the compensatíon poínt number usíng the page
P,oE
keys, p and , and cursor keys, . . , and

5 Enter a va1ue with numeńc keys and press the [1NPUT] soft key.
1081
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The program number, sequence number, and current CNC status are
always dísplayed on the screen except when the power ís turned on, a D16PLAY NG THE
system alarm occurs, or the PMC screen ís dísplayed.
PROGRAM NUMBER, If data settíng or the ínput/output operatíon is íncorrect, the CNC does not
SEQUENCE accept the operatíon and displays a warníng message.
Thís sectíon describes the display of the program number, sequence
NUMBER, AND
number, and status, and warníng messages dísplayed for íncorrect data
STATUS, AND setting or ínput/output operatíon.
WARNING
MESSAGES FOR
DATA SETTING OR
1NPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATION
The program number and sequence number are dísplayed at the top ríght
Dísplayíng the Program on the screen as shown below.
Number and Sequence
Number PROGRAM 02000 N00130
Sequence
І No.
N100 G92 XO YO Z70. ; Program
N 110 G91 G00 Y-70. ; No.
N 120 Z-70. ;
N 130 G42 G39
N 140 G41 G03 ;
N 150 G01 X-25. ;
N 160 G02
N 170 G01 X20. ;
N 180 G02 X45. Y45. R45. ;
>_
ED1T 16:05:59
[ І;Јіе;1vіІЈ [ CHECK ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ OPRT ]
-ђ/
The program number and sequence number dísplayed depend on the
screen vıd are given below:
On the program screen in the EDIT mode on Background edít screen :
The program No. beíng edíted and the sequence number just príor to the
cursor are índícated.
Other than above screens :
The program No. and the sequence No. executed last are índícated.
Immedíately after program number search or sequence number
search :
Immedíately after the program No. search and sequence No. search, the
program No. and the sequence No. searched are índícated.
1082
в-s35з4εN/o2 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
The current mode, automatíc operatíon state, alarm state, and program
editíng state are dísplayed on the next to last line on the screen allowíng Dísplayíng the Status
the operator to readíly understand the operation condítíon of the system.
and Warning for Data
If data settíng or the inpuc/output operation is incoırect, the CNC does not
Settíng or lnput/Output
accept the operation and a warning message is displayed on the next to last
Operation line of the screen. This prevents inva1id data setting and input/output
errors.
Explanatíons
Descriptíon of each díspiay
9 Data ís out of range.
Note Actually, thís is dísplayed in the area starting from 2 .
5 Note Actually, 5 is displayed ín
[e the area for 3 and 4 .
1 2 3 4 в 7
ED1T STOP MTN F1N іІ hh:mm:ss 1NPUT
Displaysoftkeys 1 H 0 E AD1
\
NOTE
Actually, 10 is displayed at the position where 8 is now
dispiayed.
1 Current mode MD1 Manua1 data ínput, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operatíon memory operation
RMT . Automatic operation DNC operatíon, or such líke
ED1T : Memory edíting
HND Manua1 handle feed
JOG . Jog feed
TJOG : TEACH IN JOG
THND : TEACH IN HANDLE
1NC Manua1 íncremental feed
REF : Manua1 reference position return
2 Automatíc operatíon : Reset When the power ís turned on or the state in whích
status program executíon has termínated and automatic operation has
termínated.
STOP : Automatic operatíon stop The state in which one block has
been executed and automatíc operatíon is stopped.
HOLD : Feed hold The state in which executíon of one block has been
ínterrupted and automatíc operatíon ís stopped.
STRT : Automatic operatíon start-up The state in whích the system
operates automatically
3 Axís moving MTN : Indícates that the axís ís moving.
status/dwe11 status DWL : Indícates the dwe11 state.
: Indícates a state other than the above.
4 State in whích an F1N : Indícates the state in whích an auxiliary function is being
auxíliary function is executed. Waiting for the complete sígnal from the PMC
beíng executed Indícates a state other than the ahove.
1083
11 . SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-63534EN/02
5 Emergency stop or : : Indícates emergency in reversed dísplay.
reset status RESET : Indicates that the reset sígnal ís beíng receíved..
6 A1arm status _____ : Indicates that ari alarm ís íssued. Blínks in reversed dísplay.
1:1ι : Indicates that the battery ís 1ow. Blínks іп reversed display.
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
7 Current time h h: m m: ss Hours, minutes, and seconds
8 Program edítíng status 1NPUT Indícates that data ís beíng ínput.
OUTPUT : Indícates that data is beíng output.
SRCH lndícates that a search ís beíng performed.
ED1T lndicates that another edítíng operation ís being perfonmed
insertíon, modífícation, etc.
LSK Indicates that 1abels are skipped when data is input.
RSTR Indícates that the program ís beíng restarted
Space Indícates that no edítíng operatíon ís being performed.
9 Warníng for data settíng When inva1id data ís entered wrong format, value out of range, etc. ,
or ínput/output when ínput ís dísabled wrong mode, write disabled, etc. , or when
operatíon ínput/output operatíon is incorrect wrong mode, etc. , a warníng message
ís dísplayed. In thís case, the CNC does not accept the settíng or
ínput/output operatíon retry the operation accordíng to the message .
The followíng are examples of warníng messages:
Example 1
When a parameter is entered
>1
ED1T WRONG MODE
Display sof tkeys
-ј
Example 2
When a parameter is entered
J
> 999999999
MD1 TOO MANY D1G1TS
Display soft keys
Example 3
When a parameter is output to an extemal input/output device
J
>_
WRONG MODE
LМ
Display soft keys
10 Too1 post name PATH 1: Too1 post 1 ís selected.
for the two path PATH2 : Too1 post 2 ís selected.
control Other names can be used dependíng on the settings of parameters 3141
to 3147.
The tool post name ís dísplayed at the posítion where 8 ís now dísplayed.
Whí1e the program ís edíted, 8 ís dísplayed.
1084
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

By pressing the functíon key ј , data such as alarms, alarm history
sCRεεNs
data, and external messages can be displayed.
DISPLAYED BY _
For informatíon relatíng to alarm display, see Section For
FUNCTION KEY I ínformatíon relating to alarm hístory dísplay, see Sectíon
For ínformatíon relating to external message dísplay, see the relevant
manual supplíed by the machíne tool builder.
External operator messages can be preserved as history data.
External Operator Preserved hístory data can be displayed on the external operator message
hístory screen.
Message Hístory
Dísplay
Procedure for external operator message hístory display
Procedure
1 Press the function key.
ι
C,., c 2 Press the contínuous menu key o, then press the chapter selectíon
soft key [MSGH1s]. The screen shown below appears.
a 0 0 0 0 o
Continuous menu key MESSAGE HISTORY 00000 N00000
Date and Page number 01 /09/12 17:25:00 PAG E:1
Message nuumber ł NO.
Display range
Up to 255 characters
MEM STRT M1N F1N ALM 09:36:48
1 [ ] ј Іе1іІ] [ ][ ] [ OPRT ]

NOTE
Up to 255 characters can be specified for an external
operator message. By setting MS1 and MSO bits 7 and 6
of parameter No. 3113 , however, the number of characters
that can be preserved as external operator message history
data can be restricted, and the number of history data items
selected.
Explanatíons
Updatíng external When an external operator message number ís specified, updatíng of the
operator message external operator message hístory data ís started; thís updatíng is
hístory data continued untíl a new external operator message number is specífied or
deletíon of the external operator message hístory data ís specífıed.
1085
4
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-sзьзaεиıoг
Clearíng external To clear external operator message hístory data, press the [CLEAR] soft
operator message key. Thís clears a11 external operator message history data. Set MSGCR
hístory data bit 0 of parameter No. 3113 to 1.
Note that when Ms 1 and MSO bíts 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3113 , used
to specífy the number of external operator message hístory data ítems to
Ьe dísplayed, are changed, a11 exísting external operator message hístory
data ís cleared.
Límítatíons
Two path control When two path control ís exercísed, the external operator messages for
system 1 are dísplayed. The external operator messages for system 2 are
not dísplayed.
Optíon Before thís functíon can be used, the external data ínput function or
optіona1 external message function must be selected.
1086
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-63534EN/02
When screen índication isn t necessary, the life of the back light for LCD
caп be put off Ьy turning off the back light. CLEARING THE
The screen can be cleared Ьy pressíng specífıc keys. It ís also possíble to
SCREEN
specífy the automatíc clearing of the screen if no keys are pressed duńng
a períod specifíed wíth a parameter.
But, the lífe of the back líght may be contracted a11 the more when the
cleańng of screen and re indicatíon of screen are repeated beyond the
necessity.
This effect can Ьe expected when a screen ís cleared for more than oпe
hour.

Holding down the CAN key and pressing an arbitrary function key clears
Erase Screen Dísplay
the screen.
Procedure for erase screen díspiay
ıı
Procedure
Clearíng the screen
Ho1d down the CAN key and press аn arbitrary functíon key such as
Pos and PROG
Restoríng the screen Press an arbítrary functíon key.
Límitatíons Erase screen displayfunctíoncan not be used with the
160i/180i/ 160is/ 180is.
1087
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s353aEN/o2
The CNC screen ís automatically cleared íf no keys are pressed during the
period in mínutes specífıed wíth a parameter. The screen is restored by Automatíc Erase
pressíng any key.
Screen Display
Procedure for automatíc erase screen díspiay
Clearíng the screen The CNC screen is cleared once the period minutes specífied wíth
parameter No. 3123 has elapsed, provided the following condítions are
satísfıed:
Condítíons for clearing the CNC screen
Parameter No. 3123 ís set to other than O.
None of the following keys have been pressed:
MDI keys
Soft keys
External input keys
No alarm has been íssued.
Restoríng the screen The cleared CNC screen is restored once at least one of the following
condítions ís satísfied:
Condítíons for restoring the CNC screen
Any of the followíng keys has been pressed:
MDI keys
Soft keys
Externally input keys
An alarm has been íssued.
Some machínes feature a specíal key for restoríng the screen. For an
explanatíon of the locatíon and use of thís key, refer to the corresponding
manual, supplíed by the machíne tool buílder.
Explanatíons
Clearíng the screen
If parameter No. 3123 ís set to 0, clearíng of the screen usíng the key
usíng function key
and a functíon key Ш ís dísabled.
Specífíed períod The period specífıed wíth parameter No. 3123 ís va1id on1y for tool post
1.
A1arm for another path The screen is not cleared íf an alarm is íssued for tool post 1 or 2 or the
loader before the specifıed períod elapses.
CAUTION
Pressing any key while the screen is being cleared restores
the screen. 1n such a case, however, the function assigned
to the pressed key ís initiated. Do not press the
or LLTER key to restore the screen, therefore.
lONN
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Limitations Automatíc erase screen dísplay function can not be used wíth the
160i/180i/160ís/180is.
1089
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
1 2 GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Two graphíc functíons are available. One ís a graphic dísplay functíon,
and the other ís a dynamíc graphíc dísplay functíon.
The graphíc dísplay functíon can draw the tool path specifíed Ьy a
program being executed on a screen. The graphíc dísplay function also
allows enlargement and reduction of the display.
The dynamic graphíc dísplay functíon can draw a tool path and machíníng
profıle.
In tool path drawing, automatíc scaling and solíd drawíng are possíble.
In machíníng profíle drawíng, the status of machíning in progress can be
drawn through símulatíon. B1ank figures can also Ьe drawn.
The background drawing function enables drawing to be performed by
one program whíle machíning ís performed Ьy another program.
This chapter maіn1y explaíns drawíng procedures and drawíng
parameters for the followíng:
1. Drawíng the tool path specifıed by a program beíng executed, with the
graphic display functíon
2. Drawing the tool path wíth the dynamíc graphíc display functíon
3. Drawíng the machíníng profile wíth the dynamіc graphic display
function
4. Background drawíng procedure
1090
в-sз5з4εN;02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
It ís possible to draw the prograıruned tool path on the screen, whích
makes it possíble to check the progress of machíníng, whíle observíng the GRAPHICS DISPLAY
path on the screen.
In addítíon, ít ís also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.
Before drawíng, graphíc parameters must be set.
When the dynamic graphícs functíon is used, the graphícs functíon
described іп thís sectíon cannot be used. See Sectíon for the dynamic
graphícs functíon.
Graphícs dísplay procedure
Procedure
1 Press function key Press for a sma11 MDI unít.
The graphic parameter screen shown below appears. If thís screen
does not appear, press soft key [PARAM].
GRAPHIC PARAMETER 00000 N00000
AXES P= 0
,ZY=2, XZ=3, XYZ=4, ZXY=5
RANGE MAX.
X= 115000 Y= 150000 Z= 0
RANGE M1N.
X= 0 Y= 0 Z= 0
SCALE K= 70
GRAPHIC CENTER
X= 57500 Y= 75000 Z= 0
PROGRAM STOP N= 0
AUTO ERASE A= 1
MD1 - 14:23:54
GRAPH
2 Move the cursor wíth the cursor keys to a parameter to set.
3 Enter data, then press the игu key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until a11 required parameters are specified.
5 Press soft key [GRAPH].
1091
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
6 Automatíc operation is started and machine movement ís drawn on
the screen.
Explanation
RANGE The síze of the graphíc screen wí11 be as follows:
Actual graphic range
Gc : Center of the screen
72mm___ 45 75 m m
120
Gc
L
.Ї
7 2mm 45 75 mm
120

Note :O indicate the values for LCD.
Fíg. a Graphic range
As shown in a , the maximum graphics range ís an area of
approx. 144 mm width x 90 mm heíght for LCD and approx.
240 mm wídth x150 mm height for LCD.
Setting the graphícs To draw a section of the program wíthín the actual graphics range, set the
range graphícs range usíng one of the followíng two methods:
1. Set the center coordinates of the range and the magnification.
2. Set the maximum and minimum coordinates for the range in the
program.
Whether 1 or 2 is used depends on which parameters are set 1ast. A
graphícs range whích has been set is retaíned when the power ís turned
off.
1092
в-sзsзaEw 02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
1. setting the center Set the center of the graphíc range to the center of the screen. If the
coordinate of the drawing range in the program can be contained in the above actual
graphics range and graphícs range, set the magnífıcatíon to 1 actual value set ís 100 .
graphics magnification
When the drawing range ís larger than the maximum graphícs range oг
much smaller than the maximum graphícs range, the graphics
magníficatíon should be changed. The graphícs magnífıcatíon is to
times, whích ís usually determíned as follows;
Graphics magnífıcatíon=Graphics magnífıcatíon H , or graphícs
magnífıcatíons V , whíchever ís smaller
Graphics magníficatíon H=a1 length oп program to horízontal
dírection axis
Graphics magníficatíon V=β/ length on program to vertical
direction axís
a:144mm for seven soft key type
3:90mm for twelve soft key type
a:240mm for seven soft key type
3: 150мм for twelve sofc key type
The graphícs magnífícation ís always based on the center of the screen.
і Graphícs range after Program
magnification is applied

Graphícs range before
magnifícation is applied
Gc : Center of screen
Program
1Gc
Graphics range before
magnification is applied
Graphics range after
magnıfıcation is applied
-
Fíg. b Applyíng graphics magnífícatíon Example of enlargement
10Ч
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-6з5з4εwo2
2. Setting the maximum When the actual tool path is not near the center of the screen, method 1
and minimum wí11 cause the tool path to be drawn out of the geaphics range if graphics
coordinates for the magníficatíon ís not set properly.
drawing range in the
To avoid such cases, the following six graphíc parameters are prepared;
program
Graphíc range Max. X
Graphíc range Max. Y
Graphíc range Max. Z
Graphic range Mín. X
Graphic range Min. Y
Graphic range Min. Z
Wíth the above parameters, the center of screen Gcx, Gcy, Gcz is
determíned by the CNC as follows;
Gcx = X MAX. + X MIN. /2
Gcy = Y MAX. + Y MIN. /2
Gcz = Z MAX. + Z MIN. / 2
The unit of the va1ue wi11 be mm or ínch dependíng on the
ínput unít.
Graphícs magnificatíon ís applied automatically. When the graphics
range ís specífíed, the center coordínates and magnífıcatíon do not need
to be calculated.
Work coordínate system The graphíc origín and graphíc center poínt wi11 not be changed even íf
and graphícs the workpiece coordínate origin is changed.
In other words, the workpíece coordínate origín ís always consístent wíth
the graphíc origín.
v
Example
Graphics point 60mm, 90mm
Y
Gc -30mm, 50mm
------ -- G92 x60. Y90. ;
After execution ; Graphics point

x x
1 Ї1
Graphics origin Graphics origin-workpiece coordinate origin
As shown in the above example, when the command of G92 is specified, the drawing is moved as indicated
by . The position of the graphics origin or graphics center does not change.
Fíg. c Workpíece coordínate origin and graphícs orígin
1094
в-ε35здεгvıo2 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Graphícs parameter AXES
Specify the plane to use for drawing. The user can choose from the
followíng síx coordinate systems.
Wíth two path control, a dífferent drawíng coordínate system can be
selected for each tool post.
Y Z Y = 0 : Select 1
= 1 : Select 2 1 2 3
= 2 : Select 3
= 3 : Select 4
= 4 : Select 5
X Y Z = 5 : Select 6
Z Z Y
6
4 5 Z
X
χ X Y
The rotating angle horizontal, vertical for ísometric dísplay of 5 and 6 is
fixed at 45 ín both cases.
Fíg. d Coordínate system
ØNGE Max., Min.
Set the graphic range displayed on the screen by specifying maximum
and minímum values along each axis.
X=Maximum va1ue X=Mínimum va1ue
Y=Maximum va1ue Y=Minimum va1ue
Z=Maximum va1ue Z=Mínímum va1ue
Va1id range: 0 to t 9999999
NOTE
1 The units are mm or inch. Note that the
maximum value must be greater than the mínimum value for
each axís.
2 When setting the graphics range with the graphics
parameters for the maximum and mínímum values, do not
set the parameters for the magníficatíon and screen center
coordínates afterwards. On1y the parameters set last are
effective.
SCALE
Set the graphic magnifícation
The setting range ís 0 to 10000 tíme .
1095
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-δ3534EN/02
GRAPHIC CENTER
x= Y_
Z-_-
Set the coordínate va1ue on the workpíece coordínate system at
graphic center.
NOTE
1 When MAX. and M1N. of RANGE are set, the values wi11 be
set automatically once drawing is executed
2 When setting the graphics range with the graphics
parameters for the magnification and screen center
coordinates, do not set the parameters for the maximum
and minimum values afterward. On1y the parameters set
last are effective.
PROGRAM STOP
N=_
Set the sequence No. of the end block when necessary to partíally
dísplay.
Thís value ís automatícally cancelled and set to 1 oпce drawíng ís
executed.
AUTO ERASE
1: Erase the prevíous drawing automatically when the automatic
operatíon ís started under reset condítíon.
2 : Not erase autoinatically.
Executíng drawíng only Sínce the graphíc drawing ís done when coordinate va1ue is renewed
duríng automatic operatíon, etc., it is necessary to start the program by
automatíc operation. To execute drawing without moving the machine,
therefore, enter the machíne lock state.
Deletíng the previous When the AUTO operatíon is started under reset condition, the program
drawíng ís executed after deleting the prevíous drawíng automatícally Automatíc
deletíng=l . It ís possíble not to dele[e the prevíous drawíng by graphíc
parameter Automatíc deleting=0 .
Drawíng a part of a When necessary to dísplay a part of a program, search the starting block
program to be drawn by the sequence No. search, and set the sequence No. of the
end block to the PROGRAM STOP N= of the graphic parameter before
startíng the program under cycle operatíon mode.
Drawíng usíng dashed The tool path is shown with a dashed line - - - - for rapid traverse and
línes and solíd línes wíth a solid 1ine for cuttíng feed.
Límitatíons
Feedrate In case the feed rate is considerably high, drawing may not be executed
correctly, decrease the speed by dry run, etc. to execute drawíng.
Two path lathe control For the two path lathe control, two paths can not be dísplayed at the same
time.
1096
B-ε3534EN; 02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
There arc the followíng two functions in Dynamíc Graphícs.
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC Path graphíc This is used to draw the path of tool center com-
manded by the part program.
DISPLAY
So1id graphíc This is used to draw the workpíece figure machined by
tooi movement commanded by the part program.
The path graphíc function ís used to precísely check the part program for
drawing the tool path wíth a 1íne. The solíd graphíc functíon ís used to
draw the workpíece fígure to be machíned wíth a program. Thus, it ís easy
to recognize roughly the part program. These two functions can be used
freely by swítchíng them.
1 The path graphíc feature ca11s a program from memory and draws the tool
path specífíed by the program. Thís feature provides the followíng Path Drawing
functíons.
1. Drawing plane The user can choose the drawing plane from four types of plane víews,
two types of isometńc projection víews, and bíplane víew.
2. Drawing rotation When an ísometńc projectíon víew ís used, the drawing can be rotated
horizontally and vertícally.
3. Drawing enlargement A drawíng can be enlarged or reduced by specífyíng a magníficatíon from
and reduction to 100 wíth respect to the actual síze. In addítíon, a drawíng can be
automatically enlarged or reduced by setting maximum and mínimum
values.
4. Partial drawing A range of the program can be drawn by specífyíng a startíng sequence
number and endíng sequence number.
5. Programmed path The user can specífy whether to apply tool length offset and cutter
and tool path compensatíon to drawíng. Thís way, either the actual programmed path
drawing or the tool path can be drawn.
6. Co1or When a tool path ís drawn oп a screen, the colors used can be chosen from
seven colors íncludíng whíte. The color of the tool path can be changed
accordíng to the T code.
7. Automatic scaling The CNC automatically determines the maxímum and mínímum drawíng
coordínates for each program. Thís means that drawíng can be performed
wíth a magnífícatíon automatícally determíned according to these
maximum and mínimum values.
8. Partial enlargement Except for bip1ane víews the user can enlarge a11 types of drawíngs by a
drawing factor of up to 100 while lookíng at the drawíng that has been made.
9. lndicating the current The current tool posítíon can be dísplayed on the screen.
tool position with a
mark
10. lndicating the The current position can also be índicated using coordinates.
coordinates of the
current position
1097
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
11. Displaying Coordinate axes and actual síze dímensíon línes are dísplayed together
coordinate axes and wíth the drawíng so that actual síze can be referenced.
actuai 5ize
dimensions lines
The fırst síx functions above 1. to 6. are available by settíng the graphic
parameters. The seventh to nínth functíons 7. to 9. are mainly executed
usíng soft keys after drawíng has been setup. The tenth functíon 10. ís
enabled by settíng a parameter. The eleventh functíon 11. can Ьe used
at any tíme.
Path drawíng procedure
Procedure 1 To draw a tool path, necessaıy data must be set beforehand.
So press the function button some times for the sma11
MDI .The PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER ís dísplayed.
-
-
PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER-1 00000 N00002
AXES P= і
xY=O, YZ=1, ZY=2, XZ=3, xYZ=4, ZXY=5, 2P=6
ANGLE
ROTATION A= 0
T1LTING A= 0
sCALE K=
CENTER OR MAX./M1N.
Y= Z=
1= J= K=
sTART SEQ. NO. N= 0
END sEQ. NO. N= 0
NO. A=
MD1 .. ., ... 14:25:07
І Ј І 1 Γ EXEC 1 SCALF 1 POS 1 1
\f J
- \
PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER-2 00000 N00001
TOOL. COMP P= 0
COLOR 0123456
PATH P= 0
TOOL Q= 0
AUTO CHANGE R= 0
MD1 14:25:51
EXEC SCALE POS
1 J
1098
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
2 There are two screens for setting drawing parameters.
Press the page key accordíng to the settíng items for selectíng
screens.
3 Set the cursor to an item to be set by cursor keys.
4 Input numerics Ьy numeric keys.
5 Press the key.
The input numerics are set by these operatíons and the cursor
automatically moves to the next settíng ítems. The set data ís held even
after the power is turned off.
6 Set the operation mode to the memory mode, press functíon key
PROG , and ca11 the part program whích should be drawn.
7 Press functíon key GRAPH c usτoві for a sτтіa11 MDI several tímes to
redisplay the PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen, then press soft
key [EXEC] to display the PATH GRAPHIC EXECUTION screen.
PAтH GRAPHIC iEXECUT10Ni 01126 N01126

MEM 10: 10:40
AUTO START STOP REWIND, ERASE
8 Press soft key [ OPRT ], then press soft key [AUTO] or [sTART].
Pressing [AUTO] enables automatíc scalíng. See item 7 іп
introduction of path drawíng and the descríptíon of soft key [AUTO]
in Explanations for detaíls. Drawíng ís now started. Duríng drawing,
the message DRAWING blínks at the lower ríght corner of the CRT
screen.
9 Press soft key [STOP] to pause drawíng. The indication of STOP
blínks at the lower right corner on the CRT screen. Press soft key
[START] to start drawing. In addition, press soft key [REWIND] to C
redraw from the top of program before pressíng soft key [START].
10 Execute the last of part program M02/M30 to end drawing. Thís
wí11 cause, blínkíng of the DRAWING líght to turn off. The tool
path víew drawn can be retaíned until the power is turned off
unless a new tool path víew ís drawn.
1099
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-б3534E N/02
Partíal enlargement 11 For partial drawíng enlargement, dísplay the PATH G RA P H 1 C
SCALE screen by pressing the soft key [ZOOM] on the PATH
GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen of step 1 aЬoуe. The tool path ís
dísplayed. Next, press soft key [ OPRT ].
12 Perform posítíoning of marks dísplayed at the center of the screen
to the center of the part enlarged using soft keys [< ], [ >], [sL],
and [T].
13 Set the relatíve magnífıcatíon rate for the tool path view which is
beíng drawn usíng the address keys P and M . When you press
address key P or M, the following results:
Address key Function
P The relative magnificatiorı rate increases by
M The relative magnification rate decreases by
The relatíve magnífıcation rate is continuously changed by keeping
the address keys depressed. It is possible to magnífy up to 100
tímes in reference to the actual dimensíons.
14 Press the soft key [EXEC] after settíng the relatíve magnificatíon
rate. Then, the screen automatícally changes to TOOL PATH
EXECUTION and the drawíng of set partíal enlargement view
starts. The set partíal enlargement status ís va1id untíl soft key
[AUTO] or [ERASE] ís pressed.
1100
в-6з5з4EN o2 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Mark dísplay 15 Tπ dísplay a mark at the current tool pπsitiυп, disрla ıhe PATH
GRAPHIC POS1T10N scIeeii h lıгeлsinс ѕπі і kι [POS] πп the
PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER scrcen г,Іѕtеp 1 ahо о . Thi
nкu-К hlíııks ai tlic cuiiciit і<ıо1 ceііІeґ posItioll on the iool ıııth.
PATH GRAPHIC 1POSITION 01126 N01126

MD1 14:27:47
ł AHAM LXLC SCALL ..

Explanatíons
AXES The relaúuııshilı heіи eeіі the scttiiic \гt1ue aııd drIi\\ inс screen iѕ ,іѕ ѕhııи ıı
heluπ:
setting va1ue Drawing screen
0 P1ane view XY
1 P1ane view YZ
2 P1ane view ZY
3 P1ane view XZ
4 lsometric projection XYZ
5 lsometric projection tZXY1
6 Biplane view XY,XZ
P1ane view XY,YZ,ZY,XZ The foiIowing cππҐcliпate s stcıııs are selected.
Y Z
P=0 P=1

XY X YZ Y
Y Z
P=2 P=3
r
ZY Z XZ X
Fíg. Coordínate systems for the plane víew
11O1
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
lsometric projectíon Projector view by ísometric can be drawn.
XYZ,ZXY
Fíg. a Coordínate systems for the isometríc projectíon
Bìplane víew
Y z
P=6
X X
Fíg. b Coordinate systems for the biplane view
Bíplanes XY and XZ can be drawn símultaneously. The maximum and
minímum coordinate values must be set to draw the bíplane view. The
maximum and mínimum coordínate values can also be set by performíng
automatic scalíng
ANGLE The dírectíon of the coordinate axís ís set when the isometric projectíon
ís the settíng of the drawíng screen. The dírectíon ís set by horizontal and
vertícal rotation angles. The unít ís expressed in degrees.
ROTATION The horizontal rotatíon angle ís set in the range of 180 to ín
reference to the vertical axís. Set a posítíve va1ue for clockwise rotatíon
of the coordínate axís. Thus, the dírectíon of projectíon visual arrow
becomes counterclockwise.
Fig. c Rotating
11O2
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
T1LTING The tilting angle of the vertícal axis ís set in the range of 90 to іп
reference to the horizontal axis crossíng the vertícal axís at a right angle.
When a posítíve va1ue is set, the vertícal axís slants to the other síde of
the graphic screen. Thus, the projectíon dírection arrow directíon
becomes the hońzontal direction.
Fíg. d Tíltíng
SCALE Set the magnífıcation rate of drawíng from to When ís
set, drawíng is carríed out in actual dímensions. When 0 is set, the
drawíng magnífıcatíon rate ís automatícally set based on the settíng of
maximum and minimum coordinate values of drawíng.
CENTER OR MAX./M1N. When a graphícs drawing magnifícatíon of 0 is set, maxímum
coordínates on the X axís, Y axís, and Z axís in the workpiece
coordínate system must be set in addresses X, Y, and Z, and minímum
coordínates must be set in addresses I, J, and K, to specify the graphics
drawíng range. For Ьіp1ane víew drawing, maximum and minimum
coordínates for drawíng must be specífıed.
When a drawíng magnífıcation other than 0 ís set, the X, Y, and Z
coordínates of the drawíng center in the workpiece coordínate system
must be set in addresses X, Y, and Z. Addresses I, J, and K are not used.
The table below summańzes the settíng requirements descríbed above.
settíng the drawíng Settíng
magnifícation rate Address X/Y/Z Address 1/J/K
Other than 0 Drawíng center coordínate lgnored
value of X, Y, and Z axes
0 0г Ьіp1aпe víew Drawíng maximum Drawíng minimum
drawing coordinate value of coordinate value of
X, Y, and Z axes X, Y, and Z axes
START SEQ. NO. and Set the start and end sequence numbers of drawíng in five dígíts each. The
END SEQ. NO. part program for drawing ís executed from the head and on1y the part
enclosed by the start sequence and end sequence numbers is drawn. When
0 ís commanded as the start sequence number, drawíng ís performed from
the head of the program. In additíon, when 0 is commanded as the end
sequence number, drawing is performed up to the end of program. The
sequence numbег ís referred to regardless of either main program or
subprogram.
1103
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
TOOL COMP. It is possíble to set whether the tool path is drawn by makíng the tool
length offset or cutter compensatíon va1id or invalíd.
Settíng value Too1 length offset oг cutter compensatíon
0 Perform drawing by making tool compensatíon valid
An actual tool path ís drawn.
1 Perform drawing by makíng tool compensatíon invalid
A programmed path ís drawn.
Always set 0 before drawíng when indícatíng the mark of the current tool
positíon.
COLOR Specify the color of the tool path. In the case of monochrome ít is not
requíred to set it. The relatíonshíp between the setting va1ue and color ís
as shown below:
Setting va1ue Co1or
0 White
1 Red
2 Green
3 Ye11ow
4 B1ue
5 Purple
6 Light b1ue
PATH Specify the color of the tool path.
TOOL Specífy the color of the current posítion mark of the too1.
AUTO CHANGE Set if for changíng the color of the tool path
automatícally accordíng to the T code command.
Settíng value Functíon
0 The color of the tool path is not changed.
1 The co1or of the tool path is changed automatically.
When 1 ís set, the settíng va1ue of the color desígnation of PATH is
íncremented by 1 every tíme the T code ís commanded. At the same tíme,
the color of the tool path changes. If the settíng va1ue exceeds 6, it returns
to O.
Soft key functions on the
PATH GRAPHIC Software key Functíon
[EXECUTION] screen
[AUTO] Automatic scaling is performed. Obtain the maximum and
minimum coordinates of the part program before performing
drawíng, specífy them for the maximum and minimum values of
drawíng parameters, and set the drawing magnífícation rate to
0 before starting drawíng. Thus, the tool path víew is properly
laid out on the screen.
[START] Drawing starts. When the [START] ís pressed while the
drawing is not in STOP, the part program starts from the top of
the part program. Press the [START] while the drawing is in
stop to a11ow drawing to be carried out contínuously.
[STOP] Stop drawing. Single block stop
[REWIND] Press this key to start drawíng from the top of part program.
Searches for the beginning of a part program.
[ERASE] Erase the tool path view which has been drawn.
1104
в- зSзaEw 02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Graphic program No part program whích has not been regístered in memory can be drawn.
A1so, it is necessary that the M02 or M30 should be commanded at the
end of the part program.
Mark for the tool current The period of mark blínkíng is short when the tool ís movíng and becomes
positíon longer when the tool stops.
The mark índícatíng the current position of tool ís displayed on the XY
plane view when the biplane drawíng is performed.
Position mark Parameter 6501 CSR, bit 5 ís used to specífy whether to use or x as
the mark for índícatíng the current tool positíon and the center of a
partíally enlarged drawíng.
Dísplay of the coordínate Parameter 6500 DPO, bít 5 ís used to specify whether to display the
vaiue coordinates of the current positíon on the tool path drawing screen.
Changíng the coordínate If a program specífıes a coordínate system change, parameter 6501 ORG,
system bít 0 is used to specífy whether to draw wíthout changíng the coordínate
system or to draw by regardíng the current drawíng posítíon as the current
positíon in the new coordinate system.
Restríctíons
Graphic condítíon If machíne operatíon ís not allowed, пo drawíng caп be carried out. No
drawíng can be made duríng machíne operatíon. The settíng data and
swítches required for drawing are as shown below:
Setting data and swítCh Status
Too1 offset amount Set ít properly when performing drawing
while the tool offset amount becomes valid.
Single block Off
Optional block skíp Set it properly.
Feed hold Off
Partial enlargement The partíal enlargement can be carried out on the plane víew and ísometric
projection view. No partíal enlargement can be made in the drawíng of
the biplane víew.
Too1 current posítíon In dynamic graphics dísplay, drawíng cannot be executed whíle the
machine is operatíng even though this is possible ín ordinary graphics
dísplay see However, after drawing ís executed, the operator
caп see how the tool moves along the tool path by operating the machine
whíle dísplayíng the mark for the current posítíon of the too1.
It is necessary that the setting data and swítches related to the machíne
operation should be the same status between drawíng operation and
machiníng operation for properly displayíng the current position of tool
on the drawn tool path.
Two path lathe control For the two path lathe control, two paths can not be displayed at the same
time.
1105
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The solid graphícs draws the fígure of a workpíeces machíned hy the
movement of a too1. SO1íd Graphícs
The followíng graphic functíons are províded :
1. So1id model graphic So1íd model graphíc ís drawn by surfaces so that the machined figure can
Ьe recognized concretely.
2. B1ank figure graphics It ís possíble to draw a blank fígure before machíning.
A rectangular para11e1epíped and a círcular column oг cylínder can be
drawn. A círcular column or cylinder para11e1 to the X axís, Y axís, oг
Z axís can be selected.
З. Drawing of machining It ís possíble to draw the progress of machiníng by símulation.
progress
4. Drawing of final machíned It ís possíble to draw the fınal fınish machíned fıgure.
figure
5. Changing of drawing direction The user can choose from four drawíng dírectíons and eíght tíltíng angles.
6. P 1 a n e v i e w g rap h i c s It ís possible to draw XY plane víews as we11 as solíd model views. Heíght
of the workpíece ís díscrimínated by color for co1or or brightness for
monochrome.
7. Triplane view graphic In addítion to a solid drawíng, a triplane víew can be drawn. The user can
choose from four types of p1ane víew and side view positíons. The user
can freely change the cross sectíon posítion of a síde víew.
8. Horízontal hole machíning It is possíble to ínstall tools in the directíon whích is para11e1 to the X or
Y axís as we11 as the Z axis.
9. Too1 change during machining It ís possible to change tools during machining by the part program
command.
1106
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
So1íd graphícs drawing procedure
Procedure 1 To draw a machining profile, necessary data must be set beforehand.
So press the function key јGRAPHј І с ,, І for the sma11 MDI .
The screen of sOL1D GRAPHIC PARAMETER is dísplayed.
SOL1D GRAPHIC PARAMETER 00000 N00003
BLANK FORM P=
X= Y= Z=
1= J= K=
TOOLFORM P= 2
R= K=
PROJECTION P= 3
Q= 1 R= 0
1NTENSITY P= 4
0123456 Q= 2 R= 1
START N= 0
END N= 0
AN1M. SPEED N= 0
>
MD1 = нΡ 14:42:17
Г і іі BLANK ј Г EXEC Ѕ REVIEW
\ J
2 Use a cursor key to move the cursor to an item to be set.
3 Input numerics for the item at the cursor using the numeric key.
4 Press thel INPUTI.
Input numeňcs can Ьe set by these operatíons and the cursor moves to the
next setting item automatícally. The set data ís retained even if the power
ís turned off.
See Explanations for details on settíngs.
SOL1D GRAPHIC 5 To draw a blank figure, dísplay the SOL1D GRAPHIC BLANK
BLANK screen by pressing soft key [BLANK] on the SOL1D GRAPHIC
PARAMETER screen of step 1 above.
1107
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
6 Press soft key [AN E W]. Thís allows the blank fígure drawíng to be
performed based on the blank fıgure data set.
7 Press soft keys [+ROT] [ ROT] [+T1LT], and [ T1LT], when
performíng drawíng Ьy changíng the drawíng dírectíons. Parameters
P and Q for the drawíng dírectíon are changed and the fígure ís
redrawn wíth the new parameters.
SOL1D GRAPHICS 8 Set the operatíon mode to the memory mode, press function key
EXECUTION
PROG , and ca11 the subject part program of drawíng.
9 To draw a machíníng profile, display the SO L 1 D G R A P H 1 C
EXECUTION screen by pressíng soft key [EXEC] ori tlıe SOL1D
GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen of step 1 above.
1108
8-б3534ENí02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
10 Press soft key [ OPRT ] and press eíther soft key [] or [].
When [] is pressed, the status of machíníng ín progress is drawn
Ьy simulatíon. When [] ís pressed, the profıle during machíníng
ís not drawn. 0n1y the fıníshed profile produced by the program ís
drawn. This allows drawíng to be started.
When STOP ís not dísplayed at the lower right corner of the screen,
the program ís executed from íts head. DRAWING blinks at the
lower right corner of CRT screen during drawing.
11 Press soft key [STOP] to stop drawíng temporarily. Drawíng is
stopped after drawing the current block and STOP blinks at the
lower right corner of CRT screen. Press soft key [] or []
when restartíng drawíng. Press soft key [REWIND] and then the
[] or [] íf redrawing from the head. It is possíble to continue
drawíng after changíng the solíd graphic parameters in temporary
stop.
12 When the end of program M02 or M03 ís executed, the drawíng
ends and the blinkíng of DRAWING stops. Then, the fınal fınísh
fıgure ís drawn on the CRT screen. The drawn fıgure víew is retained
untíl the power ís turned off as long as a new machíne fıgure view is
drawn.
REVIEW 13 The color, íntensíty, or drawing dírection of a machíníng fıgure whích
has Ьeeп drawn can be changed and the fígure redrawn.
To redraw the fıgure, fırst change the parameters for the color,
íntensíty, or drawing directíon on the SOL1D GRAPHIC
PARAMETER screen shown in step 1, then press soft key
[REVIEW] to dísplay the SOL1D GRAPHIC REVIEW screen.
14 Press soft key [ OPRT ], then press soft key [ANEW]. The machiníng
fıgure ís redrawn wíth the color, íntensíty, or drawíng directíon set in
step 13.
1109
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
15 To redraw the figure in a clii rent mode, press soft key [+ROη,
[-ROη, [+T1Lη, or [-T1LT]. Parameters P and Q for the drawíng
dírectíon are changed and the fígure ís redrawn wíth the new
paramaters.
Tríplane view drawíng 16 The machíned fígure can be drawn on the tň-p1ane víew.
To draw a triplane víew, press the rightmost soft key next-menu key
on the SOL1D GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen of step 1 above, then
press soft key [3-PLN] anii [ OPRT ]. The SOL1D GRAPHIC
3-PLANE screen appears.
17 Each tíme soft key [ η] is pressed, the síde-víew drawíngs dis-
played change as follows.
Ríght view and rear view

Rear víew and left víew
Left víew a nd front view
Front víew a d right view
18 The sectíonal position of side víew can Ьe changed by the soft keys
[-], [-], [T], and [ ].
Wıth the sectíonal position of the left/right side víew, the marks , and
V índícatíng the sectíonal posítíon cаn Ьe moved using the soft keys
[<-] and [->].
Wıth the sectíonal positíon of rear/front síde víew, the marks and
índicating the sectíonal posítion can be moved using the soft keys [T],
and [ 1-]. Keep the keys depressed to change sectional/views
contínuously.
1110
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Explanatíons
GRAPHICS PARAMETER
BLANK FORM
BLANK FORM P Set the type of blank figure under P. The relatíonshíp between the settíng
va1ue and fígure ís as follows:
P B1ank figure
0 Rectangular para11e1epiped Cubed
1 Column or cylínder para11e1 to Z-axis
Material positions Set the X axis, Y axís, and Z axis coordínate values of standard poínt
X,Y,Z of mateńals in workpíece coordínate system to the addresses X, Y, and Z.
The standard point of materials ís the corner poínt in the negatíve
directíon in the case of rectangular para11e1epiped blank fígure and the
center poínt of bottom in the case of column and cylínder materials.
Materíal dímensions Set the dímensíons of mateńals. The relationshíp between the addresses
1,J,K I. J. tпd K and setting value ís as shown below:
Material 1 J K
Rectangular Length in X-axis Length in Y-axis Length in Z-axis
direction direction direction
Column Radius of circle 0 Length of column
Cylinder Radius of external Radius of internal Length of cylinder
circle circle
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN02
TOOL FORM
Machining tool Set the machíníng dírectíon of tools.
orientation P
P Machíníng direction of tools
0,1 Parallel to the Z axís perform machıníng from the + direction
Dimensions of tools Set the dímensíons of too1. The relatíonshíp between the dísplayed
R,K address and settíng va1ue ís as shown below:
Address setting numerícs
R Radius of tool
K Distance from the program poínt to tool típ normally U
Program point
R
K
Tip of the tool
PROJECTION
Graphics method The relatíonshíp between graphíc method and dírectíon and setting va1ue
and direction P ís as shown below:
P Graphíc method and dírectíon
0, 4 Oblíque projection view + X-axis
1, 5 Oblique projection view + Y axís
2, 6 Oblique projectìon view X axis
3, 7 Oblique projection view Y axís
Thís setting va1ue can also be incremented or decremented by the soft
keys [+ROT] oг [- ROT]. In thís case, íf the settíng va1ue exceeds 7, ít
returns to O. If ít ís smaller than 0, ít becomes 7.
VERTICAL AX1S R Dírectíon of the vertícal axís ís fıxed in Z-axís.
1112
в-s35зaεN/o2 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
1NTENSITY Specify the íntensíty of the drawíng screen when performíng drawíng on
the monochrome, and the color of the drawíng screen when performing
drawíng on the color screen. The relationship between the setting,
íntensity, and co1or ís as shown below:
However, when the p1ane view ís dísplayed on the monochrome. The
brighter surface, whíchever is specífíed by P or Q becomes the top surface.
Settíng vaiue lntensíty Co1or
0 Maximum brightness White
1 Red
2 Dark Green
3 1, Ye11ow
4 Light B1ue
5 Purple
6 Light b1ue
The relationshíp between the dísplay address, surface, and líne on the
machíned figure view is as shown below:
Address Oblique projectíon p a e víew T p1ane víew
víew
P Uppersurface Uppersurface Upper/iowersurface
Q Síde surface Middle surface Left/right surface
R Rídge Ridge Ridge
Remarks The intensity/co1or of Lower surface The intensity/co1or of
front surface is is blank plane view is between
between P and Q P and Q
- 1113 -
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
START SEO. NO. and Specífy the start sequence number and end sequence number of each
END SEO. NO. drawing in a fíve-digít numeríc. The subject part program is executed
from the head. But on1y the part enclosed by the start sequence number
and end sequence numeric ís drawn. When 0 ís commanded as the start
sequence number, the program ís drawn from íts head. When 0 ís
commanded as the end sequence number, the program ís drawn to íts end.
The comparison of sequence number is performed regardless of main
program and subprogram.
AN1M. SPEED Set interval of anímated símulation drawíng ranging from 0 to 255.
Every tíme the machíníng proceeds by the number set, the drawing ís
repeated. If 0 ís set, drawing ís repeated at every 1 block execution.
Soft key functíons on the
SOL1D GRAPHIC Soft key Function
EXECUTION screen
[] Símulate and draw the progress of machining.
[] No figure duńng machíning is drawn and only the final
finish figure by that program ís drawn.
[STOP] When pressed, stops drawíng at the end of block single
block stop .
Press thís key to perform drawing from the head of part
[REWIND] program. Headíng ís performed automatícally after execu-
tíon of program end M02/M30 .
Graphícs program No part program which has not been regístered in memory can be drawn.
It ís also necessary that the M02 or M30 Ьe commanded at the end of the
part program.
Specífying the blank It ís possíble to specífy BLANK FORM and TOOL FORM in the part
form and tool form ín the program. The command format is as shown below. If it is commanded
part program duríng executíon of drawing, the ítem correspondíng to the screen of
SOL1D GRAPHIC PARAMETER is set and drawing contínues wíth the
set data.
Command of BLANK FORM
G10 L90 P_X_Y_Z_1_J_K_ ;
The command value succeedíng the address is the same as the
numeríc set to the address beíng dísplayed at the ítem of BLANK
FORM of SOL1D GRAPHIC PARAMETER . If BLANK FORM
ís commanded, drawíng continues after a new blank figure ís
drawn.
Command of TOOL FORM
G10 L91 P_R_K_ ;
The command va1ue succeeding the address ís the same as the
iiumeric set to the address beíng dísplayed at the ítem of TOOL
FORM of screen SOL1D GRAPHIC PARAMETER . If 0 ís
commаnded wíth the tool radius value, no machiníng símulation
ís performed thereafter.
Dísplay of the coordínate Parameter 6500 DPO, bít 5 ís used to specify whether to dísplay the
value coordínates of the current position on SOL1D GRAPHIC screen.
1114
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
TOOL COMP. In solid graphics, parameter 6501 TLC, bít 1 is used to specífy whether
to apply toollength offset.
Graphíc method Parameter 6501 3PL, bit 2 ís used to select whether to draw a tńplane
víew with the thírd-angle oг first-angle projectiun.
Rídge drawíng Parameter 6501 RID, bít 3 is used to specífy whether to draw ridges in
p1ane víew drawíng.
Dísplay mode Parameter 6501 FIM, bít 4 ís used to specífy whether to dísplay a solid
graphícs ín the rough mode or in the fıne mode. When a solid graphics
is drawn in the fíne mode, the drawíng speed is slower than when drawn
in the rough mode.
Cross sectíon posítíon In tríplane drawíng, a va1ue can Ьe specifíed for changíng the positíon of
change the cross sectíon whíle the soft key ís held down. A value from 0 to 10
can be set. When 0 ís specífied, a va1ue of 1 is used. Parameter No. 6515
1115
12. GβAPH1CS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN 42
Examples
: Sśdε view seIection ín
tríplane drawíng
Example The side views of the figure below are illustrated. Rear view
Top view
0
Left side view Right side view

Front view
1n the above figure, the side views displayed are switched as follows.
Right view and rear view Rear view and left view
Press [ ]
g

Press [ Press [ Сĺ ]
Front view and right view Left view and front view
Press [ ј
-E--
116
8-6353aEгv o? OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Cross sectíon posítion Some examples of cross sectional views are given below for the left view
selectíon ín tríplane and front view shown on the prevíous page.
drawing
Límítations
Graphíc condítion If the machine operation is not enabled, no drawíng can be made. No
drawíng can be made during operatíon of machíne. The main settíng data
and swítches needed on drawing are as shown below:
Settíng data/swítch Status nØed for drawíng
Too1 offset value 1t is necessary to set the cutter compensatíon
value properly. The tool length offset is ignored.
single block Off
Optional block skip Properly set it.
Feed hold Off
Too1 form Too1s whích set the tool fıgure are limited to the cylinder figure
equivalent to flat end mi11 .
H e 1 í ca 1 i nte r p o 1 at i o n In solíd graphícs, paths based on helícal interpolation cannot be drawn.
Two path control For the two path control, two paths can not be dísplayed at the same tíme.
1117
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
The background drawíng function enables the drawíng of a fıgure for one
BACKGROUND program whíle machiníng a workpiece under the control of another
program.
DRAWING
Procedure for Background Drawíng
Procedure сА теu 1 Press the GRAPH function key for a sma11 MDI .
fиAы,
2 Press the [PARAM] soft key. The followíng screen appears:
PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER-1 00001 N00001
. AXES
XY=O, YZ=1, ZY=2, XZ=3, XYZ=4, ZXY=5, 2P=6
ANGLE
ROTATION A = 0
T1LTING A = 0
SCALE K =
CENTER OR MAX./M1N.
X= X= X=
X= X= X=
START SEQ. NO. N= 0
END SEQ. NO. N= 0
>
MD1 21 :20:05 :іеі
l Г EXEC SCALE , POS OPRT ,

3 Press the [ O P RT ] soft key.
ĺ 4 To select the program to be used for drawing, enter the number of that 1NPUT
program, then press the [O SRH] soft key. The O number at the top
right of the screen índícates the selected program. Repeatedly
pressíng on1y the [O SRH] soft key selects the regístered programs in
turn.
To ínput a graphíc parameter, the [1NPUT] soft key can be used
ínstead of the 1NРІЛ ј MDI key.
5 Press the left most soft key return menu key , to return the soft
keys to the state existíng upon the completion of step 2.
6 Perform dynamíc graphíc dísplay, as descńbed ín Sectíon
Explanatíons
Program selection Immedíately after entering background drawíng mode, the program
whích was selected prevíously remaíns selected. Any program can be
selected for background drawíng, by usíng the background drawíng
screen.
If no program ís selected prior to entering background drawíng mode, the
program number ís set to O. In such a case, drawíng cannot be started untíl
the program to be used for drawíng ís specifıed.
1118
6-6353aεN/o2 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Too1 offsets Separate tool offsets are internally províded for machíníng and
background drawing. Upon startíng drawíng or when selectíng a program
for drawing, the tool offset data for machíníng is copied to the tool offset
data for background drawíng. Changíng a tool offset Ьy usíng a G10
command duńng machíning does not affect that for background drawing.
Simílarly, changing a tool offset Ьy usíng a G 10 command duńng drawíng
does not affect that for machíning.
Parameters The same parameters are used for both background drawíng and actual
machíning.
Workpíece coordinate Workpíece coordínate system offsets, part of the parameters, are províded
offsets separately for machíníng and background drawíng. Upon selectíng a
program for drawíng, the workpíece coordinate system offset data for
machiníng ís copied to the workpíece coordínate system offset data for
background drawing. Changing a workpíece coordínate system offset by
usíng a G10 command duńng machíníng does not affect that for
background drawíng. Símilarly, changing a workpíece coordínate system
offset by usíng a G10 command duńng drawíng does not affect that for
machíníng.
Macro varíables Macro vańables are províded separately for machíníng and background
drawíng. Upon selectíng a program for drawíng, the macro variables for
machining are copied to the macro vańables for background drawíng.
Changíng a macro vańable by using a G10 command duríng machiníng
does not affect that for background drawíng. Similarly, changíng a macro
vańable usíng a G10 command duńng drawing does not affect that for
machíníng.
OFFSET functíon key
SETΓING When bit 6 BGOF of parameter No. 3109 is set to 1, pressing the OFFSET SEП G
function key on the background drawíng screen dísplays the tool offsets,
workpiece coordínate system offsets, and macro vańables for background
drawíng. In such a case, BGGRP is dísplayed at the bottom ríght of the
screen, to indícate that data for background drawing ís beíng dísplayed.
1119
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-6353aEN/o2
Dísplayíng the Bit 5 DPO of parameter No. 6500 caп be used to specify whether the
coordínates coordinates of the current posítíon are to be dísplayed on the tool path
drawíng.
In background drawing mode, modal ínformatíon F, S, and T ís dísplayed,
together wíth the current posítíon. If the [POS] softkey has been selected
for dynamíc graphic dísplay, however, F, Ѕ. and T are not displayed.
CAUTION
Once an alarm is issued during background drawing,
drawing is stopped and the alarm description is displayed
at the bottom right of the screen. To release the alarm state,
press the СAti MD1 key. Note that pressing the key
wi11 also stop foreground machining if currently in progress.
Note, however, that bit 0 RST of parameter No. 8100 can
be used to specify that machining wi11 not be stopped if the
RESET key is pressed during background drawing.
1120
B-s353aENıo2 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION
HELP FUNCTION
1 3
The help functíon dísplays on the screen detailed informatíon about
alarms íssued ín the CNC and about CNC operatíons. The followíng
ínformation ís displayed.
Detaíled ínformatíon of When the CNC ís operated incorrectly or an erroneous machining
alarms program is executed, the CNC enters the alarm state. The help screen
dísplays detailed informatíon about the alarm that has been íssued and
how to reset it. The detaíled ínformatíon ís displayed on1y for a límited
number of P/S alarms. These alarms are often mísunderstood and are
rather diffıcult to understand.
Operatíon method If you are not sure about a CNC operatíon, refer to the help screen for
information about each operation.
Parameter tabie When settíng or refeníng to a system parameter, if you are not sure of the
number of the parameter, the help screen displays a list of parameter Nos.
for each functíon.
He1p Functíon Procedure
Procedure
1 Press th н e ειг key on the MDI. HELP 1N1T1AL MENU screen ís
dísplayed.
HELP INITIAL MENU 01234 N00001
HELP
1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERAT20N METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE
S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
[ ALM ] [ OPR ] [ PARA ] [ ] [ ]
\
Fig. 13 a HELP 1N1T1AL MENU Screen
The user cannot swítch the screen dísplay from the PMC screen or
CUSTOM screen to the help screen. The user can return to the normal
CNC screen by pressing the нειa key or another functíon key.
1121
13. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION B-63534EN/02
ALARM DETAIL screen 2 Press soft key [ALM] on the HELP 1N1T1AL MENU screen to dísplay
detailed informatíon about an alarm currently being
raísed..
HELP ALARM DETAIL 00010 N00001
NUNBER : 027 A1ann No.
M`SAGE . NO AXES COMØED IN G43/G Normai explana-
FUNCTION TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION 1ј0п oп aІaгm
ALARM Functíon
IN TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION TYPE C, classificatíon
NO AXIS IS DESIGNATED IN G43 644
BLOCKS. IN TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION A1ann detaíls
TYPE C, IT TRIES TO LATCH ON TO
ANOTHER AXIS WITHOUT OFFSET CANCE
L2NG.
>100 S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
OPR ] ľ PARA l ľ ][ ]
-ј
Fíg. 13 b ALARM DETAIL Screen when P/S A1arm No. 27 ís issued
Note that oп1y details of the alarm identified at the top of the screen
are dísplayed on the screen.
If the alarms are a11 reset whíle the help screen is dísplayed, the alarm
dísplayed on the ALARM DETAIL screen ís deleted, índicatíng that no
a1ц m [s íssued.
HELP ALARM DETA2L 01234 N00001
NIIMBER
M`SAGE .
FUNCTION :
ALARM
ALARM IS NOT GENERATED
ENTER THE DETAIL REQUIRED ALARM NПMBER,
AND PRESS ĽSELECTI KEY
>100 S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
1 ľ ] Ľ OPR l Ľ PARA ] ί ] Ľ l
л
Fíg. 13 c ALARM DETAIL Screen when No A1arm ís íssued
1122
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION
3 To get detaíls on another alarm number, fírst enter the alarm number,
then press soft key [SELECT]. This operation is useful for
investigating alarms not currently beíng raísed.
>100 s o т0000
мεм 10:12:25
[ ][ ][ ] [ ] [ SELECT ]
Fíg. 13 d How to select each ALARM DETAILS
HELP ALARM DETAIL 01234 N00001
NUMBER : 100
M`SAGE : PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
FUNCTION :
ALARM .
ALARM IS NOT GENERATED
>100 S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
I ] [ ] [ ] ] [ SELECT ]
J
Fíg. 13 e ALARM DETAIL Screen when P/S alarm No. 100 ís selected
OPERATION METHOD 4 To determíne an operatíng procedure for the CNC, press the soft key
screen [OPR] key on the HELP 1N1T1AL MENU screen. The OPERATION
METHOD menu screen is then displayed. See Fíg. 13 f .
HELP OPERATION METHOD 01234 N00001
1. PROGRAM ED2T
2. SEARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT W2TH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR
5 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
[ ALM ] [ ] [ PARA ] Ľ ] [ ]
Fig. 13 f OPERATION METHOD Menu Screen
To select an operatíng procedure, enter an ítem No. from the keyboard
then press the [SELECT] key.
1123
13. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION 8-63534EN/02
>1 S 0 T0000
M8M 10:12:25
Ľ ] ľ ] ] Ľ ] Ĺ SELECT ] J
\
Fig. 13 g How to select each OPERATION METHOD scneen
When 1. PROGRAM ED1T is selected, for example, the screen in
Fígure 13 g ís dísplayed.
On each OPERATION METHOD screen, it is possible to change the
dísplayed page by pressíng the PAGE key. The current page No. ís
shown at the upper ríght coıner on the screen.

Each item
HELP OPERATION METHOD 4 N00001 Pageimaximum
1. PROGRAM EDIT 1/4 page
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS hњ Operauon
MODE : EDIT Set mode
SCREEN : PROGRAM operдáoп locauon
OPR : 0-9999 Operatin8
procedure
DELETE ONE PROGRAM
MODE EDIT
SCREEN PROGRAM
OPR O+PROGRAλI N ЛMBER
> 5 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
[ ALM ] [. ..- ] [ PARA ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 13 h Selected OPERATION METHOD screen
Tυ rιturıı to the OPERATION METHOD menu screen, press the
C J L C RETURN MENU key to dísplay [OPR] again, and then press the
aσσσσ σ [OPR] key again.
To dírectly select another OPERATION METHOD screen on the
`RETURN MENU key screen shown ín Fígure 13 h , enter an item No. from the keyboard
and press the [SELECT] key.
>з s o т0000
MEM 10:12:25
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SELECT ]
Fíg. 13 i How to select another OPERATION METHOD screen
PARAMETER TABLE 6 If you are not sure of the No. of a system parameter to be set, or to refer
screen to a system parameter, press the [PARA] key on the HELP iN1T1AL
MENU screen. A líst of parameter Nos. for each functíon is
dísplayed. See Fígure 13 j .
It ís possíble to change the dísplayed page on the parameter screen.
The current page No. ís shown at the upper right corner oп the screen.
1124
B-63534EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION
HELP PARAMETER TABLE 01234 N00001
1/4
SETTEING No. 0000-
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE No. 0100-
AXIS CONTROL
/SETTING UNIT No. 1000-
COORDINATE SYSTEM No. 1200-
STROKE LIM2T No. 1300-
FEED RATE No. 1400-
ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL No. 1600-
SERVORELATED No. 1800-
DI/DO No. 3000-
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12c25
....
ALM ] [ OPR ] [ ][ ][ ] J
Fíg. 13 j PARAMETER TABLE screen
7 To exít from the help screen, press the нειP key or another function
key.
Explanatíon
Configuratíon of the He1p Screen
HELPkey
HELP CNC
1N1T1AL MENU
screen screen HELP key
oг
[ALAM] [OPR] [PARA] function key
ALARM OPERATION PARAME-
DETAIL METHOD TER TABLE
screen screen screen PAGE key
HELP key ί
oг I
function key 0
NO. +[sELECT] [OPR]
NO. +[sELECT] HELP key
Each opera- oг
tion instruc- function key
tion screen
τ NO. +[sELECT]
l
..
1125
14. SCREEN HARDCOPY OPERATION B-δ3534EN/02
1 4 SCREEN HARDCOPY
The screen hardcopy functíon outputs the ínformation dísplayed on the
CNC screen as 640 480_1ot bítmap data. Thís function makes ít possible
to produce a hard copy of a stí11 ímage dísplayed on the CNC..
The created bitmap data can be dísplayed on a PC.
Screen Hardcopy Procedure
1 Check the parameter settíngs. To use the screen hardcopy functíon,
set bít 7 HDC of parameter 3301 to 1 and parameter 20 UO channel
selection to 4 memory card I/F . Set other relatíve parameters bits
0, 2, and 3 of parameter 3301 as needed. In a multípath system, set
the parameters for each path.
2 Insert a memory card.
3 To start the functíon, set hardcopy staıt sígnal HDREQ to
1. Alternatively, hold down the [SH1FT] key for fíve seconds.
4 To end the function, press the [CAN] key. Alternatively, set hard
copy stop sígnal HDABT to 1.
5 Whí1e the screen hardcopy operatíon ís in progress, the hardcopy in
progress sígnal ís tied to 1. For several tens of seconds or
several seconds, for a monochrome LCD before the hardcopy
operatíon ends, the screen image stands sti11.
6 When the screen hardcopy operation is completed, the hardcopy in
progress sígnal goes 0.
Supplementary Whi1e the screen hardcopy operatíon ís in progress, the screen ímage
explanatíon keeps stí11. Thís means that the clock dísplayed on the screen índícates
the begínníng and end of the operatíon. When the clock stops counting
seconds, the hard copy operatíon starts. The clock resumes countíng
seconds when the screen hard copy operatíon ends.
1126
6-63534EN/02 OPERATION 14. SCREEN HARDCOPY
NOTE
1 During the screen hardcopy operation, key ínput ís dísabled
for several tens of seconds. Unti1 the screen hardcopy
operatíon ends, the screen image lies sti11. During this
períod, the hardcopy ín progress sígnal is tíed to
1. No other signal is output. Avoíd turning off the power
indiscriminately during that period.
2 1f the [SH1FT] or [CAN] key ís customízed by C executor, for
ínstance, the screen hardcopy operation may disable the
[SH1FT] or [CAN] key.
3 A normal hard copy may not be produced while the screen
image ís movíng.
LímÍtatíOnS A hard copy of the following screens cannot be produced.
1 Screen of the FS-160í/180ί/210ί CNC wíth personal computer
function
2 System alarm screen
3 Screen whíle RS-232 C ís beíng used
4 Screen during automatíc or manual operatíon A hard copy can be
produced in a rest of the operatíon.
Screen hardcopy functíon can not be used with the 1 60ί/ 1 80і/ 1 бОіѕ/ 180is.
Fí1e name The bítmap files created by the screen hardcopy functíon are named as
follows, in order in whích they are created after power up:
` Name of the fırst hardcopy file created after
power up
` Name of the second hardcopy fíle created after
power up
`
NOTE
1 A screen hardcopy file produced after the file HDCPY099.
BMP ís output wí11 be named as
2 1f a BMP fíle output by the screen hardcopy functíon has the
same name as a file present on a memory card, the file on
the memory card is overwrítten unconditíonally.
3 When the hardcopy function is carried out after power ís
turned off and on agaín, the fírst output file is named as
again. 1f the inserted memory card has a
fíle havíng the same name, the fíle is uncondítionally
overwritten. Note thís when continuously producing hard
copies of varíous screens.
1127
14. SCREEN HARDCOPY OPERATION 6-63534EN/02
Colors of data The number of colors used ín created bitmap data depend on the dísplay
control card, the LCD hardware, and the dísplay mode of the CNC screen.
Tab1e 14 a índícates the relationships.
Tab1e 14 a Colors of BMP data created by the screen hardcopy functíon
LCD CNC screen Colors Colors used ín created Remarks
hardware díspiay dísplayed BMP data
mode on CNC
Monochrome 2 colors 2 colors Shades of gray are not supported.
LC D
2 Co1or LCD VGA-comp Character: When bít 0 of parameter Most CNC screens use thís mode. Note
ύ atíble mode 16 colors 3301 is set to 0: 256 colors that colors may not be normally dísplayed
a Graphíc: When bít 0 of parameter ín the 16 color mode.
> 16 colors 3301 ís set to 1: 16 colors
VGA mode 256 colors 256 colors A special screen can be prepared by C
executor,forínstance.
Data síze Tab1e 14 b indicates the sizes of bitmap data created by the screen
hardcopy functíon.
Tab1e 14 b Sízes of bitmap data created by the screen hardcopy
function
Bítmap coiors Fí1e síze bytes
Monochrome 2 colors 38,462
Co1oг 16 colors 153,718
Co1or 256 colors 308,278
A1arm message If bít 2 HCA of parameter 3301 ís set to 1, an alarm message can be
output when the hardcopy operatíon ends in faílure.
P/S alarm Nos. 5212 to 5214
For descriptions of these alarms, see APPENDIX G, ALARM LIST.
1128
N. MAINTENANCE

B-63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
1 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
Thís chapter descńbes how to replace the CNC backup battery and
absolute pulse coder battery. Thís chapter consísts of the following
sectíons:
REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD MOUNTED TYPE i
SERIES
REPLACING THE BATTERY FOR STAND ALONE TYPE i
5ERIES
BATTERY IN THE CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC
FUNCTIONS 3 VDC
BATTERY FOR SEPARATE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODERS
6 VDC
BATTERY FOR BUILT IN ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER
6 VDC
Battery for memory Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CM05
backup memory in the control unít. The power to the CMOS memorу ís backed
up by a líthíum battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit.
Therefore, the above data ís not lost even íf the main battery faíls. The
backup battery ís ínstalled in the contro1 unít príor to beíng shipped from
the factory. Thís battery can províde backup for the memorу contents for
about a year.
When the battery voltage fa11s, alarm message BAT blinks on the LCD
dísplay and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. When this
alarm is dísplayed, replace the battery as soon as possíble. In general, the
battery caп be replaced within oпe or two weeks of the alarm first beíng
issued. This, however, depends on the system configuration.
If the battery voltage subsequently drops further, backup of inemory can
no longer be provided. Turníng oп the power to the control unít in thís
state causes system a1arm 910 SRAM paríty alarm to be issued because
the contents of inemorу аre 1ost. Replace the battery, clear the entire
memorу, then reenter the data.
Replace the memorу backup battery within a few mínutes whíle the
control unít ís brought off.
The followíng two kínds of batteńes caп Ьe used.
Líthium battery, íncorporated ínto the CNC control unít.
Two alkalíne drу ce11s síze D ín an external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory.
1131
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE в-63ь34εNıo2

REPLACING
BATTERY FOR
LCD-MOUNTED
TYPE i SERIES
Replacement procedure When a líthium battery ís used
Prepare a new lithium battery ordering code: A02B-0200-K102
FANUC specificatíon: A98L-0031-0012 .
1 Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off the
power.
2 Remove the o1d battery from the top of the CNC control unít.
First, unplug the battery connector, then take the battery out of its
case.
The battery case of a control unit wíthout option slots ís located at the
top end of the unit as shown ín the fígure of the prevíous page. The
battery case of a control unít wíth 2 slots or 4 slots ís located in the
central area of the top of the unit between fans .
3 Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may result in the
battery exploding. Replace the battery only with the
specified battery A02B-0200 K102 .
1132
B-s3534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
CAUTION
Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30 minutes. Do
not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer
than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of
memory may be 1ost.
1f steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30 minutes,
save a11 contents of the CMOS memory to the memory card
beforehand. Thus, if the contents of the CMOS memory are
1ost, the contents can be restored easily.
For the method of operation. refer to Maintenance manual
B-63525EN .
When discardíng a battery, observe the applícable ordínances or other
rules of your 1oca1 ºovernment. A1so, cover the termínals of the battery
with vinyl tape or the like to prevent a short-circuit.
1133
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE 6-63534EN/02
Replacíng 1 Prepare two alkaline dry ce11s síze D commercíal]y available.
commercíal alkalíne dry 2 Turn on the power to the Seríes 16i/18i/160i/180і.
ce11s size D
3 Remove the battery case cover.
4 Replace the ce11s, paying careful attention [o their orientation.
5 Reínstall the cover onto the battery case.
CAUTION
When replacíng the alkaiine dry ce11s whiie the power ís off,
use the same procedure as that for lithium battery
repiacement described above.
A1kaline dry ce11 x 2
Cover
Connection terminal on the rear
Mounting hole x 4
Battery case
1134
B-63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY

REPLACING THE
BATTERY FOR
STAND-ALONE TYPE
і SERIES
Replacíng the battery If a líthíum battery ís used, have A02B-0200 K102 FANUC internal
code: A98LØ31Ø12 handy.
1 Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.
2 Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unít.
Disconnect the connector first. Then, remove the battery from the
battery case.
The battery case ís provided in the top area of the face plate of the main
CPU board.
3 Replace the battery, then connect the connector.
Battery case
MA1N
Lithium battery
A02B-0200 K102
7Ї Connector 1
WARNING
The incorrect mounting of the battery may cause an
explosion. Avoid using any battery other than the one
specified here A02B-0200 K102 .
1і?5
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B-63534EN/02
CAUTION
Complete steps 1 to 3 within 30 minııtes,
1f the battery is left removed for a long time, the memory
would lose the contents.
1f there is a danger that the replacement cannot be
completed within 30 minutes. save the whole contents of the
CMOS memory to a memor,ı card. The contents of the
memory can be easily restored with the memory card in
case the memory loses the contents.
Díscard the dead battery, observing appropriate munícipal rules and
regulatíons. When discardíng the battery, ínsulate the termínal wíth a tape
so that no short-circuit would occur.
1136
в-взsз4εNıo2 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
When usíng commercíal
D síze alkalíne dry ce11s
Replacíng the battery 1 Have commercíal D síze alkalíne dry ce11s handy.
2 Turn the CNC on.
3 Remove the 1id from the battery case.
4 Replace the o1d dry ce11s wíth new ones. Mount the dry ce11s in a
correct oríentatíon.
5 Replace the 1id on the battery case.
CAUTION
1n the power off state, the battery should be replaced as in
the case of the lithium battery, which is descried above.
2 dry ce11s
Lid
Connection termínal
on the back
4 mounting holes
Case
1
1137
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B-63534EN/02
A líthíum battery ís used to back up BIOS data in the CNC dísplay unít
wíth PC functíons. Thís battery ís factory set ín the CNC dísplay unít BATTERY 1N THE
wíth PC functíons. Thís battery has sufficient capacity to retaín BIOS
CNC DISPLAY UN1T
data for one year.
W1TH PC FUNCTIONS
When the battery voltage becomes 1ow, the LCD screen blínks. The LCD
3 VDC screen also blínks if a fan alarm ís íssued. If the screen blínks, replace
the battery as soon as possible wíthin one week . FANUC recommends
that the battery Ьe replaced once per year regardless of whether a battery
alarm ís issued.
Replacíng the battery 1 To guard agaínst the possible loss or destructíon of BIOS parameters,
write down the BIOS parameter values.
2 Obtain a new lithíum battery A02B-02ØK102 .
3 After power has been supplíed for at least five seconds, turn off the
power to CNC dísplay unít wíth PC functions. Remove the íntellígent
termínal from the panel so that replacement work can be done from the
rear of the íntellígent termínal.
4 Detach the connector of the líthíum battery, and remove the battery
from the battery holder.
5 Run the cab1e for the new lithium battery as shown ín the Fíg.
6 Attach the connector, and place the battery ín the battery holder.
7 Install CNC dísplay unit wíth PC functions agaín.
8 Turn oп the power, and check that the BIOS parameters are maintaíned
BIOS setup is not activated forcibly .
Between removíng an o1d battery and inserting new battery, no more than
fíve mínutes must be allowed to elapse.
1138
6-63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
Battery holder
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector
BAT1
Fíg. Líthium battery connection for CNC dísplay unít wíth PC functíons
1139
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE 6-63s34Ervıo2
One battery unít can maintaín current posítíon data for síx absolute pulse
coders for a yeaг. BATTERY FOR
When the voltage of the battery becomes 1ow, APC alarms 306 to 30 +
SEPARATE
axís name are dísplayed on the CRT display. When APC alarm 3n7 ís
ABSOLUTE PULSE dísplayed, replace the battery as soon as possíble. In general, the battery
CODERS 6 VDC should be replaced wíthín two or three weeks, however, this depends on
the number of pulse coders used.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, the current posítíons for
the pulse coders can no longer be maíntaíned. Turníng on the power to
the control unít ín thís state causes APC alarm 300 reference posítíon
return request alarm to occur. Return the tool to the reference posítíon
after replacíng the battery.
See Sectíon for detaíls of connectíng the battery to separate absolute
pulse coders. The battery for the buílt ín absolute pulse coder ís ínstalled
in the servo amplífíer. For an explanatíon of the replacement procedure,
refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR a Series Maintenance Manua1.
Replacíng batteríes Obtaín four commercially available alkalíne batteries size D .
1 Turn on the power to the machíne i Series CNC .
2 Loosen the screws on the battery case connected to the ínterface unit
of the detector separately ínstalled, and remove the cover.
3 Replace the dry batteríes in the case.
Note the polarity of the batteries as shown in the figure below orient
two batteríes one way and the other two in the opposíte dírectíon .
4 After ínstallíng the new batteries, replace the cover.
5 Turn off the power to the machíne i Series CNC .
WARNING
1f the batteries are installed incorrectly, an explosion may
occur. Never use batteries other than the specified type
Size D alkaline batteries .
CAUTION
Replace batteries while the power to the i Series CNC is on.
Note that, if batteries are replaced while no power is
supplied to the CNC, the recorded absolute position is 1ost.
І і+o
B-63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
When the battery voltage fa11s, APC alarms 306 to 308 are displayed on
the screen. When APC alarm 307 ís dísplayed, replace the battery as soon BATTERY FOR
as possíble. In general, the battery should be replaced withín one or two
BU1LT-1N ABSOLUTE
weeks of the alarm fírst appearíng. Thís, however, depends on the number
PULSE CODERS of pulse coders beíng used.
DC6V If the battery voltage drops any further, the current posítions for the pulse
coders wí11 be 1ost. Turníng oп the power to the control unit in thís state.
1 APC a1aгm 306 battery zero alarm and APC alarm 300 reference
posítíon return request alarm occur. Return the tool to the reference
posítíon after replacíng the battery.
2 The battery for the built ín absolute pulse coder ís connected wíth the
servo amplífıer.
3 Note that the attachment methods of the battery and orderíng
specífıcatíons of battery are dífferent from SERVO AMPLIFIER ai
seríes SVM to SERVO AMPLIFIER β series.
The battery unít for the absolute pulse coder can Ьe connected usíng
[Connectíon scheme 1] and [Connectíon scheme 2] explained below. Method of Replacíng
Refer to Subsection , Battery ín FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER
Battery for Servo
ai seríes Descríptíons B-63282EN for details.
Amplifíer ui series
[Connectíon scheme 1]
Supplyíng power from
one battery unít to more
than one SVM
Batterycase
A066-6050 K060
SVM SVM Battery
A06B-6050 KOβ1 CXA26 CXA26
cXA2A CXA2A CXA2A
Connector
A066-6110 K211
If a 1ow battery voltage or a battery voltage of 0 V ís índícated by an
APC absolute pulse coder alarm, replace the battery.
If a battery voltage of 0 V ís índicated, you need to make a zero poínt
return..
The absolute pulse coder of the ai seríes servo motor is íncorporated
wíth a backup capacítor as standard. Thís backup capacítor enables an
absolute posítíon detection to be continued for about 10 mínutes.
Therefore, пo zero point return need be performed íf the tíme duńng
which servo amplifïer power is kept off for battery replacement ís
wíthin 10 mínutes.
When the replacíng of the battery takes more than 10 minutes, replace
the battery after see Item [Caution for battery replacement].
1141
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE в-s3534ENıo2
The servíce lífe of the batteńes ís about two years if they are used ín
a síX axís confıguratíon with ai series servo motors and one year if
they are used in a síX axís confıguratíon wíth a seríes servo motors.
FANUC recommends that you replace the batteries peńodically
aecordíng to the battery servíce 1ife.
The battery unít consísts of four R20 alkalíne batteríes. Comnıercíal
batteries can be used ín the battery unít. The optional battery offered
Ьy FANUC ís A06B-6050 K061.
WARNING
1 Do not connect more than one battery to the same BATL
B3 1ine. 1f the output voltage is different between the
batieries, they may be short circuited, resulting in the
batteries becoming very hot.
2 lnstall the battery with correct polarity. 1f the battery is
installed wìth incorrect polarity, it may overheat, blow out, or
catch fire.
[Connection scheme 2]
lncorporatíng each SVM
with batteríes
svM svM
Battery case Battery case
A066Ø14 t600 A066-6114-F600
Battery Battery
A068-6073 K001 A06B-6073-K001
cX5X CX5X
If a 1ow batteıy voltage or a battery voltage of 0 V ís índícated by an APC
absolute pulse coder alarm, replace the battery A06BØ73 K001 .
ff a battery voltage of 0 V is índicated, you need to make a zero poínt
retum.
1142
B-s3534EN/o2 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
The absolute pulse coder of the ai seńes servo motor is incorporated
with a backup capacítor as standard. Thís backup capacítor enables an
absolute posítion detection to be continued for about 10 mínutes.
Therefore, no zero poínt return need be performed íf the time duńng
which servo amplífier power ís kept off for battery replacement is
wíthín 10 mínutes.
On the contrary, the absolute pulse coder of the standard a seńes servo
motor ís not incorporated wíth a backup capacítor. Be careful when
replacing the battery for thís pulse coder. See [Caution for battery
replacement] at the end of thís sectíon for detaíls.
The service lífe of the batteńes ís about two years wíth aá seríes servo
motors and one year wíth a series servo motors.
FANUC recommends that you replace the batteries peńodícally
according to the battery servíce 1ife.
The built ín batteńes are not commercíally avaílable. They must be
purchased from FANUC. So, FANUC recommends that you keep
spares.
WARNING
1 When using the built in batteries A06B-6073 K001 , do
not connect them to the BATL B3 of connector CXA2A.
CXA2B.
The output voltages from different SVM batteries may be
short circuited, resulting in the batteries becoming very hot.
2 Do not connect more than one battery to the same BATL
B3 1ine. 1f the output voltage is different between the
batteries, they may be short circuited, resulting in the
batteries becoming very hot.
3 lnstall the battery with correct polarity. 1f the battery is
installed with incorrect polaríty, it may overheat.. blow out. or
catch fire.
І І-4,
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE в-63534εNıo2
[Installatíon procedure for the battery]
1 Remove the battery cover from the SVM.
2 Install the battery іп the SVM as shown in the figure below.
3 Install the battery cover.
4 Attach the battery connector to CX5X of the sVM.
..
svM
lnsertlna direction
CaЬ1e side
Е ι,::: V
ιoп ec o 61acи: OV
CAUTION
1 When the battery is installed in the SVM from the side from
which the cable is drawn, the cable may be stretched tight.
which can lead to a poor contact condition. Therefore. install
the battery so that the cable is not extended tightly.
2 Be careful when handling the connector. See [Caution
for battery replacement] at the end of this section for details.
[Cautíon for battery The pulse coder for the a series servo motor is not íncorporated wíth a
replacement] backup capacítor as standard. To keep the absolute posítion informatíon
in the absolute pulse coder, you need to keep the control power turned on
during battery replacement. Fo11ow the procedure explained below.
[Replacing procedure for the battery]
1. Make sure that the power to the SVM is oп the 7 segment LED on
the front of the SVM ís on .
2. Make sure that the emergency stop button of the system has been
pressed.
З. Make sure that the motor is not activated.
4. Make sure that the DC línk charge LED of the SVM ís off.
5. Remove the o1d battery, and install a new battery.
6. This completes the replacement. You can turn off the power to the
system.
1144
в-εз5з4εw o2 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
WARNING
1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch bare
metal parts in the panel. 1n particular, be careful not to touch
any hïgh voltage circuits due to the electric shock hazard.
2 Before replacing the battery, check that the DC link charge
confirmation LED on the front of the servo amplifier is off.
Neglecting this check creates an electric shock hazard.
3 lnstall the batteıy with correct polarity. 1f the battery is
installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat, blow out, or
ćatch fire.
4 Avoid a short circuit between the V and OV lines of a
battery or cable. A short circuit may lead to a hot battery, an
explosion, or fire.
[Cautíon for battery 1f aп с сcsѕivc: strain ís applicd to a cıınnectπr wheıı ít is insertecl or
replacement] rcmo\cd , a 1ıπ r cπntact nıav result. When ínscrtin and reiiiovnig the
batiery couііecіл, ι1іeїefυгc, lıε cuieliil iiot tu alılılv an cлce siιe
\ιтспchin Іπіce 10 iı; just Io11ow thc instrιıctionз givcIi iIi thc follu\ving
tablc.
1 Attachiiig conncctors
Check the attachment position.
<1>
P1ug the cable connector while raising it
slightly.
Q>
; 10 degrees or less
Here.. the angle of the cable connector to
the horizontal must be 5 degrees or 1ess. ı
<5> ı
5 degrees or less
1
After passing the lork pin, insert the
<з> connectorstraight.
The attachment of the connector is
<4> completed.
ι LJ
1145
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE в-øз5зaEwıo2
l _ f ctuch inc ibc c<,nцcctıır
Ho1d both the sides of the cabfe insuIator
and the cable.. and pu11 them horizontally.
Pu11 out the cable side while raising it
slightly.
<2>
10 degrees or less
Here, the angle of the cable to the
horìzontal must be 5 degrees or 1ess.
<з>
5 degrees or less
11a6
6-63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
The battery ís connected in eíther of 2 ways as follows.
Method of Replacíng Method 1: Use the battery case A06B-6050 K060 .
Battery for Servo Use the battery: A06BØ50 K061 or D síze alkaline battery.
Amplífíer > seríes Method 2: Attach the líthium battery to the SVM.
Use the battery: A06B-6093 K001.
Method ltem Ordering specification
Method 1 Battery 4 píeces of D-size alkaline A06B-6050-K061
battery
Method 2 Battery Líthium battery A06B-6093-K001
Replacement of batteńes іп the battery case. Method 1
Replace four D síze alkaline batteries іп the battery case installed in
the machíne.
[Attachment procedure]
1 Turn the servo unit machíne on.
2 P1ace the machíne in the emergency stop state.
3 Confírm that the servo motors are not actíve.
4 Have four D síze alkaline batteries on hand.
5 Loosen the screws on the battery case. Remove the cover.
6 Replace the alkalíne batteńes іп the case. Pay careful attention
to the polańty of the alkalíne batteríes.
7 Attach the cover.
Attach the lithium battery to the amplífıer. Method 2
Attach the lithium A06B-6093 K001 battery to the amplíГіer.
[Attachment procedure]
1 Turn the servo unit machíne on.
2 P1ace the machine in the emergency stop state.
3 Confırm that the servo motors are not active.
4 In case of SVU-12 or SVU-20, remove the battery cover under
the servo unit grasping its left and right sídes. In case of
SVU-40 or SVU-80, remove the cover attached on ríght síde
of the servo unít graspíng its upper and lower sídes.
1147
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE 6-63534EN/02
5 Remove the battery from the servo unít.
6 Replace the battery and connect the battery cable with the
connector CX5X or CX5Y of the servo unít.
7 Mount the battery cover.
Battery cover Batte η
.... 111 0 i
l ы...øл
oiпι oп b
, Ø
m D 1i D
мı1 o uurv
Ін
Pass the battery caЬ1e to this s1ít. 4 11I л
SVU-40, SVU-80
CAUTIONS
The connector of the battery can be connected with either
of CX5X and CX5Y.
І 1 -t -
в-635з4εNıo2 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
Used batteríes 01d batteńes should be disposed as INDUSTRIAL WASTES
accordíng to the regulations of the country or autonomy where your
machine has been ínstalled.
1149
APPENDIX
6-63534EN/02 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE L1ST
ATAPE CODE L1ST
1S0 code E1A code Meaning
Without With
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CUSTOM CUSTOM
MAC
1153

B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE L1ST
NOTE
1 The symbols used in the remark coiumn have the following meaníngs.
Space : The character wi11 be registered ín memory and has a specífic meaning.
1t it is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm occurs.
x : The character wi11 not be registered in memory and wí11 be ignored.
Δ : The character wi11 be regístered in memory, but wí11 be ignored duríng program
executíon.
: The character wí11 be registered in memory. 1f ít is used ín a statement other than
a comment, an alarm occurs.
: 1f it is used in a statement other than a comment, the character wí11 not be
regístered ín memory. 1f it ís used in a comment, it wí11 be registered in memory.
2 Codes not ín thís table are ignored if their paríty is correct.
3 Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH aiarm. But they are ignored without generatíng the
TH alarm when they are in the comment sectíon.
4 A character with a11 eight holes punched ís ígnored and does not generate TH alarm ín E1A code.
- 1155 -
B. L1ST OF FUNCTIONS AND
TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
BL1ST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT
Some functions cannot be added as optíons depending on the model.
In the tables below, 1P _:presents a combínatíon of arbitrary axis
addresses usíng X,Y,Z,A,B and C such as X_Y_Z_A_ .
x= 1 st basic axís X usually
y= 2nd basíc axis Y usually
z= 3rd basíc axis Z usually
Least ínput increment mm mm
Least command increment mm mm
Max. programmable dímension mm mm
Max. rapid traverse Note 240000 mm/mín 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range Note 1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
1 ncremental feed , , , , , ,
1 mm/step mm/step
Too1 compensatíon 0 to mm 0 to mm
Dwe11 time 0 to sec 0 to sec
1n case of ínch input, lncrement system
feed screw ís míllímeter
Іs-в ıs-c
Least input increment inch inch
Least command increment mm mm
Max. programmable dimensìon ínch ìnch
Max. rapid traverse Note 240000 mm/mіп 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range Note to 9600 to 4000
inch/mín inch/min
lncremental feed , , , , ,
inch/step , inch/step
Too1 compensatíon 0 to ínch 0 to inch
Dwe11 time 0 to sec 0 to sec
1163
C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX -63534EN/02
1n case of ínch input, lncrement system
feed screw ís ínch
Іs-в ıs-c
Least input increment ínch inch
Least command íncrement inch ínch
Max. programmable dimensíon ínch ínch
Max. rapid traverse Note 9600 ínch/min 4000 inch/min
Feedrate range Note to 9600 to 4000
inch/mín inch/min
lncremental feed , , , , ,
inch/step , inch/step
Too1 compensation 0 to ínch 0 to inch
Dwe11 tíme 0 to sec 0 to sec
1n case of miliimeter increment system
input, feed screw ís inch
ıs-в ıs-c
Least ínput íncrement mm mm
Least command increment ínch inch
Max. programmable dimension mm mm
Max. rapid traverse Note 9600 ínch/min 4000 inch/min
Feedrate range Note 1 to 240000 mm/mín 1 to 100000 mm/min
1 ncremental feed , , , 1 , , ,
mm/step mm/step
Too1 compensation 0 to mm 0 to mm
Dwe11 tíme 0 to sec 0 to sec
11Ø
B s3s34ENі02 APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
Rotation axis
lncrement system
1s B 1S c
Least input increment deg deg
Least command increment deg deg
Max. programmable dimension deg dey
Max. rapid traverse Note 240000 deg min 1 00000 degımin
Feedrate range Note 1 to 240000 degimin 1 to 100000 deg min
lncremental feed 0001. , . , ,
1 degıstep deg step
NOTE
The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity. As a whole system,
limitations depending on servo system must also be
considered.
1165
D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
NOMOGRAPHS
- 1166 -
B-63534ENί02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS
The leads of a thread are generally íncorrect in 1 and 2. as shown in Fig.
1NCORRECT a , due to automatíc acceleratíon and deceleratíon.
Thus dístance allowances must be made to the extent of δ1 and 62 in the
THREADED LENGTH program.
Fíg. a lncorrect thread posítíon
Explanations
How to determíne cî2
á, = T,V mm ....... 1
V = б0 RL
Ti : Time constant of senıo system sec
V : Cuttíng speed mm/sec Time constant T1 sec of
R : Spíndle speed rpm the senıo system: Usually
L : Thread feed mm s.
How to determíne δ1
δ, = t T, + T,exp fV 2
a = exp Ť 3
Time constant T sec of
T1 : Time constant of senıo system
V : Cutting speed mm/sec the senıo system: Usually
s.
The lead at the begínning of thread cuttíng is shorter than the specífıed
lead L, and the allowable lead error ís ΔL. Then as follows.
a = 4L
When the value of HaI ís determíned, the tíme lapse until the thread
accuracy ís attained. The time HtI ís substítuted in 2 to determine δ1:
Constants V and T1 are determíned іп the same way as for 62. Sínce the
calculatíon of δ1 ís rather complex, a nomography ís províded on the
followíng pages.
1167
D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
How to use nomograph Fírst specify the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy, x,
wí11 be obtained at 1 , and dependíng on the time constant of cutting feed
acceleration/ deceleratíon, the δі va1ue when V= 10mm / s wí11 be
obtaíned at 2 . Then, depending on the speed of thread cuttíng, δ1 for
speed other than 10mm/ s can be obtained a[ 3 .
see the graph in reference later in
the manual for an actual example. L
Fíg. b Nomograph
NOTE
The equatíons for , and δ2 aгe for when the acceleration/
deceleration time constant for cuttíng feed is O.
1168
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS
Fíg. a Slíght deviatíon between the tool path and
the programmed path
Thís tool path ís determined by the following parameters:
Feedrate Vi, V2
Corner angle Θ
Exponentíal acceleration / deceleratíon tíme constant T1 at
cutting T1 = 0
Presence or absence of buffer register.
The above parameters are used to theoretícally analyze the tool path and
above tool path is drawn wíth the parameter whích ís set as an example.
When actually programmíng, the above ítems must be consídered and
programming must be performed carefully so that the shape of the
workpíece ís wíthín the desíred precisíon.
In other words, when the shape of the workpíece is not within the
theoretícal precísíon, the commands of the next block must not be read
untíl the specífıed feedrate becomes zero. The dwe11 functíon is then used
to stop the machíne for the appropńate peńod.
11
D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
Analysis The tool path shown in Fíg. Ь ís analyzed based on the following
condítíons:
Feedrate ís constant at both blocks before and after cornering.
The controller has a buffer register. The error díffers wíth the reading
speed of the tape reader, number of characters of the next block, etc.
Fíg. b Example of tool path
Descríptíon of condítíons
and symbols
Vs, = Vcosф,
vYI = VsínØ,
, = V cos Ø,
Vr = V sín ф,
V : Feedrate at both blocks before and after corneríng
Vxі : X-axís component of feedrate of precedíng block
VYi : Y-axis component of feedrate of precedíng block
VX2 : X-axis component of feedrate of followíng block
VY2 : Y-axis comØnent of feedrate of followíng block
Θ : Corner angle
φ1 : Ang1e formed by specífied path direction of precedíng block
and X-axis
02 : Ang1e formed by specified path direction of followíng block
and X-axis
1172
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS
lnitíal value calculatíon
Fíg. c lnítíal va1ue
The ínitial va1ue when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordínates
at the end of command dístributíon by the controller, ís determíned Ьy the
feedrate and the positíoníng system time constant of the servo motor.
Xo = Vx1 T1 + T,
Yo = Vri T, + T,
T1:Exponential acceleration / deceleratíon tíme constant. T=0
T2:Time constant of posítíoníng system lnverse of positíon loop gaín
Analysís of corner tool The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner sectíon in
path X-axis directíon and Y-axís dírectíon.
V t = Vx,-Vxı ί1-T T, T,exp -Ť -T,exp -Ť + Vxı]
= Vx,[1-TVxT, T,exp -T -T,exp -Ť, 1]
V, г = T:-Ťr T, exp - f -T, exp - Ť J + Vr
Therefore, the coordínates of the tool path at tíme t are calculated from the
following equations:
X t = 1 Vλ t dt Xo
0
V λі 2 ехр _ _Т22 ехр _f -Vх2 Ті + T,-t
Y t =1 V, t dt-Yo
0
__ V r_-V n t - t T, exp - Ť T, exp -Ť -V,, T, + T,-t
1173
D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
When a servo motor is used, the posítíoníng system causes an error
RADIUS DIRECTION between input commands and output results. Sínce the tool advances
along the specifıed segment, an error ís no[ produced in línear
ERROR AT CIRCLE
ínterpolatíon. In círcular ínterpolation, however, radial errors may be
CUTTlNG produced, sepecially for círcular cutting ac híσh speeds.
Thís error can Ьe obtaíned as follows:
x
_ V,
dг = T, + T,2 1 - 1

dг : Maximum radíus error mm
v Feedrate mm/s
. Cігc1e radius mm
T1 Exponential acceleration/deceleratíon tíme constant sec
at cutting T=0
T2 : Time constant of positoning system sec .
lnverse of positon loop gain
a Feed forward coefficient
1n the case of be11-shaped acceleratíon/deceleratíon and linear acceleration/
deceleratíon after cutting feed ínterpolation, an approxímation of this radius
error can be obtained with the following expressíon:
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolatíon
V
2T2 1 - a=
Be11-shaped acceleratíon/deceleratíon after cuttíng feed ínterpolation
dг = 48T 2 + .T, 1 -
Thus, the radius error in the case of be11-shaped acceleration/deceleration
and linear acceleration/deceleratíon after ínterpolation ís smaller than in
case of exponentíal acceleration/deceleratíon by a factor of 12, excludíng
any error caused by a senıo loop tíme constant.
Sínce the machining radíus r mm and allowable error Δr mm of the
workpíece ís given in accual machiníná, the allowable 1imic feedrate v
mm /sec ís determined Ьy equation 1 .
Since the acceleration/deceleration tíme constant at cutting whích ís set
by this equípment varies wíth the machine too1, refer to the manual íssued
Ьy the machine too1 buílder.
1174
E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON,
в-sзsздEN o2 APPENDIX WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET
AND WHEN RESET
ESTATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
Parameter CLR No. 3402 6 ís used to select whether resetting the CNC
places ic in the cleared state or in the reset state 0: reset state/1: cleared
state .
The symbols in the tables below mean the followíng :
O:The status ís not changed or the movement ís continued.
x:The status ís cancelled or the movement is ínterrupted.
ltem When turníng power on C1eared Reset
setting Offset value O
data -- -- -
Data set by the MD1
settíng operation
Parameter
Various Programs in memory
data
Contents ín the buffer : MD1 mode
storage : Other mode
Display of sequence Note 1 _, Note 1
number
One shot G code x
Moda1 G code lnitial G codes. lnítíal G codes.
The G20 and G21 codes return to G20/G21 aгe not
the same state they were ín when changed.
the power was last turned off.
F Zero Zero
S,T,M x O
K Number of repeats x x x
Work coordinate value Zero C O
1175
E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON,
WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
ltem When turníng power on C1eared Reset
Action ín Movement x x x
opera- Dwe11 x x x
tíon
lssuance of M, S and x x x
T codes
Too1 length compensa- x Depending on O: MD1 mode
tíon parameter Other modes depend
LVK oп parameter
LVK
Cutter compensation x x O: MD1 mode
x : Other modes
Storing called subpro- x x Note 2 O: MD1 mode
gram number x: Other modes
Note 2
Output CNC a1arm signal Extinguísh if there is no cause for Extinguísh íf there is Extínguísh íf there ís
signals AL the a1arm no cause for the no cause for the alarm
a1aгm
Reference position x O O
return completion LED x : Emergency x : Emergency stop
stop
S, T and B codes x O O
M code x x x
M, S and T strobe síg- x x x
nals
Spíndle revolution sig- x O O
пa1 S analog sígnal
CNC ready signal ON C O
MA
Servo ready sígnal ON When other than servo ON When other ON When other than
SA a1arm than servo alarm servo a1arm
Cyc1e start LED STL x x x
Feed hold LED SPL x x x
NOTE
1 When headíng ís performed, the main program number is displayed.
2 When a reset is performed during executíon of a subprogram, control returns the head of maín
program.
Execution cannot be started from the middle of the subprogram.
1176
F. CHARACTER-TO-CODES
в-6з5здεN 02 APPENDIX CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
FCHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
acter Char- Code Comment acter Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 034 Quotation mark
H 072 035 Hash sign
1 073 036 Dolfar sign
J 074 037 Percent
K 075 038 Ampersand
L 076 039 Apostrophe
M 077 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 P1us sign
Q 081 044 Comma
R 082 - 045 Minus sign
S 083 046 Period
T 084 / 047 S1ash
U 085 : 058 Co1on
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
X 088 = 061 Equa1 sign
Y 089 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
0 048 064 HAt1 mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 ^ 092
3 051 ] 094 Rıgnt square bracket
4 052 095 Underscore
5 053
1177
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534ENi02 GALARM LІЅТ
1 Program errors P/S alarm
Number Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter whích requires the power off was ínput, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH aiarm A character with incorrect parity was input . Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm The number of characters ín a block ís odd . Thís alarm wi11
be generated only when the TV check ís effective.
003 TOO MANY D1G1TS Data exceedíng the maximum allowable number of digits was input.
Referto the item of max. programmable dímensions.
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral orthe sign was input without an address atthe beginning
of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed
Ьy another address or EOB code. Modífy the program.
006 1LLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE S1GN Sign . ínput error Sign was input after an address with which it
cannot be used. Or two or more signs were input.
Modify the program.
007 1LLEGALUSEOFDECIMALPOINT Decímalpoint inputerror Adecimalpoíntwasinputafteranaddress
with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.
Modify the program.
009 1LLEGAL ADDRESS 1NPUT Unusable character was input in significant area.
Modify the program.
010 1MPROPER G CODE Aп unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not pro-
vided is specìfied. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was in-
adequate. Modify the program.
014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specifíed wíthout the option for threading / syn-
chronous feed.
015 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED The number of the commanded axes exceeded that of simuitaneously
controlled axes.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS lncircularinterpolatíon G02orG03 ,dífferenceofthedístancebetween
the start poínt and the center of an arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 1LLEGAL PLANE AX1S COMMAN- An axis not included in the selected p1ane by using G17, G 18, G 19 was
DED commanded in circular interpolatíon. Modífy the program.
022 NO CIRCULAR RADIUS When circular interpolation is specifíed, neither R specifying an arc ra-
díus , nor 1, J, and K specìfyíng the distance from a start point to the cen-
ter ís specífíed.
025 CANNOT COMMAND FO iN FO fast feed was instructed by F1 digít column feed in circular inter-
G02/G03 polatíon. Modífy the program.
027 NO AXES COMMANDED 1N No axis is specifíed in G43 and G44 blocks forthe toollength offset type
G43/G44 C.
Offset ís not canceled but another axis is offset for the toollength offset
type C. Modify the program.
028 1LLEGAL PLANE SELECT 1n the p1ane selection command, two or more axes in the same directíon
aгe commanded.
Modífy the program.
1178
6-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
029 1LLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified Ьy H code is too large.
Modify the program.
030 1LLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offsetvalues specífíed by D/H code fortoollength offset, cuttercom-
pensatíon or 3 dímensíonal cutter compensatíon is too large. Other-
wise, the number specified by P code for the addítíonal workpiece coor-
dinate system is too large.
Modify the program.
031 1LLEGAL P COMMAND 1N G10 1n setting an offset amount by G10, the offset numberfollowing address
P was excessive or ít was not specífíed.
Modify the program.
032 1LLEGAL OFFSET VALUE 1N G10 1n settíng an offset amount by G10 or ín writing an offset amount by sys-
tem varíables, the offset amount was excessive.
033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of íntersection cannot be determined for cutter compensatíon C.
Modify the program.
034 NO C1RC ALLOWED 1N ST UP / The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
EXT BLK mode in cutter compensation C. Modífy the program.
035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 G39 ís commanded in cutter compensatíon B caпcel mode or on the
plane other than offset p1aпe. Modífy the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting G31 was specífíed in cutter compensation mode.
Modífy the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE 1N CRC G40 is commanded on the plane other than offset p1ane in cutter com-
pensatíon B. The p1ane selected by using G17, G18 0Г G19 is changed
in cutter compensation C mode. Modify the program.
038 1NTERFERENCE 1N CIRCULAR Overcutting wí11 occur ín cutter compensatíon C because the arc start
BLOCK poínt or end poínt coincídes with the arc center.
Modífy the program.
041 1NTERFERENCE 1N CRC Overcutting wi11 occur in cutter compensatíon C. Two or more blocks
aгe consecutively specifíed in whích functions such as the auxiliary
functíon and dwe11 functions are performed wíthout movement in the cut-
ter compensation mode. Modify the program.
042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED 1N CRC Too1 offset G45 to G48 is commanded in cutter compensatíon. Modífy
the program.
044 G27 G30 NOT ALLOWED 1N F1XEDOne of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode.
CYC Modífy the program.
045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND 1n canned cycle G73/G83, the depth of each cut Q ís not specífied. A1-
G73/G83 ternatively, QO is specífíed. Correct the program.
046 1LLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3гd and 4th refer-
COMMAND ence posítíon return command.
047 1LLEGAL ÃX1S SELECT For startup of three dimensíonal tool compensatíon or three dímen-
sional coordinate conversion, two or more axes were specified in the
same dírection basíc and para11e1 axes.
048 BAS1C 3 AX1S NOT FOUND For startup of three dimensional tool compensatíon or three dimen-
sional coordínate conversíon, the three basic axes used when Xp YP
and ZP are omítted were not specífied in parameter No. 1022.
049 1LLEGAL OPERATION G68/G69 The commands for three iimensional coordínate conversion G68,
G69 and tool length compensatíon G43, G44, G45 aгe not nested.
Modífy the program.
050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED 1N THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded ín the thread cutting block.
BLK Modify the program.
051 M1SSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR lmproper movement or the move dístance was specífied in the block
next to the chamfering or corner R block.
Modífy the program.
052 CODE 15 NOT G01 AFTER CHF/ The block next to the chamferíng or corner R block ís not G01,G02,or
CNR G03. Modífy the program.
1179
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
Number Message Contents
053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COM- For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting,
MANDS a comma was specified. Forsystems wíth this feature, a comma was fo1-
lowed by something other than R or C Correct the program.
055 M1SSING MOVE VALUE 1N CHF/ 1n the arbítrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance
CNR ís less than chamfer or corner R amount.
058 END PO1NT NOT FOUND 1n a arbìtrary angle chamfering orcorner R cutting block, a specifíed axis
is not ín the selected plane. Correct the program.
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND 1n an external program number search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program specífíed for searchíng is being
edíted in background processíng. Alternatívely, the program with the
program number specified in a one-touch macro ca11 ís not found in
memorу. Check the program number and external sígnal. Or díscontin-
ue the background eiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence numberwas notfound ín the sequence number
search. Check the sequence number.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE 1N The memorу area is insufficient.
MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Orthe program with specí-
fied program number was not found in program number search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROG RAMS The numberof programs to be stored exceeded 63 basic ,125 optíon ,
200 option , or 400 optíon . Delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration agaín.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY 1N The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
074 1LLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modífy the program number.
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P program number was not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modífy the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was specífied by ad-
dress P in the block which íncludes an M98, M99, M65 0г G66 was not
found. The sequence number specífied by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program ís being edíted ín background pro-
cessing. Correct the program, or discontínue the background edíting.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR 1n memorу oг program collation,a program in memoгу does not agree
wíth that read from an external 1/O device. Check both the programs ín
memoгу and those from the external device.
080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT AS- 1n the automatíc toollength measurement functíon G37 , the measure-
SERTED ment positíon reach signal XAE, YAE, or ZAE is not turned on within
an area specified in parameter 6254 value .
This is due to a setting or operator error.
081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND 1N Too1 length automatic measurement G37 was specífied without a H
G37 code. Automatic tool length measurement function Modífy the pro-
gram.
082 H-CODE NOT ALLOWED 1N G37 H code and automatic tool compensatíon G37 were specifíed in the
same block. Automatic tool length measurement functíon Modify the
program.
083 1LLEGAL AX1S COMMAND 1N G37 1n automatíc toollength measurement, an invalíd axis was specífíed or
the command is incremental. Modify the program.
1180
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
085 COMMUNICATION ER ROR Whenenteríngdatainthememory byusingReader/Puncherínterface,
aп overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bìts
of input data or setting of baud rate or specíficatíon No. of 1/O unit is in-
co rrect.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When enteríng data in the memory Ьy using Reader/ Puncher interface,
the ready sígnal DR of reader / puncher was off.
Power supply of 1/0 unit is off oг caЬ1e is not connected or a is de-
fective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memorу Ьy using Reader/ Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is specified, ínput is not ínterrupted
after 10 characters read. 1/O unit or ís defective.
088 LAN F1LE TRANS ERROR Fí1e data transfer over the OS1 Ethernet was termínated as a result of
CHANNEL-1 a transfer error.
089 LAN F1LE TRANS ERROR Fi1e data transfer over the OS1 Ethernet was terminated as a result of
CHANNEL-2 a transfer error.
090 REFERENCE RETURN 1NCOM- 1. The reference position return cannot be performed normally be-
PLETE cause the reference posìtíon return start point ís too close to the ref-
erence position or the speed ís too s1ow. Separate the start point far
enough from the reference position, or specífy a sufficiently fast
speed for reference posítion return.
2. Duríng reference posítíon return wíth the absolute posítíon detector,
if thís alarm occurs even though condition 1 ís satísfied, do the fo1-
lowing:
After turning the servo motor for the axís at least one turn, turn the
power off and then on agaín. Then perform reference posítion re-
turn.
091 REFERENCE RETURN 1NCOM- 1n the automatic operation halt state, manual reference posítion return
PLETE cannot be performed.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 Reference position return check did not
PO1NT return to the reference positíon.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED COORD P type cannot be specified when the program ís restarted. Afterthe au-
CHG tomatic operation was interrupted, the coordínate system settíng opera-
tion was pertormed. Perform the correct operatíon accordíng to th oper-
ator s manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED EXT OFS P type cannot be specífied when the program is restarted. After the
CHG automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED WRK OFS P type cannot be specified when the program ís restarted. Afterthe au-
CHG tomatic operation was interrupted, the workpíece offset amount
changed.
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED AUTO P type cannot be directed when the program ís restarted. After power
EXEC ON, after emergency stop or P/S alarm 94 to 97 were reset, no
automatíc operation is performed. Perform automatic operation.
098 G28 FOUND 1N SEQUENCE RE- A command of the program restart was specífíed without the reference
TURN positíon return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28
was found during search. Perform the reference posítíon return.
099 MD1 EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. Aftercompletion of search in program restart, a move command is gíven
SEARCH with MD1.
100 PARAMETER WR1TE ENABLE On the PARAMETER SETTING screen, PWE parameter writing en-
ab1ed ís set to 1. Set ít to 0, then reset the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewríting the memory by program edit opera-
tion. 1f this a1arm has occurred, press whíle pressing
, and only the program beíng edíted wí11 be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
1181
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX Б-3534EN 02
Number Message Contents
109 FORMAT ERROR 1N G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P ín the G08 code, or no
value was specífied.
1 ı 0 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute va1ue of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the a1-
lowable range. Modífy the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculation ís out of the allowable range -1047 to -10-29
0, and 10-29 to 1047 .
112 D1VIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specífied. including tan 90
113 1MPROPER COMMAND A function whích cannot be used ín custom macro is commanded.
Modífy the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR 1N MACRO There ís an error in other formats than .
Modify the program.
115 1LLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a varíable number is desígnated in the custom
macгo or in high-speed cycle cutting.
The header contents are ímproper in a hígh-speed cycle cutting. This
a1aгm is gíven in the followíng cases:
1. The header correspondíng to the specified machining cycle number
called ís not found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable range
0 - 999 .
3. The number of data in the header is out of the allowable range
0 - 32767 .
4. The start data variable number of executable format data is out of
the allowable range 20000 - 85535 .
5. The storíng data variable number of executable format data is out of
the allowable range 85535 .
6. The storing start data varíable number of executable format datais
overlapped wíth the variable number used ín the header.
Modífy the program.
116 WR1TE PROTECTED VARIABLE The 1eft side of substítutíon statement ís a varíable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limít quíntuple .
Modify the program.
119 1LLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative, BCD argument ís negative, or other
values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of B1N argument.
Modífy the program.
122 QUADRUPLICATE MACRO A total of four macro ca11s and macro modal ca11s are nested. Correct
MODAL-CALL the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
1N DNC Modify the program.
124 M1SSING END STATEMENT DO - END does not correspond to 1: 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR 1N MACRO format ís erroneous. Modify the program.
126 1LLEGAL LOOP NUMBER 1n DOn, 1 n 3 ís not established. Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT 1N SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist.
BLOCK Modífy the program.
128 1LLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to
NUMBER 9999. Or, ít cannot be searched. Modífy the program.
129 1LLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS Aп address whích is not allowed in is used.
Modify the program.
130 1LLEGAL AX1S OPERATION An axís control command was gíven by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command was gíven by CNC to an axis con-
trolled by PMC. Modify the program.
1182
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Fíve or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No a1arm No. concerned exists ín external a1arm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 1LLEGAL DATA 1N EXT. ALARM Sma11 section data ís erroneous ín external a1arm message or ex r-
MSG na1 operator message. Check the PMC ladder díagram.
135 1LLEGAL ANGLE COMMAND The index table índexíng posítioning angle was ínstructed in othε
than an integral multiple of the value of the mínimum angle.
Modífy the program.
136 1LLEGAL AX1S COMMAND 1n index table indexing, another control axis was instructed together
wíth the B axís.
Modífy the program.
138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA 1n PMC based axis control, the increment for pulse dístribution on
OVERFLOW the CNC and PMC side are too large when the superimposed control
extended function is used.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CON- An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
TROL AX1S Modify the program.
141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 1N CRC G51 Scaiíng ON is commanded ín the tool offset mode.
Modify the program.
142 1LLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnífication is commanded ín other than 1 999999.
Correct the scaling magnifícation setting G51 Pp .. or parameter
5411 0г 5421 .
143 SCALED MOT10N DATA OVER- The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular
FLOW radius exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or
scaling mangificatíon.
144 1LLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordínate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C
plane must be the same. Modify the program.
145 1LLEGAL COND1T10NS 1N POLAR The condítíons are incorrect when the polar coordínate ínterpolation
COORDINATE 1NTERPOLATION starts oг it is canceled.
1 1n modes other than G40, was specífíed.
2 Aп eггoг is found in the plane selectíon. Parameters No. 5460 and
No. 5461 are íncorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
146 1MPROPER G CODE G codes whích cannot be specifíed in the polar coordinate interpola-
tíon mode was specifíed. See sectíon polar coordinate ínterpolation
and modífy the program.
148 1LLEGAL SETTING DATA Automatic corner override deceleration rate ís out of the settable
range of judgement angle. Modífy the parameters to

149 FORMAT ERROR 1N G10L3 A code other than 01,02,P1 0г P2 was specífied as the life count
type ín the extended tool iífe management.
150 1LLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Too1 Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.
Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT The tool group commanded in the machining program is not set.
FOUND Modífy the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY The number of tools withín one group exceeds the maximum value
registerable. Modify the number of tools.
153 T CODE NOT FOUND 1n the regístration of tool life data, a T code was not specified in a
block where it is required. Alternativeiy, oniy M06 was specified in a
block for tool change type D. Correct the program.
154 NOT US1NG TOOL 1N LIFE GROUP When the group is not commanded, H99 0г D99 was commanded.
Correct the program.
155 1LLEGAL T CODE 1N M06 1n the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not
correspond to the group ín use. Correct the program.
1183
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
Number Message Contents
156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the
tool group is set. Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable
value. See parameter GS1, GS2 No. 6800 bít 0 and 1 . Modify the
program.
158 1LLEGAL TOOL L1FE DATA The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING 1NCOM- During executing a lífe data setting program, power was turned off.
PLETE set again.
160 NESTING ERROR Code was specified in a sub-program after the same code
had already been specifíed for copying with rotation.
161 1LLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE Code was specified in a sub-program after the same code
T series three-path control had already been specified for para11e1 copying.
169 1LLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA lncorrect tool figure data in interference check.
At two-path Set correct data, or select correct tool figure data.
175 1LLEGAL G107 COMMAND Condítíons when performing cylindrical interpolation start or cancel
not correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation
mode, specify the command in a format of rotation-axis name
radíus of cylinder.
176 1MPROPER G-CODE 1N G107 Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified ín the cylín-
drical interpolatíon mode was specified.
1 G codes for positioníng, such as G28 G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89,
includíng the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2 G codes for setting a coordínate system: G52,G92,
3 G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54-G59
Modífy the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error
G05 MODE Modify the program.
178 G05 COMMANDED 1N G41/G42 G05 was commanded ín the G41/G42 mode.
MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. PRM NO. 7510 SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds
ERROR the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number
REMOTE BUF of cables, parameters and 1/O device.
181 FORMAT ERROR 1N G81 BLOCK G81 block format error hobbing machine
1 T number of teeth has not been ínstructed.
2 Data outside the command range was instructed by either T, L, Q or
P.
3 Calculation of the synchronization coefficient has overflowed.
gear hobbing machine, EGB Modífy the program.
182 G81 NOT COMMANDED G83 C axis senıo 1ag quantíty offset was instructed though synchro-
nization by G81 has not been ínstructed. Correct the program. hob-
gear hobbing machine bing machine
183 DUPLICATE G83 COMMANDS G83 was ínstructed before canceled by G82 after compensating for
gear hobbing machine the C axis senıo 1ag quantity by G83. hobbing machine
184 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N G81 A command not to be instructed during synchronízation by G81 was
instructed. hobbing machine
1 A C axis command by G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, etc. was
instructed.
gear hobbing machine, EGB 2 lnch/Metric switching by G20, G21 was instructed.
1184
B-63534EN 02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
185 RETURN TO REFERENCE PO1NT G81 was instructed without performing reference position return after
power ori or emergency stop. hobbing machine Perform reference
gear hobbing machine posítion return.
186 PARAMETE R SETTING ERROR Parameter error regardíng G81 hobbing machine
1 The C axis has not been set to be a rotary axis.
gear hobbing machine, EGB 2 A hob axís and posítíon coder gear ratío settíng error
190 1LLEGAL A C1S SELECT 1п the constant surface speed control, the axis specifícation is wrong.
See parameter No. 3770. The specífíed axís command P contaíns
aп illegal va1ue.
Correct the program.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND 1N SYN- A contour control mode, spindie positíoníng Cs axís control mode,
CHRO MODE oг rigid tapping mode was specífied duríng the serial spíndle
synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the seríal
spindle synchronous control mode is released ín advance.
197 C AX1S COMMANDED 1N SPINDLE The program specífied a movement along the Cs axis when the sig-
MODE na1 CON DGN=G027 7 was off. Correct the program, or consult the
PMC ladder díagram to fínd the reason the signal is not turned on.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
200 1LLEGAL S CODE COMMAND 1n the rigid tap, an S value ís out of the range or is not specifíed.
The maximum value for S which can be specífíed ín rígíd tappíng ís
set in parameter to 5243 . Change the setting ín the
parameter or modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND 1N R1G1D 1n the rigid tapping, no F value is specífíed.
TAP Correct the program.
202 POS1T10N LS1 OVERFLOW 1n the rigid tapping, spindle distribution va1ue is too large.
203 PROGRAM M1SS AT R1G1D 1n the rigid tapping, positíon for a rígid M code M29 or an S
TAPPING command ís íncorrect. Modífy the program.
204 1LLEGAL AX1S OPERATION 1n the rigíd tapping, an axis movement is specifíed between the rigid
M code M29 block and G84 G74 block. Modífy the program.
205 R1G1D MODE D1 SIGNAL OFF Rigid tapping sígnal DGNG 061 1 ís not 1 when G84 G74 is
executed though the rigid M code M29 is specified.Consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the D1 signal is not turned on.
Modífy the program.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE R1G1D P1ane changeover was instructed in the rígíd mode.
TAP Correct the program.
207 R1G1D DATA MISMATCH The specífied dístance was too short oг too long ín rígid tapping.
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M99 1 M198 and M99 aгe executed ín the schedule operation. Or M198
is executed in the DNC operation.
2 1п a multiple repetítíve pocketíng canned cycte, an ínterrupt macro
was specífíed, and M99 was executed.
212 1LLEGAL PLANE SELECT The arbitrary angle chamferíng or a corner R is commanded or the
plane íncluding an additional axis. Correct the program.
213 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N SYN- Any of the following alarms occurred in the operatíon with the simple
CHRO MODE synchronization control.
1 The program issued the move command to the slave axís.
2 The program issued the manual contínuous feed/manual handle
feed/íncremental feed command to the slave axís.
3 The program issued the automatic reference positíon return com-
mand wíthout executing the manual reference positíon return after
the power was turned on.
4 The dífference between the posítion error amount of the master and
slave axes exceeded the va1ue specífied in parameter No. 8313.
1185
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-6353дEN 02
Number Message Contents
214 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N SYN- Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shíft type ís
CHRO MODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED 1N BG. lnput and output are executed at a time in the background edition.
ED1T Execute a correct operation.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE PO1NT Reference posítion return has not been performed before the auto-
matíc operatíon starts. Perfomı refε nce posítíon return on1y when
parameterZRNx is О.
230 R CODE NOT FOUND The ínfeed quantity R has not been instructed for the G161 block. Or
for grínding machine the R command value is negatíve. Correct the program.
231 1LLEGAL FORMAT 1N G10 OR L50 Aпy of the followíng errors occurred in the specífied format at the
programmable parameter ínput.
1 Address N or R was not entered.
2 A number not specífied for a parameter was entered.
3 The axís number was too large.
4 An axis number was not specífíed in the axís type parameter.
5 Aп axís number was specífíed in the parameter whích ís not an axis
type.
6 An attempt was made to reset bít 4 of parameter 3202 NE9 oг
change parameter 3210 PSSWD when they are protected by a
password. Correct the program.
232 TOO MANY HELICAL AX1S COM- Three or more axes in the norma1 direction control mode two or more
MANDS axes were specified as helical axes in the helícal interpolation mode.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via
the RS-232 C ínterface, other users were usíng ít.
239 BP/S ALARM Whi1e punchíng was beíng performed with the function for controllíng
external 1/O units ,background edíting was performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MD1 operation.
241 1LLEGAL FORMAT 1N The end point, 1, J, K, or R was not specífíed for involute
interpolatíon.
242 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N An erroneous value was specified for ínvolute interpolatíon.
The start or end point was specifíed wíthín the base circle.
The value 0 was specified for 1, J, K, oг R,.
The start or end point exceeds 100 revolutions from the involute
curve start point.
243 OVER TOLERNCE OF END PO1NT The end poínt was not positíoned on the ínvolute curve which started
at the start point, and the end poínt was out of the range specífied by
parameter
246 During read of an encrypted program, an attempt was made to store the
program wíth a number exceedíng the protection range.
See parameter Nos. 3222 and 223.
247 When an encrypted program is output, E1A ís set for the punch code.
Specífy 1S0.
250 Z AX1S WRONG COMMAND ATC Movement alogn the Z axis was specified in a block ín which a com-
mand for changíng tools M06 T_ was specífíed. On1y for the ROBO-
DR1LL
1186
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
251 ATC ERROR An error occurs in the following cases On1y for the ROBODRILL :
. When unusable T code is specífíed ín M06 T_
. When the M06 code is specífíed when the Z coordinate is posítíve
in the machine coordínate system.
. When parameter No. 7810,whích specifies the current tool number,
is О.
. When the M06 code ís specífíed ín the canned cycle mode.
. When the M06 code ís specífíed in a block in which a reference posí-
tion return code, G27,G28, G29, oг G30 is specífíed.
. When the M06 code is specífied in the tool compensatíon mode
G41 to G44 .
. When the M06 code is specified wíthout any reference position re-
turn after the power ís turned on or after the emergency stop is re-
leased.
. When the machíne lock signal or the sígnal for ignoríng the Z axís
is turned on while the tooi is beíng changed.
. When a prying condition is detected while the tool ís changed.
. Refer to díagnosis parameter No. 530 for identífying the situatíons
above.
252 ATC SPINDLE ALARM An error due to excessive devíatíon occurs in spindle posítioning
during ATC operatíon. For details, see diagnosis parameter
0n1y for the ROBODRILL
253 G05 1S NOT AVAIRABLE Binary input operation wíth a hígh speed remote buffer G05 oг
high speed cycle machining G05 has been specified in look ahead
control mode G08P1 . Before attemptíng to specify these
commands, first specífy G08P0; to cancel look ahead control mode.
5000 1LLEGAL COMMAND CODE The specified code was íncorrect in the hígh precision contour con-
trol HPCC mode.
5003 1LLEGAL PARAMETER HPCC The parameter settíng is incorrect.
5004 HPCC NOT READY High precision contour control is not ready.
5006 TOO MANY WORD 1N ONE BLOCK The number of words specified in a block exceeded 26 in the HPCC
mode.
5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE 1n the HPCC mode, the machine moved beyond the limit.
5009 PARAMETER ZERO DRY RUN The maximum feedrate parameter No. 1422 or the feedrate ín dry
run parameter No. 1410 ís 0 in the HPCC model.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record was specífíed.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO CUT MAX The maximum cuttíng feedrate parameter No. 1422 is 0 in the
HPCC mode.
5012 G05 P10000 1LLEGAL START UP G05 P10000 has been specífíed in a mode from which HPCC mode
HPCC cannot be entered.
5013 HPCC:CRC OFS REMAIN AT G05P0 has been specífíed in G41/G42 mode or before cancellatíon
CANCEL axis is not found.
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Trace data is not available, preventíng transfer from being performed.
5015 NO ROTATION AX1S During tool axís directíon handie feed or tool axís norma1 directíon
handle feed, the specífíed rotatíon axís cannot be found.
5016 1LLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specified ín a
CODE block. Alternatively,an M code which must be specifíed wíthout other
M codes in the block was specífíed in a block with other M codes.
5020 PARAMETER OF RE3TART The parameter for specífyíng program restart is not set correctly.
ERROR
5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING The G68 command for three dimensional coordinate conversion has
been specífíed three or more times.
1187
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
Number Message Contents
5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR The G68 block contaíns a format error. This alarm occurs in the fo1-
lowing cases:
1 Oпe of 1, J, and K is not specífied in the G68 block missing option
for coordinate conversion .
2 1, J, and K aгe 0 іп the G68 block.
3 R ís not specífied in the G68 block.
5046 1LLEGAL PARAMETER Aп illegal parameter has been specífíed for straightness compensa-
tion.
Possible reasons are as follows:
1 There ís no axis correspondíng to the axis number specífied in the
move axis or compensatíon axís parameter.
2 More than 128 pítch error compensatíon poínts are not sequentially
numbered.
3 The straightness compensatíon points are not sequentíally num-
bered.
4 A specífíed straíghtness compensatíon poínt ís outsíde the range
between the pítch error compensatíon poínts having the maximum
positive and negatíve coordínates.
5 The compensation value specífíed for each compensation point is
too large or too sma11.
6 The settíngs of parameters Nos. 13881 to 13886 aгe illegal.
5050 1LL-COMMAND 1N CHOPPING When the choppíng functíon ís used, a move command was specified
MODE for a choppíng axis in chopping mode duńng recíprocation between
a top dead poínt and bottom dead poínt .
5051 M-NET CODE ERROR When the choppíng functíon ís used, a move command was specified
for a chopping axis in chopping mode duńng recíprocatíon between
a top dead poínt and bottom dead point .
5052 M-NET ETX ERROR ETX code ís abnormal.
5053 M-NET CONNECT ERROR Connectíon time supervision error parameter
5054 M-NET RECEIVE ERROR Boring tíme supervísion error parameter
5055 M-NET PRT/FRM ERROR Vertícal parity orframing errordetection
5057 M-NET BOARD SYSTEM DOWN Transmít tíme-out error parameter No. 177
ROM pańty eггoг
CPu ínterruptíon detection of not listed above
5060 1LLEGAL PARAMETER 1N Parameter settíng is illegal.
No. 5641 setting of the linear axis is not specífíed.
No. 5641 specífíes an axís other than a línear axis.
No. 5642 settíng of the rotatíon axís is not specífíed.
No. 5642 specifies an axis other than a rotation axís.
The CNC cannot control the 1inear or rotation axís the value of No.
1010 ís exceeded .
5061 1LLEGAL FORMAT 1N The command for exponential interpolatíon contains a
format error.
Address 1, J, or K is not specifíed.
Addresses 1, J, and K are 0.
5062 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N The command for exponential interpolatíon contains
an illegal value.
The specífíed value is not suitable for exponential ínterpolation for
example, a negative value is subject to 1n .
1188
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
5063 1S NOT PRESET AFTER REF. This message is output when the position counter has not been
preset before the start of plate thickness measurement. This alarm ís
íssued in one of the cases below.
1 When an attempt was made to perform measurement before a refer-
ence positíon had been establíshed.
2 When, after manual reference positíon return, an attempt was made
to start measurement wíthout fírst settíng the posítion counter.
5064 DIFFERRENT AX1S UN1T Circular interpolation was specífíed for a plane formed by axes using
1S B, 1S C different íncrement systems.
5065 DIFFERRENT AX1S UN1T 1n PMC based axis control, axes usíng dífferent increment systems
PMC AX1S aгe specified for the same D1/DO group. Modífy parameter No. 8010.
5067 G05 PO COMMANDED 1N G68/G51 HPCC mode cannot be canceled duríng G51 scalíng or G68 coordi-
MODE HPCC nate system rotatíon .
Correct the program.
5068 G31 P90 FORMAT ERROR The continuous high speed skíp command G31 P90 has one of the
following errors:
1. The axis along which the tool ís moved ís not specífied.
2. Moгe than one axis is specífíed as the axis along which the tool is
moved.
Alternatively, the EGB skíp command oг contínuous high
speed skip command has one of the following errors:
1. A move command is specified for the EGB axis workpiece axis .
2. More than one axis is specífied.
3. P ís not specified.
4. The specified Q value exceeds the allowable range.
Correct the program.
5069 WHL C; 1LLEGAL P DATA The P data, specífied for selecting the compensation center for grind-
ing wheel wear compensation, is invalid.
5073 NO DECIMAL PO1NT A decimal point ís not specified for a command for which a decimal
point must be specified.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address appears more than once in a block. Atternatively,
a block contains two or more G codes belongíng to the same group.
5082 DATA SERVER ERROR Details are dísplayed on the data server message screen.
5085 SMOOTH 1PL ERROR 1 A block for specifying smooth ínterpolation contaíns a syntax error.
5096 MISMATCH WAITING M CODE Dífferent waít codes M codes were specífied in HEAD1 and HEAD2.
Correct the program.
5110 1MPROPER G CODE An illegal G code was specifíed in simple hígh precision contourcontrol
G1 MODE mode.
A command was specífíed for the index table indexing axis in simple
high precísíon contour control mode.
5111 1MPROPER MODAL G CODE Ari illegal G code ís 1eft modal when símple hígh precision contour con-
G1 trol mode was specified.
5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED Look ahead control G08 was specifíed ín símple hígh precisíon con-
G1 tourcontrol mode.
5114 NOT STOP POS1T10N At the time of restart after manual inteıventíon, the coordinates at which
01 the manual intervention occurred have not been restored.
1189
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
Numbe Message Contents
5115 SPL : ERROR There ís an error in the specífication of the rank.
No knot ís specifíed.
The knot specifícation has an error.
The number of axes exceeds the Iimits.
Other program errors
5116 SPL : ERROR There ís a program error in a block under look ahead control.
Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.
1п NURBS interpolation mode, a mode that cannot be used together is
specifíed.
5117 SPL : ERROR The first control point of NURBS is incorrect.
5118 SPL : ERROR Aftermanual íntervention with manual absolute mode set to on, NURBS
ínterpolation was restarted.
5122 1LLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL A spíral ínterpolatíon or conícal interpolatíon command has an error.
Specifically, this error is caused by one of the following:
1 L= 0 is specified.
2 O= 0 ís specífied.
3 R/, R/, C ís specífíed.
4 Zero ís specifíed as heíght increment.
5 Three or more axes are specifíed as the height axes.
6 A height increment is specífíed when there are two height axes.
7 Conical interpolation is specífied when the helical interpolation
functíon is not selected.
8 Q< 0 is specified when radíus dífference > 0.
9 Q> 0 is specified when radíus difference < 0.
10 A height íncrement is specífied when no height axis is specifíed.
5123 OVER TOLERANCE OF END The dífference between a specífíed end poínt and the calculated end
POINT poínt exceeds the allowable range parameter 3471 .
5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL A spiral ínterpolation oг conical ínterpolation was specified in any of the
following modes:
1 Scalíng
2 Programmable mírror image
3 Po1aг coordinate interpolation
1n cutter compensation C mode, the center is set as the start point or
end point.
5134 FSSB : OPEN READY T1ME OUT lnítíalizatíon did not place FSSB іп the open ready state.
5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE FSSB has entered error mode.
5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS 1S 1п comparison wíth the numberof controlled axes, the numberof amplífí-
SMALL ers recognized Ьy FSSB is not enough.
5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ERROR FSSB detected a confíguration error.
5138 FSSB : AX1S SETTING NOT COM- 1n automatíc setting mode, axís setting has not been made yet.
PLETE Pertomı axís setting on the FSSB setting screen.
5139 FSSB : ERROR Servo ínítialization did not terminate normally.
The optical caЬ1e may Ьe defective, or there may be an error in connec-
tíon to the amplífier or another module.
Check the optícal cable and the connectíon status.
5155 NOT RESTART PROGRAM BY G05 During servo leaning control by G05, an attempt was made to perform
restart operatíon after feed hold or interlock. Thís restart operation can-
not be performed. G051eaning control terminates at the same time.
1190
6-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message . Contents
5156 1LLEGAL AX1S OPERATION 1n simple high precision contourcontrol SHPCC mode, the controlled
SHPCC axís selection signal PMC axis control changes.
1n SHPCC mode, the símple synchronous axis selection signal
changes.
5157 PARAMETER ZERO A1CC Zero ís set in the parameterforthe maximum cutting feedrate parame-
ter No. 1422 0г 1432 .
Zero is set in the parameter for the acceleratíon/deceleratíon before in-
terpolation parameter No. 1770 0г 1771 .
Set the parameter correctly.
5196 1LLEGAL OPERATION HPCC Detach operation was performed in HPCC mode. 1f detach operation
ís performed in HPCC mode, thís alarm is issued after the currently
executed block temıínates.
5197 FSSB : OPEN T1ME OUT The CNC permitted FSSB to open, but FSSB was not opened.
5198 FSSB : iD DATA NOT READ Temporaryassignmentfailed,soamplifierinítíallDinformationcouldnot
be read.
5199 F1NE TORQUE SENSING PARAME- A parameter related to the fíne torque sensíng function is illegal.
TER The storage ínterval ís invalid.
Aп ínvalíd axís number is set as the target axis.
Correct the parameter.
5212 SCREENCOPY: PARAMETER ER- Thereísaparametersettingerror. Checkthat4issetasthel/Ochannel.
ROR
5213 SCREEN COPY : COMMUNICA- The memory card cannot be used. Check the memory card. Check
T10N ERROR whether the memory card is write protected or defective.
5214 SCREEN COPY : DATA TRANSFER Data transfer to the memory card faíled.
ERROR Check whether the memory card space is insuffícient and whether the
memory card was removed during data transfer.
5218 1LLEGAL PARAMETER 1NCL. There ís an inclínatíon compensatíon parameter setting error.
COMP Cause:
1. The пumЬeг of pitch error compensation points between the nega-
tive end and positive + end exceeds 128.
2. The relationship in magnitude among the inclination compensation
point numbers ís incorrect.
3. An inclination compensatíon poínt ís not located between the nega-
tíve end and positive + end of the pítch error compensation
poínts.
4. The amount of compensation per compensation poínt is too large or
too sma11.
Correct the parameter.
5219 CAN NOT RETURN Manual intenıentíon or return ís not allowed during three dímensional
coordínate conversion.
5220 REFERENCE PO1NT ADJUST- A parameter for automatícally set a reference position is set. Bít 2 of
MENT MODE parameter No. 1819 = 1
Perform automatic setting.
Posítion the machíne at the reference positíon manually, then perform
manual reference position return.
Supplementary: Automatic setting sets bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 to
0.
5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR The SRAM correctable error cannot be corrected.
Cause:
A memoгу problem occurred duríng memoгу ínitíalízation.
Actíon:
Replace the master printed círcuit board SRAM module .
1191
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
Number Message Contents
5227 F1LE NOT FOUND A specífied fíle is not found during communication wíth the built-in
Handy Fi1e.
5228 SAME NAME USED There are duplicate fíle names in the buílt-in Handy Fi1e.
5229 WR1TE PROTECTED A fioppy disk in the built-in Handy Fí1e ís write protected.
5231 TOO MANY F1LES The number of fíles exceeds the limit during communicatíon with the
buílt-ín Handy Fi1e.
5232 DATA OVER-FLOW There ís not enough floppy dísk space in the built-in Handy Fi1e.
5235 COMMUNICATION ERROR Acommunícationerroroccurredduríngcommunícatíonwiththebuilt-in
Handy Fí1e.
5237 READ ERROR A floppy disk ín the buílt-in Handy Fí1e cannot be read from. The fioppy
disk may be defective, orthe head may be dirty. Alternatívely, the Handy
Fí1e ís defectíve.
5238 WR1TE ERROR A floppy dísk in the built-in Handy Fí1e cannot be wrítten to. The floppy
dísk may be defective, or the head may be dírty. Alternatively, the Handy
Fí1e is defectíve.
5242 1LLEGAL AX1S NUMBER The axís пumЬeг of the synchronous master axis oг slave axis is incor-
M series rect. This a1arm ís íssued when flexible synchronization is turned on.
Alternatívely, the axís number of the slave axis is smaller than that of the
master axis.
5243 DATA OUT OF RANGE The gear ratío ís not set correctly. This a1arm is íssued when flexíble
M series synchronization is tumed on.
5244 TOO MANY D1 ON Even when an M code was encountered in automatic operation mode,
M series the flexíble synchronizatíon mode sígnal was not dríven on or off.
Check the ladder and M codes.
5245 OTHER AX1S ARE COMMANDED One of the following command conditions was present during flexíble
M series synchronization or when flexible synchronízation was turned on:
1. The synchronous master axís or slave axís is the EGB axís.
2. The synchronous master axis or slave axis is the choppíng axis.
3. 1n reference posítíon return mode
5251 1LLEGAL PARAMETER 1N A fíxture offset parameter No. 7580 to 7588 is illegal. Correct the pa-
rameter.
5252 1LLEGAL P COMMAND 1N The P value specifying the offset number of a fíxture offset ís too large.
Correct the program.
5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED 1N MD1 G41/G42 cutter compensation C: M seríes, tool-nose radius com-
MODE pensation: T seríes was specífíed in MD1 mode. Depending on theset-
ting of bít 4 of parameter No. 5008
5300 SET ALL OFFSET DATAS AGA1N After the inch/metric automatíc conversion functíon 01M: Bít 0 of pa-
rameter No. 5006 for tool offset data is enabled or disabled, a11 the tool
offset data must be reset. This message remínds the operator to reset
the data.
1f thís a1arm is íssued, reset a11 the tool offset data. Operating the ma-
chine wíthout resetting the data wí11 result in a malfunctíon.
5302 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N G68 MODE A command to set the coordínate system ís specifíed in the coordinate
system rotation mode.
5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR A touch panel error occurred.
Cause:
1. The touch panel ís kept pressed.
2. The touch pane1 was pressed when power was turned on.
Remove the above causes, and turn on the power again.
5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR 1n a one-touch macгo ca11, mode switchíng at the tíme of actívatíon is not
pertormed correctly.
1192
G. ALARM L1ST B-63534EN-02 APPENDIX
Number Message Contents
5307 1NTERNAL DATA OVER FLOW 1n the followíng function, internal data exceeds the allowable range.
1 lmprovement of the rotatíon axís feedrate
5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION A connection related to FSSB ís íllegal.
This alarm ís issued when eíther of the foliowíng ís found:
1. Two axes havíng adjacent servo axís numbers parameter No.
1023 , odd number and even number, are assígned to amplífiers to
which different FSSB systems are connected.
2. The system does not satísfy the requírements for pertormíng HRV
control, and use of two pulse modules connected to different FSSB
systems having dífferent FSSB current control cycles ís specified.
5321 S-COMP. VALUE OVERFLOW The straíghtness compensation value has exceeded the maximum va1-
ue of 32767.
After thís alarm is issued, make a manual reference posítion return.
5400 SPL:ILLEGAL AX1S COMMAND An axis specifíed forsplíne interpolatíon orsmooth interpolatíon is incorrect.
1f an axis that is not the spline axís ís specified ín spline ínterpolation
mode, this alarm is issued. The spline axís ís the axis specífíed in a block
contaíning or the next block. For smooth ínterpolation, the axis
specified ín is incorrect.
5401 SPL:ILLEGAL COMMAND 1n a G code mode in which specificatíon of ís not permitted,
is specífied.
5402 SPL:ILLEGAL AX1S MOVING A movement is made along an axís that ís not the spline interpolation axis.
For example, ín three-dimensíonal tool compensation mode using an
offset vector of which components are the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, when
two-axis splíne interpolation ís performed wíth the two splíne axes set
to the X- and Y-axes, a movement along the Z-axis occurs, resulting
in this a1arm.
5403 SPL:CAN NOT MAKE VECTOR Three-dimensional tool compensatíon vectors cannot be generated.
When a three-dimensíonal tool compensation vector ís created for the
second or subsequent point, that point, previous poínt, and next point are
on the same straight 1ine, and that straight line and the three-dfımensional
tool compensation vector for the previous point are in paгa11e1.
When a three-dimensional tool compensation vector is created at the
end point of smooth interpolation or spline interpolation, the end point
and the poínt two poínts before are the same.
5405 iLLEGAL PARAMETER 1N The parameter settíng that determines the relatíonship between the
rotatíon axis and rotation p1ane is incorrect.
5406 FORMAT ERROR 1 A 0г G40 block contaíns a move command.
2 A block contains a G code or M code for which buffering is sup-
pressed.
5407 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N 1 A G code that belongs to group 01 except G00 and G01 is specífied
in mode.
2 An offset command a G code belongíng to group 07 ís specified in
mode.
3 The block next to startup contains no movement.
5408 1LLEGAL START_UP 1 1n a mode of group 01 except G00 and G01, startup is speci-
fied.
2 At startup, the included angle of the tool dírection vector and move
dírection vector is 0 or 180 degrees.
5409 iLLEGAL PARAMETER 1N The parameter setting No. xxxx to xxxx that determines the relation-
shíp between the rotatíon axis and rotatíon plane ís incorrect.
5411 NURBS:ILLEGAL ORDER The number of steps is specifíed íncorrectly.
5412 NURBS:NO KNOT COMMAND No knot ís specífied. Alternatively, in NURBS interpolatíon mode, a
block not relatíng to NURBS ínterpolation is specified.
1193
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 8-63531EN 02
Number Message Contents
5413 NURBS:ILLEGAL AX1S COMMAND An axís not specífied with controlled points is specified ín the first block.
5414 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT The number of blocks contaíníng knots only is insufficient.
5415 NURBS:ILLEGAL CANCEL Although NURBS interpolation is not completed yet, the NURBS inter-
polatíon mode ís turned off.
5416 NURBS:ILLEGAL MODE A mode that cannot be used with NURBS interpolation mode is speci-
fied ín NURBS interpolation mode.
5417 NURBS:ILLEGAL MULT1 KNOT As many knots as the number of steps are not specified at the start and
end poínts.
5418 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE Knots do not increase in monotone.
5420 1LLEGAL PARAMETER 1N A parameter related to pívot tool length compensation is incorrect.

5421 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N pivot toollength compensatíon type 2 mode, a rotation axís is specified.
5422 EXCESS VELOCITY 1N As a result of pivot tool length compensatíon, an attempt was made to
move the tool along an axis at a feedrate exceedíng the maximum cut-
ting feedrate.
5425 1LLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset number is íncorrect.
5430 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N 3 D C1R 1n a modal state in which three dímensional circular interpolation can-
not be specífíed, a three dimensíonal circular ínterpolation
is specified. Alternatívely, in three limensional circular
interpolation mode, a code that cannot be specified is specifíed.
5432 FORMAT ERROR A three dimensíonal circular ínterpolatíon command is
incorrect.
5433 MANUAL 1NTERVENTION 1N 3 D 1п three limensional circularinterpolatíon mode , manu-
C1R a1 intenıention was made when the manual absolute swítch was on.
5435 PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE lncorrect parameter setting set va1ue range
TLAC
5436 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR 1 lncorrect parameter settíng setting of the rotatíon axis
TLAC
5437 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR 2 lncorrect parameter settíng setting of the tool axis
TLAC
5440 1LLEGAL DRILLING AX1S The drilling axís specified for the drillíng canned cycle is íncorrect.
SELECTED The G code command block of the canned cycle does not specify the
Z poínt of the drilling axis. When there is a paгa11e1 axis wíth the drillíng
axís, the para11e1 axís ís also specífíed at the same tíme.
5445 CRC:MOTION 1N G39 Comercircular ínterpolatíon G39 of cuttercompensatíon is not speci-
fied a1one but is specífied wíth a move command.
5446 CRC:NO AVOIDANCE Because there is no ínterference evade vector, the interference check
evade function of cutter compensatíon cannot evade interference.
5447 CRC:DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE The ínterference check evade functíon of cutter compensation deter-
mínes that an evade operation wí11 lead to danger.
5448 CRC:INTERFERENCE TO AVD. 1n the ínterference check evade function of cutter compensation, a further
interference occurs for an already created ínterference evade vector.
1194
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
5452 1MPROPER G-CODE 5AX1S A G code that cannot be specifíed is found. 5-axis mode
MODE This a1arm ís íssued when:
1 Three-dímensíonal cuttercompensation síde-face offset and lead-
íng-edge offset ís appiied duríng cutter compensation, oг cutter
compensatíon ís appiíed during three-dimensíonal cutter com-
pensation side-face offset and leading-edge offset .
2 A leading-edge offset of three-dímensional cutter compensation is
applied during side-face offsettíng ofthree-dimensional cuttercom-
pensation, oг a síde-face offset of three-dímensional cutter com-
pensatíon ís applied duríng leadíng-edge offsetting of three-dimen-
sionaI cutter compensatíon.
3 Too1 axis dírection tool length compensation ís applied during tool
length compensatíon, or toollength compensatíon ís applied during
tool axis direction tool length compensatíon.
4 Too1 center point control ís províded duríng tool length compensa-
tíon, or toollength compensatíon is applied duríng tool center point
control.
5 Too1 center point control is províded duríng tool axis dírectíon tool
length compensatíon, ortool axis direction toollength compensation
ís applied duríng tool center poínt control.
1f this a1arm is íssued, cancel the relevant mode, then specify a differ-
ent mode.
5453 NOTE: G68 1S CANCELED HPCC When bít 2 of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, and a reset does not cancel
G68, this a1arm ís íssued at the tíme of program restart.
To release this a1arm, press and . Once this operation
ís performed, the alarm wí11 not be íssued at the next restart.
5455 1LLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER A permíssible acceleratíon parameter for optimum torque acceleratíon/
deceleration is incorrect. The cause ís one of the following:
1 The ratío of the deceleration rate to the acceleratíon rate is below the
límit.
2 The time required for deceleratíon to a speed of 0 exceeds the maxi-
mum value.
NOTE
A1CC desígnates A1 contour control.
2 Background edít alarm
Number Message Contents
??? BP/S a1aгm BP/S a1arm occurs ín the same number as the P/S a1aгm that occurs in
ordinary program edit.
P/S a1aгm No. 070, 071, 072, 073, 074, 085 to 087
Modífy the program.
140 BP/S a1aгm 1t was attempted to select or delete ìn the background a program being
seiected in the foreground. NOTE
Use background edíting correctly.
NOTE
A1arm in background edit is displayed ín the key ínput line of the background edít screen instead
of the ordínary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MD1 key operatíon.
1195
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
3 Absolute pulse coder APC alarm
Number Message Contents
300 nth axís origin return Manual reference position return ís required forthe nth axis n=1 to 8 .
301 APC a1aгm: nth axis communication nth axis n=1 to 8 APC communícation eпoι Faílure in data transmissíon
Possíble causes ínclude a faulty APC, cable, oг servo ínterface module.
302 APC alarm: nth axís over time nth axis n=1 to 8 APC overtíme error.
Faílure in data transmission.
Possíble causes include a faulty APC, cable, or senıo interface module.
303 APC alarm: nth axis framing nth axís п=1 to 8 APC framíng error. Faílure in data transmíssion.
Possible causes ínclude a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
304 APC alarm: nth axís pańty nth axís n=1 to 8 APC paгіη eггoг.
Faílure in data transmíssíon.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or senıo interface module.
305 APC alarm: nth axís pulse error nth axis n=1 to 8 APC pulse error aiarm.
APC a1aг oг cable may be faulty.
306 APC alarm: nth axis battery voltage nth axis n=1 to 8 APC battery voltage has decreased to a 1ow 1eve1 so
0 that the data cannot be heid.
APC alarm. Battery oг cable may Ьe faulty.
307 APC alarm: nth axís battery 1ow 1 nth axis n=1 to 8 axis APC battery voltage reaches a 1eve1 where the
battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.
308 APC alarm: nth axis battery 1ow 2 nth axis n=1 to 8 APC battery voltage has reached a 1eve1 where the
battery must be renewed including when power is OFF .
APC a1arm .Replace battery.
309 APC ALARM : n AX1S ZRN An attempt was made to perform reference position return wíthout rotat-
1MPOSSI6L ing the motor through one or more turns. Rotate the motor through one
oг moгe turns, turn off the power then on again, then perform reference
posítion return.
4 lndustosyn alarms
No. Message Contents
330 1NDUCTOSYN:DATA ALARM The absolute posítion data offset data from inductosyn cannot be
detected.
331 1NDUCTOSYN:ILLEGAL PRM Parameter No. 1874, 1875, or 1876 ís set to 0.
5 Serial pulse coder SPC alarms
When either of the following alarms ís íssued, a possible cause is a faulty seríal pulse coder or cab1e.
No. Message Descríptíon
360 n AX1S : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM A checksum error occurred in the buílt ín puise coder.
1NT
361 n AX1S : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA A phase data error occurred in the buílt in pulse coder.
1NT
362 n AX1S : ABNORMAL A rotation speed count error occurred in the built in pulse coder.
1NT
363 п AX1S : ABNORMAL CLOCK 1NT A clock error occurred in the buílt in pulse coder.
364 п AX1S : SOFT PHASE ALARM 1NT The digital servo software detected inva1id data in the buílt ín pulse
coder.
365 n AX1S : BROKEN LED 1NT An LED error occurred in the buílt ín pulse coder.
366 n AX1S : PULSE M1SS 1NT A pulse error occurred in the buílt in pulse coder.
367 n AX1S : COUNT M1SS 1NT A count error occurred in the built in pulse coder.
1196
6-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
No. Message Descríption
368 n AX1S : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the built in pulse coder cannot be re-
1NT ceived.
369 п AX1S : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bít error occurred ín the communícation data being
1NT received from the buílt in pulse coder.
380 n AX1S : BROKEN LED EXT The separate detector is erroneous.
381 n AX1S : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred ín the separate linear scale.
EXT L1N
382 n AX1S : COUNT M1SS EXT A pulse error occurred in the separate detector.
383 п AX1S : PULSE M1SS EXT A count error occurred in the separate detector.
384 п AX1S : SOFT PHASE ALARM The dígítal servo software detected ínvalíd data in the separate de-
EXT tector.
385 п AX1S : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the separate detector cannot be receíved.
EXT
386 n AX1S : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communicatíon data being
EXT receíved from the separate detector.
387 n AX1S : ABNORMAL ENCODER An error occurs in the separate detector. For detaíls, contact the
EXT manufacturer of the scale.
The detaiis of seríal
pulse coder alarm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
202 CSA BLA PHA PCA BZA CKA SPH
6 CSA : Check sum alarm has occurred.
5 BLA : Battery 1ow alarm has occurred.
4 PHA : Phase data trouble alarm has occurred.
3 PCA : Speed count trouble alarm has occurred.
2 BZA : Battery zero alarrn has occurred.
1 CKA : C1ock alarm has occurred.
Ø SPH : Soft phase data trouble alarm has occuіτed.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM
7 oTE : Data error has occurred.
6 CRC : CRC error has occurred.
5 STB : Stop bit error has occurred.
4 PRM : Parameter error alarm has occurred. In this case, a servo parameter error
alarm No. 417 ís also output.
1197
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 8-63534EN/02
6 Servo alarms 1/2
Number Message Contents
401 SERVO ALARM: п TH AX1S VRDY The n th axis axis 1-8 servo amplífíer READY signal DRDY went off.
OFF Referto procedure of trouble shootíng.
402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EX- The axís control card is not provided.
1ST
403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT M1S- The combination of the axis control card and servo software is illegal.
MATCH The possíble causes are as follows:
A correct axis control card is not provided.
Correct servo software ís not ínstalled on flash memoiy.
404 SERVO ALARM: n TH AX1S VRDY Even though the n th axis axís 1-8 READY sígnal MCON went off,
ON the servo amplifier READY sígnal DRDY ís stí11 on. Or, when the power
was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off.
Check that the servo interface module and servo amp are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: ZERO PO1NT RE- Posítion control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the
TURN FAULT reference posítíon return, there ís the possíbilíty that reference posítíon
return could not be executed correctly. Try agaín from the manual refer-
ence posítion return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERROR The difference ín synchronous axís posítion devíation exceeded the set
value.
Posítíon control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the
reference position return, there ís the possibilíty that reference position
return could not be executed correctly. Tiy again from the manual refer-
ence posítion return.
409 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S TORQUE Abnormal servo motor load has been detected. Alternatívely, abnormal
ALM spindle motor load has been detected in Cs mode.
410 SERVO ALARM: n TH AX1S EX- The posítion deviation value when the n th axis axis 1-8 stops ís larg-
CESS ERROR er than the set value.
Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.
411 SERVO ALARM: n TH AX1S EX- The posítion deviation value when the n th axis axis 1-8 moves is
CESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.
413 SERVO ALARM: n th AX1S LS1 The contents of the error register for the n th axis axís 1-8 exceeded
OVERFLOW f 231 power. Thís error usually occurs as the result of an improperly set
parameters.
415 SERVO ALARM: n TH AX1S EX- A speed higher than 524288000 units/s was attempted to be set in the
CESS SH1FT n th axís axís 1-8 . Thís error occurs as the result of improperly set
CMR.
1198
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
N u mber Message Contents
417 SERVO ALARM: n TH AX1S PA- Thís alarm occurs when the n th axís axis 1-8 ís in one of the condi-
RAMETER 1NCORRECT tions listed below. Digital servo system a1arm
1 The value set in Parameter No. 2020 motorform ís out of the speci-
fied límít.
2 A proper value 111 or-111 is not set in parameter motor
revolution direction .
3 111ega1 data a value below 0, etc. was set in parameter No. 2023
number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution .
4 111ega1 data a value below 0, etc. was set in parameter No. 2024
number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution .
5 Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 flexíble fíeld gear rate have not
been set.
6 A value outside the limít of 1 to the number of control axes or a non
continuous value Parameter 1023 servo axis number contains a
value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes, or aп ísolated
value for example, 4 not prceded by 3 .was set in parameter No.
1023 servo axisnumber .
420 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S SYNC Duríng simple synchronous control, the dífference between the torque
TORQU E commands for the master and slave axes exceeded the value set in pa-
rameter No. 2031.
421 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S EXCESS The dífference between the errors ín the semi closed loop and closed
ER D loop has become excessive during dual position feedback. Check the
values of the dual position conversíon coeffícíents ín parameters No.
2078 and 2079.
422 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S 1n torque control of PMC axís control, a specífied allowable speed
has been exceeded.
423 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S 1n torque control of PMC axís control, the parameter set allowable
cumulative travel distance has been exceeded.
430 n AX1S : SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred.
431 n AX1S : CNV. OVERLOAD 1 PSM: Overheat occurred.
2 3 series SVU: Overheat occurred.
432 n AX1S : CNV. LOWVOLT CON. 1 PSM: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
2 PSMR: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
3 3 seríes SVU: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
433 n AX1S : CNV. LOWVOLT DC L1NK 1 PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
2 PSMR: The DC línk voltage has dropped.
3 a series SVU: The DC link voltage has dropped.
4 β series SVU: The DC línk voltage has dropped.
434 n AX1S : 1NV. LOWVOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
435 n AX1S : 1NV. LOWVOLT DC L1NK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
436 n AX1S : SOFTTHERMAL OVC The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state OVC .
437 п AX1S : CNV. OVERCURRENT PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuít.
POWER
438 n AX1S : 1NV. ABNORMAL CUR- 1 SVM: The motor current ís too hígh.
RENT 2 a seríes SVU: The motor current ís too hígh.
3 3 series SVU: The motor current is too hígh.
1199
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534EN 02
Number Message Contents
439 п AX1S : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER 1 PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.
2 PSMR: The DC línk voltage is too hígh.
3 a series SVU: The C link voltage ís too hígh.
4 β seńes SVU: The línk voltage ís too hígh.
440 n AX1S : CNV. EX DECELERATION 1 PSMR: The regeneratíve discharge amount is too large.
POW. 2 a series SVU: The regenerative discharge amount is too large. A1-
ternatively, the regeneratíve discharge círcuit is abnormal.
441

n AX1S : ABNORMAL CURRENT The dígital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor cur-
OFFSET rent detection circuit.
442 n AX1S : CNV. CHARGE FAULT 1 PSM: The spare díscharge círcuít of the DC link is abnormal.
2 PSMR: The spare díscharge círcuít of the DC link is abnormal.
443 n AX1S : CNV. COOLING FAN FA1L- 1 PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.
URE 2 PSMR: The ínternal stirring fan failed.
3 β series SVU: The internal stirríng fan faíled.
444

n AX1S : 1NV. COOLING FAN FA1L- SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.
URE
445
n AX1S : SOFT D1SСONNECT The dígítal servo software detected a broken wire in the pulse coder.
ALARM
446 n AX1S : HARD DISCONNECT A broken wíre ín the buílt ín pulse coder was detected by hardware.
ALARM
447 n AX1S : HARD DISCONNECT EXT A broken wire in the separate detector was detected by hardware.
448 n AX1S : UNMATCHED FEEDBACK The sígn of feedback data from the buílt in pulse coder differs from
ALARM that of feedback data from the separate detector.
449 n AX1S : 1NV. 1PM ALARM 1 SVM: 1PM íntelligent power module detected an a1arm.
2 a series SVU: 1PM intelligent power module detected an a1arm.
453 n AX1S : SPC SOFT DISCONNECT Software disconnection a1arm of the a pulse coder.
ALARM Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the pulse cod-
er cab1e. 1f this alamı ís íssued agaín, replace the pulse coder.
456 1LLEGAL CURRENT LOOP The current control cycle settíngs parameter No. 2004, bit 0 of pa-
rameter No. 2003, and bit 0 of parameter No. 2013 are incorrect.
Possíble problems are as follows.
For the two axes whose servo axís numbers settings of parameter
No. 1023 are aп odd number followed by an even number a pair
of axes 1 and 2 0г axes 5 and 6, for example , a different current con-
trol cycle is set for each of the axes.
The requirements forslaves needed forthe set current control cycle,
includíng the number, type, and connection method of them, are not
satísfied.
457 1LLEGAL H1 HRV 250U5 Use of high speed HRV is specified although the current control
cycle is 200 μs.
458 CURRENT LOOP ĚRROR The current control cycle setting does not match the actual current
control cycle.
459 H1 HRV SETTING ERROR For the two axes whose servo axis numbers settings of parameter
No. 1023 aгe an odd number foliowed by an even number a pair of
axes 1 and 2 0г axes 5 and 6, for example , the SVM for one of the
axes supports high speed HRV control but the SVM for the other
does not. Refer to the SVM specificatíon.
1200
6-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
460 п AX1S : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was dísconnected suddenly. The possíble
causes are as follows:
1 The FSSB communícation cab1e was disconnected or broken.
2 The power to the amplífíer was turned off suddenly.
3 A 1ow voltage a1arm was íssued by the amplífier.
461 п AX1S : 1LLEGAL AMP 1NTERFACE The axes of the 2 axis amplífier were assigned to the fast type inter-
face.
462 п AX1S : SEND CNC DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error, a slave could not receive
correct data.
463 n AX1S : SEND SLAVE DATA Because of an FSSB communication error, the senıo system could
FAILED not receive correct data.
464 n AX1S : WR1TE 1D DATA FAILED An attempt was made to wríte maintenance information on the amp1i-
fier maintenance screen, but ít faíled.
465 n AX1S : READ 1D DATA FAILED At power up, amplifier initial 1D informatíon could not be read.
466 n AX1S : MOTOR/AMP COMBINA- The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for
T10N the motor.
467 n AX1S : 1LLEGAL SETTING OF The senıo function for the following has not been enabled when an
AX1S axis occupying a single DSP correspondíng to two ordinary axes ís
specified on the axis setting screen.
1. Learning control bit 5 of parameter No. 2008 = 1
2. High speed current loop bít 0 of parameter No. 2004 = 1
3. High speed interface axís bít 4 of parameter No. 2005 = 1
468 H1 HRV SETTING ERROR AMP Use of high speed HRV ís specífíed for a controlled axís of an ampli-
fier whích does not support hígh speed HRV.
Detaíls of servo alarm The details of servo alarm are displayed in the diagnosis dísplay No. 200
and as shown below.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA H VA DCA FBA OFA
7 OVL : An overload alarm ís beíng generated.
6 LV : A 1ow voltage alarm is beíng generated in servo amp.
5 OVC : A overcurrent alarm ís being generated ínside of digital servo.
4 HCA : An abnormal current alarm ís beíng generated in servo amp.
3 HVA : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
2 DCA : A regenerative discharge círcuít alarm ís beíng generated ín servo amp.
1 FBA : A dísconnectíon alarm ís beíng generated.
0 OFA : An overflow alarm ís being generated ínside of dígítal servo.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
201 ALD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data servo alarm No. 400 is
being generated :
7 ALD 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifıer overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data servo alarm No. 416 is
beíng generated :
1201
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
ALD EXP A1arm detaíls
1 0 Buí1t ín puise coder disconnection hardware
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection
hardware
0 0 Pu1se coder ís not connected due to software.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
204 OFs MCC LDA PMs
6 OFS : A current conversíon error has occured in the digital servo.
5 MCC : A magnetíc contactor contact in the servo amplífier has welded.
4 LDA : The LED índícates that serial pulse coder C is defective
3 PMS : A feedback pulse error has occured becautshee feedback cable is
defective.
7 Over travel alarms
Number Message Contents
500 OVER TRAVEL :+n Exceeded the n th axis axis 1 to 8 + side stored stroke limit 1.
Parameter 0г 1326 NOTE
501 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the n th axis axis 1 to 8 side stored stroke limit 1.
Parameter 0г 1327 NOTE
502 OVER TRAVEL :+ri Exceeded the n th axís axis 1 to 8 + side stored stroke limit 11.
Parameter
503 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the n th axis axis 1 to 8 side stored stroke límít 11.
Parameter
504 OVER TRAVEL :+n Exceeded the n th axís axís 1 to 8 side stored stroke limit 111.
Parameter
505 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the n th axis axis 1 to 8 side stored stroke limit 111.
Parameter
506 OVER TRAVEL :+n Exceeded the n th axís axis 1 to 8 + side hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the n th axis axis 1 to 8 síde hardware OT.
510 OVER TRAVEL :+n A stroke limít check, made before startíng movement, found that the end
poínt of a block fa11s wíthín the plus + síde ínhíbíted area along the n
axis defined by a stroke limit. Correct the program.
511 OVER TRAVEL : n A stroke limit check, made before startíng movement, found thatthe end
point of a block fa11s within the mínus side ínhíbíted area along the
N axís defíned by a stroke límit. Correct the program.
514 1NTERFERENCE :+n The rotation area ínterference check functíon found interference oп the
plus side of the n axis.
515 1NTERFERENCE : n The rotation area interference check function found interference on the
minus side of the n axis.
i
NOTE
Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM stroke limit swítch sígnal is on.
1202 1
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
8 Servo alarms 2/2
Number Message Contents
600 n AX1S : 1NV. DC L1NK OVER CUR- DC link current is too large.
RENT
601 n AX1S : 1NV. RADIATOR FAN FA1L-The external dissípator stírring fan faíled.
URE
602 n AX1S : 1NV. OVERHEAT The senıo amplifier was overheated.
603 n AX1S : 1NV. 1PM ALARM OH The 1PM íntellígent power module detected an overheat a1arm.
604 n AX1S : AMP. COMMUNICATION Communícation between the SVM and the PSM faíled.
ERROR
605 n AX1S : CNV. EX. DISCHARGE PSMR: Regenerative power ís too large.
POW.
606 n AX1S : CNV. RADIATOR FAN FA1L- PSM: The externai dissípator stírring fan failed.
URE PSMR: The external dissípator stírríng fan failed.
607 n AX1S : CNV. SINGLE PHASE FA1L-PSM: lnput voltage ís in the open phase condítíon.
URE PSMR: lnput voltage ís in the open phase condition.
9 Overheat alarms
Number Message Contents
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UN1T Control unit overheat
Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR Thefanmotoronthetopofthecabínetforthecontorlunitisoverheated.
Check the operatíon of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary.
704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Spíndle overheat in the spíndle fluctuation detection
1 1f the cuttíng load is heavy, relieve the cutting condition.
2 Check whether the cuttíng tool ís share.
3 Another posible cause ís a faulty spindle amp.
10 Rigíd tappíng alarm
Number Message Contents
740 R1G1D TAP ALARM : EXCESS During rígid tapping, the posítion deviation of the spindle ín the stop
ERROR state exceeded the settíng.
741 R1G1D TAP ALARM : EXCESS During rígíd tappíng, the posítíon devíation of the spindle in the stop
ERROR state exceeded the settíng.
742 R1G1D TAP ALARM : LS1 OVER Duńng ńgid tapping, an LS1 overflow occurred on the spindle síde.
FLOW
1203
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534EN/02
11 Serial spindle alarms
N umber Message Contents
74 S-ςP1NDLE LS1 ERROR 1t is seńal communication error whíle system is executing after power
suppiy on. Following reasons can be consídered.
1 Optícal cab1e connection ís fault or cab1e ís not connected or cable
is cut.
2 MA1N CPU board or optíon 2 board is fault.
3 Spindle amp. printed board ís fault.
4 The spindle amplifier ís under an abnormal condítíon. The SPM in-
dication is A, A1, A2, oг the 1íke, depending on the type of the ab-
normaiíty.
1f this a1arm occurs when CNC power supply ís turned on or when
thís alarm can not be cleared even íf CNC is reset, turn off the power
supply also turn off the power supply in spíndie síde.
1f the spíndle amplífier ís under an abnorma1 condítion, check the
SPM índication A, A1, A2, or the líke . Then, refer to the FANUC
SERVO MOTOR ιzί series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-65285EN
oг FANUC SERVO MOTOR u series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B-б5165E to solve the problem.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL L1NK START This a1arm is generated when the spindie control unit is not ready for
FAULT starting correctly when the power is turned on ín the system with the
seríal spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1 An improperly connected optic cabie, or the spindle control unit s
power is OFF.
2 When the NC power was turned on under alarm condítions other
than SU-01 or AL-24 whích are shown on the LED display of the
spíndle control unit.
1n thís case, turn the spíndle amplífíer power off once and perform
startup again.
3 Other reasons improper combination of hardware
This a1arm does not occurafterthe system including the spindle con-
trol unít ís actívated.
4 The second spindle when SP2, bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1
is in one of the above conditíons 1 to 3 .
See díagnostíc dísplay No. 409 for detaíls.
752 F1RST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated íf the system does not properly terminate a
FAULT mode change. The modes include the Cs contouring, spíndle posítion-
ing, rígíd tapping, and spindle control modes. The a1arm is activated íf
the spindle control unít does not respond correctiy to the mode change
command issued by the NC.
754 SPINDLE-1 ABNORMAL TORQUE Abnormal first spindle motor load has been detected.
ALM
762 SECOND SPINDLE MODE Refer to a1arm No. 2nd axis
CHANGE FAULT
764 SPINDLE-2 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as a1arm No. 754 for the second spíndle
ALM
772 SPINDLE-3 MODE CHANGE ER- Same as a1aгm No. 752 forthe third spindle
ROR
774 SPINDLE-3 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as a1aгm No. 754 forthe third spindle
ALM
1204
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
782 SPINDLE-4 MODE CHANGE ER- Same as alarm number 752 for the fourth spindle
ROR
784 SPINDLE--4 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm number 754 for the fourth spindle
ALM
The detaíls of spíndle
alarm
1 st and 2nd spíndles
7 s 5 4 3 2 1 o
409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
3 SPE 0: In the spindle seńal control, the serial spindle parameters fu1fı11 the
spíndle unít startup condítíons.
1: In the spindle serial control, the seńal spindle parameters do not fu1fi11
the spindle uni[ startup condítions.
2 S2E 0: The second spindle is normal duńng the spindle seńal control startup.
1: The second spindle was detected to have a fault duńng the spindle
seríal control startup.
1 S1E 0: The first spíndle ís nornıal duríng the spíndle serial control startup.
1: The fırst spindle was detected to have a fault during the spíndle axís
seríal control startup.
Ø SHE 0: The seńal communícatíons module in the CNC is norma1.
1: The serial communicatíons module in the CNC was detected to have a
fault.
3rd and 41h spindles The detaíls of spíndle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis dísplay
No. 409 as shown below.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
409 SPE S4E S3E SHE
3 SPE 0: In the spindle seńal control, the seńal spíndle parameters fu1fı11 the
spíndle unit startup condítíons.
1: In the spindle seńal control, the seńal spíndle parameters do not fu1fı11
the spíndle unit startup conditíons.
2 S2E 0: The fourth spíndle ís norma1 duńng the spíndle serial contŕol startup.
1: The fourth spindle was detected to have a fault duríng the spíndle
seńal control startup.
1 S1E 0: The third spíndle ís norma1 duńng the spíndle seńal control startup.
1: The thírd spíndle was detected to have a fault duńng the spíndle axis
seńal control startup.
Ø SHE 0: The seńal communicatíons module in the CNC is normal.
1: The seńal communícatíons module in the CNC was detected to have a
fault.
1205
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
A1arm Líst Seríal Spindie
When a seríal spíndle alarm occurs, the followíng number is displayed on
the CNC. n is a number correspondíng to the spindle on whích an alarm
occurs. n = 1: First spíndle; n= 2: Second spindle; e[c.
NOTE 1
Note that the meanings of the SPM indícations differ
depending on whích LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.
When the red LED ís on, the SPM índicates a 2-dígít alarm
number. When the yellow LED is on, the SPM índícates an
error number that desígnates a sequence problem for
example, when a rotation command ís entered with the
emergency stop state not released .
- See Appendix , Error Codes Serial Spíndle .
A1arm Numbers and Alarms Dísplayed on the ai Seríes Spíndle Amplífíer
SPM іп-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Description
tíon 1
750 SPINDLE SERIAL L1NK AO 1 Replace the ROM on the SPM The program does not start пoгmally.
ERROR A control printed circuit board. ROM series error or hardware ab-
2 Replace the SPM control pńnted normality on the SPM control printed
círcuít board. circuít board
749 S SPINDLE LS1 ERROR A1 Replace the SPM control prínted cir- An abnormalíty was detected in the
cuít board. CPU peripheral círcuit of the SPM
control círcuít.
7n01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR OVER- 01 1 Check and correct the perípheral The thermostat embedded in the mo-
HEAT temperature and load status. torwindíng operated.
2 1f the coolíng fan stops, replace ít. The ínternal temperature of the motor
exceeds the specified 1eve1.
The motor ís used in excess of the
contínuous ratíng, orthe coolíng com-
ponent ís abnormal.
7n02 SPN_n_ : EX SPEED ER- 02 1 Check and correct the cuttíng The motorspeed cannot follow a spe-
ROR conditíons to decrease the 1oad. cífied speed.
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. An excessive motor load torque ís de-
tected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 ís ínsuffícient.
7n03 SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC 03 1 Replace the SPM unít. The PSM becomes ready 00 ís indi-
L1NK BLOWN 2 Check the motor ínsulatíon status. cated , but the DC línk voltage is too
3 Replace the interface cable. 1ow in the SPM.
The fuse ín the DC línk sectíon ín the
SPM ís blown. The power device is
damaged or the motor is ground
fault.
The JX1A/JX1B connectíon cable is
abnormal.
7n06 SPN_n_ : THERMAL 06 1 Check and correct the parameter. The temperature sensor of the motor
SENSOR D1S- 2 Replace the feedback cable. ís dísconnected.
CONNECT
1206
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
sPM in-
No. Message díca- Faulty location and remedy Descríptíon
tion 1
7п07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. For ex- The motor speed has exceeded
ample, check whether spindle syn- 115 of its rated speed.
chronízation was specified when the When the spindle axís was in position
spindle could not be turned. control mode, posítíonal deviations
were accumulated excessively SFR
and SRV were turned off during
spindle synchronization.
7n09 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT 09 1 lmprove the heat sínk coolíng sta- Abnormal temperature rise of the
MA1N C1RCUIT tus. powertransístor radiator
2 1f the heat sink cooling fan stops,
replace the SPM unit.
7п11 SPN_п_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
POW C1RCUIT 2 Checktheinputpowervoltageand the PSM was detected. PSM a1aгm
change in power during motor de- indicatíon: 7
celeration. 1f the voltage exceeds PSM selection error. The maximum
253 VAC forthe 200 V system or output specífícation of the PSM is ex-
530 VAC for the 400 V system , ceeded.
ímprove the power supply imped-
ance.
7п12 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 12 1 Check the motor ínsulation status. The motoroutputcurrent isabnormal-
RENT POW 2 Check the spíndle parameters. 1y high.
C1RCUIT 3 Repiace the SPM unít. A motor specífic parameter does not
match the motor model.
Pooг motor ínsulatíon
7n15 SPN_п_ : SP SWITCH 15 1 Check and correct the ladder se- The switch sequence in spíndle
CONTROL quence. swítch/output switch operation is ab-
ALARM 2 Repiace the switchíng MC. normal.
The swítching MC contact status
check sígnal and command do not
match.
7n16 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 16 Replace the SPM controi prínted cir- Abnormalíty in an SPM control circuit
cuít board. component is detected. RAM for ex-
ternal data is abnormal.
7п18 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK 18 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality ín an SPM control circuit
ERROR PGM cuít board. component is detected. Program
DATA ROM data is abnormal.
7n19 SPN_п_ : EX OFFSET 19 Replace the SPM unít. Abnormalíty in an SPM component ís
CURRENT U detected. The initial value for the U
phase current detectíon circuit is ab-
norma1.
7n20 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 20 Replace the SPM unít. Abnormalíty ín an SPM component is
CURRENT V detected. The initìal value of the V
phase current detection circuit is ab-
normal.
7п21 SPN_n_ : POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the parameters. The polarity parameter setting of the
POLARITY No. 4000 0, 4001 4 position sensor is wrong.
ERROR
1207
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534É N 02
SPM іп-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríptíon
tíon
7n24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 P1ace the CNC-to-spindle cab1e The CNC power is turned off normal
TRANSFER away from the power cable. power-off oг broken cable .
ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An error is detected in communica-
tion data transferred to the CNC.
7n26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 26 1 Replace the cab1e. The signal amplitude of the detection
C-VELO DE- 2 Re-adjust the pre-amplifíer. signal connectorJY2 on the Cs con-
TECT tour control motor side is abnormal.
Unconnected cable, adjustment er-
ror, etc.
7n27 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spíndle posítion coder con-
POS-CODER 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. nector JY4 signal is abnormal.
2 The signal amplitude connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor is ab-
norma1.
Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.
7n28 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 28 1 Replace the cable The posítíon detection signal con-
C-POS DE- 2 Re-adjust the pre-amplífíer. nector JY5 for Cs contour control is
TECT abnormal.
Unconnected cable, adjustment er-
ror, etc.
7n29 SPN_n_ SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD continuously for a certaín period of
time. Thís alarm is issued also when
the motorshaft has been locked in the
excítation state.
7n30 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 30 Check and correct the power supply Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
RENT POW voltage. circuít ínput. PSM a1aгm indication:
C1RCUIT 1
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error The maximum
PSM output specification is exceed-
ed.
7n31 SPN_n : MOTOR LOCK 31 1 Check and correct the load status. The motorcannot rotate at a specifíed
OR V-S1G LO 2 Replace the motor sensor cable speed. A 1eve1 not exceeding the
JY2 0г JY5 . SST 1eve1 for the rotation command
has existed continuously.
Abnormalíty in the speed detectíon
signal.
7n32 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 32 Replace the SPM control prínted cir- Abnormality ín an SPM control círcuít
SERIAL LS1 cuit board. component is detected. The LS1 de-
vice for serial transfer is abnormal.
7n33 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE 33 1 Check and correct the power sup- Chargíng of direct current power sup-
POWER p1y voltage. plyvoltage in the powercircuit section
CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. is insufficient when the magnetic con-
tractor ín the amplifier is turned on
such as open phase and defective
charging resistor .
1208
B-63534EN; 02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
SPM ín-
No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy I Descríptíon
tíon 1
7n34 SPN-n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the a11ow-
SETTING ER- to the manual. ab1e limit is set.
ROR 1f the parameter number is unknown,
connect the spindle check board, and
check the indicated parameter.
7n35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING 35 Correct the value according to the pa- Gear ratio data exceedíng the a11ow-
GEAR RAT10 rameter manual. ab1e limit is set.
7n36 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW 36 Check whether the position gaín va1- An error counter overflow occurred.
ERROR ue ís too large, and correct the value.
COUNTER
7n37 SPN_n_ : SPEED DE- 37 Correct the value according to the pa- The setting of the parameter for the
TECT PAR. ER- rameter manual. number of pulses in the speed detec-
ROR tor is incorrect.
7n39 SPN_n_ : 1-ROT Cs S1G- 39 1 Adjust the 1-rotation signal in the An incorrect relationship between the
NAL ERROR pre-amplífier. 1-rotation sígnal and the number of
2 Check the cable shield status. AB phase pulses was detected dur-
3 Replace the cable. íng Cs contour control.
--,
7n40 SPN_n_ : NO 1-ROT Cs 40 1 Adjust the 1-rotatíon signal in the The 1-rotation sígnal is not gener-
SIGNAL DE- pre-ampIifier. ated during Cs contour control.
TECT 2 Check the cable shield status.
3 Replace the cable.
7n41 SPN_n_ : 1-ROT POS- 41 1 Check and correct the parameter. 1 The 1-rotation signal of the
CODER ER- 2 Replace the cable. spindle posítíon coder connector
ROR 3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. JY4 ís abnormal.
2 The 1-rotation signal connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor is ab-
normal.
3 Parameter setting error
7n42 SPN_п_ : NO 1-ROT. 42 1 Replace the cab1e. 1 The 1-rotation signal of the
POS-CODER 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. spindle position coder connector
DETECT JY4 is disconnected.
2 The 1-rotation signal connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor is dís-
connected.
7л43 SPN_гі_ : DISCON. PC 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
FOR D1F. SP. signal connector JY8 in SPM type 3
MODE is abnormal.
7n44 SPN_n_ : CONTROL 44 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
C1RCUIT AD cuit board. component was detected A/D con-
ERROR verter abnormalíty .
7n46 SPN_n_ : SCREW 46 1 Check and correct the parameter. An abnormalíty equivalent to alarm
1-ROT POS- 2 Replace the cable. 41 was detected during thread cuttíng
COD. ALARM 3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor signal. operation.
1209
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534E N/02
SPM іп-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríptíon
tíon 1
7n47 SPN_n_ : POS-CODER 47 1 Replace the cab1e. 1 The A/B phase sígnal of the
SIGNAL AB- 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle posítion coder connector
NORMAL 3 Correct the cab1e layout viciníty of JY4 is aЬпoгma1.
the power 1ine . 2 The A/B phase signal connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor ís ab-
normal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1-rotatíon sígnal ís íncor-
rect Pu1se interval mismatch .
7п49 SPN_п_ : H1GH CONV. 49 Check whether the calculated díffer- 1п differentíal speed mode, the speed
D1F. SPEED entíal speed value exceeds the maxi- of the other spindle converted to the
mum motor speed. speed of the 1oca1 spíndle has ex-
ceeded the allowable límít the díffer-
ential speed ís calculated by multiply-
ing the speed of the other spindle by
the gear ratio .
7n50 SPN_n_ : SPNDL CON- 50 Check whether the calculated va1ue 1n spindle synchronization, the speed
TROL OVER- exceeds the maximum motor speed. command calculation value exceed-
SPEED ed the allowable lìmít the motor
speed is calculated by multiplyíng the
specifíed spindle speed by the gear
ratio .
7n51 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC 51 1 Check and correct the power sup- lnput voltage drop was detected.
L1NK p1y voltage. PSM a1aгm indicatíon: 4 Momen-
2 Replace the MC. tary powerfaílure or poor MC contact
7п52 SPN_n_ : 1TP SIGNAL 52 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL 1 circuit board. tected the 1TP signal stopped .
2 Replace the spíndle ínterface
prínted circuit board ín the CNC.
7п53 SPN_n_ : 1TP SIGNAL 53 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC ínterface abnormalíty was de-
ABNORMAL 11 circuít board. tected the 1TP sígnal stopped .
2 Replace the spindle ínterface
printed circuít board in the CNC.
7n54 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD 54 Revíew the load state. An overload current was detected.
CURRENT
7n55 SPN_n_ : POWER L1NE 55 1 Replace the magnetíc contactor. The power line state signal of the
SWITCH ER- 2 Check and correct the sequence. magnetic contactor for selectíng a
ROR spindle or output ís abnormal.
7n56 SPN_п_ : 1NNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unít. The cooling fan ín the SPM control cіг-
1NG FAN STOP cuít stopped.
7n57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decel- An overload was detected in the re-
ERATION eration duty. generative resístance. PSMR alarm
POWER 2 Check the cooling conditíon pe- indícatíon: 8
ripheral temperature . Thermostat operation or short-time
3 1f the cooling fan stops, replace the overload was detected.
resistor. The regenerative resístor was dís-
4 1f the resístance ís abnormal, re- connected, or an abnormal resis-
place the resístor. tance was detected.
1210
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
ι
SPM in-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríption
tíon 1
7п58 SPN_п_ : OVERLOAD 1N 58 1 Check the PSM cooling status. The temperature of the radíatorof the
PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has íncreased abnomıally.
PSM a1aгm indícatíon: 3
7n59 SPN_n_ : COOLING FAN 59 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan ín the PSM stopped.
STOP iN PSM PSM a1aгm indicatíon: 2
7п62 SPN_n_ : MOTOR VCMD 62 Check and correct the parameters. The specified motor speed is too
OVERLOWED No. 4021, 4056 to 4059 large.
7n66 SPN_n_ : AMP MODULE 66 1 Replace the cable. An error was found ín communicatíon
COMMUNICA- 2 Check and correct the connection. between amplifíers.
T10N
7n73 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. The motor sensor feedback sígnal is
SOR DISCON- 2 Check the shíeld processíng. not present.
NECTED 3 Check and correct the connection.
4 Adjust the sensor.
7n74 SPN_n_ : CPU TEST ER- 74 Replace the SPM control printed cir- An error was detected ín a CPU test.
ROR cuit board.
7n75 SPN_n_ : CRC ERROR 75 Replace the SPM control printed cir- An error was detected in a CRC test.
cuit board.
7n79 SPN_n_ : 1N1T1AL TEST 79 Replace the SPM control printed cír- An error was detected in an initíal test
ERROR cuit board. operation.
7n81 SPN_n_ : 1 ROT MO- 81 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one rotatíon sígnai of the motor
TOR SENSOR 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ERROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
7n82 SPN_n_ : NO 1 ROT 82 1 Replace the feedback cab1e. The one rotation sígnal of the motor
MOTOR SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor ís not generated.
SOR
7n83 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An írregularíty was detected in a mo-
SOR SIGNAL 2 Adjust the sensor. tor sensor feedback signal.
ERROR
7n84 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 84 1 Replace the feedback cab1e. The spíndle sensorfeedbacksígnal is
SOR DISCON- 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
NECTED 3 Check and correct the connection.
4 Check and correct the parameter.
5 Adjust the sensor.
7n85 SPN_n_ : 1 ROT SPNDL 85 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ER- 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
7n87 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 87 The one rotation sígnal of the spíndle An irregularíty was detected in a
SOR SIGNAL sensor is not generated. spíndle sensor feedback sígnal.
ERROR
7n88 SPN_n_ : COOLING RA- 88 Replace the SPM external coolíng The external cooling fan stopped.
D1FAN FA1L- fan.
URE
1211
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63531EN02
SPM ín-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríptíon
tion 1
7n97 SPN_n_ : OTHER 97 Replace the SPM. Another írregularity was detected.
SPINDLE
ALARM
7n98 SPN_n_ : OTHER CON- 98 Check the PSM alarm display. A PSM a1aгm was detected.
VERTER
ALARM
9n01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR OVER- 01 1 Check and correct the perípheral The thermostat embedded in the mo-
HEAT temperature and load status. torwinding operated.
2 1f the coolíng fan stops, гepІace it. The internal temperature of the motor
exceeds the specifíed 1eve1.
The motor is used in excess of the
continuous ratíng, orthe cooling com-
ponent ís abnormal.
9n02 SPN_n_ : EX SPEED ER- 02 1 Check and correct the cutting Themotorspeedcannotfollowaspe-
ROR conditíons to decrease the 1oad. cífied speed.
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. An excessive motor load torque is de-
tected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
9п03 SPN_n_ FUSE ON DC 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready 00 is indi-
L1NK BLOWN 2 Check the motor insulation status. cated , but the DC link voltage is too
3 Replace the ínterface cable. 1ow in the SPM.
The fuse ín the DC línk section in the
SPM is blown. The power device is
damaged or the motor is ground
fau 1t.
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable ís
abnormal.
9п06 SPN_n_ : TERMAL 06 1 Check and correct the parameter. The temperature sensor of the motor
SENSOR D1S- 2 Replace the feedback cab1e. is disconnected.
CONNECT
9n07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. For ex- The motor speed has exceeded
ample, check whether spíndle syn- 115 of its rated speed.
chronízatíon was specífied when the When the spindle axis was in position
spíndle could not be turned. control mode, positional deviations
were accumulated excessively SFR
and SRV were turned off duríng
spindle synchronizatíon.
9n09 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT 09 1 lmprove the heat sínk coolíng sta- Abnorma1 temperature rise of the
MA1N C1RCUIT tus. powertransistor radiator
2 1f the heat sink coolíng fan stops,
гeplace the SPM unít.
1212
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
SPM ín-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríptíon
tíon 1
9n11 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Ovenıoltage of the DC link section of
POW C1RCUIT 2 Checkthe input powervoltage and the PSM was detected. PSM alarm
change in power duríng motor de- índícatíon: 7
celeration. 1f the voltage exceeds PSM selectíon error. The maximum
253 VAC forthe 200 V system or output specífícatíon of the PSM is ex-
530 VAC for the 400 V system , ceeded.
improve the power supply imped-
ance.
9n12 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 12 1 Check the motor ínsulatíon status. The motoroutput current is abnorma1-
RENT POW 2 Check the spindle parameters. 1y high.
C1RCUIT 3 Replace the SPM unit. A motor specific parameterdoes not
match the motor model.
Poor motor insuiation
9n15 SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH 15 1 Check and correct the ladder se- The switch sequence ín spindle
CONTROL quence. swítch/output switch operatíon is ab-
ALARM 2 Replace the switching MC. normal.
The switchíng MC contact status
check sígnal and command do not
match.
9n16 SPN_п_ : RAM FAULT 16 Replace the SPM control prínted cír- Abnormality in aп SPM control círcuit
cuít board. component is detected. RAM for ex-
ternal data ís abnormal.
9n18 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK 18 Replace the SPM control prínted cir- Abnormalíty ín an SPM control circuit
ERROR PGM cuít board. component ís detected. Program
DATA ROM data ís abnormal.
9n19 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT U detected. The ínítíal value for the U
phase current detection circuit is ab-
пoгma1.
9n20 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormalíty in an SPM component is
CURRENT V detected. The initial value of the V
phase current detectíon circuít ís ab-
norma1.
9n21 SPN_n_ : POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the parameters. The polarity parameter settíng of the
POLARITY ER- No. 4000 0, 4001 4 position sensor is wrong.
ROR
9п24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 P1ace the CNC to spindle cable The CNC power is turned off normal
TRANSFER away from the power cab1e. power off or broken cable .
ERROR 2 Replace the cab1e. An error ís detected in communica-
tion data transferred to the CNC.
9п27 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 27 1 Replace the cab1e. 1 The spindle position coder con-
POS CODER 2 Re adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. nector JY4 signal is abnormal.
2 The sígnal amplítude connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor ís ab-
normal.
Unconnected cable, adjustment
erгoς etc.
1213
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534E Ni02
SPM in-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríptíon
tíon 1
9n29 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD contínuously for a certain period of
time. This alarm is íssued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in the
excitation state.
9n30 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 30 Check and correct the power supply Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
RENT POW voltage. circuít ínput. PSM a1aгm índícation:
C1RCUIT 1
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selectíon error The maximum
PSM output specification is exceed-
ed.
9n31 SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK 31 1 Check and correct the load status. The motorcannot rotate at a specified
OR V S1G LOS 2 Replace the motor sensor cable speed. A 1eve1 not exceeding the
JY2 or JY5 . SST 1eve1 for the rotation command
has exísted contínuously.
Abnormality ín the speed detection
sígnal.
9п32 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 32 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SERIAL LS1 cuit board. component is detected. The LS1 de-
vice for serial transfer is abnormal.
9n33 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE 33 1 Check and correct the power sup- Chargíng of dírect current power sup-
POWER p1y voltage. plyvoltage in the powercírcuít section
CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. ís insuffícíent when the magnetíc con-
tractor in the amplifier is turned on
such as open phase and defective
chargíng resistor .
9n34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceedíng the a11ow-
SETTING ER- to the manual. ab1e límit ís set.
ROR 1f the parameter number ís unknown,
connect the spindle check board, and
check the indicated parameter.
9n35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING 35 Correctthe value accordíngtothepa- Gear ratío data exceedíng the a11ow-
GEAR RAT10 rameter manual. able iímit is set.
9n36 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW 36 Check whether the posítion gain va1- An error counter overflow occurred.
ERROR ue ís too large, and correct the value.
COUNTER
9п37 SPN_n_ : SPEED DE- 37 Correct the value according to the pa- The settíng of the parameter for the
TECT PAR. ER- rameter manuaf. number of puises in the speed detec-
ROR tor is incorrect.
9n41 SPN_n_ : 1 ROT POS 41 1 Check and correct the parameter. 1 The 1 rotatíon sígnal of the
CODER ER- 2 Replace the cab1e. spindle positíon coder connector
ROR 3 Re adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. JY4 ís aЬпoгma1.
2 The 1 rotatíon signal connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor is ab-
norma1.
3 Parametersetting error
1214
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
sPM ín-
No. Message díca- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríption
tíon 1
9n42 SPN_п_ : NO 1-ROT. 42 1 Replace the cab1e. 1 The 1-rotation signal of the
POS-CODER 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. spíndle posítíon coder connector
DETECT JY4 is dísconnected.
2 The 1-rotation signal connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor is dís-
connected.
9п43 SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC 43 Replace the cab1e. The differential speed position coder
FOR D1F. SP. signal connectorJY8 in SPM type 3
MODE ís aЬпoгma1.
9п46 SPN_n_ : SCREW 46 1 Check and correct the parameter. An abnormality equivalent to a1arm
1-ROT POS- 2 Replace the cab1e. 41 was detected during thread cuttíng
COD. ALARM 3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor signal. operatíon.
9n47 SPN_n_ : POS-CODER 47 1 Replace the cab1e. 1 The AB phase sígnal of the
SIGNAL AB- 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor sígnal. spíndle position coder connector
NORMAL 3 Correct the cab1e layout viciníty of JY4 ís abnormal.
the power 1ine . 2 The A/B phase signal connector
JY2 of the MZ or BZ sensor ís ab-
normal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1-rotatíon sígnal ís incor-
rect Pu1se interval mismatch .
9п49 SPN_n_ : H1GH CONV. 49 Check whether the calculated differ- 1n differential speed mode, the speed
D1F. SPEED ential speed va1ue exceeds the maxi- of the other spindle converted to the
mum motor speed. speed of the 1oca1 spindle has ex-
ceeded the allowable limit the differ-
ential speed is calculated by multiply-
íng the speed of the other spindle by
the gear ratio .
9n50 SPN_n_ SPNDL CON- 50 Check whether the calculated value 1n spíndle synchronization, the speed
TROL OVER- exceeds the maximum motor speed. command calculation va1ue exceed-
SPEED ed the allowable limit the motor
speed is calculated by multiplying the
specifíed spindle speed by the gear
ratio .
9n51 SPN_n_ : N VOLT DC 51 1 Check and correct the power sup- lnput voltage drop was detected.
L1NK p1y voltage. PSM a1arm indicatíon: 4 Momeп-
2 Replace the MC. tary power failure or poor MC contact
9n52 SPN_n_ : 1TP SIGNAL 52 1 Replace the SPM control prínted NC ínterface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL 1 círcuít board. tected the 1TP signal stopped .
2 Replace the spíndle ínterłace
printed circuit board in the CNC.
9n53 SPN_n_ : 1TP SIGNAL 53 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interłace abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL 11 circuit board. tected the 1TP signal stopped .
2 Replace the spindle ínterface
printed circuit board in the CNC.
9n54 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD 54 Revíew the load state. An overload current was detected.
CURRENT
9n55 SPN_n_ : POWER L1NE 55 1 Replace the magnetic contactor. The power line state sígnal of the
SWITCH ER- 2 Check and correct the sequence. magnetic contactor for selectíng a
ROR spindle or output is abnormal.
1215
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-б353-λEN/02
SPM іп-
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descriptíon
tíon
9n56 SPN_n_ : 1NNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unít. The cooling fan ín the SPM control cir-
1NG FAN STOP cuit stopped.
9n57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decei- An overload was detected in the re-
ERATION eration duty. generative resistance. PSMR a1arm
POWER 2 Check the coolíng condítion pe- indication: 8
ripheral temperature . Thermostat operation or short time
3 1f the cooling fan stops, replace the overload was detected.
resistor. The regenerative resistor was dis-
4 1f the resistance is abnormal, re- connected, or an abnormal resís-
place the resistor. tance was detected.
9n58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD 1N 58 1 Check the PSM coolíng status. The temperature of the radiator of the
PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has increased abnormally.
PSM a1aгm indication: 3
9n59 SPN_п_ : COOLING FAN 59 Replace the SPM unit. The coolíng fan in the PSM stopped.
STOP 1N PSM PSM a1aгm indícation: 2
9n66 SPN_п_ : AMP MODULE 66 1 Repiace the cab1e. An errorwas found in communication
COMMUNICA- 2 Check and correct the connection. between amplífiers.
T10N
9n73 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 73 1 Replace the feedback cab1e. The motor sensor feedback signal is
SOR DISCON- 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
N ECTED 3 Check and correct the connectíon.
4 Adjust the sensor.
9n74 SPN_n_ : CPU TEST ER- 74 Replace the SPM controI prínted cir- An error was detected in a CPU test.
ROR cuít board.
9n75 SPN_n_ : CRC ERROR 75 Replace the SPM control printed cir- An error was detected in a CRC test.
cuít board.
9n79 SPN_п_ : 1N1T1AL TEST 79 Replace the SPM control printed cir- An error was detected in an ínítíal test
ERROR cuít board. operation.
9n81 SPN_п_ : 1 ROT MO- 81 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one rotatíon signal of the motor
TOR SENSOR 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ERROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
9n82 SPN_п_ : NO 1 ROT 82 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one rotation signal of the motor
MOTOR SEN- 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SOR
9n83 SPN_n_ : MOTOR SEN- 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularíty was detected in a mo-
SOR SINGNAL 2 Adjust the sensor. tor sensor feedback signal.
ERROR
9n84 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 84 1 Replace the feedback cab1e. The spíndle sensorfeedback signal is
SOR DISCON- 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
N ECTED 3 Check and correct the connectíon.
4 Check and correct the parameter.
5 Adjust the sensor.
9n85 SPN_п_ : 1 ROT SPND 85 1 Check and correct the parameter. The one rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ER- 2 Replace the feedback cable. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
ROR 3 Adjust the sensor.
1216
B-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
SpM іп- 1
No. Message dica- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríptíon
tíon 1
9n87 SPN_n_: SPNDLSEN- 87 Theone-rotationsígnalofthespíndle An írregularíty was detected in a
SOR SIGNAL sensor is not generated. spindle sensor feedback sígnal.
ERROR
9n88 SPN_n_ : COOLING RA- 88 Replace the SPM external coolíng The external cooling fan stopped.
D1FAN FA1L- fan.
URE
9097 SPN_n_ : OTHER Check the SPM alamı display. Other spindle a1arm
SPINDLE
ALARM
9098 SPN_n_ : OTHER CON- Check the PSM a1arm dísplay. Other converter alarm
VERTER
ALARM
9110 SPN_п_ : AMP COMMU- b0 1 Replace the communícatíon cable Communícatíon error between am-
N1CAT10N ER- between amplifier and module. plifier and module
ROR 2 Replace the SPM or PSM control
printed circuít board.
9111 SPN_n_ : b1 Replace the PSM control printed cir- Low converter control power supply
VOLT CON- cuit board. voltage PSM indícatíon = 6
TROL
9112 SPN_n_ : b2 1 Check the regeneratíve resis- Excessive converter regeneratíve
CHARGE POW. tance. power PSM indication = 8
2 Check the motor selection.
3 Replace the PSM
9113 SPN_n_ : Ь3 Repiace the cooling fan. Stopped cooling fan of the converter
1NG FAN FA1L- radiator PSM índícation - A
URE
9120 SPN_n_ : COMMUNICA- CO 1 Replace the communicatíon cab1e Communicatíon data alarm
T10N DATA ER- between CNC and SPM.
ROR 2 Replace the SPM control printed
circuít board.
3 Replace the CNC síde spíndle in-
tertace prínted círcuít board.
9121 SPN_n_ : COMMUNICA- C1 1 Replace the communication cable Communícation data
T10N DATA ER- between CNC and SPM.
ROR 2 Repiace the SPM control printed
circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC síde spíndle in-
tertace pńnted circuít board.
9122 SPN_ : COMMUNICA- C2 1 Replace the communication cable Communícation data alarm
T10N DATA ER- between CNC and SPM.
ROR 2 Replace the SPM controi prínted
círcuít board.
3 Replace the CNC síde spindle ín-
terface prínted circuít board.
1217
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 6-63534EN/02
ERROR CODES SERIAL SPINDLE
NOTE 1
Note that the meaníngs of the SPM indications díffer
dependíng on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.
When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated with
a 2 dígít number. The error code ís not dispiayed on the
CNC screen.
When the red LED is on, the SPM índicates the number of
aп a1aгm generated ín the serial spindle.
See 1tem, A1arm List Seríal Spindle .
Errors Displayed on the Spíndle Amplífier
sPм
indíca- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríption
tíon `1
01 Check the `ESP and MRDY sequence. For MRDY, pay Although neither ESP emergency stop signal; there
attentiontotheparametersettíngregardíngtheuseofthe are two types of signals including the PMC signal and
MRDY signaI bit 0 of parameter No. 4001 . PSM contact sígnal `2 norMRDY machine ready sig-
na1 is input, SFR forward rotation signal /SRF reverse
rotation sígnal /ORCM oríentation command is input.
02 Check the spindle motor speed detector parameter bíts When the spindie motor has a high-resolution magnet-
2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011 . ic pulse coder Cs sensor bits 6 and 5 of parameter
No. 4001 are set to 0 and 1, respectívely , 128 /rev is
to be set for the speed detector bits 2, 1, and 0 of pa-
rameter No. 4011 are set to 0, 0, and 1, respectively .
However, a value other than 128 /rev is set. 1n this
case, the motor is not excited.
03 Check the parameters for the detector for Cs contour Although use of a high-resolution magnetic pulse cod-
control bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 and bit 4 of parame- eг bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 -1 oг use of the Cs con-
ter No. 4018 . tour control functíon by the sensor bit 4 of parameter
No. 4018 =1 is not set, a Cs control command ís input.
1n this case, the motor is not excited.
04 Check the positíon coder signal parameter bit 2 of pa- Although use of the positíon coder signal bit 2 of pa-
rameter No. 4001 . rameterNo. 4001 =1 is not set, a servo mode rígíd tap-
ping, spíndle posítioníng or spindle synchronization
command is ínput. 1n thís case, the motor is not excíted.
05 Check the oríentation software optíon. Although the oríentation optíon is not set, an orientation
command ORCM is input.
06 Check the spindle output swítching software optíon and Although the output switchíng option is not set, the 1ow-
power line status signal RCH . speed winding is selected RCH = 1 .
07 Check the sequence CON, SFR, SRV . Although the Cs contour control mode is specified,
SFR/SRV is not ínput.
08 Check the sequence SFR, SRV . Although the servo mode rigíd tapping, spindle posi-
tioning ís specífied, SFR/SRV is not input.
09 Check the sequence SPSYC, SFR, SRV Although spíndle synchronization mode is specified,
SFR/SRV ís not ínput.
10 During execution of the C-axis control command, do not Although Cs contour control mode is set, another op-
specify anotheroperatíon mode. Before entering anoth- eration mode senıo mode, spindle synchronizatíon, or
eг mode, cancel the Cs contour control command. orientatíon ís specífied.
11 During execution of the servo mode command, do not Although servo mode rigid tapping, orspindle position-
specify another operatíon mode. Before entering anoth- íng ís set, another operation mode Cs contour control,
eг mode, cancel the servo mode. spíndle synchronization, or orientation is specified.
1218
6-63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
spM
índíca- Faulty locatíon and remedy Descríption
tíon 1
12 During execution of the spíndle synchronízation com- Although spindle synchronization is being performed,
mand, do not specífy another operatíon mode. Before another operatíon mode Cs contour control, servo
enteríng another mode, cancel the spindle synchroníza- mode, or oríentation ís specífíed.
tion command.
13 During execution of the oríentation command, do not Atthough the oríentation command ís beíng executed,
specify another operatíon mode. Before entering anoth- another operatíon mode Cs contour control, servo
eг mode, cancel the oríentatíon command. mode, or synchronizatíon ís specified.
14 lnput the SFT oг SRV sígnal. The SFT and SRV sígnals are both ínput at the same
time.
15 Check bít 5 of parameter No. 4000 and PMC signal When bít 5 of parameter No. 4000 is set to 1 to indicate
CON . the presence of the differential speed mode function,
Cs contour control ís specified.
16 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 and PMC sígnal When bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 is set to 0 to índícate
DEFMD . the absence of the differential speed mode function, the
dífferential speed mode command DEFMD is input.
17 Check bits 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011. Setting of the speed detector parameter bits 2, 1, and
0 of parameter No. 4011 is invalíd. The corresponding
speed detector is not present.
18 Check bít 2 of parameter No. 4001 and PMC signal Although bits 2 of parameter No. 4001 ís set to 0 not to
ORCM . use the position coder signal, a command for orienta-
tion by a posítíon coder ORCMA is input.
19 Duríng execution of the oríentation command, do not Although orientatíon by a magnetic sensor is being per-
specify another operatíon mode. Before entering anoth- formed, another operatíon mode ís specífied.
er mode, cancel the orientation command.
20 Check bít 5 of parameter No. 4001, bit 5 of parameter No. When the use of the slave operation mode function is
4014, and bit 4 of parameter No. 4018. set bít 5 of parameter No. 4014 =1 , the use of a high
resolution magnetíc pulse coder bit 5 of parameter No.
4001 = 1 oг the use of the Cs contour control functíon
Ьy the sensor bit 4 of parameter No. 4018=1 is specí-
fied. These items cannot be set at the same time.
21 lnput the slave operation mode command SLV in nor- Although posítion control such as servo mode or
ma1 operatíon mode. oríentation is beíng performed, a slave operatíon mode
command SLV is input.
22 lnput the position control command in normal operatíon Although slave operation mode is set SLVS = 1 , a
mode positíon control command such as senıo mode or
orientation is input.
23 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 and PMC signal Although bít 5 of parameter No. 4014 ís set to 0 not to
SLV . use the slave operatíon mode function, a slave opera-
tion mode command SLV ís input.
24 Check the PMC sígnal 1NCMD . Perform oríentation by Orientation ís performed in íncremental operation mode
specífying an absolute posítíon first. 1NCMD = 1 fírst, then the absolute position command
1NCMD = 0 is input.
25 Checkthespindleamplifíerspecifícationsandparameter Although the spindle amplífier SPM type 4 is not used,
settíng bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 . the use of the Cs contourcontrol function by the sensor
is set bít 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1 .
NOTE 2
PSM contact sígnal
Between ESP1 and ESP2 on the PSM Contact open: Emergency stop
Contact closed: Normal operation
1219
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-63534E N/02
12 System alarms
These alarms cannot be reset wíth reset kev.
N umber Message Contents
900 ROM PARITY A parity eггoг occurred in the CNC, macro, or servo ROM. Correct
the contents of the flash ROM having the displayed number.
910 SRAM PARITY : BYTE 0 A RAM parity error occurred in the part program storage RAM. C1ear
the RAM, or replace the SRAM module or motherboard. Subse-
911 SRAM PARITY : BYTE 1 quently, re set the parameters and a11 other data.
912 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 0 A RAM parity error occurred in the DRAM module. Replace the
913 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 1 DRAM module.
914 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 2
915 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 3
916 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 4
917 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 5
918 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 6
919 DRAM PARITY : BYTE 7
920 SERVO ALARM 1-4 AX1S Servo alarm first to fourth axis . A watchdog a1arm condition oc-
curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card.
Replace the axis control card.
921 SERVO ALARM 5-8 AX1S Servo alarm fifth to eighth axis . A watchdog alarm condition oc-
curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card.
Replace the axis control card.
926 FSSB ALARM FSSB a1aгm.
Replace the axis control card.
930 CPU 1NTERRUPT CPU error abnormal interrupt .
The motherboard or CPU card may be faulty.
935 SRAM ECC ERROR An error occurred in RAM for part program storage.
Action:
Replace the master printed circuit board SRAM module , perform
a11 с1ear operation, and set a11 parameter and other data agaín.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.
The PMC control circuit on the motherboard may be faulty.
951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.
Watchdog alarm
The motherboard may be faulty.
972 NM1 OCCURRED 1N OTHER MOD- An NM1 occurred on a board other than the motherboard.
ULE The option board may be faulty.
973 NON MASK 1NTERRUPT An NM1 occurred as a result of an unknown cause.
974 F BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus.
The motherboard or option board may be faulty.
975 BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the motherboard.
The motherboard may be faulty.
976 L BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the 1oca1 bus.
The motherboard may be faulty.
1220
Index
8-6353dEN,02
[Numbers] [в]
3 Dimensíonal Círcular Interpolatíon, 693 Back Bońng Cyc1e G87 , 212
3 Dímensíonal Cutter Compensatíon, 668 Background Drawíng, 1118
Background Edítíng, 967 LCD Mounted Type CNC Control Unít, 719
Battery for Buí1t In Absolute Pu1se Coders DC6V ,
8 Dígít Program Number, 182 1141
LCD Mounted Type CNC Control Unit, Battery for Separate Absolute Pu1se Coders 6 VDC ,
719 1140
Battery ín the CNC Dísplay Unít wíth PC Functions 3
VDC , 1138
[A] Boring Cyc1e G85 , 208
Bońng Cyc1e G86 , 210
Absolute and Incremental Programming G90, G91 ,
137 Bońng Cyc1e G88 , 214
Actual Feedrate Display, 1002 Boring Cyc1e G89 , 216
Branch and Repetitíon, 412 Adding Workpiece Coordínate Systems or
G54 , 131
Advanced Prevíew Control G08 , 476
AI Contour Control Functíon/AI Nano Contour Con- [C]
trol Function, 478 Canned Cyc1e, 186
AI High Precision Contour ControUAI Nano Hígh Canned Cyc1e Cancel G80 , 218, 230
Precísíon Contour Control, 607
Canned Gńndíng Cyc1e For Gríndíng Machíne , 231
A1arm and Se1f Díagnosís Functíons, 862
Cautíon for Usíng System Varíables, 431
Alarım Dísplay, 714, 863
Change of the Cutter Compensatíon Va1ue, 292
A1aпм Hístory Dísplay, 865 Changíng Workpíece Coordínate System, 126
A1aгm List, 1178 Character to Codes Correspondence Tab1e, 1177
Alteńng a Word, 948 Characters and Codes to be Used for the Pattern Data
Iпput Functíon, 459
Angular Axis ControUAngular Axís Control, 537
Check by Runníng the Machine, 707
Ańthmetíc and Logíc Operatíon, 406
Checkíng Ьy Se1f Díagnosбc Screen, 866
Assembling, 841
Checkíng the Minimum Gńnding Whee1 Diameter
Automatíc Corner Deceleratíon, 107 For Gńndíng Machíne , 241
Automatíc Coгпeг Ovenide, 104 Choppíng Functíon G80, , 539
Automatíc Erase Screen Display, 1088 Círcular Interpolatíon G02, G03 , 48
Clearing the Screen, 1087 Automatíc Feedrate Control Functíon, 613
Command for Machíne Operatíons Míscellaneous
Automatic Gńndíng Whee1 Díameter Compensatíon Functíon, 24
After Dressíng, 241
Compensatíon Function, 264
Automatíc Insertíon of Sequence Numbers, 977
Conditiona1 Branch IF Statement , 412
Automatic Opeгatіoп, 705, 789
Connecting PCMCIA Card Attachment, 841
Automat9c Oven:ide for Inner Corners G62 , 104
Constant Surface Speed Control G96, G97 , 145
Automatíc Too1 Length Measurement G37 , 273
Continuous High Speed Skíp Functíon G31 , 92
Auxiliary Function, 162 Contínuous Feed Surface Gńndíng Cyc1e G78 , 236
Auxíliary Functíon M Functíon , 163 Controlled Axes, 30, 31
Axís Control Functíons, 527 Conversatíonal Programmíng wíth Graphíc Functíon,
982
Axís Name, 32
Coordínate System, 122
і-1
1ndex B-63534EN/02
Coordina[e System on Part Drawíng and Coordínate Deleting Multíple Blocks, 951
System Specífied Ьy CNC - Coordínate System, 18
Deletíпg One Program, 955
Coordínate System Rotatíon G68, G69 , 367
Deletíng Programs, 955
Coordinate Va1ue and Dímensíon, 136 Detaíls of Cutter Compensatíon C, 301
Copying a Program Between Two Paths, 595 Detaíls of Functíons, 442
Copying a Program between Two Paths, 970 Details of NC Statements and Macro Statements
Copying an Entire Program, 958 Execution, 429
Dírect Constant-Dímension Plunge Gńnding Cyc1e Copyíng Part of a Program, 959
G77 , 234
Conıer Círcular Interpolation G39 , 354
Dírect Input of Measured Workpiece Ońgín Offsets,
Corner Deceleration According to the Corner Ang1e, 1043
107
Dísplay, 713
Corner Deceleration According to the Feedrate Differ-
Display of Run Time and Parts Count, 1004 ence between Blocks A1ong Each Axís, 110
Dísplayíng a Program Líst for a Specified Group ,
Corner Offset Círcular Interpolatíon G39 , 289 1027
Creatíng Programs, 975 Dísplayíng and Enteńng Settíng Data, 1036
Creating Programs ín TEACH IN Mode Playback , Dísplaying and Settíng Choppíng Data, 1058
979
Displayíng and Setting Custom Macro Common Vań-
Creaбng Programs Usíng the MDI Pane1, 976 ables, 1045
Current B1ock Dísplay Screen, 1010 Dísplayíng and Settíng Data, 710
Current Posítion Display, 714 Displayíng and Settíng Extended Too1 Life Manage-
ment, 1053 Custom Macro, 392
Dísplayíng and Settíng Paτameters, 1077
Cutter Compensation B G39-G42 , 282
Displayíng and Settíng Pítch Error Compensatíon
Cutter Compensation Cаnce1 G40 , 290 Data. 1079
Cutter Compensatíon Left G41 , 285 Dísplayíng and Settíng Rotary Tab1e Dynamíc Fíxture
Cutter Compensation Ríght G42 , 287 Offset, 1075
Cutting Feed, 97 Dísplayíng and Settíng Run Time, Parts Count, and
Tіme, 1040
Cutting Feedrate Control, 102
Dísplayíng and Settíng the Software Operator s Pаne1,
Cutбng Speed - Spíndle Speed Functíon, 22 1048
Cylindńcal Interpolatíon , 63 Displayíng and Settíng the Workpíece Oelgín Offset
Va1ue, 1042
Cylindńcal Interpolatíon Cutting Point Control
, 633 Displaying and Setting Too1 Life Management Data,
1050
Dísplayíng Directory of Floppy Cassette, 888
ľD] Displayíng Memory Used and a List of Programs,
1024
Data Input/Output, 716, 869 Dísplayíng Pattern Data and Pattern Menu, 1046
Data Input/Output on the ALL IO Screen, 897 Dísplayíng the Dírectory, 889
Data Input/Output Usíng a Memoгу Card, 914 Dísplayíng the Pattern Menu, 451
Decímal Point Programming, 142 Dísplayíng the Program Number and Sequence Num-
ber, 1082
Deleting a B1ock, 950
Dísplayíng the Program Number, Sequence Number,
Deleting a Word, 949 and Status, and Warning Messages for Data Setting
Deletíng A11 Programs, 955 or Input/Output Operation, 1082
Deletíng Blocks, 950 Dísplayíng the Status and Warníng for Data Setting or
Input/Output Operatíon, 1083
Delcting Fi1es, 894
Distńbutíon Prосessíng Terminatíon Monitońng Func-
Deletíng More than One Program Ьy Specífyíng a tíon for the Hígh-Speed Machíníng Command
Range, 956 GO5 , 472
i2
B-δ3534EN/02 lndex
DNC Operatíon, 797, 838
DNC Operatíon wíth Memory Card, 837
[G] Dńlling Cyc1e Counter Bońng Cyc1e G82 , 198
Dńlling Cyc1e, Spot Dńlling G81 , 196 G53, G28, G30, and Commands in Too1 Length
Dry Run, 849 Offset Mode, 270
Dwe11 G04 , 114 G53, G28, G30, алd G29 Commands in Cutter
Compensatíon C Mode, 335
Dynamic Graphíc Display. 1097
General F1ow of Operatíon of CNC Machine Too1, 7
General Screen Operatíons, 725
Graphic Dísplay, 715
[E]
Graphics Dísplay, 1091
Editíng a Part Program, 709
Graphics Functíon, 1090
Edi6ng of Custom Macros, 966
Gńnding Whee1 wear Compensatíon, 380
Editíng Programs, 942
Gńndíng-Whee1 Wear Compensatíon Ьy Contínuous
Electroníc Gear Box 2 Paír, 576 Dressíng For Gńnding Machíne , 240
Electronic Gear Box Automatíc Phase Synchroníza-
tíon, 568
Emergency Stop, 853 [H]
Erase Screen Display, 1087 Heading a Program, 946
Exact Stop G09, G61 Cuttíng Mode G64 Tappíng Helical Interpolatíon G02, G03 , 52
Mode G63 , 103
Helical Interpolation B G02, G03 , 53
Explanatíon of the Keyboard, 723
He1p Functíon, 1121
Exponential Interpolatíon , , 71
High Speed Cuttíng Functions, 464
Extended Part Program Edítíng Functíon, 957
Hígh Speed Skíp Sígnal G31 , 91
External I/O Devíces, 746
Hígh-Precisíon Contour Control, 500
External Motíon Functíon G81 , 246
Hígh-Speed Cyc1e Cuttíng, 465
External Operator Message History Dísplay, 1085
High-Speed Línear Interpolatíon GO5 , 473
External Output Commands, 436
Hígh-Speed Peck Dńlling Cyc1e G73 , 190
Hígh-Speed Remote Buffer, 468
Hígh-Speed Remote Buffer A GO5 , 468
[ J
Hígh-Speed Remote Buffer B GO5 , 471
FANUC Handy Fí1e, 748
Hobbing Machíne Functíon G80, G81 , 545
Feed Functions, 93
How [o Indicate Command Dímensíons for Moving
Feed- Feed Functíon, 16 the Too1- Absolute, Incremental Commands, 21
Feedrate Clamping Ьy ARC Radíus, 467 How to View the Posítíon Dísplay Change without
Runníng the Machíne, 708
Feedrate Oveníde, 847
Hypothetícal Axis Interpolatíon G07 , 84
Figure Copy , , 247
Fí1e Deletíon, 874
Fí1e Search, 872 [1]
Fi1es, 870
In-Feed Gńndíng A1ong the Y and Z Axes at the End
Fine Boríng Cyc1e G76 , 194 of Tab1e Swíng For Gńndíng Machíne , 242
Floating Reference Posítíon Return , 121 Inch/Metńc Conversíon G20, G21 , 141
Functíon Keys, 726 Incorrect Threaded Length, 1167
Function Keys and Soft Keys, 725 Increment System, 33
Functíons to Símplífy Programmíng, 185 Incremental Feed, 757
ί-3
lndex 8-63534EN/02
Index TaЬ1e Indexing Functíon, 261
[,Y,]
Input Command from MDI, 334
M Code Group Check Funcrion, 165
Inputtíng a Program, 875
Machine Coordinate 5ystem, 123
Inputtíng and Outputting Floppy Fí1es, 909
Machíne Lock аnd Auxíliary Functíon Lock, 845
Inputtíng and Outputtíng Offset Data, 906
Macro Ca11, 416
Inputtíng and Outputtíng Parameters, 904
Macro Ca11 Usíng an M Code, 424
Inputtíng and Outputting Parameters and Pitch Error
Macro Ca11 Usíng G Code, 423
Compensatíon Data, 882
Macro Statements and NC Statements, 411
Inputtíng алd Outputtíng Prograıns, 899
Manua1 Absolute On and Off, 761
Inputtíng Custom Macro Common Vańables, 886
Mаnua1 Hand1e Feed, 758
Inputtíng Offset Data, 880
Mаnua1 Hалd1e Interruptíon, 816
Inputtíng Parameters, 882
Manua1 Interventíon and Return, 835
Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Data, 884
Mаnua1 Línear/Circular Interpolation, 774
Inputtíng/Outputtíng Custom Macro Common Vań-
ables, 886 Mаnua1 Numeńc Command, 781
Inserting a Word, 947 Manua1 Operation, 702, 752
Insertíng, Alteńng and Deletíng a Word, 943 Manua1 Reference Posítíon Return, 753
Interference Check, 326 Mаnua1 Rigíd Tappíng, 779
Intermíttent-Feed Surface Gńndíng Cyc1e G79 , 238 Maximum Stroke, 34
Internal Circular Cutting Feedrate Change, 106 MDI Operation, 793
Interpolation Functíons, 41 Memory Common to Path, 594
Interruptíon Type Custom Macro, 440 Memorу Operatíon, 790
Involute Interpolatíon , , 66 Memoгу Operatíon Usíng FS 15 Tape Format, 463
Merging a Program, 961
Method of Replacíng Battery, 1131
[Ј]
Mirror Image, 819
Jog Feed, 755 Moda1 Ca11 G66 , 421
Movíng Part of a Program, 960
Multiple M Commands іп a Síngle B1ock, 164
Multistage Skíp G31 , 90 [ K]
Key Input and Input Buffer. 743
[N]
[L] Next B1ock Dísplay Screen, 1011
Leading Edge Offset, 682 Nomographs, 1166
Normal Directíon Control , , 0г Left-Handed Rigid Tappíng Cyc1e G74 , 225
G150, G151, G152 , 373
Left-Handed Tappíng Cyc1e G74 , 192
Notes on Readíng thís Manual, 9
Limitatíon and Notes, 840
Notes on Varíous Kínds of Data, 9
Límítatíons, 435
Nurbs Interpolatíon , 79
Línear Interpolatíon GO1 , 46
Líst of Function and Tape Format, 1156
Loca1 Coordínate System, 133 [О]
Look-ahead AcceleratíonØceleratíon Before Inter- Offset Data Input and Output, 880
polatíon, 608
Operating Monítor Dísplay, 1006
і-4
8-63534EN/02 1ndex
Operatíonal Devíces, 717 Program Components other than Program Sectíons,
169
Operatíons, 838
Program Confıguratíon, 25, 167
Optional Ang1e Chamfeńng and Corner Roundíng,
243 Program Contents Dísplay, 1009
Outputtíng a Program, 878 Program Display, 713
Outputtíng a Program List for a Specífied Group , 896 Program Input/Output, 875
Outputtíng Custom Macro Common Vańable, 887 Program Number Search, 952
Program Restart, 802 Outputtíng Custom Macro Common Varíables, 908
Program Screen for MDI Operatíon, 1015 Outputtíng Offset Data, 881
Program Section Confıguratíon, 172 Outputtíng Parameters, 883
Programmable Mirror Image , , 378 Outputting Pítch Error Compensation Data, 885
Programmable Parameter Entry G 10 , 461
Outputting Programs, 893
Overall Posítíon Dísplay, 999
Overcutting by Cutter Compensation, 331 [R]
Overtravel, 854
Radius Dírection Error at Circle Cutting, 1174
Overvíew of Cutter Compensatíon C G40-G42 , 295
Range of Command Va1ue, 1163
Rapid Traverse, 96
Rapid Traverse Ovemde, 848
[P]
Readíng Fí1es, 892
Parameter, 840 Recommended Memorу Cаrd, 843
Part Drawíng and Too1 Movement, 17 Reference Posítíon, 115
Parts Count Dísplay, Run Time Dísplay, 715 Reference Posítíon Machíne-Ѕpecific Posítíon , 17
Password Functíon, 968 Reference Posítíon Return, 116
Path Drawing, 1097 Regíster, Change and Delete of Too1 Lífe Manage-
ment Data, 155 Pattern da[a display, 455
Regísteńng Custom Macro Programs, 434 Pattern Data Input Functíon, 450
Repetítion Whi1e Statement , 413 Peck Dńlling Cyc1e G83 , 200
Replacement of Words and Addresses, 964
Peck Rígíd Tappíng Cyc1e G84 or G74 , 228
Replacing Battery for LCD-Mounted Type i 5eríes,
P1ane Selection, 135 1132
Plunge Gńnding Cyc1e G75 , 232 Replacing the Battery for Stand-A1one Type і Seńes,
1135 Po1aг Coordínate Command G15, G16 , 138
Restńctíons, 622, 688 PoLar Coordinate Interpolatíon , , 59
Retrace Functíon, 827 Posítíon Dísplay in the Relatíve Coordina[e System,
996 Rigíd Tappíng, 221
Posítion Dísplay ín the Work Cooгdіпa[e System, 994 Rigíd Tappíng G84 , 222
Positíoníng G00 , 42 Risc Processor, 596
Positíve/Negatíve Cutter Compensatíon Va1ue and Rotary Axís Control, 532
Too1 Center Path, 293
Rotary Axis Ro11-0ver, 531
Power Disconnectíon, 751
Rotary Tab1e Dynamic Fixture Offset, 384
Power On/Off, 749
Preparatory Function G Function , 35
Presettíng the Workpiece Coordínate System, 1001 [S]
Processíng Macro Statements, 429 Safety Functíons, 852
Program Check Screen, 1012 Sample Program, 427
í5
lndex B-63534ENı02
Scaling G50, G51 , 362 Specificatíon Method, 441
Scheduling Functíon, 809 Specíficatíon Number, 841
Screen Displayed at Power-on, 750 Specífyíng the Spíndle Speed Va1ue Directly S5-Díg-
ıt Command , 144
Screen Hardcopy, 1126
Specífyíng the Spíndle Speed with a Code, 144
Screens Dísplayed by Functíon Key 1085 Spíndle Electroníc Gear Box, 559
Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detectíon Function G25,
G26 , 148 Screens Dísplayed by Functíon Key 1030
Spíndle Speed Functíon S Functíon , 143
Screens Displayed by Functíon key гos , 993 Spíral Interpolation, Conícal Interpolation G02,
ј03 , 54
Stampíng the Machíníng Tіme, 1016
Screens Dísplayed by Functíon Key PROG In
Stand-A1one Type 61 Fu11 Key MDI Unit, 722
Memory Mode or MDI Mode , 1008
Stand-A1one Type Sma11 MDI Unít, 720
Screens Dísplayed by Function Key u In th P e ROG Stand-A1one Type Standard MDI Unít, 721
EDIT Mode , 1024 Status when Turníng Power on, when C1ear and when
Reset, 1175
Screens Displayed by Functíon Key M , 1077 Stored Sцoke Check, 855
Sцoke Limít Check Prior to Performíng Movement,
Selectíng a Workpiece Coordínate System, 125 859
Selection of Too1 Used for Various Machiníng - Too1 Subprogram M98, M99 , 178
Function, 23
Subprogram Ca11 M198 , 839
Sequence Number Compańson a d Stop, 1038
Subprogram Ca11 Functíon M198 , 814
Sequence Number Scarch, 953
Subprogram Ca11 Usíng an M Code, 425
Settíng a Workpíece Coordínate System, 124
Subprogram Ca11s Using a T Code, 426
Setting and Display Units, 718
Supplementary Explanation for Copying, Movíng and
Settíng and Dísplaying Data, 986 Merging, 962
Settíng and Displayíng the Too1 Offset Va1ue, 1031 Swítch between Cutter Compensatíon Left and Cutter
Compensation Right, 291
Setting Input/Output-Related Parameters, 898
System Varíables, 397
Setting the Floating Reference Posítíon, 1005
Símple Calculation of Incoпect Thread Length, 1169
Símple Ca11 G65 , 417 м
Símple Electńc Gear Box G80, G81 , 551 Tandem Control, 536
Símple Synchronous Control, 528 Tape Code Líst, 1153
Símultaneous Input/Output, 800 Tappíng Cyc1e G84 , 206
Síngle B1ock, 850 Test Operatíon, 844
Síngle Direction Posítíoníng G60 , 44 Testing a Program, 707
Skíp Functíon G31 , 88 The Function Líst whích Caп Ьe Used, 625
Skip Functíon for EGB Axis , 556 The Second Auxíliary Functíons B Codes , 166
Sma11-Ho1e Peck Drilling Cyc1e G83 , 202 Thread Cuttíng G33 , 86
Smooth Interpolatíon , 75 Three-Dimensíonal Coordínate Conversion G68,
G69 , 254
Soft Key Configuratíon, 745
Three-Dímensional Too1 Compensatíon G40, G41 ,
Soft Keys, 727 356
So1íd Graphícs, 1106 Too1 Axís Compensation іп Too1 Axís Dírectíon, 655
Specíficatíon, 837 Too1 Axís Dírectíon Hand1e Feed, 766
i-6
8-63534EN/02 1ndex
Too1 Axís Directíon Hand1e Feed/Too1 Axís Dírection Too1 Path at Corner, 1171
Hand1e Feed B, 766
Too1 Selection Function, 152
Too1 Axís Normal Dírectíon Hand1e Feed, 769
Too1 Side Compensatíon, 668
Too1 Center Point Control, 643
Too1 Wíthdrawal and Return, 821
Too1 Compensatíon Values, Number of Compensatíon
Values, and Enteríng Values From the Program Too1 Wıthdrawal and Return , 533
G10 , 360 Turning oп the Power, 749
Too1 Fígure and Too1 Motion Ьy Prograin, 28 Two Path Control Functíon, 590
Too1 Functíon T Functíon , 151
Too1 Length Measurement, 1034
ĽUl Too1 Length Offset G43, G44, G49 , 265
Too1 Length/Workpíece Orígin Measurement B. 1059 Unconditional Branch GOTO Statement , 412
Too1 Lífe, 161
Too1 Lífe Management Command іп a Machíníng Pro-
gram, 158 [V]
Too1 Life Management Data, 154
Varíables, 393
Too1 Life Management Function, 153
Too1 Movement A1ong Workpiece Parts Figure Inter-
polatíon, 14 [W]
Too1 Movement by Programing Automatíc Operatíon,
704
Waiting for Paths, 592
Too1 Movement ín Offset Mode, 306
Warníng Messages, 744
Too1 Movement ín Offset Mode Cance1, 320
Word Search, 944
Too1 Movement in Start up, 302
Workpíece Coordínate System, 124
Too1 Movement Range StØke , 29
Workpiece Coordinate System Preset , 129
Too1 Offset G45 G48 , 277
i-î
Revísíon Record
FANUC Series 16і/160і/160ŕs MB, 18і/180ί/180ίs MB5, 18ί/180ί/180ís MB OPERATOR S MANUAL B-63534EN
Addition of Series 160ís MB, 18ј MB5, 180 MB5,
02 Oct., 2001 180ŕs Mβ5, and 180ŕs MB
Addition of functions
01 Jun., 2001
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents
EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS
GRAND-DUCHE DE LUXEMBOURG
GE Fanuc Automation Europe
Zone Industrielle
1 6468 Echternach
Q 727979 - 1
727979 214

BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS CZECH REPUBLIC FRANCE
GE Fanuc Automation Europe GE Fалuc Automation CR GE Fалuc Automation France
- Netherlands Branch - U studanky 3 39, rue du Sau1e Trapu, BP 219
Postbus 7230 - NL-4800 GE Breda CZ-170 00 Praha 7 F-91882 Massy Cedex
Minervum 1603A - NL-4817 ZL Q 2 333 72 502 CNC Q 1 69 75 86 39 CNC
Breda Q 2 333 72 503 PLC Q 1 69 75 86 20 PLC
f 76-5783 201 CNC θ 2 333 70 821 ø 1 69 75 8649
f 76-5783 212 PLC ;
76-5870 181

GERMANY GERMANY GERMANY
GE Fалuc Automation GmbH GE Fалuc Eber e Automatíon GmbH GE Fалuc Automation GmbH
Bemhäuser StraBe 22 Sudwestpark 48 Elberfelderstr. 45
0-73765 Neuhausen 0-90449 Nörnberg 0-40724 Hiiden
Q 7158 187 400 º 911 9672 100 PLC f 2103 247410 Laser/CNC
Θ 7158 187 455 CNC θ 911 9672 200 PLC 2103 247420 Laser/CNC
7158 187 466 PLC

GERMANY GERMANY 1TALY
GE Fалuc Automation Deutschland GE Faпuc Automation GmbH GE Fanuc Automation 1talia
GmbH OЬeгe Hauptѕц. 72 Largo Brugnatelli 15 Via Volta 4
Bensheimer str. 61 D-09244 Lichtenau 1-20090 Buccínasco MI
0-65428 ROsselsheím º 37208 695 20 CNC Q 02 45795 1 CNC
Q 6142 357600 f 37208 695 30 PLC θ 02 45795 250 CNC
Θ 6142 357611 θ 37208 695 55 gefanuc.ít
ι η wи
1TALY POLAND SPA1N
GE Power Controls Italía GE Fanuc Aucomatіoп GE Fалuc Automatіon España
Via Tortona 27 Polska Sp. z Polígono lлdusцial O1aso
1-20144 Mі1aпo u1. Czerwińskiego 6 Ca11e O1aso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11
f 02 4242 280 PLC 40-123 Katowíce - Po1and E-20870 Elgoíbar
Θ 02 4242 511 PLC º 32 258 5077 º 943 74 82 90 CNC
,efanuc.ít Θ 32 258 5077 p 943 74 44 21 CNC

S PA1 N SWEDEN SWITZERLAND
GE Power Controls I6érica GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB GE Fanuc Automation Europe
Ca 1e Marqués de Comíllas, 1 Harnmarbacken 4B Zweigniederlassung Brugg
E-08225 Terrassa Baгceloпa 8-19149 So1lencuпa Swiss Bгалch
f 93 736 58 28 PLC º 8 444 5520 Eтlensuasse 35a
Θ 93 788 24 03 PLC Θ 8 444 5521 Box CH-2555 BrOgg BE
gë Q 32 366 63 63 CNC
f 32 366 63 33 PLC
32 366 63 64 CNC
32 366 63 34 PLC

UNITED KINGDOM
GE Fалuc Automation UK Ltd.
Unit 1 - Mi11 Square
Featherstone Road
Wolverton Mi11 South
Mi1[on Keynes MK12 5BZ
f 1908 84 4000
Θ 1908 84 4001

The original leaflets are for sale. A preview is shown. The price of the leaflet is on request.

Download document

Machine not in stock?

We inform you with new machines via our Alert Services

Do you want to sell your machine?

Direct cash for your machine(s)

Back to overview